III & IV Semester B. E.

M. S. RAMAIAH INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

BANGALORE

(Autonomous Institute, Affiliated to VTU)

SYLLABUS

Outcome Based Education Curricula

(For the Academic year 2014 – 2016)

Department of Electronics & Communication

III & IV Semester B. E.

2

M. S. Ramaiah Institute of Technology, Bangalore-54 (Autonous Institute, Affiliated to VTU)

Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Faculty List

Sl.

No Name of the Faculty Qualification Designation

1. Dr. S Sethu Selvi Ph.D Professor & Head

2. Prof. C R Raghunath M.Tech Professor

3. Prof. K. Giridhar M.Tech Professor

4. Prof. M S Srinivas M.Tech Professor

5. Dr. K. Indira Ph.D Professor

6. K. Manikantan M E (Ph.D) Associate Professor

7. C. Manjunath M E Associate Professor

8. B. Sujatha M E (Ph.D) Associate Professor

9. Dr. Maya V Karki Ph.D Associate Professor

10. S. Lakshmi M E (Ph.D) Associate Professor

11. V. Anandi M S (Ph.D) Associate Professor

12. Dr. T D Senthil Kumar Ph.D Associate Professor

13. Dr. Naga Ravikanth D Ph.D Associate Professor

14. H. Mallika M S (Ph.D) Assistant Professor

15. A.R. Priyarenjini M.Tech Assistant Professor

16. S.L. Gangadharaiah M.Tech Assistant Professor

17. M. Nagabhushan M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor

18. C G Raghavendra M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor

19. Sadashiva V Chakrasali M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor

20. C. Sharmila Suttur M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor

21. Mamtha Mohan M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor

22. V. Nuthan Prasad M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor

23. Reshma Verma M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor

24. Shreedarshan K M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor

25. Lakshmi Srinivasan M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor

26. Flory Francis M.Tech Assistant Professor

27. Sarala S M M.Tech Assistant Professor

28. Punya Prabha V M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor

29. Suma K V M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor

30. Jayashree S M.Sc Assistant Professor

31. Manjunath C Lakkannavar M.Tech Assistant Professor

3

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

MS.R.I.T., BANGALORE – 560054.

Vision, Mission and Programme Educational Objectives

Vision and Mission

Vision of the Institute

To evolve in to an autonomous institution of international standing for imparting quality technical

education

Mission of the Institute

MSRIT shall deliver global quality technical education by nurturing a conducive learning environment

for a better tomorrow through continuous improvement and customization

Vision of the Department

To be, and be recognized as, an excellent Department in Electronic & Communication Engineering

that provides a great learning experience and to be a part of an outstanding community with

admirable environment.

Mission of the Department

To provide a student centered learning environment which emphasizes close faculty-student

interaction and co-operative education.

To prepare graduates who excel in the engineering profession, qualified to pursue advanced degrees,

and possess the technical knowledge, critical thinking skills, creativity, and ethical values.

To train the graduates for attaining leadership in developing and applying technology for the

betterment of society and sustaining the world environment

4

Program Educational Objectives (PEOs)

Program Educational Objectives of the Department of Electronics and Communication are: PEO 1: To provide all basic fundamental prerequisites in mathematical, scientific and engineering fields required to solve technical problems. PEO 2: To train in analyzing, designing and creating new scientific tools and other software so as to gain good engineering breadth. PEO 3: To involve in professional and ethical environment, to build effective communication skills,

multidisciplinary and teamwork skills and to relate engineering issues to broader social context. PEO 4: To provide an academic environment, awareness to excel and to lead a successful professional career in lifelong learning. PEO 5: To communicate/work with research and development, to design/develop and to formulate/integrate

various products.

5

Program Outcomes

POs are statements that describe what students are expected to know, attitudes they are expected to hold, and

what they are able to do by the time of graduation. Achievement of program outcome should indicate the

student is equipped to achieve the PEOs.

The POs of the Department of Electronics & Communication

At the time of graduation an E& C graduate should be able to:

1. Recollect the essential descriptions from basic sciences, and apply them in E & C streams.

2. Demonstrate ability to identify, interpret and solve engineering problems.

3. Design circuits and conduct experiments with electronic systems, communication equipment,

analyze and interpret the result

4. Design systems/subsystems and devices

5. Demonstrate the capability to visualize, organize and work in laboratory and interdisciplinary

tasks.

6. Demonstrate skills using software tools and other modern equipment.

7. Inculcate the ethical, social and professional responsibilities such as project management and

finance.

8. Communicate effectively in oral /written form of scientific analysis or data.

9. Understand the impact of engineering solutions on the society and also will be aware of

contemporary issues and criticisms.

10. Develop self-confidence and become excellent multi-skilled engineer, manager, leader and

entrepreneur and display ability for life-long learning.

11. Participate and succeed in competitive examinations/placement and show potential research

capability.

12. An understanding of engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s work, as a

member and leader in a team, to manage projects.

6

SCHEME OF TEACHING FOR THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2013 – 2014

III SEMESTER B. E. ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SI.

No

Subject

Code Subject Teaching Dept

Credits*

L T P Total

1. ECMAT31 Engineering Mathematics –

III

Mathematics BS 4 0 0 4

2. EC301 Solid State Devices and

Technology

Electronics and

Communication

BS 4 0 0 4

3. EC302 Network Analysis Electronics and

Communication

ES 3 1 0 4

4. EC303 Analog Electronics Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

5. EC304 Digital Electronics Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

6. EC305 Data Structures using C Electronics and

Communication

ES 3 0 0 3

7. EC303L Analog Electronics Lab Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

8. EC304L Digital Electronics Lab Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

9. EC305L Data Structures Lab Electronics and

Communication

ES 0 0 1 1

Total 20 1 3 24

IV SEMESTER B. E. ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SI.

No

Subject


Credits*

L T P Total

1. ECMAT41 Engineering Mathematics

– IV


2. EC401 Linear Integrated Circuits Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

3. EC402 Digital System Design

with FPGA

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 4 0 0 4

4. EC403 Signals and Systems Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 1 0 4

5. EC404 Control Systems Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 1 0 4

6. EC405 Electromagnetics Electronics and

Communication

BS 4 0 0 4

7. EC401L Linear Integrated Circuits

Lab

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

8. EC402L FPGA Lab Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

Total 21 2 2 25

*L: Lecture T: Tutorial P: Practical

7

ENGINEERINGMATHEMATICS-III

Subject Code: ECMAT31 Credits: 4:0:0

Prerequisites: Nil Contact Hours: 56

Course Coordinator: Dr. S.H.C.V. Subba Bhatta

Course Objectives:

Learn to represent a periodic function in terms of sines and cosine

Learn the concepts of a continuous and discrete integral transform in the form of Fourier and

Z-transforms

Learn the concepts of calculus of functions of complex variables

Learn the concept of special functions.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Fourier series:Convergence and divergence of infinite series of positive terms, Periodic function,

Dirichlet’s conditions, Fourier series of periodic functions of period 2 and arbitrary period, Half

range series, Fourier series and Half Range Fourier series of Periodic square wave, Half wave

rectifier, Full wave rectifier, Saw-tooth wave with graphical representation, Practical harmonic

analysis.

UNIT II

Fourier Transforms:Infinite Fourier transform, Infinite Fourier sine and cosine transforms,

properties, Inverse transform, Convolution theorem, Parseval’sidentity(statements only). Fourier

transform of rectangular pulse with graphical representation and its output discussion, Continuous

Fourier spectra-Example and physical interpretation.

Z-Transforms: Definition, standard Z-transforms, Single sided and double sided, Linearity property,

Damping rule, Shifting property, Initial and final value theorem, Inverse Z-transform, Application of

Z-transform to solve difference equations.

UNIT III

Complex Variables-I:Functions of complex variables, Analytic function, Cauchy-Riemann

equations in cartesian and polar coordinates, Consequences of Cauchy-Riemann equations,

Construction of analytic functions. Application to flow problems, Complex potential,

Velocity potential, Equipotential lines, Stream functions, Stream lines. Discussion of the

transformations - w=z2, w=ez, and z

azw

2

(z 0), Bilinear transformations.

8

UNIT IV

Complex Variables-II: Complex integration, Cauchy’s theorem, Cauchy’s integral formula.

Taylor’s & Laurent’s series (statements only). Singularities, Poles and residues, Cauchy’s

residue theorem (statement only)

UNIT V

Series Solution of ODEs and Special Functions: Series solution, Frobenius method, Series solution

of Bessel’s differential equation leading to Bessel’s function of first kind, Series solution of

Legendre’s differential equation leading to Legendre polynomials, Rodrigue’s formula.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Erwin Kreyszig –Advanced Engineering Mathematics – Wiley publication – 8th

edition – 2004.

2. B. S. Grewal – Higher Engineering Mathematics – Khanna Publishers – 40th edition – 2007.

REFERENCES:

1. Glyn James – ―Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics‖ – Pearson Education – 3rd

edition – 2007.

2. Dennis G. Zill, Michael R. Cullen – ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics‖, Jones and

Barlett Publishers Inc. – 3rd edition – 2009.

3. Dennis G. Zill and Patric D. Shanahan- ―A first course in complex analysis with applications-

― Jones and Bartlett publishers-second edition-2009.

Course Outcomes:

Students will be able to :

1. Expansion of function as a Fourier series / half-range Fourier series, obtaining the various

harmonics of the Fourier series.

2. Solving difference equations using Z transforms.

3. Apply Cauchy-Riemann equations and harmonic functions to problems of Fluid Mechanics,

ThermoDynamics and Electromagnetic fields.

4. Find singularities of complex functions and determine the values of integrals using residues and

also discuss conformal mappings

5. Obtaining the series solution of ordinary differential equations.

9

SOLID STATE DEVICES AND TECHNOLOGY

Subject Code: EC301 Credits: 4:0:0

Prerequisites: Basic Electronics Contact hours:56

Course Coordinator: Mr. M. Nagabhushan

Course learning objectives:

State the importance of PN junction diode, in the study of the bipolar & junction field

transistors.

Explain the basic concept of energy band diagrams of PN junction diodes, schottky barrier

diodes & metal oxide silicon systems.

Discuss the basic materials& fabrication processes used in planar PN junction diodes, bipolar

junction transistors, MESFETs, MOSFETS & Integrated circuits.

Describe the constructional features & modes of operation of PN junction diodes, BJTs,

MESFETs& MOSFETs.

Analyze the current components& current voltage characteristics of PN junction diodes, BJTs,

MESFETs& MOSFETs.

Appraise the small signal model, figure of merit & high frequency limitations of JFETs and

formulate the Electronic switch &CMOS inverter circuits using MOSFETs.

Course contents:

UNIT – I

P-N Junction Diode: Introduction ,Space-Charge Region, Analytical Relations at Equilibrium,

Conditions in the Diode with Voltage Applied, Currents in diode, Real Diode Characteristics in the

Reverse Direction, Capacitances of the diode, diode switching characteristics.

UNIT – II

Fabrication Technology : Introduction , why silicon, Purity of Silicon, Czochralski growing

Process, Fabrication processes, Planar PN Junction diode fabrication, Fabrication of resistors and

capacitors in ICs.

Bipolar Junction Transistors: Introduction , structure and basic operation, Fabrication of bipolar IC

transistor, Terminology, Symbols and regions of operation, Circuit Arrangements, Transistor

currents in the active region, BJT as current amplifier, Transistor parameters, Graphical

characteristics & modes of operation .

UNIT – III

Metal Semiconductor junctions and devices: Introduction, Energy band diagrams of Metal and N

semiconductor before and after contact, Schottky barrier diode, Rectifying Metal-N semiconductor

junction, Rectifying Metal-P semiconductor junction, comparison of Schottky barrier diode with PN

diode.

Junction Field Effect Transistors: Introduction, Construction and operation, current–voltage

characteristic equation, channel conductance & JFET transconductance

10

UNIT – IV

Mesfet: Fabrication and Modes of Operation, Threshold Voltage, I-V Characteristics of Depletion

and Enhancement devices, relations between the voltages .

Metal Oxide Silicon Systems: Introduction, Energy band diagrams, Band-bending and the effect of

bias voltages, Threshold Voltage, Oxide charges in MOS Capacitors.

UNIT – V

Metal Oxide Semiconductor FET: Introduction, Construction and basic operation, Fabrication of

N-type MOSFET (N-MOS) on an integrated circuit chip, Regions of operation: Cut-off, Linear, and

Saturation regions, current voltage analytical relations, types of MOSFETs, control of threshold

voltage, Secondary effects, Small-Signal equivalent circuits, low frequency circuit, high frequency

circuit, high frequency performance. The MOSFET switch and CMOS Inverter, comparison

between MOSFET & BJT.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kanaan Kano, ―Semiconductor Devices‖, Pearson Education, 2006.

REFERENCES:

1. K. N. Bhat, ―Physics of Semiconductor Devices, Narosa Publications, 2004.

2. S. M. Sze ,―Semiconductor Devices: Physics and Technology‖, 2nd

edition, Wiley India, 2008.

Course out comes:

1. Employ the concept of current components & V-I characteristics of PN junction diodes in

various diode applications.

2. Apply the concept of different modes of operation of BJTs to construct different amplifiers like

CB,CE, CC amplifiers & digital circuits.

3. Illustrate the concept of rectifying property of schottky barrier diodes in integrated circuits for

high speed switching

4. Use the significance of fabrication processes in SSI, MSI, LSI & VLSI circuits.

5. Apply the concept of MESFETS to use in monolithic microwave integrated circuits & high

speed digital circuits and MOSFETS in the development of large scale integrated circuits to

reduce area requirements and cost of manufacture

11

NETWORK ANALYSIS

Course Code: EC302 Credits: 3:1:0


Course Coordinator: Mr. M.S.Srinivas

Course Objectives:

Understand the basic concepts of electric circuits

Study various networks using mesh and node analysis

Understand the various network theorems and to simplify circuits using them

Describe the various 2- port parameters and their relations

Appreciate the use of Laplace transforms in network analysis

Study the various properties of one - port network

Course Contents:

UNIT-1

Basic Concepts of Networks: Basic definitions, resistor/capacitors/inductors in series and parallel,

source transformation, wave-delta transformation, KVL and KCL, analysis of networks (both dc and

ac) using mesh and nodal analysis.

UNIT-2

Network Theorems: Reciprocity theorem, Miller's theorem, Superposition theorem, Thevenin's and

Norton’s theorems and Maximum power transfer theorem.

UNIT-3

Two-port Networks: Z – parameters, Y – parameters, h – parameters and transmission parameters,

relationship between parameters, inter connection of networks.

UNIT-4

Laplace transform and applications: Properties of Laplace transform, Inverse Laplace transform,

Convolution integral, Waveform synthesis, initial conditions and transient response (RL, RC and

RLC circuit).

UNIT-5

Synthesis of One – Port Network: Properties of LC immitance functions, Synthesis of LC

Driving point immitances, properties of RC driving point impedances, Synthesis of RC impedances

and RL admittances, Synthesis of two port network, Filter design example.

Resonant Circuits: Series and parallel resonant circuits. Oscillators: Colpitts, Hartley, RC.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N O Sadiku, ―Fundamentals of Electric Circuits‖,, McGraw

Hill, 3rd

edition, 2008.

2. F. F. Kuo, ―Network Analysis and Synthesis‖, 2nd

Edition, John Wiley and Sons.

12

3. David K. Cheng, ―Analysis of Linear Systems‖, Narosa Publishing House, 1st edition, 2002.

4. Gopal G. Bhise, PremR.Chadha and, Durgesh C. Kulshreshtha, ―Engineering Network

Analysis and Filter Design‖, 1st edition, Umesh Publications, 2007.

REFERENCES:

1. Hyatt, W.H. Jr. and Kemmerly, ―Engineering Circuit Analysis‖, J.E, McGraw Hill, 1993.

2. Parker Smith, ―Problems in Electrical Engineering‖, CBS, 9th

Edition, 2003.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze the various electric circuits using node and mesh methods

2. Apply various network theorems to circuits for simplification

3. Distinguish between various two – port parameters and its usage

4. Analyze circuits using Laplace transforms with the mentioned initial conditions

5. Design series and parallel resonant circuits for the mentioned specifications

13

ANALOG ELECTRONICS



Course Coordinator: Lakshmi Srinivasan

Course objectives:

Analyze the transistor two-port hybrid model.

Understand the basic concepts of feedback and express the effect of feedback on amplifier

circuits.

Comprehend FET operation, characteristics and comparison of JFET with MOSFET.

Discuss low and high frequency of common-source and common-drain amplifier.

Design and analyze the various biasing techniques for MOSFET and implement MOSFET

applications

Understand the concepts of different types of power amplifiers.

Develop the ability to analyze the performance parameters of power amplifiers.

Understand the basic concepts of RF technology.

Know the design aspects of RFICs.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Transistor circuit analysis: Two-port model, Transistor hybrid model, Analysis of a transistor

amplifier circuit using h-parameters (CE configuration), Miller’s theorem and its dual.

Feedback amplifier: Basic concept of feedback, importance of negative feedback, Types of

feedback amplifiers.

UNIT II

Power amplifiers: Classification, Class A power amplifier, Efficiency, Second harmonic distortion,

Transformer coupled audio power amplifier, Class B push-pull power amplifier, Design of power

amplifiers.

UNIT III

FET: Introduction to FET, JFET, MOSFET, Cascade amplifier using FETs, Comparison of

MOSFET & JFET, Types of MOSFET- depletion & enhancement, Transfer Characteristics of n-

channel e-type MOSFET, Power MOSFET, Steady state characteristics of n-channel & p-channel,

Switching characteristics.

UNIT IV

MOSFET biasing: Fixed bias, Voltage divider bias, Design of biasing circuits, Low & high

frequency analysis of common-source and common-drain amplifiers, Noise performance of MOS

transistor.

UNIT V

Introduction to RFIC: Design bottleneck, Applications, Analog & digital systems.

14

Basic concepts in RF design- nonlinearity & time variance, Harmonics, Gain compression,

Desensitization & blocking, Cross modulation, Intermodulation, Cascaded non-linear stages,

Intersymbol interference.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Millman & Halkias, ―Integrated Electronics ―, Tata McGraw –Hill International edition, 1991.

2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, ―Electronic Devices and Circuit theory‖, 6th edition

3. PHI, 2002.

4. Behzad Razavi, ―RF Microelectonics‖, Prentice Hall Communications Engineering and

Emerging Technology Series, 1998.

REFERENCES:

1. P. Gray, R. Meyer, S.Lewis and P. Hurst ,―Analog Integrated Circuits‖, 3rd

edition, John Wiley,

2007.

Course Outcomes:

1. Interpret transistor circuits using two-port model and h-parameters also acquire the knowledge

of feedback amplifier circuits.

2. Study and demonstrate the operation and performance characteristics of different types of

power amplifiers and Implement them

3. Understand the fundamentals of MOSFET, biasing and design simple MOSFET circuits

4. Analyze and sketch the low and high frequency response of Common source and common

drain amplifiers

5. Acquire the knowledge of RFIC technology and its design constraints.

15

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS



Course Coordinator: C. Sharmila Suttur

Course objectives:

Understand the concepts and terminology of digital electronics.

Understand the electrical characteristics of logic gates and different logic families.

Understand the operation of multiplexers and demultiplexers by analyzing several circuit

applications.

Understand the function and operation of code converters and comparators.

Understand and contrast the operations of parallel adders, serial adders and fast adders.

Appreciate the importance of HDL’s in digital designs.

Understand Verilog HDL at behavioral, gate level.

Model combinational circuits at behavioral level.

Describe the operation of several types of edge-triggered flip-flops, such as the J-K, D-type, and

S-R.

Analyze and evaluate different types of counters and determine the basic principles of how

shift registers work.

Understand different types of memories and their properties.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Introduction to different logic families: Electrical characteristics of logic gates – logic levels and

noise margins, fan-out, propagation delay, transition time, power consumption and power delay

product. TTL inverter – circuit description and operation, TTL NAND circuit description and

operation.

Combinational logic: Boolean algebra : Standard representation of logic functions – SOP and POS

forms, Multiplexing and Demultiplexing, Multiplexers – Realization of 2:1, 4:1 and 8:1 using gates,

Multiplexer – applications, Demultiplexers: Realization of 1:2, 1:4, 1:8 using basic gates,

Demultiplexer – applications.

UNIT II

Combinational logic: Parity circuits and comparators: 2 bit and 4 bit comparator, Encoding and

Decoding: codes - Binary coded decimal codes, BCD – Excess 3, Encoders: Realization, Priority

Encoders, Decoders: BCD – Decimal, BCD – Seven segment display.

Combinational Functions: Arithmetic operations: Adders, Parallel adders, Fast adders, Subtractor:

using 2s complement and applications, Adder/ Subtractor, Array multipliers.

UNIT –III

Introduction to HDL, Verilog description of Mux, Demux, encoder, decoders, priority encoder,

Array multiplier.

16

UNIT IV

Sequential Circuits Analysis and Design: Sequential Circuit Definitions, Latches, Flip-Flops:

Master Salve Flip Flops, Edge Triggered Flip Flop, Characteristic Tables,

Sequential Circuit Analysis, Analysis with JK Flip Flops, Sequential Circuit Design, Designing with

D Flip Flops, Designing with JK Flip Flops, Flip Flop Excitation Tables, Design Procedure.

Registers and Counters: Definition of register and counter, Registers, Shift Registers, Ripple

Counter, Synchronous Binary Counters, Other Counters: BCD Counter.

UNIT V

Memory and Programmable Logic Devices : Memory and Programmable Logic Devices

definitions, Random Access-Memory, RAM Integrated Circuits, Array of RAM IC’s, Programmable

Logic Technologies, Read-only Memory, Programmable Logic Array, Programmable Array Logic

Devices.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. M. Morris Mano and Charles R. Kime, ―Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals‖, Pearson

Education, 3rd

Edition, 2006.

2. Stephen Brown, ZvonkoVranesic,―Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design‖, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2003.

REFERENCES:

1. Donald D Givone,―Digital Principles and Design ―,, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2002.

2. Tocci, ―Digital Systems, Principles and Applications‖, PHI/Pearson Education, 6th Edition,

1997.

3. R.P.Jain, ―Modern Digital Electronics‖, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 4th

Edition, 2010.

Course Outcomes

1. Employ K-Map for simplifying Boolean functions and design of circuits composed of NAND

and NOR gates.

2. Design of combinational logic circuits.

3. Apply basic verilog constructs in dataflow style to model digital circuits.

4. Analyze and design sequential circuits.

5. Design and implement combinational logic circuits using PLD.

17

Data Structure Using ‘C’


Prerequisites: Fundamentals of Computing. Contact Hours:42

Course Coordinator: Reshma Verma

Course objectives:

Understand the concepts and implement the different types of linked list.

Illustrate the importance of linked lists in different applications.

Learn and understand the concept of Stacks and Queues.

Apply the concept of stacks and queues in different applications.

Understand the various operations performed on trees.

Implement various applications using different types of trees.

Explore several searching and sorting ways.

Understand and Implement the concept of graphs.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Linked List: Dynamic memory allocation & de allocation functions, Introduction to Linked List,

Types of linked list, Basic operations (Insert, Delete, Traverse, Search, and Display), and Algorithms

& Programs using Singly, Doubly & Circular linked list.

Linked List Applications: Addition of two long positive integers, Addition of two polynomials,

and Evaluation of a polynomial.

UNIT II

Stacks & Queues: Basic stack operations, Stack applications-Conversion & Evaluation of

expressions, Stack linked list implementation.

Queues: Introduction to queues: Basic operations, Different types of queues, Queue linked list

implementation, queuing policies.

ADT: Introduction, Stack ADT.

UNIT III

Trees: Introduction to trees: Basic tree concepts, Binary tree properties, Binary tree traversal,

Expression tree. Operations, Algorithms and programs on Binary search tree (BST), equivalence

between binary search algorithm and BST.

AVL tree: Basic concepts, Implementation of AVL tree.

B tree: Introduction and Implementation, B tree application (small database).

18

UNIT IV

Searching & Sorting: Sorting: sort concepts-sort order, sort stability, sort efficiency. Types of

sorting: Selection sort- Heap sort. Insertion sort-Simple insertion sort, Shell sort, Address calculation

sort.

Exchange sort-Quick sort, Bubble sort. External sort - Merge sort.

Searching: List searches: Binary search & sequential search. Hashed list searches: Basic concepts,

Hashing Methods, Collision Resolution Methods: Open Addressing, Linked list.

UNIT V

Graphs: Introduction & Basic concepts, Graph operations, Graph traversal-Depth first & Breadth

first traversal. Graph storage structure: Adjacency matrix & Adjacency list. Graph Algorithms:

Insert, Delete and Append Vertices & Edges. Application of Graph Operations: Web Graph.

Networks: Minimum spanning Tree & Shortest path Algorithms.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Tanenbaum, ―Data Structures with C‖, McGraw Hill 2000

2. Richard Gilberg and Behrouz Forouzan,‖Data Structures: A Pseudo code approach with C‖,

2nd edition, Thomson publishing, 2007.

REFERENCES:

1. Robert L Kruse, ―Data Structures and Program Design‖,Prentice Hall 1994.

2. Ullman &Hopcroft,‖ Data Structures and Algorithms‖,Addison-Wesley,2006.

3. Thomas Corman, Howowitz and SartajSahni,‖Introduction to Algorithms‖,2nd

edition,PHI,

2006.

4. E.Balagurusamy, ―Programming in ANSI C‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.

Course outcomes:

1. Understand common data structures and the algorithms that build and manipulate them.

2. Make appropriate data structure and algorithm design decisions with respect to program size,

execution speed, and storage efficiency.

3. An ability to design a system or component, or process to meet stated specifications.

4. Ability to identify and implement appropriate data structure for given application

19

ANALOG ELECTRONICS CIRCUITS LAB

Course Code: EC303L Credits:0:0:1

Prerequisites: Basic Electronics Contact Sessions:10


Course objectives:

Understand the two port transistor model.

Learn the h –parameters based transistor analysis.

Learn working principle of crystal oscillator.

Understand the importance Bridge rectifier with and without filter.

Learn the general characteristics and benefits of negative feedback.

Understand the effect of negative feedback on Rin and Ro

Understand the significance of power amplifier and its working principle with efficiencies.

Appreciate simulation tools for hardware designs.

Laboratory Experiments

1. Study the input and output characteristics of BJT CE amplifier and determine the h-parameters.

2. Design an RC coupled amplifier, plot the frequency response and derive the gain.

3. Using BJT design crystal oscillator.

4. Design a Bridge rectifier with and without C filter.

5. Design a Class B push pull and class AB power amplifiers.

6. Design of transformer coupled audio power amplifier.

7. Design a voltage series feedback amplifier. Compare the parameters with and without

feedback.

8. Study the transfer characteristics of n-channel e-type MOSFET.

9. Design a common-source MOSFET amplifier and study the frequency response.

10. Simulation of all the above experiments.

Software’s suggested: MultiSim or any other suitable simulation tool.

Course Outcomes:

Design amplifier circuits using transistor and FET devices.

Design power amplifiers and negative feedback circuits.

Design the rectifier circuits.

Simulate all the hardware designs and perform the performance analysis.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Millman and Halkias, ―Integrated Electronics ―, Tata McGraw –Hill International edition,

1991.

2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, ―Electronic Devices and Circuit theory‖, 6th

Edition

PHI, 2002.

20

3. BehzadRazavi, ―RF Microelectonics‖, Prentice Hall Communications Engineering and

emerging Technology Series, 1998.

4. Lab Manual.

21

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS CIRCUITS LAB

Course Code: EC304L Credits: 0:0:1

Prerequisites: NIL Contact Sessions:12


Course objectives:

Learn about different types of memories and their properties.

Understand the basic read and write operations of memories.

Understand the internal structure of RAM and its operation.

Learn the various programmable logic technologies

Learn the differences between programmable logic devices


1. Introduction to Digital electronics lab, Simplification, realization of Boolean

expressions using logic gates/Universal gates.

2. Realization of Half/Full adder and Half/Full Subtractors using logic gates.

3. Realization of Binary to Gray code conversion and vice versa

4. Introduction to Multisim , simulation tool

5. MUX/DEMUX – use of 74153, 74139 for arithmetic circuits and code converter.

6. Use of a) Decoder chip to drive LED display.

b) Priority encoder.

7. Truth table verification of Flip-Flops:

a) JK Master slave b) T type andc) D type.

8. Realization of 3 bit counters as a sequential circuit.

9. MOD – N counter design (7476, 7490, 74192, 74193).

10. Shift left, Shift right, SIPO, SISO, PISO, PIPO operations using 7495.

11. Wiring and testing Ring counter.

b)Programming a RAM ( 6116 ).

12. Introduction to Verilog lab

a)Program to realize all logic gates.

b) Program for combinational designs: Decoder, Encoder, Mux, Demux.

Software’s suggested: Xilinx ISE, MultiSim or any other suitable simulation tool.

Course Outcomes:

1. Use electronic design and simulation tools in digital circuit design and verification.List the

properties of memory.

2. Design combinational logic circuits.

3. Design sequential circuits.

4. Program RAM IC’s.

REFERENCES:

1. M. Morris Mano and Charles R. Kime,―Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals‖,, Pearson

Education, 3rd

Edition, 2006.

2. Stephen Brown andZvonkoVranesic―Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design‖,

Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

22

Data Structures Lab


Prerequisites: Fundamentals of Computing. Contact Sessions: 12


Course objectives:

Understand the various operations performed on linked lists. Understand the operation of

stacks.

Learn the various applications stacks. Understand the operation of Queues.

Learn the various applications Queues.

Appreciate the various traversal method used in trees.

Understand the various searching and sorting techniques used in Data base Management


Write programs for

1) Singly linked lists

2) Doubly linked lists

3) Circularly linked lists

4) Applications of linked lists

5) Stack operations

6) Queue operations

7) Binary trees

Course Outcomes:

Generate the code for different types of Linked lists and for different applications of linked lists.

Generate the code for Stack & Queues operation and Applications.

Write the algorithm for adding, deleting and searching the node in Binary and BST.

Write the algorithm for graph traversal.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Tanenbaum, ―Data Structures with C‖, McGraw Hill 2000

2. Richard Gilberg and BehrouzForouzan,‖Data Structures: A Pseudo code approach with C‖, 2nd

edition, Thomson publishing, 2007.

REFERENCES:

1. Robert L Kruse, ―Data Structures and Program Design‖,Prentice Hall 1994.

2. Ullman &Hopcroft,‖ Data Structures and Algorithms‖, Addison-Wesley, 2006.

3. Thomas Corman, Howowitz and SartajSahni,‖Introduction to Algorithms‖, 2nd edition,PHI,

2006.

4. E.Balagurusamy, ―Programming in ANSI C‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.

23

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-IV

Subject Code : ECMAT41 Credits: 4:0:0

Prerequisites : NIL Contact Hours:56

Course Coordinator: Mr. Girinath Reddy

Course Objectives:

The students will:

Learn to solve algebraic and transcendental equations numerically.

Learn the concepts of finite differences and it applications.

Understand the concepts of PDE and its applications to engineering.

Learn fitting of a curve, correlation, regression for a statistical data.

Learn the basic concepts of probability,random variables and probability distributions .

Learn the concepts of stochastic process and Markov chain.

UNIT I

Numerical Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental equations:Method of false position

Newton-Raphson method.

Finite Differences and Interpolation: Forward and backward differences, Interpolation, Newton-

Gregory forward and backward Interpolation formulae, Lagrange’s interpolation formula, Newton’s

divided difference interpolation formula(no proof).

Numerical Differentiation and Numerical Integration: Derivatives using Newton – Gregory

forward and backward interpolation formulae,Newton – Cote’s quadrature formula , Trapezoidal

rule,Simpson’s 1/3rd

rule, Simpson’s 3/8th

rule.

UNIT II

Partial Differential Equations: Formation of PDE’s by elimination of arbitrary constants and

arbitrary functions, Solution of PDE - Lagrange’s Linear form, Method of separation of Variables.

Statistics: Curve fitting by the method of least squares, Fitting a Linear curve, Quadratic curve,

Geometric curve, Correlation and Regression.

UNIT III

Probability: Probability of an event, Axiomatic definition, Addition law, Conditional

probability, Multiplication rule, Baye’s theorem.

Random Variables: Random variables (Discrete and Continuous), Probability density

function, Cumulative density function, Mean, Variance, Moment generating function.

UNIT IV

Probability Distributions: Binomial and Poisson distributions, Normal distribution, Exponential

distribution, Uniform distribution, Joint probability distribution (both discrete and continuous),

Conditional expectation.

24

UNIT V

Stochastic Processes: Introduction, Classification of stochastic processes, Discrete time processes,

Stationary, Ergodicity, Autocorrelation, Power spectral density.

Markov Chain: Probability Vectors, Stochastic matrices, Regular stochastic matrices, Markov

chains, Higher transition probabilities, Stationary distribution of Regular Markov chains and

absorbing states, Markov and Poisson processes.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Murry R. Spiegel, John Schiller & R. AluSrinivasan - Probability & Statistics - Schaum’s

outlines -2nd

edition-2007.

2. R.E. Walpole, R. H. Myers, R. S. L. Myers and K. Ye – Probability and Statistics for Engineers

and Scientists – Pearson Education – Delhi – 8th

edition – 2007.

3. B.S.Grewal-Higher Engineering Mathematics-Khanna Publishers-40th

edition-2007.

REFERENCES:

1. B.S.Grewal - Numerical methods in Engineering and Science-Khanna Publishers-8th

edition-

2009.

2. Glyn James- Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics-PearsonEducation-3rd

edition-2007.

3. Kishor S. Trivedi – Probability & Statistics with reliability, Queuing and Computer Science

Applications – PHI – 2nd

edition – 2002.

Course Outcomes:

The students will be able to :

1. Solve the problems of algebraic and transcendental equations using numerical methods

and to find polynomial function for estimation using a given data of equal and unequal

intervals.

2. Compute maxima, minima, curvature, the radius of curvature using numerical differentiation

and the arc length, area, surface area and volume using numerical integration.

3. Formation and solution of partial differential equations and fit a suitable curve for tabulated

values by the method of least squares.

4. Discuss the probability distribution arising in the study of engineering problems and their

applications.

5. Apply the stochastic process and Markov Chain concept in predictions of future events.

25

Linear Integrated Circuits and Applications


Prerequisites: Analog Electronics and Circuits Contact Hours:42

Course Coordinator: Flory Francis

Course objectives:

Understand the concepts of practical op-amp specifications, characteristics, biasing of op-amps

Learn the use of op-amp in DC and AC applications

Understand the frequency response and bandwidth performance of practical op-amps

Apply op-amp in instrumentation amplifier, rectifier multiplier, divider and waveform

generation and other nonlinear applications

Employ op-amp in regulation

Study the concept of 555 timer, PLL and its applications

Course Contents:

UNIT-I

Operational Amplifier Fundamentals: Basic Op-Amp circuits, Op-amp parameters- input and

Output voltage, CMRR and PSRR, offset voltages and currents, Input and Output Impedances, Slew

rate and Frequency limitations; Op-amp as DC Amplifiers-Biasing Op-amps, Direct Coupled

Voltage follower, Non Inverting Amplifiers , Inverting Amplifiers, Summing Amplifiers, Difference

Amplifiers.

UNIT-II Op-Amp’s as AC amplifiers: Capacitor coupled Voltage followers, High Input Impedance

Capacitor coupled Voltage followers, Capacitor coupled Non Inverting Amplifiers, High Input

Impedance Capacitor coupled Non Inverting Amplifiers, Capacitor coupled Inverting Amplifiers,

setting the Upper cut off frequency; Capacitor coupled difference amplifiers

UNIT III Op-Amp’s Applications: Instrumentation Amplifiers, Precision rectifiers, Limiting Circuits,

Clamping circuits, Peak Detectors, Sample and Hold circuits, V-I and I-V Converters, Log and

Antilog Amplifiers, Multiplier and Divider, Triangular/Rectangular wave generator, Phase shift

Oscillator, Wein Bridge Oscillator

UNIT-IV

Non -Linear Circuit Applications: Crossing detectors, Inverting Schmitt trigger circuits,

Monostable and Astablemultivibrator, Active filters/First and second order Low and High pass filter,

First order two Op-amp Band pass and band reject filters, Series Op-amp Regulator, IC 723 general

purpose Regulator.

UNIT-V Other Linear IC Applications: 555 Timer – Basic Timer circuit used as Astablemultivibrator and

26

Monostablemultivibrator, PLL operating principles, DAC and ADC techniques.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. David A. Bell, ―Operational Amplifiers and Linear IC’s‖, PHI/Pearson, 2 nd

edition,2008.

2. D. Roy Choudhury and Shail B. Jain,―Linear Integrated Circuits‖,New Age International,

2nd

edition, Reprint 2006.

REFERENCES:

1. Robert. F. Coughlin &Fred.F. Driscoll, ―Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated

Circuits‖, PHI/Pearson, 2006.

2. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, ―OP-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits ―, PHI/Pearson, 4th

Edition,

2004.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze practical op-amp specifications and characteristics.

2. Design of signal processing circuits using Op-amp

3. Analyze Op-amp non linear applications.

4. Employ Op-amps in converters ,regulators, filters and signal generators

5. Analyze 555 timer, PLL and their applications

27

Digital system design with FPGA


Prerequisites: Digital Electronics Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinator: Mrs. V. Anandi

Course objectives:

Appreciate the importance of HDLs in digital designs.

Understand the lexical conventions of VERILOG HDL at dataflow; gate level, structural,

behavioral and RTL levels

Model combinational and sequential circuits at behavioral, structural and RTL level.

Develop test benches to simulate combinational and sequential circuits in Modelsim Simulation

environment.

Interpret Verilog constructs for logic synthesis.

Discriminate between manual and automated logic synthesis and their impact on design.

Discuss different FPGA architectures.

To be able to design synchronous sequential circuits using FSM.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Overview of Digital Design with Verilog HDL: Evolution of computer aided digital design-

Emergence of HDLs-Typical design flow-importance of HDLs-Verilog HDL-Design

Methodologies-modules-instances-components of simulation-example-basic concepts.

Modules and ports: Modules-ports-Rules-Hierarchical Names.

Gate Level modeling and Data flow modeling: Gate Types-Gate Delays-Examples-Continuous

assignment-Delays-Expressions, Operators, Operands-Operator Types-Examples.

UNIT II

Behavioral modeling: Structured procedures-Procedural assignments- Timing controls-conditional

statement- Multi way branching-Loops-Sequential and parallel blocks, generate blocks-Examples.

Tasks and Functions: Difference between Tasks and Functions-Tasks-Functions-Automatic

Functions- Constant Function-Signed Functions.

UNIT III

Logic synthesis with Verilog HDL: Logic synthesis-Verilog HDL Synthesis-Interpretation of

Verilog Constructs-Synthesis Design flow-examples-verification of the gate level netlist, modeling

tips for logic synthesis.

Timing and delays: Types of delay models- modeling-timing checks,-delay back annotation

UNIT IV

FPGA based systems: Introduction-basic concepts-Digital design with FPGAs-FPGA based system

design.

FPGA Fabrics: FPGA architectures-SRAM based FPGAs-Chip I/O- Circuit design of FPGA

fabrics-Architecture of FPGA fabrics-SPARTAN-III and above versions-FPGA connectors

28

UNIT V

Synchronous sequential circuits- Moore and Mealy machines-definition of state machines- state

machine as sequence controller- Design of state machines-state table- state assignment-transition-

excitation table- logic realization-Design example Serial adder.

Case studies- Traffic light controller, simple processor.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Samir Palnitkar, ―VERILOG HDL-A Guide to digital design and synthesis‖- 2nd edition,

Pearson education, 2003.

2. Wayne Wolf, ―FPGA based system design‖- Reprint 2005, Pearson Education ―Electronic

Communication Systems‖, McGrawHill,4th

edition,1992.

REFERENCES:

1. Stephen Brown andZvonkoVranesic, ―Fundamentals of Digital logic with VERILOG design‖,

TMH.

Course Outcomes:

1. Demonstrate the basic knowledge of HDL.

2. Demonstrate the ability to apply HDL in modeling combinational and sequential circuits and

to write a VERILOG test bench to test VERILOG modules.

3. Use EDA tools in digital circuit modeling, simulation, functional verification.

4. Target and synthesize a VERILOG design to FPGA board.

5. Design state machines to control complex systems.

29

Signals and Systems

Subject Code : EC403 Credits: 3:1:0

Prerequisites : Basic Mathematics Contact hours:56

Course Coordinator: Mrs. H. Mallika

Course objectives:

Appreciate the significance of signals, systems and processing in different application.

To understand the properties of various signals and systems.

Discuss the continuous and discrete time systems

Discuss the properties of LTI systems and convolution.

Appreciation of differential and difference equations in describing an LTI Systems.

Appreciate the significance of Fourier Transform, DTFT and Z-Transform in representing the

signals.

Discuss the various properties of Fourier Transform and Z-Transform.

Use of Z-Transform in characterization of LTI systems.

Express the system in block diagram representation.

Course Contents:

UNIT-I

Introduction to signals and systems:Continuous and Discrete time signals, transformation of the

independent variables, Exponential and Sinusoidal signals, unit impulse and step signals, CT and DT

systems, basic system properties.

UNIT-II

LTI Systems:Discrete time LTI systems, continuous time LTI systems, properties of LTI systems,

causal LTI systems described by differential and difference equations.

UNIT-III

Continuous Time Fourier Transform: Representation of aperiodic signals, Fourier Transform of

periodic signals, properties of CTFT ( Linearity, time shifting, conjugation and conjugate

symmetry, differentiation and integration, time and frequency scaling, duality, Perseval’s relation,

convolution and multiplication properties)

UNIT-IV

DTFT and Z-Transform: Representation of aperiodic signals by DTFT, the Fourier Transform of

periodic signals. Z-Transform, ROC of Z-Transform, Inverse Z-Transform (Partial fraction and

power series only) Geometric evaluation of FT from pole zero plot, properties of ZT (Linearity,

time shifting, scaling in the Z-domain, time expansion)

UNIT-V

Continuation of properties of ZT and analysis of LTI Systems: Properties of ZT (conjugation,

convolution, differentiation in Z-domain, initial value theorem), analysis and characterization of LTI

30

system using Z-transform, system function, algebraic and block diagram representation, unilateral Z-

transform.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Alan S. Willsky with Hamid Nawab ―Signals and Systems‖ 2nd

edition

PHI Publications.

REFERENCES:

1. John G. Proakis and Dimitris G. Manolakis,―Digital signal Processing, Principal, Algorithms

and Applications‖, Fourth edition, PHI Publications.

2. Haykin and B. Van Veen,‖Signals and Systems‖, Second Edition, Wiley, 2003.

Course Outcomes:

1. Classify and analyze the given CT and DT systems and signals.

2. Calculate the response of the system by the process of convolution.

3. Analyze the system by difference and differential equations.

4. Apply FT/ZT and analyze the signals and systems.

5. Demonstrate the block diagram representation of discrete time systems.

31

CONTROL SYSTEMS


Prerequisites: Network Analysis and Engineering Mathematics. Contact hours:56

Course Coordinator: Mrs. V. Punya Prabha

Course objectives:

Appreciate the significance and types of control systems.

Compute the transfer function and impulse response of mechanical and analogous systems.

Apply the concept of block diagram reduction techniques and signal flow graph to find the

transfer function of a given system.

Understand the time response of first and second order systems for different test input signals.

Understand the method to find steady state error and error constants of a given system.

Understand the concept of stability of control systems and stability analysis using R.H

Criterion and Nyquist Criterion.

Apply the concept of root locus in the construction of root loci in order to determine the

stability of a given transfer functions.

Analyze the frequency response concepts for assessment of relative stability using Bode plots.

Apply the correlation between time and frequency response.

Understand the classification of controllers and analysis of different types of controllers

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Introduction: Examples of control systems, closed loop vs open loop control systems, classification

of control systems, applications: development and advancement of modern civilization and

technology, Open Loop Systems (Manual Control), Closed Loop Systems (Automatic Control).

Mathematical modeling of linear systems: Transfer function and impulse response: mechanical

systems, analogous systems, Block diagram and signal flow graph, applications: industrial

automation, robotics, mechanical systems and biomedical control, The application of signal flow

graphs—the kinematic analysis of planetary gear trains, analyzing dc–dc pulse width modulated

(PWM) switch mode power converters(SMPC’s).

UNIT – II

Time response of feedback control systems: Test input signals, time response of first and second

order systems, Transient response specification of second order system, Steady state error and error

constants. Applications: Design and stability of second order system.

UNIT – III

Stability analysis: Concept of stability, Routh-Hurwitz criterion, Relative stability analysis,

application of Routh stability criterion, Nyquist plot: polar plots, Nyquist stability criterion,

assessment of relative stability using Nyquist criterion. Applications: to predict whether or not a

system is unstable from knowledge of the loop gain and the loop delay.

32

UNIT – IV

Root-locus technique: Introduction, the root-locus concepts, construction of root loci. Applications:

to design the damping ratio and natural frequency of a feedback system.

UNIT – V

Frequency response analysis: Introduction, Bode diagrams, assessment of relative stability using

Bode plots. Applications: determining the stability of op-amps and transistors and design of lead-lag

compensating networks.

Frequency domain specifications: Correlation between time and frequency response.

Controllers: Classification of controllers, Brief analysis of different types of controllers.

Applications: industrial process and control, robotics.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. K. Ogata,―Modern Control Engineering‖, 4th

Edition, Prentice Hall, 2001.

2. David K. Cheng, Narosa,―Analysis of Linear Systems‖, Publishing House, 5th

Edition, 1986.

3. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal,―Control System Engineering‖, 5th

Edition, New Age International

Publishers, 2007.

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ mathematical modeling techniques to determine the transfer function of a given

system.

2. Analyze the time response of first and second order systems for different test input signals.

3. Employ concept of R.H Criterion, Nyquist Criterion and root locus to determine the stability of

a given transfer function.

4. Analyze the frequency response of given system based on frequency response specifications

and the correlation between time and frequency response.

5. Sketch a stable system based on the analysis of Bode plot.

33

ELECTROMAGNETICS


Prerequisites: Basic Science and Vector Analysis Contact hours:56

Course Coordinators: Sujatha B

Course Objectives:

Illustration of Coulomb’s law in understanding force and electric field intensity, and apply the

concept of electric flux and Gauss law in line charge, surface charge and volume charge

distributions.

Understand the concept of divergence, potential, energy densities in electrostatic fields, and

boundary conditions for electric field and flux densities

Analysis of capacitance of various configurations, and applications of Laplace’s/Poisson’s

equations.

Application of Biot-Savart’s law, Ampere’s law, and Stoke’s theorem.

Illustration of Lorentz force equation, and Maxwell’s equations for time-varying fields

Application of Maxwell’s equations in propagation of TEM/TM/TE waves in various media.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Coulomb's Law and Electric Field Intensity: The experimental Law of Coulomb, Electric field

intensity, Field due to a Continuous Volume Charge Distribution, Field of Line Charge, Field of a

Sheet of Charge. Electric Flux Density, Gauss's Law: Electric Flux Density, Gauss's Law,

Application of Gauss's Law, Some Symmetrical Charge distributions

UNIT – II

Divergence, Energy and Potential: Differential Volume element, Divergence, Maxwell's First

Equation (Electrostatics), vector operator and Divergence Theorem, Energy expended in moving a

point charge in an electric field, Line integral, Definition of Potential Difference and Potential,

Potential field of a point charge, Potential field of a system of charges: conservative property,

Potential Gradient, Energy Density in the Electrostatic Field.

UNIT – III

Dielectrics, Capacitance, Poisson's and Laplace's Equations: Boundary Conditions for perfect

dielectric materials, Capacitance, Several Capacitance examples, Derivation of Poisson's and

Laplace's equations, Examples of the solution of Laplace's equation, Examples of the solution of

Poisson's equation. Steady Magnetic Field: Biot-Savart's Law, Ampere's circuital law, Curl, Stoke's

theorem.

34

UNIT – IV

Magnetic Forces, Time-varying Fields and Maxwell's Equations: Magnetic flux and Magnetic

flux Density, Scalar and Vector Magnetic Potentials, Force on a Moving Charge, Force on a

Differential Current Element, Force between Differential Current Elements, Retarded Potential,

Faraday's law, Displacement Current, Maxwell's Equations in Point Form, Maxwell's Equations in

Integral Form.

UNIT – V

The Uniform Plane Wave: Wave propagation in Free Space, Wave propagation in Dielectrics,

Poynting's Theorem and Wave Power, Propagation in good conductors: Skin effect, Wave

Polarization (Qualitative treatment). Waveguides: Rectangular Waveguides, Analysis of field

components, cut off frequency, group and phase velocities, phase constants, dominant modes.

TEXT BOOK:

1. William H. Hayt Jr., John A. Buck, ―Engineering Electromagnetics‖, TMH, 7th

Edition, 2005.

REFERENCES:

1. Mathew N. O. Sadiku, ―Elements of Electromagnetics‖, Oxford University Press, 4th

Edition,

2006.

Course Outcomes:

1. Apply different laws of electrostatics such as Coulomb’s law, and Gauss’s law.

2. Analyze the divergence of electric flux, interpret the potential and energy content in the

presence of static charge distributions.

3. Employ boundary conditions in the analysis of capacitances of various configurations and

analyze the Application of Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations in electrostatic fields.

4. Employ Biot-Savart’s law and Ampere’s law for various current distributions.

5. Apply the concept of Faraday’s law and Lenz’ law in obtaining Maxwell’s equations for time

varying fields and apply them in study of propagation of waves.

35

Linear Integrated Circuits Laboratory


Prerequisites: Analog Electronics Contact Hours:14

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Flory Francis

Course objectives:

To learn the method of designing and to conduct by using hardware components for different

applications circuits using Op-Amp such as inverting, non-inverting, summer, integrator

differentiator, filter and oscillator.

Understand the designing method and conduct the experiment for the circuit of Precision

rectifier using Op-Amp.

Designing the circuit and test the designed circuit to generate square wave using IC 555 timer

and Op-Amp for various duty cycle

Analysis of analog to digital signal conversion and vice-versa

Course Contents:

1. To Study the following applications of Op-Amp as :

i) Design Inverting and Non Inverting Amplifier for suitable Gain.

ii) Design Inverting summer to sum Two voltage Sources with Suitable Gain.

iii) To study the frequency response of Voltage follower.

2. To design Op-Amp Differentiator and Integrator circuit and draw the output waveforms for

different type of signals at different RC time constants.

3. To design and test Op-Amp Half and Full wave Precision rectifiers and to observe Transfer

Characteristics.

4. To design and test Inverting Schmitt trigger for the given UTP, LTP and Vsat . Also observe

Transfer Characteristics.

5. i) To design Op-Amp Monostable Multivibrator and analyze the capacitor waveforms

for given RC time constants.

ii) To design Op-Amp Symmetrical Astable Multivibrator and unsymmetrical Astable

Multivibrator for duty cycle less than or greater than 50%.

6. To design and test function generator (Triangular waveform) using op-amp.

7. To design and test application of 555 Timer as

i) Unsymmetrical Astable Multivibrator for duty cycle less than or greater than 50%.

ii) Symmetrical Astable Multivibrator.

iii) To obtain pulse width of Monostable Multivibrator by choosing suitable RC time

constant.

8. To Compare the Roll of rate of First and Second Order Low pass and high pass filters for

suitable gain.

9. To design and plot the frequency response of Op-Amp First order Band pass filter

10. To study the working of 4-Bit R-2R DAC and verify the practical analog output comparing

with theoretical values for different digital inputs.

11. To Design and study the working of 2-bit Flash ADC

12. To design Op-Amp Wein Bridge Oscillator for given frequency of oscillation.

36

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, ―OP-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits ―, PHI/Pearson, 4th

Edition, 2004.

2. David A. Bell,―Operational Amplifiers and Linear IC’s‖, PHI/Pearson, 2nd

edition,2008.

REFERENCES:

1. Robert. F. Coughlin &Fred.F. Driscoll, ―Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated

Circuits‖, PHI/Pearson, 2006.

2. D. Roy Choudhury and Shail B. Jain, ―Linear Integrated Circuits‖, New Age International

2nd


Course Outcomes:

1. Design different applications circuits using Op-amp as inverting, non-inverting, summer,

integrator differentiator, filter and oscillator.

2. Design the circuit of precision rectifier using Op-amp.

3. Design the circuit to generate square wave using IC 555 timer and Op-amp for various duty

cycle

4. Analyze analog to digital signal conversion and vice-versa.

37

DSD WITH FPGA LAB


Prerequisites: Digital electronics Contact Sessions: 12

Course objectives:

Learn to Design complex combinational and sequential digital circuits.

Model combinational and sequential digital circuits by Verilog HDL

Design and model digital circuits with Verilog HDL at behavioral, structural, and RTL levels

Develop test benches to simulate combinational and sequential circuits.

Learn how the language infers hardware and to simulate and test that hardware ..

Learn about the use of FPGAs in digital design.

Course Contents:

All the Programs to be simulated using VERILOG HDL and downloaded on to XILINX

SPARTAN 3E FPGA for synthesis.

Tool used: XILINX ISE 9.1i

Simulation tool: Modelsim XE-Verilog

Synthesis tool: Xilinx XST

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. Basic Gates

2. Adders, Subtractors in all three descriptions

3. Decoders, Encoders, Multiplexers

4. Gray code conversion , Excess three conversion

5. Ripple carry adder , parity generation / detection

6. Design ALU, Comparators

7. Flip Flops (JK, SR, T, D) , BCD counter , Binary counter, Any mod counter

8. Shift registers

9. INTERFACING PROGRAMS i. Seven Segment Display

ii. DAC / ADC

iii. Stepper Motor

Course Outcomes:

1. Use electronic design automation (EDA) tools in digital circuit modeling, simulation, and

prototyping with FPGA

2. Implement existing SSI and MSI digital circuits with Verilog HDL.

3. Design combinational circuits of increasing complexity according to functional behavior.

4. Design sequential circuits using RTL description, interface stepper motor and DAC with

FPGA.

5. Design various arithmetic circuits (both combinational and sequential) for specific needs


BANGALORE


SYLLABUS




V &VI Semester B. E.

2

M. S. Ramaiah Institute of Technology, Bangalore-54

(Autonous Institute, Affiliated to VTU)


Faculty List

Sl.







6. K. Manikantan M E (Ph.D) Associate Professor

7. C. Manjunath M E Associate Professor




11. V. Anandi M S (Ph.D) Associate Professor


13. Dr. Naga Ravikanth D Ph.D Associate Professor



16. S.L. Gangadharaiah M.Tech Assistant Professor




3













4


MS.R.I.T., BANGALORE – 560054.


Vision and Mission


To evolve in to an autonomous institution of international standing for imparting quality

technical education


MSRIT shall deliver global quality technical education by nurturing a conducive learning

environment for a better tomorrow through continuous improvement and customization


To be, and be recognized as, an excellent Department in Electronic & Communication

Engineering that provides a great learning experience and to be a part of an outstanding

community with admirable environment.








5


Program Educational Objectives of the Department of Electronics and Communication are:

PEO 1: To provide all basic fundamental prerequisites in mathematical, scientific and engineering fields required to solve technical problems.

PEO 2: To train in analyzing, designing and creating new scientific tools and other software so as to gain good engineering breadth.

PEO 3: To involve in professional and ethical environment, to build effective communication skills, multidisciplinary and teamwork skills and to relate engineering issues to broader social context.

PEO 4: To provide an academic environment, awareness to excel and to lead a successful professional career in lifelong learning.

PEO 5: To communicate/work with research and development, to design/develop and to formulate/integrate various products.

6

Program Outcomes

POs are statements that describe what students are expected to know, attitudes they are expected to hold,

and what they are able to do by the time of graduation. Achievement of program outcome should indicate

the student is equipped to achieve the PEOs.



1. Recollect the essential descriptions from basic sciences, and apply them in E & C streams.

2. Demonstrate ability to identify, interpret and solve engineering problems.

3. Design circuits and conduct experiments with electronic systems, communication equipment,


4. Design systems/subsystems and devices

5. Demonstrate the capability to visualize, organize and work in laboratory and interdisciplinary tasks.

6. Demonstrate skills using software tools and other modern equipment.

7. Inculcate the ethical, social and professional responsibilities such as project management and

finance.

8. Communicate effectively in oral /written form of scientific analysis or data.

9. Understand the impact of engineering solutions on the society and also will be aware of


10. Develop self-confidence and become excellent multi-skilled engineer, manager, leader and


11. Participate and succeed in competitive examinations/placement and show potential research

capability.

12. An understanding of engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s work, as a


7


V SEMESTER B. E. ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SI.

No.

Subject


Credits*

L T P Total

1. EC501 Analog

Communication

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

2. EC502 Digital Signal

Processing

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 4 0 0 4

3. EC503 VLSI Design and

Circuits

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 4 0 0 4

4. EC504 Microcontrollers Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 4 0 0 4

5. EC505 Microwave

Components & Circuits

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 4 0 0 4

6. Departmental Elective

– I

Electronics and

Communication

PS-E x x x 4

7. EC501L Analog

Communication Lab

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

8. EC502L Digital Signal

Processing Lab

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

9. EC504L Microcontroller Lab Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

Total 19+x x 3+x 26


8

VI SEMESTER B. E. ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SI.

No.

Subject


Credits*

L T P Total

1. EC601 Digital Communication Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 4 0 0 4

2. EC602 Analog and Mixed

Mode VLSI Design

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

3. EC603 Computer

Communication

Networks

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

4. EC604 Antennas and

Propagation

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

5. EC605 Entrepreneurship &

Management

Electronics and

Communication

HSS 2 0 0 2


– II

Electronics and

Communication

PS-E x x x 4


– III

Electronics and

Communication

PS-E x x x 4

8. EC601L Digital Communication

Lab

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

9. EC602L VLSI Lab Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

Total

15+x x 2+x 25


9

LIST OF PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES:

The student has to earn a maximum of 24 credits as electives.

The student has to earn a maximum of 03 credits as open elective.

Subject Code Subject Title L T P C

ECPE01 OOPs with C++ and Data Structures PS-E 3 0 1 4

ECPE02 Operating Systems PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE03 Computer Organization and Architecture PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE04 Power Electronics PS-E 3 0 1 4

ECPE05 Digital Electronic Measurements PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE06 Advanced Signal Processing PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE07 Image Processing PS-E 3 0 1 4

ECPE08 Communication Switching Systems PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE09 Discrete Time Control Systems PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE10 Linear Algebra PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE11 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE12 Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems PS-E 3 0 1 4

ECPE13 Cryptography and Network Security PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE14 Global Positioning Systems (GPS) PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE15 Low Power VLSI Design PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE16 Design of Electronic Systems PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE17 Data Compression PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE18 Radar and Navigational Aids PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE19 Wavelets and its Applications PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE20 Spread Spectrum Communication PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE21 Satellite Communication PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE22 RF ICs PS-E 4 0 0 4

10

ANALOG COMMUNICATION


Prerequisites: Signals & Systems Contact hours: 42

Course Coordinator: Dr. T.D. Senthil Kumar

Course objectives:

Understand the time and frequency domain representation of single tone and multi tone

AM

Illustrate the generation and demodulation of AM and DSBSC

Appreciate the mathematical representation of SSB and VSB

Illustrate the generation and demodulation of SSB and VSB

Understand the frequency spectrum of FM signals and PM signals

Illustrate the generation and demodulation of FM

Understand the effect of noise in CW modulation systems

Appreciate the application of AM and FM systems and TV systems

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Amplitude Modulation and Double Side-band Suppressed Carrier Modulation: Introduction to

AM: Time domain description, Frequency domain description. Generation of AM wave: Square law

modulator, switching modulator. Detection of AM waves: Square law detector, envelope detector,

time domain description of DSBSC, Frequency domain representation, Generation of DSBSC waves,

balanced modulator, ring modulator, coherent detection of DSBSC modulated waves, Costas loop,

Quadrature carrier multiplexing

UNIT II

Single Side-band Modulation (SSB): Hilbert transform, properties of Hilbert transform, pre-

envelope, single side-band modulation, frequency domain description of SSB wave, time domain

description, frequency discrimination method for generating an SSB modulated wave, time domain

description, phase discrimination method for generating an SSB modulated wave, demodulation of

SSB waves

Vestigial Side-band Modulation: Frequency domain description, Generation of VSB modulated

wave, time domain description, coherent demodulation, envelope detection of VSB wave along with

carrier

UNIT III

Angle Modulation (FM): Basic definitions, FM, narrow band FM, wideband FM, transmission

bandwidth of FM waves. Generation of FM waves: indirect FM and direct FM, frequency

stabilization in FM receivers, demodulation of FM waves, frequency discrimination method, phase

11

locked loop, non linear model of phase locked loop, linear model of the phase locked loop, non linear

effect in FM systems

UNIT IV

Applications of AM and FM: AM radio (super heterodyne): block diagram of transmitter

andreceiver, mixer, AGC, performance characteristics. FM radio: block diagram of transmitter and

receiver.

Elements of Colour TV: Frequency range and channel bandwidth, scanning and synchronization,

composite video signal. Block diagram of transmitter and receiver

UNIT V

Noise Basics and Noise in Continuous Wave Modulation Systems: Introduction, shot noise,

thermal noise, white noise, noise equivalent bandwidth, noise figure, equivalent noise temperature,

cascade connection of two port networks, receiver model, noise in DSBSC receivers, noise in SSB

receivers, noise in AM receivers, threshold effect, noise in FM receivers, FM threshold effect, pre-

emphasis and de-emphasis in FM

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Simon Haykin, ―Communication Systems‖, 3rd

edition, John Wiley, 1996

2. Simon Haykin, ―An Introduction to Analog and Digital Communication‖, John Wiley,

2003

3. R.R. Gulati, ―Monochrome and Colour TV‖, New Age International (P) Ltd. 2004

REFERENCES:

1. B.P. Lathi ―Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems‖, 3rd

edition, Oxford

University Press, 2005

2. H. Taub, D.L Schilling, ―Principles of Communication Systems‖ 2nd

edition, Mc-Graw

Hill, 1986

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe the generation and demodulation of AM and DSBSC systems

2. Describe the generation and demodulation of SSB and VSB

3. Describe the direct and indirect method of generation of FM and its detection

4. Employ AM and FM in radio and TV systems

5. Noise performance of receivers

12

Digital Signal Processing


Prerequisites: Signals and Systems Contact hours:56

Course Coordinator: Dr. K. Indira

Course objectives:

Appreciate the importance of Fourier Transform and its relation with other transform.

Illustrate filtering of long data sequence using Over lap add and Over lap save method.

Apply the concept of FFT algorithms to compute DFT.

Design FIR filter using various window method, frequency sampling and FIR differentiator.

Understand FIR filters in Symmetric and anti symmetric nature.

Understand the characteristics of analog filters.

Design IIR filter using impulse invariant, bilinear transform and matched Z transforms.

Implement FIR &IIR filters for digital filter structures and signal flow graphs.

Appreciate the importance and application of DSP processors

Understand the Architecture overview of 54x and 67x processors.

Illustrate various addressing modes in 54x and 67x processor.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

DFT and FFT: Frequency Domain Sampling and Reconstruction of Discrete-time signals, Discrete

Fourier Transform, DFT as a linear transformation, DFT relations with other transforms, DFT in

linear filtering, Filtering long data sequences: overlap-save, Filtering long data sequences: overlap-

add method, FFT algorithms: Direct computation of DFT, Radix-2 FFT algorithm: Decimation-in-

time algorithm, Radix-2 FFT algorithm: Decimation-in-frequency algorithm.

UNIT II

FIR Filters: Design of FIR filters: Symmetric and anti symmetric FIR filters, Design of linear-phase

FIR filters using windows and frequency sampling methods, FIR differentiators.

Structures for FIR Systems: Direct-Form Structures, Cascade-Form Structures and Lattice Structures.

UNIT III

IIR Filters: Analog filter specifications, classification of analog filters: Butterworth and Chebyshev

filters, frequency transformations, design of analog filters. Digital IIR filter design using impulse

invariant, bilinear transformation, Matched z-transform methods.

IIR filter structures: Direct form (I and II), Cascade, Parallel, and Transposed structures.

13

UNIT IV

DSP Processors: Computer architectures for signal processing, Harvard architecture, Pipelining,

Hardware multiplier-accumulator, On-chip memory/cache, Extended Parallelism-SIMD,VLIW and

static super scalar processing. Data representations and arithmetic: Fixed point numbers and

Arithmetic, Floating Point Arithmetic, Comparison of Fixed-point and Floating Point Processors.

UNIT V

TMS320C54xProcessor: Architecture of 54x, Addressing modes: direct, Indirect addressing,

absolute addressing, memory mapped register addressing, stack addressing, circular and bit

reversal addressing. Instruction set: Load/store operations, Arithmetic operations, Logical

Operations, Program control operations. Implementation of FIR and IIR filters.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. J. G. Proakis and D. G. Manolakis, ―Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms and

Applications,‖ Pearson Education Asia/Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

2. Sanjit K. Mitra, ―Digital Signal Processing‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

3. Sen M. Kuo, Woon-SengGan, ―Digital Signal Processors: Architectures,

Implementations and Applications‖, Pearson Education Asia, 1st Edition, 2005.

4. Emmanuel Ifeachor Barrie W.Jervis ,‖ Digital Signal Processing A Practical Approach― ,

Pearson Education, Second Edition , 2002.

REFERENCES:

1. Oppenheim and Schafer, ―Discrete Time Signal Processing‖, Pearson Education, 2003.

2. Venkataramani B, and Bhaskar M, ―Digital Signal Processors Architecture, Programming and

Applications‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze the importance and application of FFT algorithm.

2. Design FIR and IIR filters which are used for various applications.

3. Employ digital filter structure to implement FIR and IIR expression.

4. Analyze the significance of DSP processor in real time application

5. Construct and describe processor architecture using macro model.

14

VLSI DESIGN AND CIRCUITS


Prerequisites: Solid state devices and Technology, DSD with FPGA Contact hours:56

Course Coordinator: Mrs. A. R. Priyarenjini

Course objectives:

Introduce digital integrated circuits.

Introduce CMOS devices and manufacturing technology.

Introduce CMOS logic gates and their layout.

Ability to find Propagation delay, noise margins, and power dissipation in the digital VLSI

circuits.

Ability to design Combinational (e.g., arithmetic) and sequential circuit.

Understand the concepts of testing in VLSI.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION: Historical perspective, circuit design example, VLSI Design methodologies,

hierarchy, Concept of modularity, regularity, locality, Design styles ,Packaging, CAD. Fabrication of

MOSFETS: CMOS N-WELL, Layout design rules

UNIT II

MOS Transistor : Structure, external biasing, operation ,V I Characteristics, scaling, MOS

Capacitor.MOS Inverter: Static characteristics: Resistive load inverter, N type load, CMOS Inverter.

UNIT III

Dynamic switching characteristics: Delay time, calculation of delay time, rise and fall times,

resistance ,capacitance estimation, Switching power dissipation, super buffers.

UNIT IV

Combinational MOS static Logic circuits: NMOS Depletion load complex logic circuits, Pass

transistor, Transmission gate, stick diagrams, mask layout. Sequential circuits: SR Latch, CMOS D

Latch, edge triggered flip flop. Dynamic logic circuits: Basic principles of PT circuits, Dynamic

CMOS circuit techniques: CMOS TG logic, Dynamic CMOS logic High performance Dynamic

circuits, charge sharing problems, remedies.

UNIT V

Design for testability: Fault type and models, Controllability, Observability, Ad hoc testing, scan

based techniques, BIST, IDDQ.

15

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Sung – Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici ―CMOS digital integrated circuits—Analysis and Design ―

Tat McGraw Hill 3 rd Edition 2003

REFERENCES:

1. Kamran Eshraghian, Dougles and A. Pucknell, ―Essentials of VLSI circuits and systems‖ -

PHI, 2005 Edition.

2. Weste and Eshraghian, ―Principles of CMOS VLSI Design‖ - Pearson Education,1999.

3. John P. Uyemura,‖Chip Design for Submicron VLSI: CMOS Layout & Simulation,‖ -

Thomson Learning, 2005.

4. John .P. Uyemura,‖ Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems‖ - JohnWiley, 2003.

5. John M. Rabaey,‖Digital Integrated Circuits‖ - PHI, EEE, 1997.

6. Wayne Wolf, ―Modern VLSI Design‖ - Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 1997.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze the CMOS layout levels, how the design layers are used in the process sequence.

2. Describe the general steps required for processing of CMOS integrated circuits.

3. Be able to design static CMOS combinational and sequential logic at the transistor level,

including mask layout.

4. Design using different logic styles such as complementary CMOS logic, pass-transistor

logic, dynamic logic, etc.

5. Have the skill of transistor-level analysis and design of simple and complex logic gates

such as inverter, NOR and NAND gates.

16

MICROCONTROLLERS


Prerequisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact hours : 56

Course coordinator : Mr. K. Manikantan

Course objectives:

Provide a knowledge foundation which will enable students to pursue subsequent courses in

real-time embedded systems software and computer design.

Understand the differences between microcontrollers and microprocessors, different CPU

architectures, & describe the features of a typical microcontroller.

Comprehend the architectures of 8051 and MSP430 Microcontrollers, & understand the

operation of parts of these controllers, and be able to apply this knowledge in simple programs.

Use the 8051 addressing modes and instruction set to perform - arithmetic & logic operations,

data & control transfer operations, input & output operations.

Describe each module in MSP430, working out to the on-chip peripherals and Use low power

features of MSP430 to develop embedded solutions.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Microprocessors and Microcontrollers: Introduction, Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, A

microprocessors survey, RISC and CISC CPU architectures, Harvard and Von-Neumann CPU

architectures.

The 8051 Architecture: Introduction, 8051 microcontroller Hardware, Input/output Pins, Ports and

Circuits, External Memory, Counters and Timers, Serial Data Input/output, Interrupts.

Addressing Modes: Introduction, Addressing modes, External data Moves, Code Memory, Read

Only Data Moves / Indexed addressing mode, PUSH and POP Opcodes, Data exchanges, Example

Programs.

UNIT – II

Logical and Arithmetic Operations: Byte level logical operations, Bit level Logical operations,

Rotate and Swap operations, Example programs, Arithmetic operations: Flags, Incrementing and

Decrementing, Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division, Decimal Arithmetic, Example

programs.

Jump and Call instructions: The JUMP and CALL Program range; Jumps, Calls and Subroutines,

Interrupts and Returns, More Details on Interrupts, Example Problems.

8051 Programming in C: Data types and time delays in 8051C, I/O programming, logic operations,

data conversion programs, accessing code ROM space, data serialization.

UNIT – III

Timer/Counter programming in 8051: Programming 8051 Timers, Counter Programming,

Programming timers 0 and 1 in 8051C.

8051 Serial Communication: Basics of Serial Communication, 8051 connections to RS-232, 8051

Serial communication programming, Serial port programming in C.

17

UNIT – IV

Interrupts Programming: 8051 Interrupts, Programming Timer Interrupts, Programming External

Hardware Interrupts, Programming the Serial Communication Interrupts, Interrupt Priority in

8051/52, Interrupt Programming in C.

8051 Interfacing and Applications: Interfacing 8051 to LCD, Keyboard, ADC, DAC, Stepper

Motor Interfacing.

UNIT – V

Introduction to MSP430 :Low power features, Pin-out, Functional block diagram, Memory map,

MSP430 families.

Architecture of MSP430: Central processing unit, Addressing modes, Instruction set, Clock system.

Functions, Interrupts and Low Power modes: Functions and subroutines, Interrupts, Low Power

modes of operation.

Digital I/O –Digital Input and Output: Parallel ports, Understanding the muxing scheme of the

MSP430 pins, programming examples.

On-chip peripherals: Watchdog Timer, Comparator, Op-Amp, Basic Timer, ADC, DAC, SD16,

LCD.

MSP430 Interfacing: Interfacing LED, LCD, ADC, DAC, Programming examples.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kenneth J Ayala, ―The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and Applications‖,

Second Edition, Penram International 1996 / Thomson Learning 2005.

2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice GillispieMazidi, Rolin D McKinlay, ―The 8051

Microcontroller and Embedded Systems – Using Assembly and C‖, PHI 2006 / Pearson 2006.

3. ―MSP430 Microcontroller Basics”, John Davies, Elsevier, 2010.

REFERENCES:

1. M. Predko, ‖Programming and Customizing the 8051 Microcontroller‖, McGraw Hill, 1999.

2. MSP430 Teaching CD-ROM, Texas Instruments, 2008 (can be requested http://www.uniti.in )

Course outcomes:

1. Identify the components of microcontroller architecture and illustrate these with the 8051

microcontrollers.

2. Use commands/instructions that place data in internal memory, external memory, get data from

ROM addresses, exchange data, predict the ranges of Jump.

3. Develop , 8051 assembly language and C programs for time delays, I/O operations, and

4. Serial communication.

5. Develop programs using interrupts and Write C programs to interface 8051 chip to interfacing

modules to develop single chip solutions.

6. Identify the components of microcontroller architecture and illustrate these with the MSP430

microcontrollers and Design low power embedded applications using MSP430.

18

MICROWAVE COMPONENTS AND CIRCUITS


Prerequisites: Electromagnetics Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinators: Naga Ravi Kanth D

Course Objectives:

Understand wave propagation through transmission lines in terms of equivalent voltages and

currents.

Illustrate transmission line parameters using Smith chart.

Perform microwave network analysis using scattering parameters.

Design matching networks using Smith chart.

Understand transmission line resonators, microwave filters, various power dividers,

microwave sources, and mixers.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Transmission line theory and Impedance matching: Lumped-element circuit model for a

transmission line – wave propagation on a transmission line, lossless line; Terminated lossless

transmission line; Smith chart – combined impedance-admittance Smith chart, matching with lumped

elements (L Networks) – analytic solutions, Smith chart solutions.

UNIT II

Transmission lines, Impedance tuning and Resonators: Single-stub tuning – shunt stubs, series

stubs; Quarter-wave transformer; Coaxial line – TEM modes; Stripline – formulas for propagation

constant, characteristic impedance, attenuation, approximate electrostatic solution; Introduction to

Microstrip line; Series and parallel resonant circuits, loaded and unloaded Q; Transmission line

resonators – short-circuited λ/2 line, short-circuited λ/4 line, open-circuited λ/2 line.

UNIT III

Microwave network analysis, Power dividers and Directional couplers: Impedance and

admittance matrices – reciprocal networks, lossless networks; Scattering matrix – reciprocal

networks and lossless networks, shift in reference planes; Transmission matrix – relation to

impedance matrix; Basic properties of dividers and couplers – three-port networks, four-port

networks; T-junction power divider – lossless divider, resistive divider; Wilkinson power divider –

even-odd mode analysis.

UNIT IV

Microwave filters: Periodic structures – analysis of infinite periodic structures, terminated periodic

structures, k-β diagrams and wave velocities; Filter design by the image parameter method – image

impedances and transfer functions for two-port networks, constant-k filter sections, m-derived filter

sections, composite filters; Stepped-impedance low-pass filters.

19

UNIT V

RF diodes, Oscillators and Mixers: RF diode characteristics – PIN diodes and control circuits,

varactor diodes; Mixer characteristics, single-ended diode mixer; Gunn diodes (theory) – Gunn

effect, RWH theory, modes of operation; IMPATT diodes (theory) – avalanche multiplication,

carrier and external currents, negative resistance; Reflex Klystrons (theory) – velocity modulation,

bunching process. (NO MATHEMATICAL ANALYSIS)

TEXT BOOKS:

1. David M Pozar; Microwave Engineering; 3rd

edition; Wiley; 2011.

2. Samuel Y Liao; Microwave Devices and Circuits; 3rd

edition; Pearson; 2011.

REFERENCES:

1. Annapurna Das and Sisir K Das; Microwave Engineering; McGraw-Hill; 2006.

2. John Ryder D; Networks, Lines and Fields; 2nd

edition; PHI; 2010.

3. R.E.Collin, ―Foundations for Microwave Engineering, 2nd

edition, John Wiley, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze various transmission lines and resonators.

2. Apply concepts of analysis using Smith chart for impedance matching and appraise different

impedance matching networks.

3. Employ microwave network analysis in design of multiport microwave networks.

4. Describe microwave filter design.

5. Apply different microwave diodes and mixers in microwave systems.

20

ANALOG COMMUNICATION LABORATORY


Prerequisites: Signals & Systems Contact Sessions: 12

Course Coordinator: Dr. T. D. Senthil Kumar

Course objectives:

To obtain a practical perspective of various communication modules

To implement various analog modulation and demodulation schemes using discrete components

List of Experiments

1. Design and construction of second order active low-pass filter and high- pass filter. Plot of

frequency response and estimation of roll-off factor

2. Design and construction of second order active band-pass filter and band-stop filter. Plot of


3. Class-C amplifier. Plot of efficiency Vs load resistance.

4. Generation of AM using collector modulation. Plot of modulation signal amplitude Vs

modulation index.

5. Demodulation of AM using envelope detector. Plot of AM output Vs input signal

6. Generation of DSBSC using ring modulation. Observation of output waveform

7. Generation of AM/DSBSC using IC MC1496. Observing the output waveforms

8. Generation of FM using IC 8038. Plot of frequency Vs input dc and estimation of modulation

index

9. Pre-emphasis and de-emphasis.

10. Radio receiver characteristics.

11. Transistor mixer study of up conversion and down conversion.

12. Demodulation of FM using PLL.

13. Matlab simulation of analog modulation and demodulation techniques.

Course Outcomes:

1. Construct second order active filters for various frequency bands

2. Design and implement modulation and demodulation circuit for AM, DSBSC and FM

Implement AM/DSBSC using ICs

3. Characterize a super heterodyne receiver

21

Digital Signal Processing Laboratory




Course objectives:

To gain a working knowledge of the design & implementation on various DSP operations using

MAT LAB.

To obtain a practical perspective of convolution and filtering operations using DSP processor

Course Contents:

A .LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING MATLAB / DSP PROCESSOR

1. Perform the following operation on a given sequence (Time shifting, Up and down sampling,

Folding)

2. Verification of sampling theorem.

3. Convolution of given sequence

a) . Linear b) Circular

4. Solving a given difference equation with and without initial conditions.

5 .Computation of N point DFT of a given sequence and to plot magnitude and phase spectrum,

and verify using built in function

6. Given a causal system H(z), obtain pole-zero plot, magnitude and phase response.

7. Linear convolution of two sequences using DFT and IDFT.

8. Circular convolution of two given sequences using DFT and IDFT

9. Design and implementation of FIR filter to meet given specifications. (Window, frequency

sampling method)

10. Design and implementation of IIR filter to meet given specifications (Impulse Invariant,

Bilinear Transform)

B. LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING DSP PROCESSOR

1. Linear convolution of two given sequences.

2. Circular convolution of two given sequences.

3. Solving a given difference equation

4. Computation of N- Point DFT of a given sequence

5. Realization of an FIR filter (any type) to meet given specifications .The input can be a signal

from function generator / speech signal.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Digital signal processing using MATLAB - J. G. Proakis & Ingale, MGH, 2000

2. Digital Signal Processors, B. Venkataramani and Bhaskar, TMH,2002

REFERENCES:

1. Digital signal processing using MATLAB - Sanjeet K Mitra, TMH,2001

22

Course Outcomes

1. To be able to perform basic operations on a given signal.

2. To be able to implement DFT using convolution and built in function.

3. To implement FIR filter and IIR to meet the given specifications.

4. To implement convolution and filtering using Code Composer Studio (CCS)

23

MICROCONTROLLER LAB

Subject Code: EC504L Credits: 0:0:1

Prerequisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact Sessions : 12

Course Coordinator : Mr. K. Manikantan

Course objectives:

Understand assembly level programming and the C data types for 8051, & write 8051 C

programs & assembly language programs using Keil development software.

Illustrate the various modes of 8051 timers, describe serial communication features of 8051 and

program the 8051 timers/counters & serial port in assembly & C.

Understand what occurs within the 8051 on an interrupt. Understand how hardware generated

interrupts operate, & write programs for 8051 using interrupts.

Interface application circuits like LCD, keyboard, ADC, DAC and stepper motor with 8051

microcontroller & develop application programs using 8051 C.

Understand assembly level programming and the C data types for MSP430, &write C

programs & assembly language programs using Code Composer Studio development software.

LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS

PART A: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING (using KEIL uVISION 3)

1. Block move, Exchange, Sorting, Finding largest element in an array, Arithmetic instructions

2. Counters

3. Code conversion programs

4. Programs using serial port, and on-chip timers.

PART B: INTERFACING

Write C programs to interface 8051 chip to Interfacing modules to develop single chip solutions for:

5. Keyboard interface.

6. External ADC interface.

7. Generate different waveforms using DAC interface.

8. Stepper Motor interface.

PART C: Programming MSP430 with Code Composer Studio/IAR Embedded Workbench

9. Assembly Language programs for arithmetic and logic operations

10. C Programs for interfacing LCD panel and Keypad.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kenneth J Ayala, ―The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and Applications‖,


2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice GillispieMazidi, Rolin D McKinlay, ―The 8051

Microcontroller and Embedded Systems – Using Assembly and C‖, PHI 2006 / Pearson 2006.

3. ―MSP430 Microcontroller Basics”, John Davies, Elsevier, 2010.

REFERENCES:

1. M. Predko, ‖Programming and Customizing the 8051 Microcontroller‖, McGraw Hill, 1999.

2. MSP430 Teaching CD-ROM, Texas Instruments, 2008 (can be requested http://www.uniti.in )

24

Course outcomes

1. Familiarity with hardware and software development and debugging tools.

2. Develop, simulate and debug 8051 assembly language and C programs for time delays, I/O

operations, logic and arithmetic operations, data conversion using Keil software development

tools.

3. Write C programs to interface 8051 chip to Interfacing modules to develop single chip

solutions for: Displaying the pressed key's key code on the On-board LCD of the ESA

MCB51, rotate the stepper motor, read the ADC output and display it on the on-board LCD and

generate waveforms using DAC.

4. Interpret and design hardware and software for simple real-time digital systems which use the

8051 microcontroller.

5. Design low power embedded applications using MSP430.

25

Digital Communication

Subject Code: EC601 Credits:4:0:0

Prerequisites: Analog Communication, Signals and Systems Contact Hours:56

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Lakshmi S.

Course Objectives:

Understand Nyquist Sampling Theorem.

Apply the practical aspects of signal sampling.

Understand the different quantization techniques.

Appreciate the need for DPCM, DM and ADM.

Categorize different Line Codes in terms of their Power Spectra.

Understand ISI and ways to overcome the same.

Conceptualize and apply Correlative and Duo binary Coding techniques.

Analyze the concept of Detection and Estimation.

Apply Gram-Schmidt orthogonolization procedure for signals.

Discuss the need for a Matched Filter Receiver.

Understand Coherent modulation techniques such as BPSK, ASK,DPSK and QPSK systems.

Analyze the same in terms of error probability and power spectrum.

Understand Non-Coherent Modulation Techniques.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Signal Sampling: Basic signal processing operations in digital communication, Sampling Principles,

Sampling Theorem, Quadrature sampling of band-pass signals, Practical aspects of sampling and

signal recovery, PAM, TDM.

UNIT – II

Waveform Coding Techniques: PCM block diagram, Different quantization techniques, SNR in

PCM, robust quantization, DPCM, DM, Adaptive DM

UNIT – III

Base-Band Shaping for Data Transmission: Line Codes and their power spectra, ISI, Nyquist

criterion for distortion less base-band binary transmission, correlative coding, duobinary coding,

adaptive equalization, eye pattern

UNIT – IV

Digital Modulation and Demodulation Techniques: Coherent binary modulation techniques,

BPSK, FSK, ASK, DPSK, QPSK systems with signal space diagram, generation, demodulation and

error probability concept, Comparison using Power Spectrum, Coherent demodulation techniques for

ASK, FSK and BPSK.

26

UNIT – V

Detection and Estimation: Concept of Detection and Estimation, Correlation Receiver, Matched

Filter Receiver, Properties of Matched Filter. Non -Coherent demodulation techniques for FSK and

BPSK, Synchronization: - Carrier synchronization Symbol Synchronization.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Simon Haykin, ―Digital Communications‖, John Wiley, 2003.

2. J. Proakis, ―Digital Communication‖, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2000.

REFERENCES:

1. K. Sam Shanmugam, ―Digital and Analog Communication Systems‖, John Wiley, 1996.

2. Simon Haykin, ―An Introduction to Analog and Digital Communication‖, John Wiley, 2003.

3. Bernard Sklar ―Digital Communications‖, Pearson Education, 2007.

4. K. Sam Shanmugam, A. M. Breipohl, ―Random Signals: Detection, Estimation and Data

Analysis‖, Wiley, 1988.

Course Outcomes:

1. Sample a signal and reconstruct it at receiver.

2. Design a PCM, DPCM, DM and ADM systems.

3. Design Base Band shaping for data transmission.

4. Describe system level blocks for BPSK, ASK, DPSK and QPSK systems.

5. Apply GSOP procedure to obtain basis functions and hence analyze coherent and non-

coherent digital modulation systems.

27

Analog & Mixed signal VLSI Design


Prerequisites: SSDT Contact hours: 42



Understand the importance of MOS devices, in the field of Analog VLSI Design.

Explain the basic operation & design of CS, CD, Differential amplifiers, and current mirrors.

Quantitative Analysis of differential pair amplifier with different loads.

Analysis & Design of simple current mirrors, cascode current mirrors.

Analysis of Frequency response of telescopic opamp & folded cascade opamp.

Stability analysis of telescopic opamp & folded cascade opamp.

Characterization & Design of different ADCS & DACs

Identify and analyze the error terms in basic D/A and A/D designs.

Course Contents:

UNIT-1

Introduction & Single Stage Amplifiers, MOS Device Basics, MOS Device, Models, RC Circuits,

Passive Devices, mixed signal Layout issues, Common Source Amplifiers, Source Follower,

Common Gate, Cascode Structures and Folded Cascode Structures.

UNIT-2

Differential Amplifier& Current Mirrors: Introduction to Differential Pair Amplifier, Quantitative

Analysis to Differential Pair Amplifier, Common Mode Response, Differential Amplifiers with

Different Loads, Effects of Mismatches. Simple Current Mirrors, Cascode

Current Mirrors, Differential Pair with Current Mirror Load.

UNIT-3

Operational Amplifiers& Frequency Response: Op Amps Low Frequency Analysis, Two Stage Op

Amps, Common Mode Feedback. Frequency Response of Common Source Amplifiers, Source

Follower Common Gate, Cascode Structures and Folded Cascode Structures, Differential Amplifiers,

Single Ended Differential Pair.

UNIT-4

• Frequency Compensation & Stability: General considerations, multi-pole systems, Phase Margin,

Frequency Compensation Techniques in Telescopic Op Amps, Folded Cascode Op Amps, Two

Stage Op Amps, other compensation techniques.

UNIT-5

Data Converters: Analog Vs Digital Discrete Time-Signals, Converting Analog Signals to Digital

Signals, Sample and Hold Characteristics, DAC Specifications, ADC Specifications, DAC

28

Architectures, Digital Input Code, Resistor String, R-2R Ladders Networks, Current Steering,

Charge Scaling DACs, Cyclic DAC, Pipeline DAC, problems ADC Architectures. Flash type, 2-Step

Flash, Pipeline ADC, Integrating ADC, Successive Approximation methods, problems.

TEXT BOOK:

1. B Razavi ,‖Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits‖, First Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001

2. R. Jacob Baker, Harry W Li, David E Boyce, ―CMOS Circuit Design, Layout, Simulation‖,

PHI Edn, 2005 .

REFERENCES:

1. Johns and Martin ―Analog Integrated Circuit Design‖, John Wiley Publications, 1997

2. P E Allen and D R Holberg ―CMOS Analog Circuit Design‖, , Second Edition, Oxford

University Press,2002

3. B.Razavi ―MICROELECTRONICS‖, First Edition, McGraw Hill,2001

Course outcomes:

1. Employ the concept of MOS devices in various MOS amplifier applications.

2. Apply the concept of different ial amplifiers to construct telescopic opamp, two stage opamp,

folded cascode structures.

3. Illustrate the concept of current mirrors and apply the concept for design of differential

amplifiers.

4. Use frequency compensation techniques for telescopic opamp, two stage opamp, folded

cascode structures .

5. Apply all the above concepts for the design of opamp used in ADCs & DACs

29

Computer Communication Networks


Prerequisites: Fundamentals of computing and Data Structures Contact Hours:42

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Mamtha Mohan

Course Learning Objectives:

Understand the fundamentals of OSI model and the TCP/IP suite.

Understand the functioning of addresses of the Internet

Understand the concept of linking different types of networks in Data communication.

Design of protocols used in noisy and noiseless channel

Basic Concept about the protocols for the transmission of frames.

Understanding the concepts of Multiple access such as Random access, Controlled access and

Channelization

Discuss the Basic concepts of IEEE standards for wired and wireless LAN, and its architecture,

Connecting devices.

Understand and model logical addressing,Ipv4 and Ipv6

Appreciating the significance of routing algorithms such as distance vector algorithm,

minimum spanning tree, Shortest path algorithm, path vector routing

Understanding the protocols used in transport layer.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Network Models:Introduction, Layered tasks, OSI Model Layers in OSI model: TCP/IP Suite,

Addressing. Telephone Network, Dial up Modem DSL. Cable TV for Data Transmission, RS 232,

FDDI, SONET

UNIT-II

Data Link Control : Framing, Flow and error control, Protocols, Noiseless channels& Noisy

Channels HDLC Protocol, Error detection (CRC)

UNIT III

MULTIPLE ACCESS:Random access: CSMA CSMA/CA, Controlled access Channelization

UNIT-IV

Wired, Wireless LAN and Connecting LANs :Ethernet, IEEE standards, Standard Ethernet, IEEE

802.11 Bluetooth, Connecting LANS Connecting Devices, Back Bone Networks

30

UNIT –V

Network Layer, Transport layer and Application Layer: Logical addressing Ipv4 addresses:

IPV6 Addresses, Transition from Ipv4 to Ipv6

Delivery: Forwarding, Unicast Routing Protocols, Process to process delivery, UDP & TCP format,

and Congestion control concepts.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. B.Forouzan, ―Data Communication Networking‖, 4th Edition, TMH 2006

REFERENCES:

1. James F.Cruz, Keith.W.Ross, ―Computer Networks‖, Pearson education, 2nd Edition, 2003

2. Wayne Tomasi, ―Introduction to Data communication and networking‖, Pearson Education,

2007

Course Outcomes:

1. Discriminate the functionality between the Layers in OSI model and TCP/IP suite.

2. Employ protocols to facilitate the transmission of frames and to decide the efficiency of the

protocols

3. Distinguish the IEEE standards designed to regulate the manufacturing and interconnectivity

between different LANs.

4. Analyze the global addressing schemes in the Internet and configure the addresses for the

subnet.

5. Employ routing algorithms in routing a packet to the final destination and describe transport

layer protocol which is needed for the process to process delivery

31

ANTENNAS AND PROPAGATION


Prerequisites : Electromagnetics Contact hours: 42

Course Coordinator: V Nuthan Prasad

Course Objectives:

Apply the concepts of vector coordinates and wave theory for the analysis of radiation pattern,

field components in electromagnetism.

Understand basic antenna parameters.

Appreciate the importance of antennas for different frequency and various applications.

Illustrate various usage of antenna by designing and sketching the radiation patterns.

Illustrate the signal transmission by designing a suitable antenna using software tools.

Design any antenna which has good directivity and beam width which can be used in practical

application.

Understand different propagation concepts like LOS, Ionosphere and surface wave.

Understand the effect of relative permittivity and conductivity in ionosphere for wave

propagation.

UNIT-1

ANTENNA BASICS: Introduction, basic Antenna parameters, patterns, beam area, radiation

intensity, beam efficiency, directivities and gain, antenna apertures, effective height, bandwidth,

radiation efficiency, antenna temperature and antenna field zones.

UNIT-2

POINT SOURCES AND ARRAYS: Introduction, point sources, power patterns, power theorem,

radiation intensity, field patterns, phase patterns. Array of two isotropic point sources, principles of

pattern multiplication, broad side, end fire array and Hasen & woodyard array.

UNIT-3

ELECTRIC DIPOLES AND THIN LINEAR ANTENNAS: Introduction, short electric dipole,

fields of a short dipole, radiation resistance of short dipole, field patterns of dipole in general, λ/2

dipole, radiation resistances of λ/2 thin linear antenna, long wire antenna, folded dipole antennas.

Small loop, comparison of far fields of small loop and short dipole, far field patterns of small circular

loop, radiation resistance, directivity.

UNIT-4

ANTENNA TYPES : Yagi-Uda array, parabolic reflectors, log periodic dipole antenna, lens

antenna, rectangular horn antennas, Introduction to Smart Antennas.

Microstrip Antennas: salient features, Advantages & limitations, Rectangular microstrip antennas,

Feed methods, Characteristics of microstrip antennas.

32

UNIT-5

RADIO WAVE PROPAGATION: Introduction, free space propagation, ground reflection, surface

wave, diffraction, space wave propagation.

Ionosphere propagation, electrical properties of the ionosphere, expressions for conductivity and

relative permittivity.

TEXT BOOK:

1. John D Kraus, Ronald J Marhetka, Ahmad S Khan, ―Antenna and Wave Propagation‖- Fourth

edition, Tata McGraw Hill 2006

REFERENCES:

1. John D Kraus, ―Antennas‖ Mc Graw Hill, 2nd

edition, 1988.

2. Lamont V Blake, ―Antennas: Fundamentals, Design, Measurement‖, Scitech Publishing, 2009.

3. Constantine A Balanis, ―Antenna, Theory, Analysis & Design‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd

edition. 1997

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze the importance of far field, near field and principle of Friis transmission theory.

2. To classify different field patterns based on short dipole and half wave length dipole antennas.

3. Describe different types of antennas and their applications.

33

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND MANAGEMENT


Prerequisites: Nil Contact hours: 28

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Punya Prabha V.

Course objectives:

Develop a deep working knowledge of managerial fundamentals.

Inculcate advanced ability to communicate and work in multidisciplinary teams.

Acquire skills to conceive, design, implement, and operate systems in an enterprise and societal

context.

Develop reinforce managerial traits, motivation and the spirit of Organization.

Facilitate decision making process for setting up new enterprise.

Facilitate successful and profitable operation of the enterprise.

Develop skills to create an environment of sensitivity to cultural and personal factors for

effective communication.

Know all the government polices available to start up a new business enterprise and

Institutional support.

Understand the meaning, identification, selection of project and also preparation and errors in

project reports.

Course Contents:

UNIT-I

Management and Planning

Management: Introduction, meaning-nature and characteristics of management, scope & functional

areas of management. Management as science, art or profession, Management and administration,

Roles of management, Levels of management. Development of management thought, Early

management approaches, Modern management approaches.

Planning: Nature, Importance and purpose of Planning process, Objectives, Types of plans

(meaning only). Decision making, Importance of planning. Steps in planning and planning premises,

Hierarchy of plans.

UNIT-II

Organizing and Staffing

Organizing and Staffing: Nature and purpose of organization, Principles of organization, Types of

organization, Departmentation, Committees, Centralization Vs Decentralization of authority and

responsibility. Span and control, MBO and MBE (meaning). Nature and importance of staffing.

Process of selection and recruitment(in brief).

UNIT-III

Directing and Controlling

Directing and Controlling: Meaning and nature of directing, Leadership styles, Motivation theories,

Communication meaning and importance. Techniques and importance of coordination. Meaning and

steps in controlling, Essentials of sound control system, Methods of establishing control (in brief).

34

UNIT-IV

Entrepreneur & Small – Scale Industry Entrepreneur: Meaning of entrepreneur, Evolution of the

concept, Functions of an entrepreneur. Evolution of Entrepreneur, Development of Entrepreneurship.

Entrepreneur vs Intrapreneur, Entrepreneurship and Manager. Attributes and Characteristics of a

successful Entrepreneur. Role of Entrepreneur in Indian economy and developing economies with

reference to Self-Employment Development. Entrepreneurship in India, Entrepreneurship – its

Barriers and Entrepreneurial Culture.

Small Scale Industry: Definition, Characteristics, Need and rationale of small-scale industry.

Objectives, Scope, Role of SSI in Economic Development, Advantages of SSI, Steps to start an SSI

– government policy towards SSI, Different policies of SSI., Government support during 5 years

plans, Impact of Liberalization, Privatization Globalization on SSI, Effect of WTO /GATTT

supporting agencies of government for SSI.

UNIT- V

Project Management, Entrepreneurship Development and Government

Project Management: Meaning of project, Project Identification, Project selection. Project report -

Need and significance of report, Contents, Formulation, Technical, Financial, Marketing, Personnel

and Management Feasibility.

Entrepreneurship Development and Government: Estimating and Financing funds requirement -

Schemes offered by various commercial banks and financial institutions like IDBI, ICICI, SIDBI,

KSFCs. Role of Central Government and State Government in promoting Entrepreneurship -

Introduction to various incentives, subsidies and grants. Export Oriented Units - Fiscal and Tax

concessions available. Case studies of Successful Entrepreneurial Ventures, Failed Entrepreneurial

Ventures and Turnaround Ventures.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. P. C. Tripathi, P. N. Reddy, ―Principles of Management, McGraw –Hill, 2008.

2. Vasant Desai, ―Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development & Management‖, Himalaya

Publishing House, 4th

edition 2010.

3. Poornima M Charantimath, ―Entrepreneurship Development – Small Business Enterprises‖,

Pearson Education - 3rd

edition, 2006.

REFERENCES:

1. Robert Lusier, Thomson, ―Management Fundamentals – Concepts, Application, Skill

Development‖, 2006.

2. S. S. Khanka, ―Entrepreneurship Development‖, S Chand & Co, 3rd

edition, 2008.

3. ―Management‖, by Pearson Education, PHI – 17TH

Edition, 2003.

4. Brigitte Berger, ―The Culture of Entrepreneurship‖ 2008.

5. K. Nagarajan, “Project Management‖ 2010.

Course Outcomes:

1. The ability to identify, analyze and solve organizational problems.

2. Apply knowledge and skills required to function in a specific managerial discipline.

3. Ability to recognize and apply knowledge of environmental friendly resources and to utilize

them effectively and efficiently in a workplace environment.

4. Acquired all the necessary skills and knowledge to be a successful entrepreneur.

5. Effectively prepare and present project appraisal and report.

35

Digital Communication and Microwave Laboratory


Prerequisite: Analog Communication & LIC Contact Sessions: 12


Course Objectives

To verify Sampling theorem.

Implement various Digital modulation and demodulation schemes using discrete

components.

To multiplex signals in time-domain.

To verify microwave three port and four port network analysis using scattering

parameters. (Power dividers and directional couplers).

To understand the wave propagation through the rectangular waveguide and to measure

VSWR, impedance and operating frequency.

To determine the gain and directivity and beam width of dipole and yagi antennas using

strip or micro strip line.

To observe the losses in optical fiber communication link.

Course Delivery:

Conduction of experiments, demonstrations and excercises

List of Experiments

1. Verification of Sampling theorem using natural sampling and Flat Top sampling circuits.

2. Time Division Multiplexing of two band limited signals and also to recover the signals and

receiver.

3. Generation of Amplitude Shift Keying signals using IC 4016 and recovery of the ASK signals

using detector circuits.

4. Generation of Frequency Shift Keying signals using MUX CD 4051 and recovery of the FSK

signals using frequency discriminators.

5. Generation of Phase Shift Keying signals using MUX CD 4051 and detection of PSK signals

using phase discriminating circuits.

6. Generation and detection Differential Binary signal and Quadrature PSK using DPSK kits.

7. To verify the power division and calculate insertion loss, isolation of Hybrid network (Magic

tee).

8. Measurement of losses in a given optical fiber ( propagation loss, bending loss) and numerical

aperture.

9. Measurement of frequency, guide wavelength, power, VSWR and attenuation in a microwave

test bench.

10. Measurement of directivity and gain of antennas: Standard dipole (or printed dipole), and

Yagi antenna (printed).

11. Determination of coupling and isolation characteristics of a stripline (or microstrip)

directional coupler

12. (a) Measurement of resonance characteristics of a microstrip ring resonator and

determination of dielectric constant

36

b) Measurement of power division and isolation characteristics of a microstrip 3 dB power

divider.

The course will be delivered through demonstration, conducting experiments, presentations and

exercises.

Course Outcomes

1. To be able to implement a natural sampling and flat-top sampling circuit to find Nyquist rate.

2. To be able to design and implement ASK, PSK, FSK, DPSK digital modulation schemes.

3. To observe waveforms of multiplexed signal and also to demultiplex them at receiver.

4. Employ microwave network analysis in design of multiport microwave networks.

5. To be able to analyze and compare strip, micro strip and rectangular wave guides practically.

37

VLSI LAB

Course Code: EC602L Credit:0:0:1

Prerequisites: Solid State Devices & Technology Contact Sessions: 12


Course Objectives:

The VLSI design concepts studied from 5th

sem &MOS concepts studied in 6th

sem are

employed in various MOS amplifier applications.

Course Experiments:

I: Digital Circuits using Microwind Tool:-

1. Schematic Entry and simulation of the following circuits.

i) Not gate ii) 2 input nand gate and nor gate iii)Ex-or gate iv)full adder v)4-bit parallel

adder

2. Schematic entry and simulation of Sequential circuits.

i)JK Flip Flop using nand gates ii)JK Master slave flip flop iii) 3bit asynchronous up counter

iv) 3 bit SIPO shift register

3. Preparing Layout and checking DRC for combinational circuits/sequential circuits.

i)Inverter ii) Full adder iii)JK Flipflop

II. Analog circuits using Cadence tools

1. Design an Inverter with given specifications*, completing the design flow mentioned below:

a. Draw the schematic and verify the following

i) DC Analysis

ii) Transient Analysis

b. Draw the Layout and verify the DRC, ERC

c. Check for LVS

d. Extract RC and back annotate the same and verify the Design

e. Verify & Optimize for Time, Power and Area to the given constraint***

2. Design the following circuits with given specifications*, completing the design flow mentioned

below:


i) DC Analysis

ii) AC Analysis

iii) Transient Analysis


c. Check for LVS

d. Extract RC and back annotate the same and verify the Design.

i) A Single Stage differential amplifier

ii) Common source and Common Drain amplifier

3. Design the following circuits with given specifications*, completing the design flow mentioned

below:


i) DC Analysis

38

ii) AC Analysis



c. Check for LVS


i) current mirrors

ii) Common gate amplifier

4. Design an op-amp with given specification* using given differential amplifier Common source

and Common Drain amplifier in library** and completing the design flow mentioned below:


i) DC Analysis

ii). AC Analysis



c. Check for LVS


TEXT BOOK:

1. Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits, B Razavi, First Edition, McGraw Hill,2001

2. R. Jacob Baker, Harry W Li, David E Boyce, CMOS Circuit Design, Layout, Simulation, PHI

Edn, 2005 .

REFERENCES:

1. Johns and Martin, ―Analog Integrated Circuit Design‖, John Wiley Publications, 1997

2. P E Allen and D R Holberg, ―CMOS Analog Circuit Design‖, Second Edition, Oxford


3. B.Razavi, ―MICROELECTRONICS‖, First Edition, McGraw Hill,2001

Course Out comes

1. The theory concepts studied are practically simulated using microwind &cadence simulators.

2. The basic building blocks are simulated for required gain & stability.

3. These basic building blocks are used for construction of OP-amp

4. The op-amp & various components can be used for constructing any data converter

applications

39



























40

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES

OOPS WITH C++ AND DATA STRUCTURES

Subject Code : ECPE01 Credits: 3:0:1

Prerequisites : Data Structures using C Contact Hours:42 + 14

Course Objectives:

Understand OOP concepts – classes, objects

Understand the features of inheritance overloading, polymorphism

Understand data structures stacks, queues, lists, heaps, and priority queue

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Introduction: Structure of C++ program: Preprocessor directive, declarations and definitions,

Functions: simple function, passing arguments to functions such as variables, reference arguments

pointer type, function return data type such as constant, variables, data structures, specifying a class,

member function and member data, nested classes, static data members and member functions,

friendly functions

UNIT II

Classes and Objects: Definition, class initialization, class constructors and destructors, constructor

types, multiple constructor in a class, destructors, Inheritance, defining derived classes, different

types of inheritance, Virtual base classes, abstract classes, constructors in derived classes, virtual

functions and dynamic polymorphism, pure virtual functions

UNIT III

Operator Overloading: Overloading various operators, overloading using friends, new and delete

operators, rules, type conversions, exception handling and working with files

UNIT IV

Stacks: ADT, derived classes, formula based representation and linked list based representation,

Applications

Queue: ADT, derived classes, formula based and linked representation, Applications

UNIT V

Skip lists and hashing: linear representation, skip list and hash table representation

Trees: Binary trees, properties and its representation, operations, binary tree traversal, ADT

Priority queues: Linear list, heaps.

41

List of Programs:

1. Simple C++ program, use of cin and cout statements, program using setw

Manipulator.

2. Programs using functions: Passing arguments such as variables, reference

arguments, pointers.

3. Programs using return from functions : reference arguments, structures,

Recursions

4. Simple program using class and objects , nesting of member functions, Arrays

within a class.

5. Programs on static class member, arrays of objects, objects as arguments.

6. Programs on friendly functions, constructors and destructors.

7. Programs on inheritance, virtual base classes

8. Programs on operator overloading using different operators

9. Programs on Stacks using arrays and linked list

10. Programs on Queues using arrays and linked list

11. Construction of singly linked list and perform operations such as

insertion, deletion, searching and displaying.

12. Program to construct binary search tree, to insert a node,delete a node, display

the tree

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Robert Lafore, ‖Introduction to OOPsS with C++, 4th

edition ,Sams Publishing,2001.

2. E.Balaguruswamy,‖ object oriented Programming with C++‖,TMH,4th

edition 2011.R.R.

Gulati, ―Monochrome and Colour TV‖, New Age International (P) Ltd. 2004

3. D.S. Malik, ―Data Structures using C++‖ India edition, CENGAGE Learning, 2003.

REFERENCES:

1. Gray Litwin, ‖Programming with C++ and Data Structures ―, Vikas publications,2003 .

2. Aaron M.Tenenbaum,‖ Data structures using C and C++‖, Pearson Education, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Write programs related to classes ,objects, constructors destructors, overloading

2. Design and analyse functions, member functions

3. Write programs related to stack ADT and queue ADT

4. Write programs for trees and priority queues

42

OPERATING SYSTEMS

Subject Code: ECPE02 Credits:4:0:0

Prerequisites: Computer Architecture Contact hours: 56

Course objectives:

Understanding the goals of OS

To study the different types of OS for different application

Construct and design a process threads

Learn about memory management and scheduling jobs

To study file handling and organization

UNIT I

Introduction: Overview: goals, resource allocations, classes, batch processing. Multiprogramming, time

sharing real time and distributed OS

UNIT II

Structure: Operation, structure of supervisor configuring and installing,OS with monolithic

structure,layered design virtual machineOS, kernel based OS

UNIT III

Processes : Definition, programmers view and OS view,interactingprocesses,threads,processes in

unix, threads in Solaris

UNIT IV

File system: IOCS, directories, I/O organisation, interface between file system and IOCS, allocation

of disk space, implementation of file access, UNIX FS

UNIT V

Memory management: Memory allocation in programs, prelims, contiguous and non-contiguous

allocation to program and for controlled programs

Scheduling: Fundamentals, long term and short term, and medium term scheduling, scheduling in

UNIX.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. D. Dhamdhere, ―Operating Systems‖, McGraw Hill-2008

REFERENCES:

1. A. Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, G. Gagne, ―Operating System Concepts‖, Wiley, 8th

Edition,

2008

2. M. Palmer, M. Walters, ―Guide to Operating Systems‖, 4th

Edition, Course Technology, 2011.

43

Course outcomes:

1. To understand the goals and application of OS

2. To analyze a process and threads in UNIX

3. To analyze memory handling

4. To work with file systems

5. To design and organize scheduling

44

COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND ARCHITECTURE


Prerequisites : Digital Electronics Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:

Describe the progression of computer architecture.

Know about the different software and hardware components of a digital computer.

Apply principles of logic design to digital computer design.

Analyze digital computer and decompose into various lower level modules and lower level

blocks involving both combinational and sequential circuit elements.

Explain the basic concepts of interrupts and how interrupts are used to implement I/O control

and data transfers.

Explain the reasons for using different formats to represent numerical data.

Identify the different architectural and organizational design issues that can affect the

performance of a computer such as Instruction Sets design, Pipelining, RISC architecture, and

Superscalar architecture.

UNIT I

Basic Structures of Computers: Computer types, Functional units: Input unit, Memory unit,

Arithmetic and logic unit, Output unit, Control unit, Basic Operational Concepts, Performance,

Processor clock, Basic performance equation, Pipelining and Superscalar operation, Clock rate,

Performance measurement.

UNIT II

Input/Output Organization: Accessing I/O devices, Interrupts: Interrupt Hardware, Enabling and

Disabling Interrupt, Handling Multiple Devices, Controlling Device Requests, Exceptions, Direct

Memory Access, Bus Arbitration; Buses: Synchronous Bus, Asynchronous Bus, Interface Circuits,

Parallel Port, Serial Port, Standard I/O Interfaces, PCI bus, SCSI bus, USB.

Pipelining: Designing Instruction set for pipelining, pipeline hazards, structural hazards,

UNIT III

The Memory System: Some Basic Concepts, Semiconductor RAM memories, Read only memories,

Speed size and cost, Cache memories, Virtual memories and performance considerations.

UNIT IV

Basic Processing Unit: Register Transfers, Performing an Arithmetic or Logic operation, Fetching

a Word from Memory, Storing a Word in Memory, Execution of a Complete Instruction, Branch

instruction, Multiple Bus Organization, Hardwired Control, A Complete Processor, Micro programmed

Control.

UNIT V

Arithmetic: Addition & Subtraction of Signed Numbers: Addition/Subtraction Logic Unit, Design

of fast adder: Carry-Look-ahead Addition, Multiplication of Positive numbers: Signed-Operand

Multiplication, Booth Algorithm, Fast Multiplication: Bit-pair recoding of Multipliers; Integer

45

division, Floating-point Numbers & Operations, IEEE Standard for Floating-point Numbers,

Arithmetic Operations on Floating-point Numbers, Implementing Floating-point Operations.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat Zaky, ―Computer Organization‖, Fifth Edition,


REFERENCES:

1. William Stallings, ―Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance‖,

Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.

2. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, ―Computer Organization and Design: The

Hardware/Software interface‖, Third Edition, Elsevier, 2005.

3. John P. Hayes, ―Computer Architecture and Organization‖, Third Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,

1998.

4. V.P. Heuring, H.F. Jordan, ―Computer Systems Design and Architecture‖, Second Edition,

Pearson Education, 2003.

Course Outcomes:

1. Learn the basic hardware for processing, storing, and moving information, and how they are

organized within the internal architecture of a computer.

2. List computer hardware components - the CPU, memory, I/O devices.

3. Describe computer architecture and organization, computer arithmetic, and CPU design

4. Describe I/O system and interconnection structures of computer

5. Identify high performance architecture design

6. Use assembly language to program a microprocessor system

7. Develop independent learning skills and be able to learn more about different computer

architectures and hardware.

8. Interpret data expressed in binary, decimal, and hexadecimal.

46

POWER ELECTRONICS

Subject Code: ECPE04 Credits: 3:0:1

Pre requisites: Analog Electronic Circuits Contact Hours :42 +14

Course Objectives:

Understand the meaning and importance of power electronics.

Learn the main switching topologies used in power electronics circuits and how they operate, how

they are controlled, driven and protected.

Understand the principle of operation of a thyristor.

Analyze and understand different configurations of control rectifiers.

Categorize different commutation techniques.

Categorize ac voltage controllers.

Conceptualize dc-dc converters.

Understand the principles of inverters.

Course Outcomes:

UNIT I

Power Devices: Application of power electronics, Power BJT’s, Switching characteristics, Switching units,

Base drive control, Power MOSFETs, Switching characteristics, Gate drives, IGBTs, Isolation of gate and

base drive, Construction of thyristor, Principle of operation, Different states/Modes of operation, Static

anode VI characteristics, Two transistor model, Triggering/Turn-on mechanism, Dynamic (Turn-on and

Turn-off), Characteristics, Gate characteristics, Gate triggering, di/dt and dv/dt protection, Thyristor firing

circuits.

UNIT II

Control Rectifier: Introduction, Principle of phase controlled converter operation, Single phase half

controlled converter, Single phase fully controlled converter, Dual converter, Three phase half controlled

converter, Three phase fully controlled converter.

UNIT III

Commutation Techniques: Introduction to commutation, Different types of commutations, Natural

commutation and forced commutation, Self-commutation, Complementary commutation, Auxiliary

thyristor commutation.

UNIT IV

AC Voltage Controllers and Choppers: Introduction to choppers, Principles of step down and step up

choppers, Step down chopper with RL load, Classification of chopper, Analysis of impulse commutated

thyristor chopper, Introduction to AC voltage controllers, Principle of ON-OFF control, Principle of phase

control, Single-phase AC controllers with R load and RL load.

47

UNIT V

Inverters: Introduction, Principle of operation, Performance parameters, Single-phase bridge inverter,

Voltage control of single-phase inverters, Current source inverters.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. M. H. Rashid, ―Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications‖, 3rd

Edition, Prentice

Hall, 2003.

2. G. K. Dubey, S. R. Doradla, A. Joshi, R. M. K. Sinha, ―Thyristorized Power Controllers‖, New

Age International Pvt. Ltd, 6th

Edition, 1986.

REFERENCES:

1. P. S. Bhimbra, ―Power Electronics‖, Khanna Publication, 1995.

2. SCR GE Manual, 6th


Course Outcomes:

1. Describe the role of Power Electronics as an enabling technology in various applications such

as flexible production systems, energy conservation, renewable energy, transportation.

2. Explain the operation of power semiconductors and their associated drive and protection

circuits.

3. Understand and analyze the operation of single and three-phase rectifiers with source

inductance and real loads output

4. Analyze various commutation techniques and be able to design various commutation circuits.

5. Design ac voltage controllers for different configurations.

6. Learn the basic concepts of operation of dc-dc converters in steady state in continuous and

discontinuous modes

7. Understand and analyze the operation of switch-mode dc-ac single and three-phase inverters

48

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS


Prerequisites: Digital Electronics Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:

Discuss the various terms, different types of errors and standards of measurements used in the

electronic instrumentation systems.

Explain the principle of operation and applications of different types of digital measuring

instruments such as Voltmeters, Multimeters, Frequency meters, Phasemeters, Tachometers,

PHmeters etc.

Describe the principle of working, features and usage of different types of important electronic

instruments such as LCR meters, special oscilloscopes, digital signal generators, spectrum

analyzer, logic analyzer, recorders etc. in various electronic applications.

Discuss the working and use of data acquisition systems, data loggers, digital transducers,

telemetry systems, digital process controllers and microprocessor based distributed controls

systems in various electronic and industrial applications.

UNIT I

Measurement and Error: Definitions, Accuracy and precision, Significant figures, Types of errors,

Limiting errors, Classification of standards of measurement, Time and frequency standards.

Digital Voltmeters and Multimeters: Advantages of digital meters, General characteristics

(specifications) of a DVM, Ramp type DVM, Integrating type DVM (Voltage to frequency

conversion), Dual slope integrating type DVM (Voltage to time conversion), Successive

approximation type DVM, Parallel or flash type DVM, Microprocessor based ramp type DVM,

Digital meter displays – LED and LCD displays, Range changing methods for DVM, Digital

multimeter.

UNIT II

Digital Frequency meters and Phase meters: Introduction, Frequency measurement, High

frequency measurement (extending the frequency range), Time (period) measurement, Time interval

measurement, Frequency ratio measurement, Totalizing mode of measurement, Universal counter,

Automatic and computing counters, Reciprocal electronic counters, Sources of measurement errors,

Specifications of electronic counters – Input characteristics and operating mode specifications,

Digital phase meter.

UNIT III

Digital Instruments: Digital tachometer, Digital PH meter, Digital measurement of mains (supply)

frequency, Digital L, C and R measurements – Digital RCL meter, Digital capacitance meter.

Special Oscilloscopes: Sampling oscilloscope, Digital read out oscilloscope, Digital storage

oscilloscopes, DSO applications.

49

UNIT IV

Digital Signal Generators: Arbitrary waveform generators (AWG), Arbitrary function generator,

Data generator, Key characteristics of digital signal generators.

Digital Spectrum Analyzer: Principle of working and its applications.

Logic Analyzer: Types of logic analyzer - Logic time analyzer, Logic state analyzer, interfacing a

target system.

Recorders: Digital data recording, Objectives and requirements of recording data, Recorder

selection and specifications, Digital memory waveform recorder (DWR).

UNIT V

Transducers: Electrical transducers, advantages, classification of transducers, characteristics and

choice (selection) of transducers. Digital Transducers - Optical encoders, Shaft (spatial) encoders.

Digital Data Acquisition System: Objectives of DAS, Elements of data acquisition system.

Data loggers – Basic operation of data loggers.

Telemetry systems: Landline and radio frequency (RF) telemetry systems.

Digital Controllers: Direct digital and computer supervisory control, Digital process controllers,

Microprocessor based distributed control systems.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Albert D. Helfrick, William D. Cooper, ―Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement

Techniques‖, PHI, 2012.

2. David A. Bell, ―Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements‖, 2nd

Edition, PHI, 2009.

3. M. M. S. Anand, ―Electronic Instruments and Instrumentation Technology‖, PHI, Eighth

printing, 2010.

4. H. S. Kalsi, ―Electronic Instrumentation‖, TMH, 3rd

Edition, Seventh reprint, 2012.

REFERENCES:

1. A. J. Bouwens, ―Digital Instrumentation‖, PHI, 2007.

2. A. K. Sawhney, ―Electrical and electronic Measurements and Instrumentation‖, Dhanpat Rai &

Co, 19th

Revised Edition 2011.

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ the concept of different types of errors in the study of performance of various


2. Apply the concepts of basic principle of working of different electronic instruments in

designing and constructing the various new types of instruments for different applications.

3. Illustrate the various important applications such as design and testing of different circuits and

systems, finding the components values, observing the timing relationships, frequency

spectrum, recording the data and wave forms etc. using important electronic instruments, such

as digital LCR meter, special oscilloscopes, spectrum analyzer, logic analyzer, recorders etc.

4. Demonstrate the use of data acquisition systems, data loggers, digital transducers, telemetry

systems, digital process controllers etc. in the various industrial and electronic applications.

50

ADVANCED SIGNAL PROCESSING


Prerequisites : Digital Signal Processing Contact Hours:56

Course Objectives:

Understand discrete random variables and random processes

Analyze response of LTI systems to stationary input signal

Estimate non parametric power spectral density of deterministic and stationary random signals

Design optimum and adaptive filters.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Introduction: Discrete time signals, Transform domain representation of deterministic signals,

Discrete time systems, Minimum phase and system invertibility

UNIT II

Random variables, vectors and sequences: Random variables, random vectors, discrete time

stochastic processes, linear systems with stationary random inputs, innovations representation of

random vectors.

UNIT III

Non parametric power spectrum estimation: Spectral analysis of deterministic signals, estimation

of the autocorrelation stationary random signals, estimation of the power spectrum of stationary

random signals.

UNIT IV

Optimum linear filters: Optimum signal estimation, linear mean square error estimation, optimum

FIR filters, linear prediction, optimum IIR filters.

UNIT V

Least square filtering and adaptive filters: Least squares error estimation, least square FIR filters

typical applications of adaptive filters method of steepest descent, LMS adaptive filters, RLS

adaptive filters.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. D G Manolakis, V K Ingle and S M Kogon, ―Statistical and Adaptive Signal Processing‖,

MGH, 2000.

2. M H Hayes, ―Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling‖, John Wiley, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe behavior of LTI systems to stationary signals

2. Estimate autocorrelation and psd of stationary signals

3. Understand and design optimum and adaptive filters

51

IMAGE PROCESSING

Subject code: ECPE07 Credits: 3:0:1 Prerequisites: Digital Signal Processing

Contact Hours: 42 + 14

Course objectives:

Review the basics of Digital Image Processing.

Study different spatial and frequency domain image enhancement algorithms.

Appraise 2-D filtering and image restoration techniques.

Study on Line and Edge detection

Study Thresholding and Different Segmentation Techniques.

Course Contents:

UNIT-I Introduction and Fundamentals: What is Digital Image Processing? Origins, Examples, Fundamental Steps, Components, Elements of visual perception, Image Sensing and acquisition, Image sampling and quantization, Basic relationship between pixels, Mathematical tools used in image processing.

UNIT-II Intensity Transformations and Spatial Filtering : Basic intensity transformation functions. Histogram processing, Spatial filtering, smoothing spatial filters, Sharpening spatial filters.

UNIT III

Image Transforms: Two dimensional Orthogonal and unitary Transforms, Properties of Unitary

Transforms, 1D-DFT,2D-DFT, DCT, Basics of filtering in the frequency domain , Image Smoothing and

Image Sharpening using Frequency domain filters.

UNIT-IV Image Restoration: Model of image degradation/restoration process, noise models. Spatial filtering.

Periodic noise reduction, Linear position Invariant degradation, Estimating the degradation function,

Inverse filtering, MMSE filtering, Constrained least squares filtering, Geometric mean filter.

UNIT-V

Image Segmentation: Fundamentals, Edge detection, Edge linking via Hough Transform, Thresholding,

Region Based Segmentation, Segmentation using Morphological Watersheds.

List of Programs using Matlab:

Basic concepts of displaying images.

Conversion between images classes and types.

Spatial frequency in an image

Intensity Transformation functions

Spatial Filtering

Filtering in Frequency domain.

Image Restoration using filters.

52

Line and Edge detection using filter masks

Line detection using Hough Transform

Thresholding and Segmentation using Watershed Transform

TEXT BOOKS:

1. R C. Gonzalez, R.E. Woods, ―Digital Image Processing‖, 3 rd

edition, Pearson Education 2009.

2. R C. Gonzalez, R.E. Woods,S.L.Eddins, ―Digital Image Processing using MATLAB‖, 2nd

REFERENCES:

1. Anil.K.Jain, ― Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing‖, Pearson 2002

Course outcomes:

1. Analyze general terminology of digital image processing.

2. Examine various types of images , intensity transformations and spatial filtering

3. Develop Fourier Transform for image processing in frequency domain.

4. Evaluate the methodologies for image restoration and segmentation.

5. Apply image processing algorithms in practical applications.

53

COMMUNICATION SWITCHING SYSTEMS


Prerequisites: Analog Communication Contact Hours:56

Course Objectives:

Discuss the evolution, network topologies, regulations and standards of telecommunication

systems.

Explain the switching techniques, principle of working, features and applications of different

types of switching systems such as, crossbar systems, electronic systems, SPC systems and

digital switching systems.

Define the various terms used in the telecommunications traffic and analyze the loss probability

and delay probability of lost call systems and delay systems.

Discuss the different types of networks such as, ISDN, Cellular radio networks, intelligence

networks etc. in telecommunication systems.

Design the different types of space division switching networks and describe the principle of

working of different time division switching networks and also calculate the loss probability

(grade of service) of these networks.

Explain the software architecture and classification of software used in digital switching

systems and also discusses the maintenance of digital switching systems.

UNIT I

Evolution of Switching Systems: Evolution of telecommunications, Network structure, Network

services, Terminology, Regulation, Standards, the ISO reference model for open systems

interconnection, Message switching, Circuit switching, Basics of switching systems, Functions of

switching systems, Cross bar switching systems, Electronic switching.

Digital Switching Systems: Basic central office linkages, Evolution of digital switching systems,

Stored program control switching systems, Digital switching system fundamentals, Building blocks

of a digital switching system, Basic call processing.

UNIT II

Telecommunications Traffic: Introduction, unit of traffic, Congestion, Traffic measurements,

Mathematical model, Lost call systems, Theory, Traffic performance, Loss systems in tandem,

Queuing systems, Second Erlang distribution, Probability of delay, Finite queue capacity, System

with a single server, Queues in tandem, Delay tables, Application of delay formulae.

Networks: Introduction, ISDN, Intelligent networks, private networks and Cellular radio networks.

UNIT III

Switching Networks: Introduction, single-stage network, Gradings, Principle, Design of progressive

grading, Other forms of grading, Traffic capacity of grading, Application of grading, Link systems,

General, Two-stages networks, Three-stage networks, Four-stage networks, Discussion, Grades of

service of link systems, Applications of graph theory to link systems, Use of expansion, Call

packing, Re-arrangeable networks, Strict sense three stage non blocking networks.

54

UNIT IV

Time Division Switching: Introduction, Basic time division space switching, Basic time division

time switching, Time multiplexed space switching, Time multiplexed time switching, Combination

switching, Three stage combination switching, Grades of service of time division switching

networks, Synchronization, Frame alignment, Synchronization network.

UNIT V

Switching System Software: Basic software architecture, Operating systems, Database

management, Concept of generic programs, Software architecture for level-1, level-2 and level-3

control, Digital switching system software classification, Call models, Connect sequence, Disconnect

sequence, Software linkages during a call, Call features, Feature flow diagrams, Feature interaction.

Maintenance of Digital Switching Systems: Introduction, software maintenance, interfaces of a

typical digital switching systems central office, system outage and its impact on digital switching

system reliability, impact of software patches on digital switching system maintainability, growth of

digital switching systems central offices, A methodology for reporting and correction of field

problems, diagnostic capabilities for proper maintenance of digital switching systems, effect of firm

ware deployment on digital switching systems.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. J. E. Flood, ―Telecommunication Switching Traffic and Networks‖, Pearson Education, Fourth

impression, 2008.

2. Thiagarajan Viswanathan, ―Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks‖, PHI,

Thirty Fifth printing, August 2011.

3. Syed R. Ali, ―Digital Switching Systems‖, TMH, 2010.

REFERENCES:

1. John C. Bellamy, ―Digital Telephony‖, John Wiley, 3rd

Edition, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ the concepts of different types of switching techniques in voice and data

communication and apply the concept to different types of switching systems..

2. Use the concepts of basic principle of working of different types of networks for choosing

networks to provide required services to the customers at a satisfactory level.

3. Estimate the optimum number of switching elements (cross points) from the knowledge of the

design of different switching networks.

4. Select the suitable switching network which can carry optimum traffic with less loss probability

and blocking probability from the knowledge of the theory of working of different switching

networks.

5. Use the basic information of maintenance of digital switching systems to assess the

maintainability of a switching system (Central Office).

55

DISCRETE TIME CONTROL SYSTEMS


Prerequisites : Control Systems Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:

Apply knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering in control systems

Discuss the basic principle of zero order and first order hold.

Understand discrete time models for sampled data systems.

Analyze digital control systems.

Obtain basic knowledge of digital process control design.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Z plane analysis of discrete control systems: Impulse sampling and data hold, obtaining the Z-

Transform by the convolution integral method; Evaluation of the convolution integral in the left half

plane, right half plane, obtaining ZT of function involving the term 1−𝑒−𝑇𝑠

𝑠 pulse transfer function;

convolution, starred Laplace Transform of the signal involving both ordinary and starred Linear

time systems, General procedure for obtaining pulse transfer functions, pulse transfer function of

cascaded elements, pulse transfer function of closed loop system, pulse transfer controller of a digital

PID Controller.

UNIT II

Design of DTC Systems by Conventional Methods: Mapping between the S-plane and the z-plane,

Mapping of the LH of the S-plane into Z-plane; Stability analysis of closed loop system in the Z-

plane; Jury stability test, bilinear transformation and Routh’s Stability, transient and steady state

response analysis.

UNIT III

Design of Discrete Time Control System: Design based on the Root Locus method; Design based

on the frequency method.

UNIT IV

State Space Analysis: State space representation of discrete time systems; Controllable Canonical

forms, Observable Canonical forms, Diagonal Canonical forms, Jordan Canonical forms, Solving

Discrete Time State Space equations, Lapnov’s Stability test.

UNIT V

Pole placement and observer design: Controllability, Observability, Design via Pole Placement.

56

TEXT BOOK:

1. Katsuhiko Ogata, ―Discrete Time Control System‖, PHI, Second Edition, 2008

REFERENCES:

1. C. L. Phillips, H. Troy Nagle, ―Digital Control System Analysis and Design‖, PHI,

2. M. Gopal, ―Digital Control and State Variable Methods‖, Third edition, Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi, 2009.

3. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop, ―Modern Control Systems‖, Pearson Education, Eighth

Edition, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze, formulate and solve discrete control engineering problems.

2. Able to design a system, component or process to meet desired needs.

3. Apply the techniques, skills and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice.

57

LINEAR ALGEBRA


Prerequisites : Engineering Mathematics Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:

Use mathematically correct language and notation for Linear Algebra.

Become computational proficient involving procedures in Linear Algebra.

Understand the axiomatic structure of a modern mathematical subject and learn to construct

simple proofs.

Solve problems that apply Linear Algebra to Chemistry, Economics and Engineering.

UNIT I

Linear Equations in Linear Algebra: Systems of Linear Equations, Row reduction and Echelon

Forms, Vector Equations, Matrix Equation Ax=b, Solution Sets of Linear Systems, Linear

Independence, Introduction to Linear Transformations, Matrix of a Linear Transformation, Linear

Models in Engineering.

UNIT II

Vector Spaces: Vector Spaces and Subspaces, Null Spaces, Column Spaces and Linear

Transformations, Linearly Independent sets, Bases, Co-ordinate Systems, Dimensions of a Vector

Space, Rank, Applications to Difference Equations

UNIT III

Eigen Values and Eigen Vectors, Characteristic equation, Diagonalization, eigen vectors and

Linear Transformations.

UNIT IV

Orthogonality and Least Squares: Inner Product, Length and Orthogonality, Orthogonal Sets,

Orthogonal Projections, Gram – Schmidt Process, Least Squares Problems

UNIT V

Symmetric Matrices and Quadratic Forms: Diagonalization of Symmetric Matrices, Quadratic

Forms, Constrained Optimization, Singular Value Decomposition.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. David C Lay, ―Linear Algebra and its Applications‖, 3rd

Edition, Pearson, 2005.

2. Gilbert Strang, ―Linear Algebra and its Applications‖, 3rd

Edition, Thomson Learning Asia,

2003.

58

Course Outcomes:

1. Solve systems of linear equations using multiple methods, including Gaussian elimination and

matrix inversion.

2. Carry out matrix operations, including inverses and determinants.

3. Demonstrate understanding of the concepts of vector space and subspace.

4. Demonstrate understanding of linear independence, span, and basis.

5. Determine eigen values and eigenvectors and solve eigen value problems.

6. Apply principles of matrix algebra to linear transformations.

7. Demonstrate understanding of inner products and associated norms.

59

MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS


Prerequisites : Solid State Circuits and Devices Contact Hours:56

Course Objectives:

Get an overview of microsytems.

Learn about typical applications of microsystems.

Understand scaling laws.

Understand the principles of microsensors and microactuators.

Understand the various principles of operations of mems transducers.

Learn basic electrostatics and its applications in MEMS sensors and actuators.

Understand about RF MEMS and its applications.

Familiarize oneself with atleast one MEMS CAD tool.

Learn about ways to fabricate MEMS device

Understand the packaging needs for MEMS devices.

Course Contents:

UNIT 1

Introduction to MEMS: Historical background of Micro Electro Mechanical Systems, Feynman’s

vision, Nano technology and its applications, multi-disciplinary aspects, basic technologies,

application areas, scaling laws in miniaturization, scaling in geometry, electrostatics,

electromagnetics, electricity and heat transfer

UNIT II

Micro and Smart Devices and Systems – Principles: Transduction principles in MEMS Sensors:

Micro sensors-thermal radiation, mechanical and bio-sensors, Actuators: different actuation

mechanisms - silicon capacitive accelerometer, piezo-resistive pressure sensor, blood analyzer,

conductometric gas sensor, silicon micro-mirror arrays, piezo-electric based inkjet print head,

electrostatic comb-driver, Smart phone applications, Smart buildings

UNIT III

Materials and Micromanufacturing: Semiconducting materials, Silicon, Silicon dioxide, Silicon

Nitride, Quartz, Poly silicon, Polymers, Materials for wafer processing, Packaging materials

Silicon wafer processing, lithography, thin-film deposition, etching (wet and dry), wafer-bonding,

Silicon micromachining: surface, bulk, LIGA process, Wafer bonding process.

UNIT IV

Electrical and Electronics Aspects: Electrostatics, Coupled electro mechanics, stability and Pull-in

phenomenon, Practical signal conditioning circuits for microsystems, Characterization of pressure

sensors, RF MEMS. Switches, varactors, tuned filters, Micromirror array for control and switching in

optical communication, Application circuits based on microcontrollers for pressure sensor,

Accelerometer, Modeling using CAD Tools (Intellisuite)

60

UNIT V

Integration and Packaging of Microelectromechanical Systems: Integration of microelectronics

and micro devices at wafer and chip levels, Microelectronic packaging: wire and ball bonding, flip-

chip, Microsystem packaging examples, Testing of Micro sensors, Qualification of MEMS devices

TEXT BOOKS:

1. G. K. Ananthasuresh, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalakrishnan, K. N. Bhat, V. K. Aatre, ―Micro and

Smart Systems‖, Wiley India, First edition, 2010

2. T R Hsu, ―MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacturing‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd

Edition, 2008

3. Chang Liu, ―Foundations of MEMS‖, Pearson International Edition, 2006

4. S D Senturia, ―Microsystem Design‖, Springer International Edition, 2001

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand Micro Systems and their applications.

2. Analyze scaling laws and operation of various practical MEMS systems.

3. Analyze the electrical and electronics aspects of MEMS system.

4. Describe the various RF MEMS applications.

5. Describe various fabrication techniques and packaging methods for MEMS devices.

61

NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY SYSTEMS


Prerequisites : Nil Contact Hours: 42 +14

Course Objectives:

Understand neural networks and fuzzy logic fundamentals and theory.

Express the functional components of neural network classifiers and fuzzy logic classifiers.

Develop and implement a basic trainable neural network.

Develop and implement fuzzy logic system.

UNIT I

Fundamentals of Neural Networks: Biological neurons and their artificial models, Neural Network

Architecture: Single Layer, Multi layer Feed Forward Networks, Recurrent Networks, Learning

methods.

UNIT II

Back Propagation Networks: Architecture of a back propagation network, Back propagation

learning, Training of Neural network, Method of steepest descent, effect of learning rate, Back

propagation algorithm.

UNIT III

Fuzzy Set Theory: Fuzzy vs crisp sets, crisp sets, Operations on crisp sets, properties of crisp sets,

partition and covering. Membership function, Basic fuzzy set operations, properties of Fuzzy sets,

Crisp relations and Fuzzy relations.

UNIT IV

Fuzzy systems: Crisp logic: Laws of propositional logic, inference in propositional logic. Predicate

logic: Interpretations of predicate logic formula, inference in predicate logic. Fuzzy logic: Fuzzy

Quantifiers, Fuzzy inference. Fuzzy rule based system, defuzzification. Applications: Greg Viot’s

Fuzzy cruise controller, Air conditioner controller.

UNIT V

Applications: MATLAB Implementation: Pattern classification using Hebb net and McCulloch –

Pitts net, Pattern recognition using Perceptron Networks, Implementation of all fuzzy operations on

both discrete and continuous fuzzy sets, Defuzzification, Fuzzy inference system.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. S. Rajasekaran, G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, ―Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic

algorithms‖, PHI, 2003.

62

2. S. N. Sivanandam, S. Sumathi, S N Deepa , ―Introduction to Neural Networks using Matlab

6.0‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

3. Timothy Ross, ―Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications‖, John Wiley and Sons, 2004.

REFERENCES:

1. Jacek M. Zurada , ―Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems‖, Jaico Publishing House.

2. Simon Haykin, ―Neural Networks- A Comprehensive Foundation‖, Pearson Education, 2001.

3. B. Kosko, ―Neural Networks and Fuzzy systems, Prentice Hall, 1991.

Course Outcomes:

1. Generate logic functions like AND, OR, XOR using learning rules.

2. Apply Hebb rule and perceptron learning rule for pattern classification problem.

3. Understand character recognition and data compression using back propagation network.

4. Apply the rules of fuzzy logic for fuzzy controller.

5. Apply fuzzy set operations and defuzzification for control system applications.

63

CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY


Prerequisites : Nil Contact Hours:56

Course Objectives:

Explain the objectives of information security, and application of each of confidentiality and

integrity.

Analyze the tradeoffs inherent in security

Understand the basic categories of threats to computers and networks

Describe efficient basic number theoretic algorithms, including greatest common divisor,

multiplicative inverse mod n, and raising to powers mod n.

Understand the principles of symmetric and asymmetric cryptography

Discuss the fundamental ideas of public key cryptography.

Analyze the importance of elliptical curve encryption and decryption

Understand steganography and its applications

UNIT I

Introduction: Overview of modern cyptography, Number theory principles, Euclid’s algorithm,

Extended Euclid’s algorithm, Chinese Remainder Theorem, Discrete logarithm, classical encryption

techniques.

UNIT II

Block Cipher and DES: S-Box Design Principles, Block cipher modes of operation, Attacks and

applications on DES, Stream Ciphers, Pseudorandom functions

UNIT III

Asymmetric key cryptography: RSA, Mathematical foundations of RSA, Attacks on RSA. The

Discrete Logarithm Problem (DLP), Diffie Hellman Key Exchange algorithm, El Gamal encryption.

UNIT IV

Digital signatures: Signature schemes, Theory of Elliptic Curves, Elliptic Curve Encryption and

Decryption

UNIT V

Steganography: Types and its applications, Intruders, viruses and firewalls.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. W. Stallings, "Cryptography and Network Security", 4th

Edition, Pearson Education.

2. B. A. Forouzan, "Cryptography & Network Security", Tata Mc Graw Hill.

64

3. Neal Koblitz, ―A Course in Number Theory and Cryptography‖, Springer Verlag, New York

Inc. May 2001.

4. Hoffstein, Pipher, Silvermman, "An Introduction to Mathematical Cryptography", Springer,

2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze and design classical encryption techniques and their applications for computer

networks.

2. Analyze and design block ciphers and their applications for computer networks.

3. Understand and analyze data encryption standard.

4. Understand and analyze advanced encryption standard.

5. Design confidentiality schemes using symmetric encryption.

6. Understand and analyze public-key cryptography and RSA.

7. Design key management scheme, digital signatures and authentication protocols.

8. Design steganographic schemes for various applications.

65

GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEMS


Prerequisites : Digital Communication Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:

Understand the basics of Global Positioning System.

Appreciate the functioning of different segments in GPS system.

Recognize the coordination of GPS time with earth rotation.

Understand the concepts of positioning of satellites in earth’s orbit.

Recognize the significance of GPS navigation systems.

Understand the concepts of wave propagation in the ionosphere.

Illustrate the effects of ionosphere on GPS observations.

Study of interdisciplinary applications of GPS system.

UNIT I

History of GPS: BC4 System, HIRAN, NNSS, NAVSTAR GLONASS and GNSS Systems, GPS

Constellation, Space Segment, Control Segment, User Segment, Single and Dual Frequency, Point,

Relative, Differential GPS, Static and Kinematic Positioning, 2D and 3D, reporting Anti Spoofing

(AS); Selective Availability (SA), DOP Factors.

UNIT II

Coordinate Systems: Geocentric Coordinate System, Conventional Terrestrial Reference System,

Orbit Description, Keplerian Orbit, Kepler Elements, Satellite Visibility, Topocentric Motion,

Disturbed Satellite Motion, Perturbed Motion, Disturbing Accelerations, Perturbed Orbit, Time

Systems, Astronomical Time System, Atomic Time, GPS Time, Need for Coordination, Link to

Earth Rotation, Time and Earth Motion Services.

UNIT III

Different Codes: C/A code; P-code; Y-code; L1, L2 Carrier frequencies, Code Pseudo Ranges,

Carrier Phases, Pseudo Ranges, Satellite Signal Signature, Navigation Messages and Formats,

Undifferenced and Differenced Range Models, Delta Ranges, Signal Processing and Processing

Techniques, Tracking Networks, Ephemerides, Data Combination: Narrow Lane; Wide Lane, OTF

Ambiguity.

UNIT IV

Propagation Media: Multipath, Antenna Phase Centre, Atmosphere, Elements of Wave

Propagation, Ionospheric effects on GPS Observations, Code Delay, Phase Advances, Integer Bias,

Clock Error, Cycle Slip, Noise Bias, Blunders, Tropospheric Effects on GPS oberservable, Multipath

effect, Antenna Phase Centre Problems and Correction.

66

UNIT V

Interdisciplinary Applications: Crystal Dynamics, Gravity Field Mapping, Atmospheric

Occulation, Surveying, Geophysics, Air borne GPS, Ground Transportation, Space borne GPS,

Metrological and Climate Research using GPS.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. B. Hoffman Wellenhof, H. Lichtenegger and J. Collins, "GPS: Theory and Practice", 4th

revised edition, Springer, New York,1997

2. A. Leick, "GPS Satellites Surveying", 2nd edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1995

3. B. Parkinson, J. Spilker, Jr.(Eds), "GPS: Theory and Applications", Vol. I and Vol. II, AIAA,

1996

4. A. Kleusberg and P. Teunisen(Eds), ―GPS for Geodesy‖, Springer-Verlag, Berlin,1996

5. L. Adams, "The GPS - A Shared National Asset‖, Chair, National Academy Press, 1995

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ the concepts in the implementation and function of different segments of GPS system.

2. Describe the need for synchronizing GPS time with earth rotation.

3. Employ the basic concepts to position the satellites in earth’s orbit and the importance of GPS

navigation in location identification.

4. Describe the wave propagation mechanism in the ionosphere region.

5. Analyze the ionospheric effects and interdisciplinary applications on GPS system.

67

LOW POWER VLSI DESIGN


Prerequisites : VLSI Design and Circuits Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:

Explain the basic design concepts for low power VLSI circuits in CMOS technology.

Apply the knowledge in low-power VLSI circuit analysis and simulation.

Identify the critical parameters that affect the VLSI circuits’ performance.

Design low-power VLSI circuits by using CMOS processes.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Power Dissipation in CMOS: Introduction: Need for low power VLSI chips, sources of power

consumption, introduction to CMOS inverter power dissipation, low power VLSI design limits, basic

principle of low power design.

UNIT II

Power Optimization: Logical Level Power Optimization: gate reorganization, local restructuring,

signal gating, logic encoding, state machine encoding, pre-computation logic

Circuit Level Power Optimization: Transistor and gate sizing, equivalent pin ordering, network

restructuring and re-organization, special latches and flip-flops.

UNIT III

Design of Low Power CMOS Circuits: Reducing power consumption in memories, low power

techniques for SRAM, circuit techniques for reducing power consumption in adders and multipliers,

Special techniques: power reduction and clock networks, CMOS floating gate, low power bus, delay

balancing.

UNIT IV

Power Estimation: Simulation power analysis: SPICE circuit simulation, Gate level Simulation,

Architectural level analysis, Data correlation analysis in DSP systems, Monte-Carlo simulation.

Probabilistic Power analysis: random signals, probabilistic techniques for signal activity

estimation, propagation of static probability in logic circuits, gate level power analysis using

transition density.

UNIT V

Synthesis and Software Design for Low Power: Synthesis for low power: behavioral level

transforms, algorithm level transforms for low power, architecture driven voltage scaling, power

optimization using operation reduction, operation substitution.

68

Software Design for Low Power: sources of software power dissipation, gate level, architecture

level, bus switching activity. Case study: Multi-core processor architecture such as ARM, AMD.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Gary Yeap, ―Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design‖, Kluwer, 1998.

2. K. Roy and S.C. Prasad, ―Low Power CMOS VLSI Circuit Design‖, Wiley, 2000.

REFERENCES:

1. Dimitrios Soudris, Chirstian Pignet, Costas Goutis, ―Designing CMOS Circuits for Low

Power‖, Kluwer, 2002

2. Jan M. Rabaey and Massoud Pedram, ― Low Power Design Methodologies‖, KAP, 1996. P.

Chandrakasan and R.W. Broadersen, Low Power Digital CMOS Design‖, Kluwer, 1995.

3. Abdellatif Bellaouar, Mohamed.I. Elmasry, ―Low Power Digital VLSI Designs‖, Kluwer,

1995.

Course Outcomes:

1. Investigate low power design techniques.

2. Classify the mechanisms of power dissipation in CMOS integrated circuits;

3. Model power dissipation and use optimization methods on various levels;

4. Apply in practice technology-level, circuit-level, and system-level power optimization

techniques.

5. Analyze and to design low-power VLSI circuits using different circuit technologies and

design levels.

69

DESIGN OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS


Prerequisites: Electronic Circuits Contact Hours:56

Course Objectives:

Give overview of design aspect of an electronic system meeting customer requirement.

Select transmission lines optimizing various parameters.

Understand importance of packaging technology and MCM.

PCB laminates and fabrication process and method of PCB selection for systems.

Design consideration for selecting frequency, transmitter, power and receiver for a radar

system.

UNIT I

Overview of design of electronic systems: Introduction to electronic systems, Distinguishing

feature and difference between electronic system and circuit, Role of Electronic System Design and

Manufacturing Hub and global opportunities for electronic engineers, Development stages and

evolution of electronic systems: current and future trends, Significance of time of completion,

development of intellectual asset and engineer’s role, Achieving cost effective solution through

electronic systems, Impact of global competition and innovation on system design.

UNIT II

Phases Involved in System Engineering Process: Challenges of system design, Need analysis,

technique of translating user need to a well defined requirement, Globalization and its impact on

electronic system design, Cost benefits of system design, Broad classification of systems as

consumer, professional, defense: salient differences through practical examples, various standards

and their importance: ISO, ISI, JSS, Case studies

UNIT III

Packaging & Product Development: Introduction and overview of microelectronics packaging &

its influence on system performance & cost, Packaging hierarchy, Driving force on packaging

technology, PCB Technologies: Selection process of laminates in electronics in different

applications, Overview of PCB laminates structure and overview of important laminates.

UNIT IV

Case Studies on Radar System Design: Introduction to working principles of Radar, Radar

equation, importance of probabilities of detection & False alarm, Radar cross section of targets and

its role on system parameters, working principle of phased array and active aperture radar, overview

of system consideration during the design of radar.

70

UNIT V

Case Studies on Consumer Systems: Based on mobile telephone: Automated parking with security

arrangements, Based on rural requirements: Food and health management.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Merrill. I. Skolnik, ―Introduction to Radar Systems‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd

Edition, 2001.

2. Rao R Tum Mala, ―Fundamentals of Microsystems Packaging‖, McGraw Hill, NY 2001.

3. William D Brown, ―Advanced Electronic Packaging‖, IEEE Press, 1999.

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand the distinguishing features and difference between electronic system and circuits

2. Understand impact of global competition and innovation in system design

3. Understand the process of translating user requirement to implementable steps and Classify

systems as consumer, professional, defense.

4. Understand influence of microelectronics packaging on system performance and understand

PCB laminates structure and properties.

5. Derive Radar equation and discuss the overview of system consideration during the design of

radar and work out system configuration for a consumer requirement.

71

DATA COMPRESSION


Prerequisites: Digital Signal Processing Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:

Appreciate the significance of data compression in real world.

Differentiate between lossy and lossless compression methods.

Illustrate different lossy and lossless compression methods.

Apply compression methods to different data types which include audio, text and images.

Categorize some audio compression and image compression standards.

Adapt different video compression techniques.

Study different video compression standards like H.261, H.264, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4

and MPEG-7.

UNIT I

Lossless Compression: Huffman coding, Adaptive Huffman coding, Arithmetic coding,

Comparison, Dictionary techniques

UNIT II

Lossy Compression: Scalar quantization, Uniform quantizer, Vector quantization – Advantages,

LBG algorithm, Differential coding – Basic algorithm, Prediction in DPCM, Delta Modulation,

Transform coding – Transform, Transforms of interest, Quantization and coding of transform

coefficients

UNIT – III

Image Compression Standards: JPEG, Embedded Zerotree Coder, SPIHT, JPEG 2000, JPEG-LS,

JBIG, JBIG2

UNIT – IV

Video Compression Techniques: Motion Compensation, Search for Motion Vectors, H.261, H.263,

MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, MPEG-7, H.264

UNIT – V

Audio Compression: ADPCM in Speech coding, G.726 ADPCM, Vocoders

MPEG Audio Compression: Psychoacoustics, MPEG Audio

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Khalid Sayood, ―Introduction to Data Compression‖, 3rd

Edition, Morgan Kaufmann

Publishers, 2006.

2. Ze-Nian Li, Mark S. Drew, ―Fundamentals of Multimedia‖, Pearson Education, 2004.

72

References:

1. David Saloman, ―Data Compression: The Complete Reference‖, 4th

Edition, 2007.

2. M. Ghanbari, ―Standard Codecs: Image Compression to Advanced Video Coding‖, IEE, 2003.

3. Iain E. G. Richardson, ―H. 264 and MPEG-4 Video Compression‖, John Wiley, 2003.

Course Outcomes:

1. Explain the importance of data compression.

2. Code and decode text using Huffman, arithmetic and dictionary based methods.

3. Understand the image compression standards JPEG and JPEG 2000.

4. Describe different video compression standards

73

RADAR AND NAVIGATIONAL AIDS


Prerequisites: Microwaves and Antennas and Propagation Contact hours: 56

Course Objectives:

To be familiar with the principle of RADAR and NAVIGATIONAL AIDS.

To make the student understand the principles of Radar and its use in military

and civilian environment.

To make the student familiar with navigational aids available for navigation of

aircrafts and ships.

To strengthen students’ knowledge in radar applications.

To design simple radar system for understanding vehicular movements.

To become familiar with different navigational systems and directional finders.

UNIT- I: INTRODUCTION TO RADAR

Basic Radar –The nature of Radar-Block diagram of simple Radar-Simple form of the Radar

Equation- Maximum Unambiguous range of Radar- Radar Block Diagram- Radar

Frequencies –Applications of Radar – The Origins of Radar

THE RADAR EQUATION-Introduction- Range performance-Minimum Detectable signal-

Receiver noise and signal-to-noise ratio-Radar cross-section of Targets-Signal-to-noise ratio-PRF

and Range Ambiguities-System Losses-Plumbing loss-Beam Shape loss-Limiting loss- Collapsing

loss-Non-ideal Equipment-Operator loss-Field Degradation-Other loss factors-Straddling loss-

Propagation Effects.

UNIT-II: MTI AND PULSE DOPPLER RADAR

Introduction to Doppler and MTI Radar- The Doppler Effect-CW Doppler Radar- Coherent MTI

-Delay Line Cancelers-Filter characteristics of Delay-line canceller-Blind Speeds- Clutter attenuation

–Blind Phases- Digital MTI Processing – Pulse Doppler Radar–Moving Target Detector-Original

MTD Signal Processor-Performance and Limitations of MTI.

UNIT-III: TRACKING RADAR

Tracking with Radar – Sequential Lobing - Conical Scan and Monopulse Tracking –Tracking in

Range-Target Acquisition-Comparison of Trackers - Automatic Tracking with Surveillance Radars

(ADT).

Radar Receivers - The Radar Receiver - Receiver noise Figure – Noise Figure of networks in

cascade-Effective Noise Temperature- Mixers-Low-noise Front-ends- Radar Displays- Duplexers

and Receiver Protectors

74

UNIT IV: DETECTION OF SIGNALS IN NOISE AND SPECIAL

TYPES OF RADAR

Detection of Signals in Noise -Introduction – Matched –Filter Receiver –Correlation Detectors-

Detection Criteria – Detector characteristics

Special Types of Radar - Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR)-Air-Surveillance Radar-Electronic

Counter Measure- Bistatic Radar- Millimeter Wave Radar.

UNIT-V: NAVIGATIONAL AIDS

Navigation-Introduction - Four methods of Navigation.

Radio Direction Finding - The Loop Antenna - The Goniometer - Adcock Direction

Finders - Automatic Direction Finders

Radio Ranges - Hyperbolic Systems of Navigation (Loran and Decca) - Loran-A - Loran-C

Distance Measuring Equipment - Operation of DME- TACAN

Aids to Approach and Landing - Instrument Landing System - Ground ControlledApproach

System –Surveillance Radar Element-Precision Approach Radar

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Merrill I. Skolnik," Introduction to Radar Systems", Tata McGraw-Hill (3rd Edition)2003.

2. N.S.Nagaraja, Elements of Electronic Navigation Systems, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2001.

REFERENCES :

1. Peyton Z. Peebles: "Radar Principles", John Wiley, 2004

2. J.C Toomay, ―Principles of Radar", 2nd Edition –PHI, 2004

Course Outcomes:

1. Derive and discuss the Range equation and the nature of detection.

2. Apply Doppler principle in the detection of moving targets and able to understand types of

Doppler radars.

3. Understand principles of tracking radars and refresh the principles of transmitters and receivers.

4. Analyze the presence of signals in noise and identify special types of radars.

5. Understand the principles of navigation, Radio direction finding, DME and TACAN systems.

75

WAVELETS AND ITS APPLICATIONS


Prerequisites : Digital Signal Processing Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:

Illustrate time frequency resolution using wavelet transform

Understand the significance of multi resolution analysis.

Understand DWT and DTWT and their interpretation using orthonormal PRQMF filter.

Develop applications of wavelet transform in data compression, denoising, edge detection

UNIT I

Introduction: Continuous wavelet transforms, Properties, Inverse transform, Examples of mother

wavelets, Analytic wavelet transform,

UNIT II

Introduction to Discrete Wavelet Transform: MRA, A wavelet basis for MRA, Digital filtering

interpretation, Examples of orthogonal basis – generating wavelets, Interpreting orthonormal MRAs

for discrete time signals.

UNIT III

Biorthogonal Wavelets: Biorthogonal wavelet bases, Filtering relationship for biorthogonal

filters, Examples of biorthogonal scaling functions and wavelets, Two dimensional wavelets,

Multidimensional wavelets and wavelet packets.

UNIT IV

Wavelet transform and data compression: Transform coding, DTWT for image compression,

Audio compression and video coding

UNIT V

Applications of Wavelet Transforms: Denoising, Biomedical applications, Applications in

communication system, Edge detection and object isolation, Image fusion.

Text books:

1. Raghuveer M. Rao, Ajit S. Bopardikar, ―Wavelet Transforms: Introduction to Theory &

Applications‖, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2003

2. Agostino Abbate, Casimer M. DeCusatis and Pankaj K. Das, ―Wavelets and Subbands

Fundamentals and Applications‖,

3. K.P. Soman and K.L. Ramchandran, ―Insight into Wavelets from theory to practice‖, Eastern

Economy Edition, 2008

76

4. Stephane G. Mallat, ―A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing‖, Academic Press, Second Edition,

1999.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze CWT for any signal using wavelets.

2. Design higher level decomposition and reconstruction using PRQMF filters.

3. Design data compression using EZW and SPIHT algorithm.

4. Employ wavelet transforms for denoising, speckle removal object detection and data

communication

77

SPREAD SPECTRUM COMMUNICATION


Prerequisites : Digital Communication Contact Hours:56

Course Objectives:

Understand the concept of spreading and de-spreading of message sequence.

Apply the methods to reject narrowband interference.

Understand the concept of frequency hopping spread spectrum system.

Demonstrate the applications of frequency synthesizers in frequency hopping based modulator.

Recognize the need for diversity techniques to overcome the effect of fading.

Appreciate the significance of multi-carrier CDMA system.

Understand the principle of CDMA and FHMA multiple access techniques.

Appreciate the significance of power control techniques in CDMA system.

Understand the concepts of multi-user detection.

Understand the concepts of detection of CDMA and FHMA signals.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Direct Sequence Systems: Definitions and concepts, Spreading sequences and waveforms, systems

with BPSK modulation, Quaternary systems, pulsed interference, De-spreading with Band-pass

Matched Filters, Rejection of Narrow-band Interference

UNIT II

Frequency Hopping Systems: Concepts and Characteristics, Frequency Hopping with Orthogonal

FSK, Frequency Hopping with CPM and DPSK, Hybrid Systems, Codes for Partial band

Interference, Frequency Synthesizers

UNIT III

Fading and Diversity: Path Loss, Shadowing, and Fading, Time-Selective Fading, Spatial Diversity

and Fading, Frequency selective Fading, Channel Impulse Response, Diversity for Fading Channels,

Rake Demodulator, Diversity and Spread Spectrum, Multicarrier Direct Sequence Systems, MC

CDMA System, DS CDMA System with Frequency Domain Equalization

UNIT IV

Code Division Multiple Access and Frequency Hopping Multiple Access: Spreading Sequences

for DS/CDMA, Systems with Random Spreading Sequences, Cellular Networks and Power Control,

Frequency hopping Multiple Access

78

UNIT V

Detection of Spread Spectrum Signals: Multiuser detectors, Detection of Spread Spectrum Signals,

Detection of Direct Sequence Signals, Estimation of Noise Power, Detection of Frequency hopping

Signals

Textbooks:

1. Don Torrieri, ―Principles of Spread-Spectrum Communication Systems‖, 2nd

Edition, Springer

Verlag, 2005.

2. Robert C. Dixion, ―Spread Spectrum Systems with Commercial Applications‖, John Wiley &

Sons, 3rd

Edition, 1994.

3. Andrew J. Viterbi, ―Principles of Spread Spectrum Communication‖, Addison Wesley

Publishing Company, 2nd

Edition, 1995.

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ the spreading and de-spreading principle in direct sequence spread spectrum based

communication systems.

2. Employ the concept of frequency hopping to avoid jamming in digital communication systems.

3. Analyze the significance of rake receiver in combating the effect of multi-path fading.

4. Employ the concept of CDMA and FHMA multiple access techniques and importance of power

control technique in CDMA system.

5. Employ the concepts of multiuser detection in digital communication receivers to detect

CDMA and FHMA signals

79

SATELLITE COMMUNICATION


Prerequisites: Communication Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:

Familiarize with the satellite networks market and the future needs and challenges

Apply mathematical models of satellite networks

Strengthen knowledge in satellite communication systems

Design satellite communication systems.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Orbits and Launching Methods: Introduction, Frequency allocations for Satellite Services,

Kepler’s 1st, 2

nd and 3

rd laws, Definitions of terms for Earth Orbiting Satellites, Orbital elements,

Apogee and Perigee heights, Orbit perturbations – effects of nonspherical Earth, Atmospheric Drag

and related problems, Sun-synchronous orbit, Geostationary orbit, Launching orbits.

UNIT II

Space Segments: Power Supply, Attitude Control – Spin and Three – axis stabilization, Station

keeping, Thermal control, TT & C (Telemetry, Tracking and Command subsystems) and

Transponders.

UNIT III

Space Link and Interference: Introduction, Equivalent isotropic radiated power [EIRP],

Transmission Losses. link power budget equation, System noise, Carrier-to-noise ratio, Uplink,

Downlink, Combined uplink and downlink C/N ratio, Intermodulation Noise, Interference between

Satellite Circuits, (C/I) for uplink and downlink, combined (C/I) on both uplink and downlinks.

UNIT IV

Satellite Access: Introduction, Single Access, Preassigned FDMA, Demand assigned FDMA,

TDMA, On-board signal processing for FDMA/TDMA operation, Satellite-switched TDMA, CDMA

UNIT V

Satellite Services: Introduction, Direct broadcast satellite (DBS) Services, MAT, VSAT,

RADARSAT, Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) system, ORBCOMM, IRIDIUM.

TEXT BOOK:

1. Dennis Roddy, ―Satellite Communications‖, MGH, 2nd

Edition, 1996.

80

REFERENCES:

1. Richharia M, ―Satellite Communication Systems‖, 2nd

Edition, MGH, 1999.

2. Timothy Pratt, Charles W. Bostian, Jeremy E. Allnut, ―Satellite Communications‖, John Wiley,

2nd

Edition, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand the characteristics of satellite communication Orbits, Launching Methods and

channels.

2. Apply analytical and empirical models in the design of satellite networks and space segments.

3. Understand the traffic and queuing theory, space links, interference and analyze the

performance of satellite systems

4. Understand the multiple division and modulation techniques for satellite access.

5. Describe the various services offered in satellite communication systems.

81

RADIO FREQUENCY INTEGRATED CIRCUITS


Prerequisites : Nil Contact Hours:56

Course Objectives:

Understand and design RLC circuits in RF circuits.

Understand passive IC components characteristics.

Understand the transistor behavior for RF circuit design.

Analyze lumped parameter descriptions of RF circuits.

Appreciate the importance of Smith Chart and S-parameters for RF design.

Identify the factors for bandwidth limitation.

Design RF amplifiers with extended bandwidths.

Develop a design strategy for LNA.

Comprehend mixer fundamentals and design LC networks.

Understand and design the RF Power amplifiers.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Introduction: Radio Frequency systems

Passive RLC Networks: Introduction, Parallel RLC Tank, Series RLC Networks, Other RLC

networks, RLC Networks as impedance Transformers.

Characteristics of passive IC components: Introduction, Interconnect at radio frequencies: Skin

effect, resistors, Capacitors, Inductors.

UNIT II

A review of MOS device physics: Introduction, A little history, FETs, MOSFET physics, The long

– channels approximation, operation in weak inversion (sub threshold), MOS device physics in the

short – channel regime, Other effects.

Distributed Systems: Introduction, Link between lumped and distributed regimes driving-point

impedance of iterated structures, Transmission lines in more detail, Behavior of Finite – length

transmission lines, summary of transmission line equations, artificial lines.

UNIT III

The SMITH chart and S-parameters: Introduction, The smith chart, S-parameters, Band Width

Estimation Techniques, Introduction, The method of open – circuit time constant, The method of

short circuit time constant, Rise time, Delay and bandwidth.

82

UNIT IV

High frequency amplifier design: Introduction, Zeros as bandwidth Enhancers, The shunt –series

amplifier, Bandwidth Enhancement with fT Doublers, Tuned amplifiers, Neutralization and

unilateralization, Cascaded amplifiers, AM – PM conversion.

Low noise amplifier design: Introduction, Derivation of intrinsic MOSFET two-port noise

parameters, LNA topologies: Power match versus noise match, Power-constrained noise

optimization, Design examples, linearity and large signal performance, Spurious – free Dynamic

range.

UNIT V

Mixers: Introduction, Mixer fundamental, nonlinear systems as linear mixers, Multiplier – based

mixers.

RF power amplifiers: Introduction, Modulation of power amplifiers, summary of PA

characteristics, RF PA design examples, additional design considerations, Design summery.

TEXT BOOK:

1. Thomas H. Lee, ―The design of CMOS Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit‖, Cambridge, 2nd

Edition, 2004.

REFERENCES:

1. Behzad Razavi, ―Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuit‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Design RLC networks and describe passive IC components characteristics

2. Analyzer MOS behavior and distributed parameters for RF.

3. Use Smith Chart for design of S-parameters.

4. Analyze and design circuits for bandwidth extension and LNAs

5. To design mixers using LC networks and RF Power amplifiers.


BANGALORE


SYLLABUS




VII &VIII Semester B. E.

2

M. S. RAMAIAH INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY, BANGALORE (Autonomous Institute, Affiliated to VTU)


VII SEMESTER B. E. ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SI. No.

Subject Code

Subject Teaching Dept Credits*

L T P Total

1. EC701 IPR Electronics and Communication Engineering

2 0 0 2

2. EC702 Wireless Communication

Electronics and Communication Engineering

3 0 0 3

3. EC703 Information Theory & Coding


3 0 0 3

4. Department Elective - IV


x x x 4

5. Department Elective - V


x x x 4

6. Open Elective Other Departments x x x 3

7. EC704 Project Work-I 0 0 6 6

Total 8+x x 6+x 25


VIII SEMESTER B. E. ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SI. No. Subject


Credits*

L T P Total 1. EC801 Optical Fiber

Communication Electronics and Communication Engineering

3 0 0 3

2. EC802 Embedded

System Design Electronics and Communication Engineering

3 0 1 4

3. Department Elective - VI


x x x 4

4. EC804 Project Work II Electronics and Communication Engineering

0 0 14 14

Total 6+x x 15+x 25


3


The student has to earn a maximum of 20 credits as professional (departmental) electives.

The student has to earn a maximum of 03 credits as open electives.

Subject Code

Subject Title L T P C























4

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS



Course coordinator: Mrs. K V Suma

Course objectives:

Get an insight into the changes taking place in the global economic scenario and international

efforts to remove the barriers in international trade

Appreciate the role of intellectual (creative and innovative) contribution in trade and

technology, necessity to protect intellectual property (IP), its contribution in harmonizing the

global trade by removing the barriers, and increasing the standard of living.

Get introduced to various forms of Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs). Know in detail about

copyright and trademark.

Learn and acquire sufficient knowledge about patents, rights and obligations,

procedure to procure and maintain them.

Have basic training in drafting patent specification with special attention to claim

drafting.

Get trained in patent search and use it for testing patentability of the invention.

Thoroughly understand the economic/commercial aspects of IPRs.

Acquire sufficient knowledge about Industrial designs and Integrated circuits as IP right

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Basic principles of IPR laws: History of IPR – GATT,WTO,WIPO and TRIPs, Role of IPR in

Research & Development and Knowledge era, Concept of property, Marx’s theory of property,

Constitutional Aspects of Intellectual property, Different forms of IPR – copyright, trade mark,

Industrial Designs, Layout designs of Integrated circuits, Patents, Geographical Indications,

Traditional Knowledge, Plant varieties, Trade secrets

UNIT – II

Understanding Copyright Law: Evolution of copy right law in India, Justifications, Subject matter

of copyright, Terms of protections, Concepts-originality/Novelty idea expression, Fixation & fair

Use, Copyrights in software protection, Infringement of copyright and acquisition in Indian context,

Case studies

Trademark: Introduction, Justification, Concepts of subject matter acquisition, Implication and

benefits of registration terms of protection of Geographical indication of goods, infringements of

trade marks, Case studies

UNIT – III

Patent: Basic principles of patent laws, Historical background, Basis for IP protection, Criteria for

patentability, Novelty, Utility and Inventive step, Non obviousness, Non Patentable inventions.

Searching: Prior art, tangible vs intangible prior art, search strategy, pre-grant and post-grant

oppositions, grant or refusal of patents, infringement and prosecution in India, US and other

5

countries, request for reexamination and revocation, terms of patents and patent renewal, Cost of

getting and maintaining patens in India, US and other countries, Importance of patent search in

research.

UNIT – IV

Patent application procedure and drafting: Patent Drafting, Format, Provisional and Complete

specifications, Scopes of inventions, description of invention, drawings, claims.

Filing requirements: Forms to be sent, Comparison of Patentability in different countries, filing

mechanism through individual patent office, PCT route and claiming priority from either route.

UNIT – V

Industrial Designs: Introduction, Justification, Subject matter of design law definition, Excluded

subject matter law relating to industrial design and registration in India, Infringement of design

rights.

Semiconductor and IC Layout Designs: Semiconductor topography design rights, Infringement,

Case studies.

Text books:

1. P. Ganguli, “Intellectual Property Rights”, TMH, 2001.

2. Dr. B. L. Wadhera, “Intellectual Property Law Handbook”, Universal Law Publishing, 2002.

3. Thomas T. Gordon, Arthur S. Cookfair, “Patent Fundamentals for Scientists and Engineers”,

CRC Press, 1995.

4. T. Ramakrishna, “Course Material for 1 year P. G Diploma in IPR”, NLSIU, Bangalore.

References:

1. P. Narayan, “Intellectual Property Law”, 3rd

Edition, Eastern Law House, 2001.

2. D. Baingridge, “Intellectual Property”, 5th

Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.

3. World Intellectual Property Organization Handbook/Notes

Course Outcomes:

1. Contributions and limitations of GATT , reasons for formation of WTO and functions of

WIPO 2. Procedures to get Indian and other country patents by direct application or by PCT route. 3. Knowledge of various forms of IP, their infringements and their significance in

knowledge transfer and sharing.

6

WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS


Prerequisite(s): EC502-Digital Signal Processing, Contact Hours:42

EC601-Digital Communication

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Sarala S.M

Course Objectives

Understand the cellular concept in mobile communication and improve capacity in cellular

systems with limited radio spectrum.

Appreciate the significance of radio wave propagation in different propagation models.

Appreciate the concepts of different diversity techniques and equalization techniques.

Understand the different coding and multiple access techniques.

Appreciate the importance of GSM and CDMA in 2G and 3G mobile communication.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Introduction to cellular systems: Evolution of mobile communications, mobile radio systems-

Examples, trends in cellular radio and personal communications. Cellular Concept: Frequency reuse,

channel assignment, hand off, Interference and system capacity, Trunking and Grade of Service,

Improving coverage and capacity in cellular systems.

UNIT – II

Mobile Radio Propagation Models: Introduction to radio wave propagation – Free space

propagation model – Reflection – Diffraction – Scattering – Path loss models –Small scale multipath

propagation – Parameter of mobile multipath channels – Types of small scale fading

UNIT – III

Equalization Technique: Fundamentals of equalization- Training of adaptive equalizer – Equalizers

in a communication receiver. Survey of equalization techniques –Linear equalizations. Nonlinear

equalization – Decision Feedback Equalization (DFE), Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimation

(MLSE) equalizer. Algorithms for adaptive equalization- Zero Forcing (ZF) algorithm, Least Mean

Square (LMS) algorithm, Recursive Least Squares (RLS) algorithm.

Diversity techniques – practical space diversity considerations, polarization diversity, frequency

diversity, time diversity, RAKE receiver.

UNIT – IV

Wireless Coding Techniques: Convolutional codes, turbo codes, Interleaver, OFDM.

Multiple Access Techniques: Introduction to multiple access techniques – FDMA, TDMA, CDMA

and SDMA – Capacity of cellular FDMA, TDMA, CDMA and SDMA.

UNIT – V

Wireless Systems and Standards: Second and third generation mobile communication standards:

GSM, IS 95 and cdma2000 standards

7

TEXT BOOKS

1. T.S.Rappaport, "Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, Second Edition, Pearson

Education/ Prentice Hall of India, Third Indian Reprint 2003.

REFERENCES

1. R. Blake, “Wireless Communication Technology", Thomson Delmar, 2003.

2. W.C.Y.Lee, "Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory and applications, Second

Edition, McGraw-Hill International, 1998.

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ cellular concept to improve capacity of cellular systems with limited radio spectrum.

2. Employ the concept of radio wave propagation to calculate the link power budget.

3. Employ the concept of different diversity techniques to overcome the effect of small scale

multi-path propagation.

4. Employ the different coding techniques and multiple access techniques in wireless

communication.

5. Describe the functional blocks of GSM architecture and Classify different types of channels in

IS-95 and CDMA -2000 standards.

8

INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING

Subject Code : EC703 Credits:3:0:0

Prerequisites : Probability and Statistical Theory Contact Hours:42

Course Coordinator: V. Nuthan Prasad


Appraise the basics of information theory, entropy, rate of information, extension of zero-

memory sources and Markov source.

Illustrate the properties of codes, devise source codes using Shannon-Fano algorithm and

Huffman algorithm.

Discuss various types of channels used in transmitting information and explain the concepts of

mutual information, Shannon’s 1st and 2

nd theorems.

Illustrate the concepts of Shannon’s Channel Capacity theorem, Shannon-Hartley Law and

Shannon’s Limit.

Discuss error detection and correction capabilities of Linear Block Codes, Cyclic Block codes

and implement them using feedback shift registers.

Use of convolutional encoders for error control codes and appraise the concepts of state

diagram, tree diagram and trellis diagrams.

Illustrate the Viterbi and Stack algorithm methods decoding.

Course Contents:

UNIT I

Basics of Information Theory: Introduction, Block diagram of information system, Measure of

information, Average information content (entropy) of symbols in long independent sequences,

Information rate, Properties of entropy, Extension of zero-memory information source, Average

information content of symbols in long dependent sequences, Markov statistical model for information

sources

UNIT-II

Source Coding: Basic definitions and Encoding of source output, Properties of codes – Block codes,

Non-singular codes, Uniquely decodable codes. Instantaneous codes and optimal codes. Prefix of a

code, Test for instantaneous property, Kraft inequality, Construction of instantaneous codes and

problems, Code efficiency and redundancy, Shannon’s first theorem (Noiseless coding theorem),

Shannon-Fano encoding algorithm (binary & r-ary coding), Huffman encoding algorithm (binary and r-

ary coding)

UNIT III

Channels for Communication: Discrete communication channels, definitions Representation of a

channel, Joint entropy, Entropy function and equivocation, Priori and posteriori entropies, equivocation,

Mutual information, its properties, Rate of information transmission over a discrete channel and

Capacity of a discrete memoryless channel, Shannon’s theorem on channel capacity, Special channels,

Estimation of channel capacity by Muroga’s method, Continuous channels, Maximization of entropy

with peak signal limitation, Mutual information of a continuous noisy channel, Shannon-Hartley law and

its implications

9

UNIT-IV

Error Control Coding: Rationale for coding and types of codes, Example of error control coding,

Methods of controlling errors, Types of errors and codes, Linear block codes, Matrix description of

LBCs, Encoding circuit for (n,k) LBC and related problems Syndrome and error correction, Syndrome

calculation circuit, Distance property, Error detection and correction capabilities of LBC, SEC-

Hamming codes, Hamming bound, Decoding using standard array

UNIT-V

High Level Error Control Codes: Binary cyclic codes, Structure and properties of cyclic codes, G and

H matrices for cyclic codes, Encoding using feedback shift registers, Syndrome Calculation Circuit and

Decoding using feedback shift registers, Syndrome calculation circuit, Binary BCH codes Golay codes,

Shortened cyclic codes, Burst error correcting codes, Convolutional codes – encoders, State diagram,

Code tree, Trellis diagram of convolutional codes, Decoding of convolutional codes using Viterbi

Algorithm.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. K. Sam Shanmugham, “Digital and analog communication Systems”, John Wiley

Publications, 1996.

2. Shu Lin, Daniel J. Costello, “Error Control Coding”, Pearson / Prentice Hall, 2nd

Edition,

2004.

3. Simon Haykin, “Digital Communications”, John Wiley Publications, 2003

REFERENCES:

1. Bernard Sklar, “Digital Communications”, Pearson Eduction, 2007

2. Simon Haykin, “Introduction to Analog andDigital Communications”, John Wiley

publications, 2003

Course Outcomes:

1. Apply basics of information theory to analyze entropy, information rate, source extensions and

Markov sources.

2. Use code properties to design Shannon-Fano codes and Huffman codes.

3. Categorize various channels for information transmission and interpret Shannon’s 1st, 2

nd,

channel capacity theorems, Shannon Hartley Law and Shannon’s limit in continuous channels.

4. Apply LBC and CBC in error detection and error correction.

5. Construct state tables, state diagrams, code-tree diagram and trellis diagrams for convolutional

encoders and use Viterbi and stack algorithms for decoding convolutional codes.

10

OPTICAL FIBER COMMUNICATION


Prerequisites: EC501 Analog Communication, EC601 Digital Communication

Course Coordinator: Dr. T.D. Senthilkumar Contact Hours: 42

Course Objectives:

To understand the basics of light propagation in fiber optic waveguide and optical signal

degradations in propagation through fiber.

To learn the basics and applications of light sources and photo-detectors in optical

communication.

Discuss the components in analog and digital optical link and error sources accounted in the

optical link.

To learn the principles of WDM components, optical amplifiers, and optical networks.

Course Contents:

UNIT- 1

Introduction to fibers: Introduction, advantages, disadvantages and applications of optical fiber

communication. Basic optical laws and definitions, optical fiber modes and configurations. Mode

theory – overview of modes, key modal concepts. Single mode fibers - Mode field diameter,

propagation modes. Graded-index fiber structure.

Transmission characteristics of optical fibers: Attenuation, absorption, scattering losses, bending

loss. Dispersion, Intra model dispersion, modal delay, group delay, material dispersion, waveguide

dispersion.

UNIT - 2

Optical Sources: Direct and Indirect band gaps. Light Emitting Diodes – LED Structures, Quantum

efficiency and LED power. Laser Diodes – Laser diode modes and threshold conditions, Laser diode

rate equations, external quantum efficiency.

Photo detectors: pin Photodetector, Avalanche photodiodes, Photodetector noise, Detector response

time.

Fiber joints and connectors: Fiber-to-fiber joints – mechanical misalignment, Fiber splicing, Fiber

connectors-connector types.

UNIT - 3

Optical Receivers: Introduction, Optical Receiver Operation, receiver sensitivity, quantum limit,

and eye diagrams, coherent detection, Burst mode receiver, operation, Analog receivers.

Analog Links: Introduction, overview of analog links, CNR, multichannel transmission techniques,

RF over fiber, Radio over fiber links.

UNIT - 4

Digital links: Introduction, point–to–point links, link power budget, rise time budget. Power

penalties.

11

WDM Concepts: WDM concepts. Optical couplers -2x2 fiber couplers, star couplers. Isolators and

circulators, direct thin film filters. Active optical components - variable optical attenuators, tunable

optical filters.

UNIT - 5

WDM Components: Dynamic gain equalizers, optical drop multiplexers, polarization controllers,

chromatic dispersion compensators, tunable light sources.

Optical Amplifiers and Networks: Optical amplifiers, basic applications and types, semiconductor

optical amplifiers, Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifiers (EDFA). SONET / SDH – transmission formats,

SONET/SDH rings.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Gerd Keiser ,"Optical Fiber Communication”, 4th Ed., MGH, 2008.

2. John M. Senior ,"Optical Fiber Communications",, Pearson Education. 3rd Impression, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOK:

1. Joseph C Palais , “Fiber Optic Communication”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education.

Course Outcomes

1. Apply the optical losses in the power budget estimation.

2. Employ the suitable optical sources and detectors in the optical communication system to

reduce the coupling loss and joint loss.

3. Appreciate the importance of optical analog and digital links.

4. Demonstrate the principles of optical amplifiers, optical networks and WDM components.

12

EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN AND SOFTWARE


Prerequisites: Nil Contact Hours: 42+14

Course Coordinator: K.Manikantan

Course Objectives

To introduce the difference between embedded systems and general purpose systems.

To optimize hardware designs of custom single-purpose processors.

To compare different approaches in optimizing general-purpose processors.

To introduce different peripheral interfaces to embedded systems.

To understand the design tradeoffs made by different models of embedded systems.

To apply knowledge gained in software-hardware integration in team-based projects.

To Understand the concepts behind embedded software.

To design an embedded solution for a real world problem.

To select components to implement an embedded system.

To program the software for an embedded system together with its sensor and control

requirements.

To optimize an embedded system to meet design requirements of size, speed, and/or power

consumption.

UNIT – I

Introduction: Embedded Systems Overview, Design Challenge-Optimizing Design Metrics,

Processor Technology, IC Technology, Design Technology, Tradeoffs.

Custom Single-Purpose Processors – Hardware: Custom Single-purpose Processor Design,

Optimizing Custom Single-Purpose Processors.

UNIT – II

General-Purpose Processors – Software: Basic Architecture, Operation, Programmer’s View,

Development Environment, Application-Specific Instruction-Set Processors (ASIPs), Selecting a

Microprocessor, General Purpose Processor Design.

UNIT – III

Standard Single-Purpose Processors – Peripherals: Timers, Counters, and Watchdog Timers,

UART, Pulse Width Modulators, LCD Controllers, Keypad Controllers, Stepper Motor Controllers,

Analog-to-Digital Converters, Real-Time Clocks.

Memory: Memory Write Ability and Storage Permanence, Common Memory Types, Composing

Memory, Memory Hierarchy and Cache, Advanced RAM.

UNIT – IV

Embedded software – Interrupts: Interrupt Basics, The Shared-Data Problem, Interrupt Latency.

Survey of Software Architectures: Round-Robin, Round-Robin with Interrupts, Function-Queue-

Scheduling Architecture, Real-Time Operating System Architecture, Selecting an architecture.

13

UNIT – V

Introduction to RTOS: Tasks and Task States, Tasks and Data, Re-entrancy, Semaphores and

Shared Data, Semaphore Problems: Priority Inversion, Deadly Embrace Encapsulating Semaphores,

RTOS and ISR, Saving Memory Space, Saving Power.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, “Embedded System Design – A Unified Hardware/Software

Introduction”, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.

2. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education, 1999.

REFERENCES:

1. James K. Peckol, “Embedded Systems – A contemporary Design Tool”, John Wiley India Pvt.

Ltd, 2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Compare embedded system design models using different processor technologies (single-

purpose, general-purpose, application specific processors)

2. Describe and compare the various types of peripherals used in embedded systems

3. Analyze a given embedded system and identify its critical performance

4. Complete at least one project involving embedding peripherals.

5. Able to explain and to demonstrate the hardware and software aspects of interrupt systems.


BANGALORE


SYLLABUS





2

M. S. Ramaiah Institute of Technology, Bangalore-54 (Autonomous Institute, Affiliated to VTU)


Faculty List

Sl.







6. K. Manikantan Ph.D Associate Professor




10. V. Anandi Ph.D Associate Professor


12. Dr. Raghuram Srinivasan Ph.D Associate Professor


14. A. R. Priyarenjini M.Tech Assistant Professor

15. S. L. Gangadharaiah M.Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor




19. C. SharmilaSuttur M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor



22. ReshmaVerma M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor









31. Chitra M M.Tech Assistant Professor

32. Akkamahadevi M B M.Tech Assistant Professor

33. Veena G N M.Tech Assistant Professor

34. Pavitha U S M.Tech Assistant Professor

3


M. S. R. I. T, BANGALORE – 560 054


Vision and Mission



technical education











To prepare graduates who excel in the engineering profession, qualified to pursue advanced

degrees, and possess the technical knowledge, critical thinking skills, creativity, and ethical

values.



4


Program Educational Objectives of the Department of Electronics and Communication are: PEO 1: To provide all basic fundamental prerequisites in mathematical, scientific and engineering fields required to solve technical problems. PEO 2: To train in analyzing, designing and creating new scientific tools and other software so as to gain good engineering breadth. PEO 3: To involve in professional and ethical environment, to build effective communication skills,

multidisciplinary and teamwork skills and to relate engineering issues to broader social context. PEO 4: To provide an academic environment, awareness to excel and to lead a successful professional career in lifelong learning. PEO 5: To communicate/work with research and development, to design/develop and to formulate/integrate

various products.

5

Program Outcomes

POs are statements that describe what students are expected to know, attitudes they are expected to hold, and

what they are able to do by the time of graduation. Achievement of program outcome should indicate the student

is equipped to achieve the PEOs.


At the time of graduation an E & C graduate should be able to:

a. Recollect the essential descriptions from basic sciences, and apply them in E & C streams.

b. Demonstrate ability to identify, interpret and solve engineering problems.

c. Design circuits and conduct experiments with electronic systems, communication equipment,


d. Design systems/subsystems and devices

e. Demonstrate the capability to visualize, organize and work in laboratory and interdisciplinary tasks.

f. Demonstrate skills using software tools and other modern equipment.

g. Inculcate the ethical, social and professional responsibilities such as project management and

finance.

h. Communicate effectively in oral /written form of scientific analysis or data.

i. Understand the impact of engineering solutions on the society and also will be aware of


j. Develop self-confidence and become excellent multi-skilled engineer, manager, leader and


k. Participate and succeed in competitive examinations/placement and show potential research

capability.

l. An understanding of engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s work, as a


6



SI.

No

Subject


Credits*

L T P Total

1. ECMAT31 Engineering Mathematics –

III


2. EC301 Solid State Devices and

Technology

Electronics and

Communication

BS 4 0 0 4

3. EC302 Network Analysis Electronics and

Communication

ES 3 1 0 4

4. EC303 Analog Electronics Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

5. EC304 Digital Electronics Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

6. EC305 Data Structures using C Electronics and

Communication

ES 3 0 0 3

7. EC303L Analog Electronics Lab Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

8. EC304L Digital Electronics Lab Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

9. EC305L Data Structures Lab Electronics and

Communication

ES 0 0 1 1

Total 20 1 3 24


SI.

No

Subject


Credits*

L T P Total

1. ECMAT41 Engineering Mathematics

– IV


2. EC401 Linear Integrated Circuits Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

3. EC402 Digital System Design

with FPGA

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 4 0 0 4

4. EC403 Signals and Systems Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 1 0 4

5. EC404 Control Systems Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 1 0 4

6. EC405 Electromagnetics Electronics and

Communication

BS 4 0 0 4

7. EC401L Linear Integrated Circuits

Lab

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

8. EC402L FPGA Lab Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

Total 21 2 2 25


7

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-III

Subject Code: ECMAT31 Credits: 4:0:0


Course Coordinator:

Course Objectives:

Learn to solve algebraic, transcendental and ordinary differential equations numerically.

Learn to fit a curve, correlation, regression for a statistical data.

Learn the concepts of consistency, methods of solution for linear system of equations and eigen

value problems.

Learn to represent a periodic function in terms of sines and cosines.

Understand the concepts of continuous and discrete integral transforms in the form of Fourier

and Z-transforms.

Learn the concept of series solutions of ODE and special functions.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Numerical solution of Algebraic and Transcendental equations: Method of false position, Newton

- Raphson method.

Numerical solution of Ordinary differential equations: Taylor series method, Euler and modified

Euler method, fourth order Runge-Kutta method.

Statistics: Curve fitting by the method of least squares, Fitting a linear curve, fitting a parabola, fitting

a Geometric curve, Correlation and Regression.

UNIT – II

Linear Algebra: Elementary transformations on a matrix, Echelon form of a matrix, rank of a matrix,

Consistency of system of linear equations, Gauss elimination and Gauss – Siedal method to solve

system of linear equations, eigen values and eigen vectors of a matrix, Rayleigh power method to

determine the dominant eigen value of a matrix, diagonalization of a matrix, system of ODEs as matrix

differential equations

UNIT – III

Fourier series: Convergence and divergence of infinite series of positive terms. Periodic function,

Dirichlet conditions, Fourier series of periodic functions of period 2 and arbitrary period, Half

range series, Fourier series and Half Range Fourier series of Periodic square wave, Half wave rectifier,

Full wave rectifier, Saw-tooth wave with graphical representation, Practical harmonic analysis.

8

UNIT – IV

Fourier Transforms: Infinite Fourier transform, Infinite Fourier sine and cosine transforms,

properties, Inverse transform, Convolution theorem, Parseval identity (statements only). Fourier



Z-Transforms: Definition, standard Z-transforms, Single sided and double sided, Linearity property,

Damping rule, Shifting property, Initial and final value theorem, Inverse Z-transform, Application of

Z-transform to solve difference equations.

UNIT – V

Series Solution of ODEs and Special Functions: Series solution, Frobenius method, Series solution

of Bessel differential equation leading to Bessel function of first kind, Series solution of Legendre

differential equation leading to Legendre polynomials, Rodrigues's formula.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Erwin Kreyszig –Advanced Engineering Mathematics – Wiley publication – 10th edition –

2015.

2. B. S. Grewal – Higher Engineering Mathematics – Khanna Publishers – 42nd edition – 2012.

REFERENCES:

1. Glyn James – Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics – Pearson Education – 4th edition –

2010.

2. Dennis G. Zill, Michael R. Cullen - Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Jones and

Barlett Publishers Inc. – 3rd edition – 2009.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze algebraic, transcendental and ordinary differential equations using numerical

methods, and use method of least squares and determine the lines of regression for a set

of statistical data. (PO – a, b, k)

2. Develop the rank of a matrix and testing the consistency and the solution by Gauss Elimination

and Gauss Siedel iteration methods. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f, h, k)

3. Write the Fourier series expansion of a function in both full range and half range values of the

variable and obtaining the various harmonics of the Fourier series expansion for the given

numerical data. (PO – a, b, c, d, e)

4. Analyze Fourier transforms, Fourier sine and Fourier cosine transforms of functions and

solving difference equations using Z-transforms. (PO – a, b, e, f, h)

5. Obtain the series solution of ordinary differential equations. (PO – a, b, e, f)

9

SOLID STATE DEVICES AND TECHNOLOGY


Prerequisites: Basic Electronics Contact hours: 56


Course objectives:

State the importance of PN junction diode, in the study of the bipolar & junction field transistors.

Explain the basic concept of energy band diagrams of PN junction diodes, schottky barrier diodes

& metal oxide silicon systems.

Discuss the basic materials& fabrication processes used in planar PN junction diodes, bipolar

junction transistors, MESFETs, MOSFETS & Integrated circuits.

Describe the constructional features & modes of operation of PN junction diodes, BJTs,

MESFETs & MOSFETs.

Analyze the current components& current voltage characteristics of PN junction diodes, BJTs,

MESFETs & MOSFETs.

Appraise the small signal model, figure of merit & high frequency limitations of JFETs and

formulate the Electronic switch & CMOS inverter circuits using MOSFETs.

Course contents:

UNIT – I

P-N Junction Diode: Introduction ,Space-Charge Region, Analytical Relations at Equilibrium,

Conditions in the Diode with Voltage Applied, Currents in diode, Real Diode Characteristics in the

Reverse Direction, Capacitances of the diode, diode switching characteristics.

UNIT – II

Fabrication Technology : Introduction , why silicon, Purity of Silicon, Czochralski growing Process,

Fabrication processes, Planar PN Junction diode fabrication, Fabrication of resistors and capacitors in

ICs.

Bipolar Junction Transistors: Introduction , structure and basic operation, Fabrication of bipolar IC

transistor, Terminology, Symbols and regions of operation, Circuit Arrangements, Transistor currents

in the active region, BJT as current amplifier, Transistor parameters, Graphical characteristics &

modes of operation .

UNIT – III

Metal Semiconductor junctions and devices: Introduction, Energy band diagrams of Metal and N

semiconductor before and after contact, Schottky barrier diode, Rectifying Metal-N semiconductor

junction, Rectifying Metal-P semiconductor junction, comparison of Schottky barrier diode with PN

diode.

Junction Field Effect Transistors: Introduction, Construction and operation, current–voltage

characteristic equation, channel conductance & JFET transconductance

10

UNIT – IV

MESFET: Fabrication and Modes of Operation, Threshold Voltage, I-V Characteristics of Depletion

and Enhancement devices, relations between the voltages.

Metal Oxide Silicon Systems: Introduction, Energy band diagrams, Band-bending and the effect of

bias voltages, Threshold Voltage, Oxide charges in MOS Capacitors.

UNIT – V

Metal Oxide Semiconductor FET: Introduction, Construction and basic operation, Fabrication of N-

type MOSFET (N-MOS) on an integrated circuit chip, Regions of operation: Cut-off, Linear, and

Saturation regions, current voltage analytical relations, types of MOSFETs, control of threshold

voltage, Secondary effects, Small-Signal equivalent circuits, low frequency circuit, high frequency

circuit, high frequency performance, the MOSFET switch and CMOS Inverter, comparison between

MOSFET& BJT.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kanaan Kano, “Semiconductor Devices”, Pearson Education, 2006.

REFERENCES:

1. K. N. Bhat, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices, Narosa Publications, 2004.

2. S. M. Sze “Semiconductor Devices: Physics and Technology”, 2nd edition, Wiley India, 2008.

Course outcomes:

1. Employ the concept of current components & V-I characteristics of PN junction diodes in various

diode applications. (PO – a, b, c, e, h, j, k, l)

2. Apply the concept of different modes of operation of BJTs to construct different amplifiers like

CB, CE, CC amplifiers & digital circuits. (PO – a, b, c, d, f, h, i, k, l)

3. Illustrate the concept of rectifying property of schottky barrier diodes in integrated circuits for

high speed switching. (PO – b, c, d, h, j, k, l)

4. Use the significance of fabrication processes in SSI, MSI, LSI & VLSI circuits. (PO – a, f, l)

5. Apply the concept of MESFETS to use in monolithic microwave integrated circuits & high speed

digital circuits and MOSFETS in the development of large scale integrated circuits to reduce area

requirements and cost of manufacture. (PO – b, c, d, k, l)

11

NETWORK ANALYSIS


Prerequisites: NIL Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinator: Prof. M. S. Srinivas

Course Objectives:

Analyze various circuits in the Electronics and Communication area

Apply network topology concepts in developing VLSI circuits

Apply network synthesis concepts for designing filters

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Voltage and Current Laws: Kirchhoff’s Laws, Single loop and Node-pair circuits, Connected

Independent Sources, Voltage and Current division.

Circuit Analysis: Nodal and Mesh Analysis, Super Node, Super Mesh, Delta-Wye Conversion.

UNIT – II

Circuit Analysis Techniques: Linearity, Superposition, Reciprocity, Thevenin’s, Norton’s and

Maximum power transfer theorems, Source Transformation.

Sinusoidal Steady-State Analysis: Forced Response, Complex Forcing Function, and Phasor

Relationships for R, L and C, Impedances and Admittances in Nodal and Mesh Analysis,

Superposition, Source Transformations and Thevenin’s Theorem.

UNIT – III

Initial Conditions in Networks: Initial Conditions in Elements, Evaluating Initial Conditions.

Laplace Transformation: Basic Theorems, Partial Fraction Expansion, Solution by the Laplace

Transformation.

Transforms of Signal Waveforms: Shifted Unit Step Function, Ramp and Impulse Functions,

Waveform Synthesis, Initial and final value of f(t) from F(s), Convolution Integral.

UNIT – IV

Network Topology and Equations: Basic Definitions, Matrices of Graphs, Node and Mesh

Transformations, Generalized Element, Formulation of Network Equations.

Two-Port Parameters: Impedance, Admittance, Transmission and Hybrid Parameters, Relationships

between Parameter Sets.

UNIT – V

Synthesis of One – Port Networks: Synthesis of LC Driving point immitances, R-C(R-L)

impedances (Admittances).

Frequency Response: Parallel and Series resonance forms.

12

TEXT BOOKS:

1. W. H. Hyatt Jr., and J. E. Kemmerly, S. M. Durbin; “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, Sixth

Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.

2. V. K. Aatre, Network Theory and Filter Design, Second Edition, New Age International, 1980

3. M. E. Van Valkenburg, Nertwork Analysis, Third Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 1974.

4. F. F. Kuo,“Network Analysis and Synthesis”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 1966

REFERENCES:

1. M. Nahvi, J. A. Edminister, Electric Circuits, Fourth Edition, Tata-Mcgraw Hill, 2007

2. C.K. Alexander, M. N O Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, Third edition, Tata-

McGraw Hill, 2008

3. D. K. Cheng, “Analysis of Linear Systems”, Addition-Wesley, 1959

4. N. Balabanian, T. A. Bickart, Electrical Network Theory, 1969.

Course Outcomes:

1. Apply nodal and mesh analysis techniques to various electric circuits. (PO – a, b, c, f, h, k)

2. Apply various network theorems to simplify circuits. (PO – a, b, c, h, k)

3. Analyze electric circuits using the Laplace transformation. (PO – a, b, c, f, h, k)

4. Analyze circuits using network topology and express them in terms of various two-port

parameters. (PO – a, b, c, f, h, k)

5. Synthesize one-port networks using R-L, R-C or L-C components. (PO – b, c, d, f, h, k)

13

ANALOG ELECTRONICS




Course objectives:

Analyze the transistor two-port hybrid model.

Understand the basic concepts of feedback and express the effect of feedback on amplifier circuits.

Comprehend FET operation, characteristics and comparison of JFET with MOSFET.

Discuss low and high frequency of common-source and common-drain amplifier.

Design and analyze the various biasing techniques for MOSFET and implement MOSFET applications

Understand the concepts of different types of power amplifiers.

Develop the ability to analyze the performance parameters of power amplifiers.

Understand the basic concepts of RF technology.

Know the design aspects of RFICs.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Transistor circuit analysis: Two-port model, Transistor hybrid model, Analysis of a transistor

amplifier circuit using h-parameters (CE configuration), Miller’s theorem and its dual.

Feedback amplifier: Basic concept of feedback, importance of negative feedback, Types of feedback

amplifiers.

UNIT – II

Power amplifiers: Classification, Class A power amplifier, Efficiency, Second harmonic distortion,

Transformer coupled audio power amplifier, Class B push-pull power amplifier, Design of power

amplifiers.

UNIT – III

FET: Introduction to FET, JFET, MOSFET, Cascade amplifier using FETs, Comparison of MOSFET

& JFET, Types of MOSFET- depletion & enhancement, Transfer Characteristics of n-channel e-type

MOSFET, Power MOSFET, Steady state characteristics of n-channel & p-channel, Switching

characteristics.

UNIT – IV

MOSFET biasing: Fixed bias, Voltage divider bias, Design of biasing circuits, Low & high frequency

analysis of common-source and common-drain amplifiers, Noise performance of MOS transistor.

14

UNIT – V

Introduction to RFIC: Design bottleneck, Applications, Analog & digital systems.

Basic concepts in RF design: Nonlinearity & time variance, Harmonics, Gain compression,

Desensitization & blocking, Cross modulation, Intermodulation, Cascaded non-linear stages,

Intersymbol interference.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Millman & Halkias, “Integrated Electronics”, Tata McGraw –Hill International edition,

1991.

2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky,“Electronic Devices and Circuit theory”, 6th edition

PHI, 2002.

3. Behzad Razavi, “RF Microelectonics”, Prentice Hall Communications Engineering and

EmergingTechnology Series, 1998.

REFERENCES:

1. P. Gray, R. Meyer, S.Lewis and P. Hurst ,“Analog Integrated Circuits”, 3rd edition, John Wiley,

2007.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze two-port transistor model using h-parameters and effect of negative feedback in

transistor amplifier. (PO – a, c)

2. Study class A & C power amplifiers on performance parameters. (PO – a, b, l)

3. Understand the fundamentals of MOSFET, biasing and design simple MOSFET circuits.

(PO – a, b, c)

4. Analyze and sketch the low and high frequency response of Common source and common drain

amplifiers. (PO – a, b, d, h)

5. Acquire the knowledge of RFIC technology and its design constraints. (PO – e, j, k, l)

15

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS




Course objectives:

Understand the electrical characteristics of logic gates and different logic families.

Understand the operation of multiplexers and demultiplexers by analyzing several circuit applications.

Understand the function and operation of code converters and comparators.

Understand and contrast the operations of parallel adders, serial adders and fast adders.

Appreciate the importance of HDL’s in digital designs.

Understand Verilog HDL data flow model.

Model combinational circuits using data flow constructs.

Describe the operation of several types of edge-triggered flip-flops, such as the J-K, D-type, and S-R.

Analyze and design different types of counters and understand the operation of shift registers.

Understand different types of memories and their properties.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I



product, TTL inverter – circuit description and operation, TTL NAND circuit description and

operation.

Combinational logic: Boolean algebra : Standard representation of logic functions – SOP and POS

forms, Multiplexing and Demultiplexing, Multiplexers – Realization of 2:1, 4:1 and 8:1 using gates,

Multiplexer – applications, Demultiplexers: Realization of 1:2, 1:4, 1:8 using basic gates,

Demultiplexer – applications.

UNIT – II

Combinational logic: Parity circuits and comparators: 2 bit and 4 bit comparator, Encoding and

Decoding: codes - Binary coded decimal codes, BCD – Excess 3, Encoders: Realization, Priority

Encoders, Decoders: BCD – Decimal, BCD – Seven segment display.


using 2s complement and applications, Adder/ Subtractor, Array multipliers.

UNIT – III

Introduction to HDL: Verilog description of Mux, Demux, encoder, decoders, priority encoder,

Array multiplier.

16

UNIT – IV

Sequential Circuits Analysis and Design: Sequential Circuit Definitions, Latches, Flip-Flops: Master

Salve Flip Flops, Edge Triggered Flip Flop, Characteristic Tables,

Sequential Circuit Analysis: Analysis with JK Flip Flops, Sequential Circuit Design, Designing with

D Flip Flops, Designing with JK Flip Flops, Flip Flop Excitation Tables, Design Procedure.

Registers and Counters: Definition of register and counter, Registers, Shift Registers, Ripple

Counter, Synchronous Binary Counters, Other Counters: BCD Counter.

UNIT – V

Memory and Programmable Logic Devices: Memory and Programmable Logic Devices definitions,

Random Access-Memory, RAM Integrated Circuits, Array of RAM IC’s, Programmable Logic

Technologies, Read-only Memory, Programmable Logic Array, Programmable Array Logic Devices.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. M. Morris Mano and Charles R. Kime, “Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals”, Pearson

Education, 3rd Edition, 2006.

2. Stephen Brown, ZvonkoVranesic,“Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design”, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2003.

REFERENCES:

1. Donald D Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2002.

2. Tocci, “Digital Systems, Principles and Applications”, PHI/Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 1997.

3. R. P. Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 4th Edition, 2010.

Course Outcomes


and NOR gates. (PO – a, c, k)

2. Design combinational logic circuits. (PO – a, c, k)

3. Apply basic verilog constructs in dataflow style to model digital circuits. (PO – a, c, f)

4. Analyze sequential circuits. (PO – a, b, c, k)

5. Implement combinational logic circuits using PLDs. (PO – b, c)

17

Data Structure Using C


Prerequisites: Fundamentals of Computing Contact Hours: 42


Course objectives:

Understand the concepts and implement the different types of linked list.

Illustrate the importance of linked lists in different applications.

Learn and understand the concept of Stacks and Queues.

Apply the concept of stacks and queues in different applications.

Understand the various operations performed on trees.

Implement various applications using different types of trees.

Explore several searching and sorting ways.

Understand and Implement the concept of graphs.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Linked List: Dynamic memory allocation & de allocation functions, Introduction to Linked List,

Types of linked list, Basic operations (Insert, Delete, Traverse, Search, and Display), and Algorithms

& Programs using Singly, Doubly & Circular linked list.

Linked List Applications: Addition of two long positive integers, Addition of two polynomials, and

Evaluation of a polynomial.

UNIT – II

Stacks & Queues: Basic stack operations, Stack applications – Conversion & Evaluation of

expressions, Stack linked list implementation.

Queues: Introduction to queues: Basic operations, Different types of queues, Queue linked list

implementation, queuing policies.

ADT: Introduction, Stack ADT.

UNIT – III

Trees: Introduction to trees: Basic tree concepts, Binary tree properties, Binary tree traversal,

Expression tree. Operations, Algorithms and programs on Binary search tree (BST), equivalence

between binary search algorithm and BST.

AVL tree: Basic concepts, Implementation of AVL tree.

B tree: Introduction and Implementation, B tree application (small database).

UNIT – IV

Searching & Sorting: Sorting: sort concepts-sort order, sort stability, sort efficiency, Types of

sorting: Selection sort, Heap sort, Insertion sort – Simple insertion sort, Shell sort, Address calculation

sort, Exchange sort – Quick sort, Bubble sort, External sort - Merge sort.

18

Searching: List searches: Binary search & sequential search. Hashed list searches: Basic concepts,

Hashing Methods, Collision Resolution Methods: Open Addressing, Linked list.

UNIT – V

Graphs: Introduction & Basic concepts, Graph operations, Graph traversal-Depth first & Breadth first

traversal. Graph storage structure: Adjacency matrix & Adjacency list. Graph Algorithms: Insert,

Delete and Append Vertices & Edges. Application of Graph Operations: Web Graph.

Networks: Minimum spanning Tree & Shortest path Algorithms.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Tanenbaum, “Data Structures with C”, McGraw Hill, 2000

2. Richard Gilberg and Behrouz Forouzan,”Data Structures: A Pseudo code approach with C”, 2nd


REFERENCES:

1. Robert L Kruse, “Data Structures and Program Design”, Prentice Hall, 1994.

2. Ullman & Hopcroft,” Data Structures and Algorithms”, Addison-Wesley, 2006.

3. Thomas Corman, Horowitz and Sartaj Sahni,”Introduction to Algorithms”, 2nd edition, PHI,

2006.

4. E. Balagurusamy, “Programming in ANSI C”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.

Course outcomes:

1. Implement linked list solve various problems. (PO – a, b, e, f, k)

2. Make appropriate data structure algorithm design decisions with respect to program size,

execution speed, and storage efficiency. (PO – a, b, c, e, f, l)

3. Design a system or component, to meet stated specifications. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f, k)

4. Implement appropriate algorithm for trees Searching and Sorting. (PO – a, b, c, d, f)

5. Implement algorithm design techniques to solve real world Problems. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f, k)

19

ANALOG ELECTRONICS CIRCUITS LAB


Prerequisites: Basic Electronics Contact Sessions: 10


Course objectives:

Understand the two port transistor model.

Learn the h –parameters based transistor analysis.

Learn working principle of crystal oscillator.

Understand the importance Bridge rectifier with and without filter.

Learn the general characteristics and benefits of negative feedback.

Understand the effect of negative feedback on Rin and Ro

Understand the significance of power amplifier and its working principle with efficiencies.

Appreciate simulation tools for hardware designs.


1. Study the input and output characteristics of BJT CE amplifier and determine the h-parameters.

2. Design an RC coupled amplifier, plot the frequency response and derive the gain.

3. Using BJT design crystal oscillator.

4. Design a Bridge rectifier with and without C filter.

5. Design a Class B push pull and class AB power amplifiers.

6. Design of transformer coupled audio power amplifier.

7. Design a voltage series feedback amplifier. Compare the parameters with and without feedback.

8. Study the transfer characteristics of n-channel e-type MOSFET.

9. Design a common-source MOSFET amplifier and study the frequency response.


Software’s suggested: MultiSim or any other suitable simulation tool.

Course Outcomes:

1. Design amplifier circuits using transistor and FET devices. (PO – a, b, c, e, f, g, h, j, k, l)

2. Design power amplifiers and negative feedback circuits. (PO – a, b, c, e, f, g, h, j, k, l)

3. Design the rectifier circuits. (PO – a, b, c, e, f, g, h, k, l)

4. Simulate all the hardware designs and perform the performance analysis.

(PO – a, b, c, e, f, g, h, k, l)

5. Write and prepare a lab report that details design procedure and experimental results.

(PO – f, g, h, j, k, l)

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Millman and Halkias, “Integrated Electronics”, Tata McGraw –Hill International edition, 1991.

2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit theory”, 6th Edition,

PHI, 2002.

3. Lab Manual.

20

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS CIRCUITS LAB


Prerequisites: NIL Contact Sessions: 12

Course Coordinator: C. SharmilaSuttur

Course objectives:

Learn about different types of memories and their properties.

Understand the basic read and write operations of memories.

Understand the internal structure of RAM and its operation.

Learn the various programmable logic technologies

Learn the differences between programmable logic devices


1. Introduction to Digital electronics lab, Simplification, realization of Boolean expressions using

logic gates/Universal gates.

2. Realization of Half/Full adder and Half/Full Subtractors using logic gates.

3. Realization of Binary to Gray code conversion and vice versa

4. Introduction to Multisim , simulation tool

5. MUX/DEMUX – use of 74153, 74139 for arithmetic circuits and code converter.

6. Use of a) Decoder chip to drive LED display.

b) Priority encoder.

7. Truth table verification of Flip-Flops:

a) JK Master slave (b) T type and (c) D type

8. Realization of 3 bit counters as a sequential circuit.

9. MOD – N counter design (7476, 7490, 74192, 74193).

10. Shift left, Shift right, SIPO, SISO, PISO, PIPO operations using 7495.

11. (a) Wiring and testing Ring counter (b) Programming a RAM ( 6116 ).

12. Introduction to Verilog lab

(a)Program to realize all logic gates

(b) Program for combinational designs: Decoder, Encoder, Mux, Demux.

Software’s suggested: Xilinx ISE, MultiSim or any other suitable simulation tool.

Course Outcomes:

1. Design combinational circuits using gates. (PO - a, c, e)

2. Design combinational logic circuits using Mux/DeMux/Adder ICs. (PO - a, c, e)

3. Design sequential circuits. (PO - a, b, c, e)

4. Program RAM IC’s. (PO - a, e)

5. Use electronic design and simulation tools in digital circuit design and verification. (PO - a, c, e, f)

REFERENCES:

1. M. Morris Mano and Charles R. Kime,“Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals”,, Pearson

Education, 3rd Edition, 2006.

2. Stephen Brown and Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design”,


21

DATA STRUCTURES LAB

CourseCode: EC305L Credits: 0:0:1

Prerequisites: Fundamentals of Computing Contact Sessions: 12


Course objectives:

Understand the various operations performed on linked lists.

Understand the operation of stacks.

Learn the various applications stacks.

Understand the operation of Queues.

Learn the various applications of Queues.

Appreciate the various traversal method used in trees.

Understand the various searching and sorting techniques used in Data base Management


Write programs for

1) Singly linked lists

2) Doubly linked lists

3) Circularly linked lists

4) Applications of linked lists

5) Stack operations

6) Queue operations

7) Binary trees

Course Outcomes:

1. Generate the code for different types of Linked lists and for different applications of linked lists. (PO - a, b, e, f, h, l)

2. Generate the code for Stack & Queues operation and applications. (PO - b, c, d, e, f, i, h, l)

3. Write the algorithm for adding, deleting and searching the node in Binary and BST.

(PO - b, c, d, e, f, i, k, l)

4. Write the algorithm for graph traversal. (PO - b, d, f, i)

5. Identify the appropriate data structure for a given problem. (PO - a, b, k, l)

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Tanenbaum, “Data Structures with C”, McGraw Hill 2000

2. Richard Gilberg and Behrouz Forouzan,”Data Structures: A Pseudo code approach with C”, 2nd


REFERENCES:

1. Robert L Kruse, “Data Structures and Program Design”, Prentice Hall 1994.

2. Ullman and Hopcroft, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Addison-Wesley, 2006.

3. Thomas Corman, Horowitz and Sartaj Sahni,”Introduction to Algorithms”, 2nd edition, PHI,

2006.

4. E. Balagurusamy, “Programming in ANSI C”,Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.

22

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-IV

Subject Code : ECMAT41 Credits: 4:0:0

Prerequisites : NIL Contact Hours: 56

Course Coordinator:

Course Objectives:

Learn the concepts of finite differences, interpolation and it applications.


Understand the concepts of calculus of functions of complex variables.

Learn the concepts of random variables and probability distributions.


UNIT - I

Finite Differences and Interpolation: Forward, Backward differences, Interpolation, Newton-

Gregory Forward and Backward Interpolation, formulae, Lagrange interpolation formula and

Newton divided difference interpolation formula (no proof).

Numerical Differentiation and Numerical Integration: Derivatives using Newton-Gregory

forward and backward interpolation formulae, Newton-Cotes quadrature formula, Trapezoidal

rule, Simpson 1/3rd rule, Simpson 3/8th rule.

Partial Differential Equations: Introduction to PDE, Solution of PDE – Direct integration,

Method of separation of variables.

UNIT - II

Complex Variables-I: Functions of complex variables ,Analytic function, Cauchy-Riemann


Construction of analytic functions.

Transformations: Conformal transformation, Discussion of the transformations - ,,2 zewzw

and )0(2

zz

azw , Bilinear transformation.

UNIT – III

Complex Variables-II: Complex integration, Cauchy theorem, Cauchy integral formula. Taylor

and Laurent series (statements only). Singularities, Poles and residues, Cauchy residue theorem

(statement only).

UNIT – IV

Random Variables: Random Variables (Discrete and Continuous), Probability density function,

Cumulative distribution function, Mean, Variance, Moment generating function..



Conditional expectation, Simulation of random variables.

UNIT – V

Stochastic Processes: Introduction, Classification of stochastic processes, Discrete time

processes, Stationary, Ergodicity, Autocorrelation, Power spectral density.

23




TEXT BOOKS:

1. Erwin Kreyszig – Advanced Engineering Mathematics – Wiley publication – 10th edition-2015

2. B.S.Grewal-Higher Engineering Mathematics-Khanna Publishers-42nd edition-2012

3. R.E. Walpole, R. H. Myers, R. S. L. Myers and K. Ye – Probability and Statistics for Engineers

and Scientists – Pearson Education – Delhi – 8th edition – 2007.

REFERENCES:

1. Dennis G. Zill and Patric D. Shanahan- A first course in complex analysis with applications- Jones

and Bartlett publishers-second edition-2009.

2. Glyn James- Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics-PearsonEducation-4th edition-2010

3. Kishor S. Trivedi – Probability & Statistics with reliability, Queuing and Computer Science

Applications – PHI – 2nd edition – 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Apply the given data for equal and unequal intervals to find a polynomial function for estimation,

compute maxima, minima, curvature, radius of curvature, arc length, area, surface area, volume

using numerical differentiation and solve partial differential equations analytically and

numerically. (PO – a, b, e, h, k)

2. Analyze functions of complex variable in terms of continuity, differentiability, analyticity and

apply Cauchy-Riemann equations and harmonic functions to solve problems of Fluid Mechanics,

Thermo Dynamics and Electromagnetic fields and geometrically interpret conformal and bilinear

transformations. (PO - a, b, e, h, k)

3. Develop singularities of complex functions and determine the values of integrals using residues.

(PO - a, b, h,)

4. Express the probability distribution arising in the study of engineering problems and their

applications. (PO - a, b, e, h, i, j)

5. Apply the stochastic process and Markov Chain in predictions of future event s.

(PO - a, b, c, e, j)

24

LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND APPLICATIONS


Prerequisites: Analog Electronics and Circuits Contact Hours: 42


Course objectives:

Understand the concepts of practical op-amp specifications, characteristics, biasing of op-amps

Learn the use of op-amp in DC and AC applications

Understand the frequency response and bandwidth performance of practical op-amps

Apply op-amp in instrumentation amplifier, rectifier multiplier, divider and waveform generation and other nonlinear applications

Employ op-amp in regulation

Study the concept of 555 timer, PLL and its applications

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Operational Amplifier Fundamentals: Basic Op-Amp circuits, Op-amp parameters- input and

Output voltage, CMRR and PSRR, offset voltages and currents, Input and Output Impedances, Slew

rate and Frequency limitations; Op-amp as DC Amplifiers-Biasing Op-amps, Direct Coupled Voltage

follower, Non Inverting Amplifiers , Inverting Amplifiers, Summing Amplifiers, Difference

Amplifiers.

UNIT – II Op-Amps as AC amplifiers: Capacitor coupled Voltage followers, High Input Impedance Capacitor

coupled Voltage followers, Capacitor coupled Non Inverting Amplifiers, High Input Impedance

Capacitor coupled Non Inverting Amplifiers, Capacitor coupled Inverting Amplifiers, setting the

Upper cut off frequency; Capacitor coupled difference amplifiers

UNIT – III

Op-Amps Applications: Instrumentation Amplifiers, Precision rectifiers, Limiting Circuits,

Clamping circuits, Peak Detectors, Sample and Hold circuits, Triangular/Rectangular wave generator,

Phase shift Oscillator, Wein Bridge Oscillator

UNIT – IV

Nonlinear Circuit Applications: Crossing detectors, Inverting Schmitt trigger circuits, Monostable

and Astable multivibrator, Active filters/First and second order Low and High pass filter, First order

two Op-amp Band pass and band reject filters, Series Op-amp Regulator, IC 723 general purpose

Regulator.

UNIT – V

Other Linear IC Applications: 555 Timer – Basic Timer circuit used as Astable multivibrator and

Monostable multivibrator, PLL operating principles, DAC and ADC techniques.

25

TEXT BOOKS: 1. David A. Bell, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear IC’s”, PHI/Pearson, 3rd edition, 2011.

2. D. Roy Choudhury and Shail B. Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age International, 2nd


REFERENCES: 1. Robert. F. Coughlin & Fred F. Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated Circuits”,

PHI/Pearson, 2006.

2. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, “OP-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits “, PHI/Pearson, 4th Edition,

2004.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze the op-amp characteristics in DC amplifier. (PO - a, b, c, d, k)

2. Analyze the op-amp characteristics in AC amplifier. (PO - a, b, c, d, k)

3. Design of signal processing circuits using Op-amp. (PO - a, b, c, k)

4. Analyze op-amp non-linear applications, regulators, and filters. (PO - a, b, c, d, k)

5. Analyze 555 timer, PLL and converters. (PO - a, b, k)

26

DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN WITH FPGA


Prerequisites: Digital Electronics Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinator: V. Anandi

Course objectives:

Appreciate the importance of HDLs in digital designs.

Understand the lexical conventions of VERILOG HDL at dataflow, gate level, structural, behavioral and RTL levels

Understand EDA folw in digital design and model combinational and sequential circuits at behavioral, structural and RTL level.

Develop test benches to simulate combinational and sequential circuits in simulation

environment.

Interpret Verilog constructs for logic synthesis.

Discriminate between manual and automated logic synthesis and their impact on design.

Discuss different FPGA architectures.

Design synchronous sequential circuits using FSM through Verilog modelling.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Overview of Digital Design with Verilog HDL: Evolution of computer aided digital design-

Emergence of HDLs-Typical design flow-importance of HDLs-Verilog HDL-Design Methodologies-

modules-instances-components of simulation-example-basic concepts.

Modules and ports: Modules-ports-Rules-Hierarchical Names.

Gate Level modeling and Data flow modeling: Gate Types-Gate Delays-Examples-Continuous

assignment-Delays-Expressions, Operators, Operands-Operator Types-Examples.

UNIT – II

Behavioral modeling: Structured procedures, Procedural assignments, Timing controls, conditional

statement, Multi way branching, Loops: Sequential and parallel blocks, generate blocks, Examples.

Tasks and Functions: Difference between Tasks and Functions, Tasks, Functions, Automatic

Functions, Constant Function, Signed Functions.

UNIT – III

Logic synthesis with Verilog HDL: Logic synthesis, Verilog HDL Synthesis, Interpretation of

Verilog Constructs, Synthesis Design flow, examples, verification of the gate level netlist, modeling

tips for logic synthesis.

Timing and delays: Types of delay models, modeling, timing checks, delay back annotation

UNIT – IV

FPGA based systems: Introduction-basic concepts-Digital design with FPGAs-FPGA based system

design.

27

FPGA Fabrics: FPGA architectures, SRAM based FPGAs, Chip I/O, Circuit design of FPGA fabrics,

Architecture of FPGA fabrics, SPARTAN-III and above versions, FPGA connectors

UNIT – V

Synchronous sequential circuits: Moore and Mealy machines, definition of state machines, state

machine as sequence controller, Design of state machines, state table, state assignment, transition

excitation table, logic realization, Design example Serial adder.

Case studies: Traffic light controller, simple processor.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Samir Palnitkar, “VERILOG HDL-A Guide to digital design and synthesis”- 2nd edition, Pearson

education, 2003.

2. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA based system design”, Pearson Education, 2005.

3. Stephen Brown and ZvonkoVranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital logic with VERILOG design”, Tata

Mc-Graw Hill, 2010.

REFERENCES:

1. Ming-Bo- Lin, “Digital System Designs & Practices using verilog HDL & FPGA”, Wiley India,

2012.

2. Ian Grout, “Digital System Design using CPLDs and FPGAs”, Elsevier, 2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand the basics of digital design and lexical conventions of HDL. (PO - a, c, d, f)

2. Design, apply, and test combinational and sequential circuits, in HDL to verify the functionality.

(PO - b, c, d, f, k)

3. Appreciate the usage of EDA tools in digital circuit functional verification, logic synthesis and

understand design tradeoffs. (PO - b, c, f, h, k, l)

4. Discuss the different implementation fabrics and various FPGA families. (PO - c, d, e, f, h, i, j, k)

5. Design and model FSM to control complex digital systems. (PO - a, b, d, f, j, k)

28

SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS


Prerequisites : Engineering Mathematics Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinator: H. Mallika

Course objectives:

Appreciate the significance of signals, systems and processing in different application.

Understand the properties of various signals and systems.

Discuss the continuous and discrete time systems

Discuss the properties of LTI systems and convolution.

Appreciation of differential and difference equations in describing an LTI Systems.

Appreciate the significance of Fourier Transform, DTFT and Z-Transform in representing the signals.

Discuss the various properties of Fourier Transform and Z-Transform.

Use of Z-Transform in characterization of LTI systems.

Express the system in block diagram representation.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Introduction to signals and systems: Continuous and Discrete time signals, transformation of the

independent variables, Exponential and Sinusoidal signals, unit impulse and step signals, CT and DT

systems, basic system properties.

UNIT – II

LTI Systems: Discrete time LTI systems, continuous time LTI systems, properties of LTI systems,


UNIT – III


periodic signals, properties of CTFT: Linearity, time shifting, conjugation and conjugate symmetry,

differentiation and integration, time and frequency scaling, duality, Perseval’s relation, convolution

and multiplication

UNIT – IV


periodic signals, Z-Transform, ROC of Z-Transform, Inverse Z-Transform (Partial fraction and power

series only) Geometric evaluation of FT from pole zero plot, properties of ZT (Linearity, time shifting,

scaling in the Z-domain, time expansion)

UNIT – V

Continuation of properties of ZT and analysis of LTI Systems: Properties of ZT (conjugation, convolution, differentiation in Z-domain, initial value theorem), analysis and characterization of LTI

system using Z-transform, system function, algebraic and block diagram representation, unilateral Z-

transform.

29

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Alan S. Willsky with Hamid Nawab “Signals and Systems” 2nd edition PHI

Publications.

REFERENCES:

1. John G. Proakis and Dimitris G. Manolakis,“Digital Signal Processing, Principal, Algorithms and

Applications”, Fourth edition, PHI Publications.

2. Haykin and B. Van Veen,”Signals and Systems”, Second Edition, Wiley, 2003.

Course Outcomes:

1. Classify the given CT and DT systems and signals. (PO - a, b, k)

2. Calculate the response of the system by the process of convolution. (PO - a, b, d, k)

3. Analyze the system by difference and differential equations. (PO – a, b, c)

4. Apply FT and analyze the signals and systems. (PO – a, b, c, d, k)

5. Apply ZT and analyze the signals and systems. (PO – a, b, c, d, k)

30

CONTROL SYSTEMS


Prerequisites: Network Analysis Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinator: V. PunyaPrabha

Course objectives:

Appreciate the significance and types of control systems.

Compute the transfer function and impulse response of mechanical and analogous systems.

Apply the concept of block diagram reduction techniques and signal flow graph to find the transfer function of a given system.

Understand the time response of first and second order systems for different test input signals.

Understand the method to find steady state error and error constants of a given system.

Understand the concept of stability of control systems and stability analysis using RH Criterion and Nyquist Criterion.

Apply the concept of root locus in the construction of root loci in order to determine the stability

of a given transfer functions.

Analyze the frequency response concepts for assessment of relative stability using Bode plots.

Apply the correlation between time and frequency response.

Understand the classification of controllers and analysis of different types of controllers

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Introduction: Examples of control systems, closed loop vs open loop control systems, classification

of control systems.

Mathematical modeling of linear systems: Transfer function and impulse response: mechanical

systems, analogous systems, Block diagram and signal flow graph, applications: industrial automation,

robotics, mechanical systems and biomedical control.

UNIT – II




UNIT – III


application of Routh stability criterion, Nyquist plot: polar plots, Nyquist stability criterion, assessment

of relative stability using Nyquist criterion.

UNIT – IV

Root-locus technique: Introduction, the root-locus concepts, construction of root loci.

31

UNIT – V


Bode plots.

Frequency domain specifications: Correlation between time and frequency response.

Controllers: Classification of controllers, Brief analysis of different types of controllers. Applications:

industrial process and control, robotics.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. K. Ogata,“Modern Control Engineering”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2001.

2. David K. Cheng, Narosa,“Analysis of Linear Systems”, Publishing House, 5th Edition, 1986.

3. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal,“Control System Engineering”, 5th Edition, New Age International

Publishers, 2007.

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ mathematical modeling techniques to determine the transfer function of a given system.

(PO – a, b, h, k)

2. Analyze the time response of first and second order systems for different test input signals.

(PO – a, b, c, h, k)

3. Apply the concept of RH criterion and Nyquist criterion to determine the stability of a given transfer

functions. (PO – a, b, f, h, k)

4. Interpret the concept of root locus to determine the stability of a given transfer function.

(PO – a, b, f, h, k)

5. Understand frequency domain specification fundamentals and sketch a Bode plot to analyze

stability of a given systems. (PO – a, b, c, f, h, k)

32

ELECTROMAGNETICS


Prerequisites: Basic Science and Vector Analysis Contact hours:56


Course Objectives:

Illustration of Coulomb’s law in understanding force and electric field intensity, and apply the

concept of electric flux and Gauss law in line charge, surface charge and volume charge

distributions.

Understand the concept of divergence, potential, energy densities in electrostatic fields, and boundary conditions for electric field and flux densities

Analysis of capacitance of various configurations, and applications of Laplace’s/Poisson’s equations.

Application of Biot-Savart’s law, Ampere’s law, and Stoke’s theorem.

Illustration of Lorentz force equation, and Maxwell’s equations for time-varying fields

Application of Maxwell’s equations in propagation of TEM/TM/TE waves in various media.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I


intensity, Field due to a Continuous Volume Charge Distribution, Field of Line Charge, Field of a

Sheet of Charge. Electric Flux Density, Gauss's Law: Electric Flux Density, Gauss's Law,

Application of Gauss's Law, Some Symmetrical Charge distributions

UNIT – II

Divergence, Energy and Potential: Differential Volume element, Divergence, Maxwell's First

Equation (Electrostatics), vector operator and Divergence Theorem, Energy expended in moving a

point charge in an electric field, Line integral, Definition of Potential Difference and Potential,

Potential field of a point charge, Potential field of a system of charges: conservative property, Potential

Gradient, Energy Density in the Electrostatic Field.

UNIT – III


dielectric materials, Capacitance, Several Capacitance examples, Derivation of Poisson's and Laplace's

equations, Examples of the solution of Laplace's equation, Examples of the solution of Poisson's

equation.

Steady Magnetic Field: Biot-Savart's Law, Ampere's circuital law, Curl, Stoke's theorem.

33

UNIT – IV

Magnetic Forces, Time-varying Fields and Maxwell's Equations: Magnetic flux and Magnetic flux

Density, Scalar and Vector Magnetic Potentials, Force on a Moving Charge, Force on a Differential

Current Element, Force between Differential Current Elements, Retarded Potential, Faraday's law,

Displacement Current, Maxwell's Equations in Point Form, Maxwell's Equations in Integral Form.

UNIT – V

The Uniform Plane Wave: Wave propagation in Free Space, Wave propagation in Dielectrics,

Poynting's Theorem and Wave Power, Propagation in good conductors: Skin effect, Wave Polarization

(Qualitative treatment).

Waveguides: Rectangular Waveguides, Analysis of field components, cut off frequency, group and

phase velocities, phase constants, dominant modes.

TEXT BOOK:

1. William H. Hayt Jr., John A. Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, TMH, 7th Edition, 2005.

REFERENCES:

1. Mathew N. O. Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press, 4th Edition, 2006.

Course Outcomes:

1. Apply different laws of electrostatics such as Coulomb’s law, and Gauss’s law. (PO – a, h, k)

2. Analyze the divergence of electric flux, interpret the potential and energy content in the presence

of static charge distributions. (PO – a, b, h, k)

3. Employ boundary conditions in the analysis of capacitances of various configurations and analyze

the Application of Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations in electrostatic fields. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)

4. Employ Biot – Savart’s law and Ampere’s law for various current distributions. (PO – a, b, h, k)

5. Apply the concept of Faraday’s law and Lenz’ law in obtaining Maxwell’s equations for time

varying fields and apply them in study of propagation of waves. (PO – b, d, f, h, k)

34

LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LABORATORY


Prerequisites: Analog Electronics Contact Hours:14


Course objectives:

Learn the method of designing and to conduct by using hardware components for different

applications circuits using Op-Amp such as inverting, non-inverting, summer, integrator

differentiator, filter and oscillator.

Understand the designing method and conduct the experiment for the circuit of Precision rectifier using Op-Amp.

Design the circuit and test the designed circuit to generate square wave using IC 555 timer and Op-Amp for various duty cycle

Analyze analog to digital signal conversion and vice-versa

Course Contents:

1. To Study the following applications of Op-Amp as :

i) Design Inverting and Non Inverting Amplifier for suitable Gain.

ii) Design Inverting summer to sum Two voltage Sources with Suitable Gain.

iii) To study the frequency response of Voltage follower.

2. To design Op-Amp Differentiator and Integrator circuit and draw the output waveforms for

different type of signals at different RC time constants.

3. To design and test Op-Amp Half and Full wave Precision rectifiers and to observe Transfer

Characteristics.

4. To design and test Inverting Schmitt trigger for the given UTP, LTP and Vsat . Also observe

Transfer Characteristics.

5. i) To design Op-Amp Monostable Multivibrator and analyze the capacitor waveforms for

given RC time constants.

ii) To design Op-Amp Symmetrical Astable Multivibrator and unsymmetrical Astable

Multivibrator for duty cycle less than or greater than 50%.

6. To design and test function generator (Triangular waveform) using op-amp.

7. To design and test application of 555 Timer as

i) Unsymmetrical Astable Multivibrator for duty cycle less than or greater than 50%.

ii) Symmetrical Astable Multivibrator.

iii) To obtain pulse width of Monostable Multivibrator by choosing suitable RC time

constant.

8. To Compare the Roll of rate of First and Second Order Low pass and high pass filters for

suitable gain.

9. To design and plot the frequency response of Op-Amp First order Band pass filter

10. To study the working of 4-Bit R-2R DAC and verify the practical analog output comparing

with theoretical values for different digital inputs.

11. To Design and study the working of 2-bit Flash ADC

12. To design Op-Amp Wein Bridge Oscillator for given frequency of oscillation.

35

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, “OP-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits “, PHI/Pearson, 4th Edition,

2004.

2. David A. Bell, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear IC’s”, PHI/Pearson, 2nd edition, 2008.

REFERENCES: 1. Robert. F. Coughlin & Fred F. Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated Circuits”,

PHI/Pearson, 2006.

2. D. Roy Choudhury and Shail B. Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age International 2nd


Course Outcomes:

1. Design different applications circuits using Op-amp as inverting, non-inverting, summer, integrator

differentiator, filter and oscillator. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, h)

2. Design the circuit of precision rectifier using Op-amp. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, h)

3. Design analog filters and verify the parameters using opamp. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, h)

4. Design the circuit to generate square wave using IC 555 timer and Op-amp for various duty cycle.

(PO – a, b, c, d, e, h)

5. Analyze analog to digital signal conversion and vice-versa. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, h)

36

DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN WITH FPGA LAB


Prerequisites: Digital electronics Contact Sessions: 12

Course objectives:

Design complex combinational and sequential digital circuits.

Design and model digital circuits with Verilog HDL at behavioral, structural, and RTL levels

Develop test benches to simulate combinational and sequential circuits.

Learn how the language infers hardware and to simulate and test that hardware ..

Learn about the use of FPGAs in digital design.

Course Contents:

All the Programs to be simulated using Modelsim and downloaded on to XILINX SPARTAN

3E FPGA for synthesis.

Tool used: XILINX ISE 9.1i

Simulation tool: Modelsim XE-Verilog

Synthesis tool: Xilinx XST

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. Basic Gates

2. Adders, Subtractors in all three descriptions

3. Decoders, Encoders, Multiplexers

4. Gray code conversion , Excess three conversion

5. Ripple carry adder , parity generation / detection

6. Design ALU, Comparators

7. Flip Flops (JK, SR, T, D) , BCD counter , Binary counter, Any mod counter

8. Shift registers

9. INTERFACING PROGRAMS i. Seven Segment Display

ii. DAC / ADC

iii. Stepper Motor

10. Serial Adder

Course Outcomes:

1. Use electronic design automation (EDA) tools in digital circuit modeling and simulation.

(PO – c, d, e, f, h)

2. Implement existing SSI and MSI digital circuits with Verilog HDL. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f, h, j, k)

3. Design and test circuits of increasing complexity and prototype with FPGA.

(PO – b, c, d, e, f, h, j, k, l)

4. Design and test sequential circuits using RTL description, interface stepper motor and DAC with

FPGA. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, g, i)

5. Design and verify the functionality of serial adder as FSM using HDL. (PO – b, d, e, f, h)


BANGALORE


SYLLABUS




V &VI Semester B. E.

2




Faculty List

Sl. No Name of the Faculty Qualification Designation






6. Dr. K. Manikantan Ph.D Associate Professor




10. Dr. V. Anandi Ph.D Associate Professor





15. S.L. Gangadharaiah M.Tech.,(Ph.D) Assistant Professor




19. C. SharmilaSuttur M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor



22. ReshmaVerma M.Tech (Ph.D) Assistant Professor









31. Ms. Chitra M M.Tech Assistant Professor




3


M. S. R. I. T., BANGALORE – 560054.




technical education















4


Program Educational Objectives of the Department of Electronics and Communication are:






5

Program Outcomes

POs are statements that describe what students are expected to know, attitudes they are expected to

hold, and what they are able to do by the time of graduation. Achievement of program outcome

should indicate the student is equipped to achieve the PEOs.



a. Recollect the essential descriptions from basic sciences, and apply them in E & C streams.

b. Demonstrate ability to identify, interpret and solve engineering problems.

c. Design circuits and conduct experiments with electronic systems, communication equipment,


d. Design systems/subsystems and devices

e. Demonstrate the capability to visualize, organize and work in laboratory and interdisciplinary

tasks.

f. Demonstrate skills using software tools and other modern equipment.

g. Inculcate the ethical, social and professional responsibilities such as project management and

finance.

h. Communicate effectively in oral /written form of scientific analysis or data.

i. Understand the impact of engineering solutions on the society and also will be aware of


j. Develop self-confidence and become excellent multi-skilled engineer, manager, leader and


k. Participate and succeed in competitive examinations/placement and show potential research

capability.

l. An understanding of engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s work, as

a member and leader in a team, to manage projects.

6



SI.

No.

Subject


Credits*

L T P Total

1. EC501 Analog

Communication

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

2. EC502 Digital Signal

Processing

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 4 0 0 4

3. EC503 VLSI Design and

Circuits

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 4 0 0 4

4. EC504 Microcontrollers Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 4 0 0 4

5. EC505 Microwave

Components & Circuits

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 4 0 0 4


– I

Electronics and

Communication

PS-E x x x 4

7. EC501L Analog

Communication Lab

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

8. EC502L Digital Signal

Processing Lab

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

9. EC504L Microcontroller Lab Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

Total 19+x x 3+x 26


7


SI.

No.

Subject


Credits*

L T P Total

1. EC601 Digital Communication Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 4 0 0 4

2. EC602 Analog and Mixed

Mode VLSI Design

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

3. EC603 Computer

Communication

Networks

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3

4. EC604 Antennas and

Propagation

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 3 0 0 3


Management

Electronics and

Communication

HSS 2 0 0 2


– II

Electronics and

Communication

PS-E x x x 4


– III

Electronics and

Communication

PS-E x x x 4

8. EC601L Digital Communication

Lab

Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

9. EC602L VLSI Lab Electronics and

Communication

PS-C 0 0 1 1

Total

15+x x 2+x 25


8



























ECPE23 Advanced Digital Logic Design Course

PS-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE24 Advanced Digital Logic Verification PS-E 4 0 0 4

9





Course objectives:






Course Contents:

UNIT – I







UNIT – II





SSB waves



carrier

UNIT – III




locked loop, non-linear model of phase locked loop, linear model of the phase locked loop, non-

linear effect in FM systems

10

UNIT – IV

Applications of AM and FM: AM radio (super heterodyne): block diagram of transmitter and

receiver, mixer, AGC, performance characteristics. FM radio: block diagram of transmitter and

receiver.

Elements of Colour TV: Frequency range and channel bandwidth, scanning and synchronization,


UNIT – V






TEXT BOOKS:

1. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 3rd edition, John Wiley, 1996

2. Simon Haykin, “An Introduction to Analog and Digital Communication”, 2nd edition,

John Wiley, 2003

3. R. R. Gulati, “Monochrome and Colour TV”, 3rd edition, New Age International (P) Ltd.

2004

REFERENCES:

1. B. P. Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, 3rd edition, Oxford


2. H. Taub, D. L. Schilling, “Principles of Communication Systems” 2nd edition, Mc-

Graw Hill, 1986

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe the generation and demodulation of AM and DSBSC systems. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)

2. Describe the generation and demodulation of SSB and VSB. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)

3. Describe the direct and indirect method of generation of FM and its detection.

(PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)

4. Employ AM and FM in radio and TV systems. (PO – b, c, h, i, k)

5. Understand noise performance of receivers. (PO – a, b, h, i, k)

a.

11

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING


Prerequisites: Signals and Systems Contact hours: 56


Course objectives:


Illustrate filtering of long data sequence using overlap add and overlap save method.



Understand FIR filters in Symmetric and anti-symmetric nature.

Understand the characteristics of analog filters.




Understand the Architecture overview of 54x and 67x processors.


Course Contents:

UNIT – I






UNIT – II

FIR Filters: Design of FIR filters: Symmetric and anti-symmetric FIR filters, Design of linear-phase


Structures for FIR Systems: Direct-Form Structures, Cascade-Form Structures and Lattice

Structures.

UNIT – III


filters, frequency transformations, design of analog filters, Digital IIR filter design using impulse



12

UNIT – IV


Hardware multiplier-accumulator, On-chip memory/cache, Extended Parallelism-SIMD, VLIW and



UNIT – V

TMS320C54x Processor: Architecture of 54x, Addressing modes: direct, Indirect addressing,

absolute addressing, memory mapped register addressing, stack addressing, circular and bit reversal

addressing. Instruction set: Load/store operations, Arithmetic operations, Logical Operations,

Program control operations. Implementation of FIR and IIR filters.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. J. G. Proakis and D. G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms and

Applications,” Pearson Education Asia/Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

2. Sanjit K. Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

3. Sen M. Kuo, Woon-Seng Gan, “Digital Signal Processors: Architectures,

Implementations and Applications”, Pearson Education Asia, 1st Edition, 2005.

4. Emmanuel Ifeachor, Barrie W. Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing: A Practical Approach”,

Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2002.

REFERENCES:

1. Oppenheim and Schafer, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”, Pearson Education, 2003.

2. Venkataramani B, Bhaskar M, “Digital Signal Processors: Architecture, Programming and

Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze the importance and application of FFT algorithm. (PO – a, b, c, k)

2. Design FIR and IIR filters which are used for various applications. (PO – b, c, d, k)

3. Employ digital filter structure to implement FIR and IIR expression. (PO – b, d, k)

4. Analyze the significance of DSP processor in real time application. (PO – a, b, h)

5. Describe processor architecture using macro model. (PO – b, d, h)

13



Prerequisites: Solid state devices and Technology Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinator: A. R. Priyarenjini

Course objectives:




Calculate propagation delay, noise margins, and power dissipation in the digital VLSI circuits.

Design Combinational (e.g., arithmetic) and sequential circuit.

Understand the concepts of testing in VLSI.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

INTRODUCTION: Historical perspective, circuit design example, VLSI Design methodologies,

hierarchy, Concept of modularity, regularity, locality, Design styles, Packaging, CAD. Fabrication of


UNIT – II

MOS Transistor: Structure, external biasing, operation, V I Characteristics, scaling, MOS

Capacitor, MOS Inverter: Static characteristics: Resistive load inverter, N type load, CMOS Inverter.

UNIT – III


resistance, capacitance estimation, Switching power dissipation, super buffers.

UNIT – IV






UNIT V



14

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Sung – Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici, “CMOS digital integrated circuits – Analysis and Design”,

Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2003.

REFERENCES:

1. Kamran Eshraghian, Dougles and A. Pucknell, “Essentials of VLSI circuits and systems”, PHI,

2005 Edition.

2. Weste and Eshraghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design” - Pearson Education, 1999.

3. John P.Uyemura, “Chip Design for Submicron VLSI: CMOS Layout & Simulation”, Thomson

Learning, 2005.

4. John P. Uyemura, “Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems”, John Wiley, 2003.

5. Jan M. Rabaey, “Digital Integrated Circuits”, PHI, EEE, 1997.

6. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design”, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 1997.

Course Outcomes:

1. Explain chip design options and design rules in VLSI. Illustrate the steps in CMOS VLSI

fabrication. (PO – c, d, h)

2. Apply basic principles to derive threshold voltages, and hence predict performance of various

inverter structures. (PO – a, b, c, h, k)

3. Describe the source of parasitics in MOS structures and their effect on circuit performance. (PO – a, b, c, d, h)

4. Employ different logic styles for circuit design and compare and contrast their performance. (PO – b, c, d, h)

5. Define different terms in the DFT domain and describe some important methods for DFT. (PO – d, h)

15

MICROCONTROLLERS


Prerequisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact hours: 56

Course coordinator : Dr. K. Manikantan

Course objectives:











Course Contents:

UNIT – I



architectures.





Programs.

UNIT – II




programs.





16

UNIT – III





UNIT – IV





Motor Interfacing.

UNIT – V

Introduction to MSP430: Low power features, Pin-out, Functional block diagram, Memory map,

MSP430 families.



modes of operation.




LCD.


TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kenneth J Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and Applications”,

Second Edition, Penram International 1996 / Thomson Learning, 2005.

2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin D McKinlay, “The 8051 Microcontroller

and Embedded Systems – Using Assembly and C”, PHI 2006 / Pearson 2006.

3. “MSP430 Microcontroller Basics”, John Davies, Elsevier, 2010.

REFERENCES:

1. M. Predko, “Programming and Customizing the 8051 Microcontroller”, McGraw Hill, 1999.

2. MSP430 Teaching CD-ROM, Texas Instruments, 2008.

17

Course outcomes:


microcontrollers. (PO – a, b, k)


ROM addresses, exchange data, predict the ranges of Jump. (PO – a, b, c)

3. Develop 8051 assembly language and C programs for time delays, I/O operations, and Serial

communication. (PO – a, b, c, f, h, k)

4. Develop programs using interrupts and write C programs to interface 8051 chip to interfacing

modules to develop single chip solutions. (PO – a, b, c, d, f, h, k)


microcontrollers to design low power embedded applications using MSP430.

(PO – a, b, c, d, f, h)

18





Course Objectives:

Apply knowledge of impedance matching for designing feed networks for devices like

antennas that may be fed using different transmission line.

Extend the applicability of Smith charts for analyzing active circuits.

Analyze systems that contain a combination of various microwave components like

directional couplers, filters, mixers etc.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I





UNIT – II






UNIT – III



networks and lossless networks, shift in reference planes; Basic properties of dividers and couplers –

three-port networks, four-port networks; T-junction power divider – lossless divider, resistive

divider; Wilkinson power divider – even-odd mode analysis.

UNIT – IV





19

UNIT – V





bunching process. (NO MATHEMATICAL ANALYSIS)

TEXT BOOKS:

1. David M Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, 3rd edition, Wiley, 2011.

2. Samuel Y Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”, 3rd edition, Pearson, 2011.

REFERENCES:

1. Annapurna Das and Sisir K Das, “Microwave Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 2006.

2. John Ryder D, “Networks, Lines and Fields”, 2nd edition, PHI, 2010.

3. R. E. Collin, “Foundations for Microwave Engineering”, 2nd edition, John Wiley, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Define line parameters and analyze various transmission lines and resonators. (PO – a, b, h, k)


impedance matching networks. (PO – a, b, c, h, k)

3. Employ microwave network analysis in design of multiport microwave networks. (PO – a, b, c,

d, e, h, k) 4. Describe and design microwave filters. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, h, k)

5. Apply different microwave diodes and mixers in microwave systems. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, h, k)

20





Course objectives:

Obtain a practical perspective of various communication modules

Implement various analog modulation and demodulation schemes using discrete components

List of Experiments





3. Class-C amplifier. Plot of efficiency vs load resistance.

4. Generation of AM using collector modulation. Plot of modulation signal amplitude vs

modulation index.

5. Demodulation of AM using envelope detector. Plot of AM output vs input signal



8. Generation of FM using IC 8038. Plot of frequency vs input dc and estimation of modulation

index





Course Outcomes:

1. Construct second order active filters for various frequency bands. (PO – b, c, e, f, h, j)

2. Design and implement modulation and demodulation circuit for amplitude modulation. (PO – a,

c, d, e, f, h, j) 3. Design and implement modulation and demodulation circuit for frequency modulation.

(PO – c, e, f, h, j) 4. Construct the circuit and study the characteristics of pre-emphasis and de-emphasis circuit.

(PO – c, e, f, h, j) 5. Construct RF up and down converter. (PO – c, e, f, h, j)

21

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY




Course objectives:

Gain a working knowledge of the design & implementation on various DSP operations using

MATLAB.

Obtain a practical perspective of convolution and filtering operations using DSP processor

Course Contents:

A. LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING MATLAB / DSP PROCESSOR


Folding)



a) Linear b) Circular

4. Solving a given difference equation with and without initial conditions

5. Computation of N point DFT of a given sequence and to plot magnitude and phase spectrum,






sampling method)


Bilinear Transform)






5. Realization of an FIR filter (any type) to meet given specifications. The input can be a signal


TEXT BOOKS:

1. “Digital Signal Processing using MATLAB”, J. G. Proakis, Ingle, MGH, 2000.

2. “Digital Signal Processors”, B. Venkataramani and Bhaskar, TMH, 2002.

REFERENCES:

1. “Digital Signal Processing using MATLAB”, Sanjit K Mitra, TMH, 2001.

22

Course Outcomes

1. Perform basic operations on a given signal. (PO – a, b, f)

2. Implement linear convolution and circular convolution. (PO – b, f)

3. Implement FIR filter and IIR to meet the given specifications. (PO – b, c, d, f)

4. Implement IIR filters to meet the given specification. (PO – b, c, d, f)

5. Implement convolution and filtering using DSP processor. (PO – b, f)

23

MICROCONTROLLER LAB


Prerequisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact Sessions : 12

Course Coordinator : Dr. K. Manikantan

Course objectives:









Understand assembly level programming and the C data types for MSP430 & write C programs

& assembly language programs using Code Composer Studio IAR workbench development

software.

LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS



2. Counters



PART B: INTERFACING









TEXT BOOKS:



2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin D McKinlay, “The 8051

Microcontroller and Embedded Systems – Using Assembly and C”, PHI 2006 / Pearson 2006.


24

REFERENCES:



Course outcomes

1. Use hardware and software development and debugging tools. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, )



tools. (PO – a, b, c, e, f)




generate waveforms using DAC. (PO – a, b, c, e, f)


8051 microcontroller. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, k)

5. Design low power embedded applications using MSP430. (PO – b, d, e, f, k)

25

DIGITAL COMMUNICATION


Prerequisites: Analog Communication, Signals and Systems Contact Hours: 56


Course Objectives:





Categorize different Line Codes in terms of their Power Spectra.

Understand ISI and ways to overcome the same.





Understand Coherent modulation techniques such as BPSK, ASK, DPSK and QPSK systems.


Understand Non-Coherent Modulation Techniques.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I




UNIT – II



UNIT – III




UNIT – IV




ASK, FSK and BPSK.

26

UNIT – V



BPSK, Synchronization: Carrier synchronization Symbol Synchronization.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Simon Haykin, “Digital Communications”, John Wiley, 2003.

2. J. Proakis, “Digital Communication”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2000.

REFERENCES:

1. K. Sam Shanmugam, “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, John Wiley, 1996.

2. Simon Haykin, “An Introduction to Analog and Digital Communication”, John Wiley, 2003.

3. Bernard Sklar “Digital Communications”, Pearson Education, 2007.

4. K. Sam Shanmugam, A. M. Breipohl, “Random Signals: Detection, Estimation and Data

Analysis”, Wiley, 1988.

Course Outcomes:

1. Sample a signal and reconstruct it at receiver. (PO – a, b, c, h, k)

2. Design a PCM, DPCM, DM and ADM systems. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)

3. Design Base Band shaping for data transmission. (PO – a, b, c, k)

4. Describe system level blocks for BPSK, ASK, DPSK and QPSK systems. (PO – a, b, c, h, k)

5. Using GSDP procedure, analyze coherent and no-coherent digital modulation systems and

understand the basics of spread spectrum technology. (PO – a, b, c, h, k)

27

ANALOG AND MIXED MODE SIGNAL VLSI DESIGN


Prerequisites: SSDT Contact hours: 42



Design single stage amplifiers using PMOS & NMOS driver circuits with different loads.

Quantitatively analyze a differential pair amplifier with differential loads.

Analyze the frequency response of single stage and multistage amplifiers.

Analyze the op-amp characteristics and its performance parameters.

Analyze the stability and frequency compensation of op-amp.

Study the fundamentals of data converters.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Introduction & Single Stage Amplifiers: MOS Device Basics, MOS Device, Models, RC Circuits,



UNIT – II

Differential Amplifier & Current Mirrors: Introduction to Differential Pair Amplifier,

Quantitative Analysis to Differential Pair Amplifier, Common Mode Response, Differential

Amplifiers with Different Loads, Effects of Mismatches. Simple Current Mirrors, Cascode Current

Mirrors, Differential Pair with Current Mirror Load.

UNIT – III

Operational Amplifiers & Frequency Response: Op Amps Low Frequency Analysis, Two Stage

Op Amps, Common Mode Feedback, Frequency Response of Common Source Amplifiers, Source



UNIT – IV

Frequency Compensation & Stability: General considerations, multi-pole systems, Phase Margin,



UNIT – V

Data Converters: Analog vs Digital Discrete Time-Signals, Converting Analog Signals to Digital




Flash, Pipeline ADC, Integrating ADC, Successive Approximation methods, Problems.

28

TEXT BOOKS:

1. B Razavi ,”Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, First Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001

2. R. Jacob Baker, Harry W Li, David E Boyce, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout, Simulation”,

PHI Education, 2005.

REFERENCES:

1. Johns and Martin “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, John Wiley Publications, 1997

2. P E Allen and D R Holberg “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Second Edition, Oxford

University Press, 2002.

3. B.Razavi, “Microelectronics”, First Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001.

Course outcomes:

1. Design a simple current mirror & cascaded current mirrors. (PO – a, b, c, d, f, j, k)

2. Design a multistage amplifier using single stage amplifier concept. (PO – a, b, c, d, f, j, k)

3. Determine the poles and zeros of a multi pole system & analyze the frequency response,

stability of the system. (PO – a, b, c, d, f, h, j, k)

4. Design an operational amplifier to optimize its performance metrics. (PO – a, b, c, d, f, h, j, k)

5. Analyze different ADC/DAC architectures. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, j, k)

29

COMPUTER COMMUNICATION NETWORKS


Prerequisites: Fundamentals of computing and Data Structures Contact Hours: 42



Understand the fundamentals of OSI model and the TCP/IP suite

Understand the functioning of addresses of the internet

Understand the concept of linking different types of networks in data communication.


Basic concept about the protocols for the transmission of frames.

Understanding the concepts of multiple access such as Random access, Controlled access and

Channelization

Discuss the basic concepts of IEEE standards for wired and wireless LAN, and its architecture,

Connecting devices.

Understand and model logical addressing, IPv4 and IPv6



Understanding the protocols used in transport layer.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Network Models: Introduction, Layered tasks, OSI Model Layers in OSI model: TCP/IP Suite,

Addressing, Telephone Network, Dial up Modem DSL, Cable TV for Data Transmission, FDDI,

SONET.

UNIT – II

Data Link Control: Framing, Flow and error control, Protocols, Noiseless channels and noisy


UNIT – III

Multiple access: Random access: CSMA, CSMA/CD, CSMA/CA, Controlled access Channelization

UNIT – IV

Wired, Wireless LAN and Connecting LANs: Ethernet, IEEE standards, Standard Ethernet, IEEE

802.11Bluetooth, Connecting LANS Connecting Devices, Back Bone Networks

30

UNIT – V





TEXT BOOKS:

1. B. Forouzan, “Data Communication Networking”, 4th Edition, TMH, 2006.

REFERENCES:

1. James F. Cruz, Keith. W. Ross, “Computer Networks”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2003.

2. Wayne Tomasi, “Introduction to Data communication and networking”, Pearson Education,

2007.

Course Outcomes:

1. Discriminate the functionality between the layers in OSI model and TCP/IP suite. (PO – b, h, k)


protocols. (PO – a, b, d, f, h, k)

3. Distinguish the IEEE standards designed to understand the interconnectivity between different

LANs. (PO – b, h, k)

4. Analyze the global addressing schemes in the Internet to configure the addresses for the subnet.

(PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)

5. Employ different algorithms to route a packet to the destination in different networks needed

for process to process delivery. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)

31




Course Coordinator: V Nuthan Prasad

Course Objectives:



Understand basic antenna parameters.





application.

Understand different propagation concepts like LOS, Ionosphere and surface wave.


propagation.

UNIT – I

Antenna basics: Introduction, basic antenna parameters, patterns, beam area, radiation intensity,

beam efficiency, directivities and gain, antenna apertures, effective height, bandwidth, radiation

efficiency, antenna temperature and antenna field zones.

UNIT – II

Point sources and arrays: Introduction, point sources, power patterns, power theorem, radiation

intensity, field patterns, phase patterns, Array of two isotropic point sources, principles of pattern

multiplication, broad side, end fire array and Hasen and Woodyard array.

UNIT – III

Electric dipoles and thin linear antennas: Introduction, short electric dipole, fields of a short

dipole, radiation resistance of short dipole, field patterns of dipole in general, λ/2 dipole, radiation

resistances of λ/2 thin linear antenna, long wire antenna, folded dipole antennas.



UNIT – IV

Antenna types: Yagi-Uda array, parabolic reflectors, log periodic dipole antenna, lens antenna,

rectangular horn antennas, introduction to smart antennas.

Microstrip Antennas: Salient features, Advantages and limitations, Rectangular microstrip

antennas, Feed methods, Characteristics of microstrip antennas.

32

UNIT – 5

Radio wave propagation: Introduction, free space propagation, ground reflection, surface wave,

diffraction, space wave propagation.



TEXT BOOK:

1. John D Kraus, Ronald J Marhetka, Ahmad S Khan, “Antenna and Wave Propagation”, Fourth

edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

REFERENCES:

1. John D Kraus, “Antennas”, McGraw Hill, 2nd edition, 1988.

2. Lamont V Blake, “Antennas: Fundamentals, Design, Measurement”, 3rd edition, Scitech

Publishing, 2009.

3. Constantine A Balanis, “Antenna, Theory, Analysis & Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd

edition, 1997.

Course Outcomes:

1. Evaluate various far-field antenna parameters and apply the Friis transmission formula.

(PO – a, b, c, d, j, k, l)

2. Analyze various linear arrays of point sources and apply the pattern multiplication principle.

(PO – a, b, c, h, i, j, k)

3. Classify different field patterns on dipole and loop antenna. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, i, k)

4. Describe the operation and applications of various aperture antennas. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)

5. Characterize the propagation of radio waves in the atmosphere. (PO – a, b, e, h, i)

33




Course Coordinator: Mr. C. G. Raghavendra

Course objectives:




context.

Develop reinforce managerial traits, motivation and the spirit of Organization.

Facilitate decision making process for setting up new enterprise.






Understand the meaning, identification, selection of project and also preparation and errors in

project reports.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I



Roles of management, Levels of management. Development of management thought, early


Planning: Nature, Importance and purpose of planning process, Objectives, Types of plans (meaning

only), Decision making, Importance of planning, Steps in planning and planning premises, Hierarchy

of plans.

UNIT – II


organization, Departmentation, Committees, Centralization vs Decentralization of authority and

responsibility, Span and control, MBO and MBE (meaning).Nature and importance of staffing,


UNIT – III


Communication meaning and importance, Techniques and importance of coordination, Meaning and


34

UNIT – IV


concept, Functions of an entrepreneur, Evolution of Entrepreneur, Development of Entrepreneurship.

Entrepreneur vs Intrapreneur, Entrepreneurship and Manager, Attributes and Characteristics of a

successful Entrepreneur, Role of Entrepreneur in Indian economy and developing economies with

reference to Self-Employment development, Entrepreneurship in India, Entrepreneurship – its




– government policy towards SSI, Different policies of SSI, Government support during 5 years



UNIT – V

Project Management: Meaning of project, Project Identification, Project selection, Project report -









TEXT BOOKS:

1. P. C. Tripathi, P. N. Reddy, “Principles of Management”, McGraw Hill, 2008.

2. Vasant Desai, “Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development & Management”, Himalaya

Publishing House, 4th Edition, 2010.

3. Poornima M Charantimath, “Entrepreneurship Development – Small Business Enterprises”,

Pearson Education, 3rd edition, 2006.

REFERENCES:

1. Robert Lusier, “Management Fundamentals – Concepts, Application, Skill Development”,

Thomson, 2006.

2. S. S. Khanka, “Entrepreneurship Development”, S Chand & Co, 3rd edition, 2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Identify, analyze and solve organizational problems. (PO – a, b, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, l)

2. Apply knowledge and skills required to function in a specific managerial discipline. (PO – a, b,

e, g, h, i, j, k, l) 3. Recognize and apply knowledge of environmental friendly resources and to utilize them

effectively and efficiently in a workplace environment. (PO – a, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, l)

4. Acquired all the necessary skills and knowledge to be a successful entrepreneur.(PO – a, b, d, e,

g, h, i, j, k, l) 5. Effectively prepare and present project appraisal and report. (PO – a, b, c, d, f, g, h, i, j, k, l)

35

DIGITAL COMMUNICATION AND MICROWAVE LABORATORY


Prerequisite: Analog Communication & LIC Contact Sessions: 12


Course Objectives

Verify sampling theorem

Implement various Digital modulation and demodulation schemes using discrete components

Multiplex signals in time-domain

Verify microwave three port and four port network analysis using scattering

parameters.(Power dividers and directional couplers)

Understand the wave propagation through the rectangular waveguide and to measure VSWR,

impedance and operating frequency.

Determine the gain and directivity and beam width of dipole and yagi antennas using strip or

micro strip line.

Observe the losses in optical fiber communication link.

List of Experiments

1. Verification of Sampling theorem using natural sampling and Flat Top sampling circuits


receiver.








7. To verify the power division and calculate insertion loss, isolation of Hybrid network

(Magic tee).

8. Measurement of losses in a given optical fiber (propagation loss, bending loss) and numerical

aperture.


test bench.

10. Measurement of directivity and gain of antennas: Standard dipole (or printed dipole), and Yagi

antenna (printed).

11. Determination of coupling and isolation characteristics of a stripline (or microstrip) directional

coupler

12. (a) Measurement of resonance characteristics of a microstrip ring resonator and determination

of dielectric constant

(b) Measurement of power division and isolation characteristics of a microstrip 3 dB power

divider.

36

Course Outcomes

1. Implement a natural sampling and flat-top sampling circuit to find Nyquist rate. (PO – a, b, c, e,

f, h, k) 2. Design and implement ASK, PSK, FSK, DPSK digital modulation schemes. (PO – c, d, e, f, h, k)

3. Obtain the transmission line parameters of different types of transmission lines. (PO – c, d, e, f,

h, k,) 4. Employ microwave network analysis in design of multiport microwave networks. (PO – b, c, d,

e, f, h, k) 5. Obtain the radiation pattern and calculate antenna parameters. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, h, k)

37

VLSI LAB




Course Objectives:

VLSI design concepts studied from 5th semester & MOS concepts studied in 6th semester are

employed in various MOS amplifier applications.

Course Experiments:

I: Digital Circuits using Microwind Tool:-


(i) Not gate (ii) 2 input nand gate and nor gate (iii) Ex-or gate (iv) full adder (v) 4-bit parallel adder


(i) JK Flip Flop using nand gates (ii) JK Master slave flip flop (iii) 3bit asynchronous up counter (iv)

3 bit SIPO shift register

3. Preparing Layout and checking DRC for combinational circuits/sequential circuits (i) Inverter (ii)

Full adder (iii) JK Flipflop


1. Design an Inverter with given specifications, completing the design flow mentioned below:


i) DC Analysis



c. Check for LVS

d. Extract RC and back annotate the same and verify the design

e. Verify & Optimize for Time, Power and Area to the given constraint

2. Design the following circuits with given specifications, completing the design flow mentioned

below:


i) DC Analysis

ii) AC Analysis



c. Check for LVS

d. Extract RC and back annotate the same and verify the design.




below:


i) DC Analysis

38

ii) AC Analysis



c. Check for LVS


i) Current mirrors


4. Design an op-amp with given specification using given differential amplifier Common source and

Common Drain amplifier in library and completing the design flow mentioned below:


i) DC Analysis

ii) AC Analysis



c. Check for LVS


TEXT BOOK:

1. “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, B Razavi, First Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001.



REFERENCES:

1. Johns and Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, John Wiley Publications, 1997.

2. P E Allen and D R Holberg, “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Second Edition, Oxford


3. B. Razavi, “Microelectronics”, First Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001.

Course Outcomes

1. Practically simulate the theory concepts using microwind and cadence simulators. (PO – c, d, e,

f, h, j)

2. Simulate the basic building blocks for required gain and stability. (PO – c, d, e, f, h, j)

3. Implement the basic building blocks used for construction of opamp. (PO – c, d, e, f, h, j)

4. Use op-amp and various components for constructing any data converter applications. (PO – a,

b, c, d, e, f, h, j)

5. Implement any digital circuit using microwind tool. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f, h, j)

39



























40




Prerequisites : Data Structures using C Contact Hours: 42 + 14

Course Objectives:

Understand OOP concepts – classes, objects



Course Contents:

UNIT – I





friendly functions

UNIT – II





UNIT – III



UNIT – IV


Applications


UNIT V

Skip lists and hashing: Linear representation, skip list and hash table representation



41

List of Programs:

1. Simple C++ program, use of cin and cout statements, program using setw manipulator.

2. Programs using functions: Passing arguments such as variables, reference arguments, pointers.

3. Programs using return from functions: reference arguments, structures, Recursions

4. Simple program using class and objects, nesting of member functions, Arrays within a class.







11. Construction of singly linked list and perform operations such as insertion, deletion, searching

and displaying.

12. Program to construct binary search tree, to insert a node, delete a node, display the tree

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Robert Lafore, “Introduction to OOPs with C++”, 4th edition, Sams Publishing, 2001.

2. E.Balaguruswamy, “Object oriented programming with C++”,TMH, 4th edition, 2011.

3. D.S. Malik, “Data Structures using C++”, India edition, Cengage Learning, 2003.

REFERENCES:

1. Gray Litwin, “Programming with C++ and Data Structures “, Vikas Publications, 2003.

2. Aaron M.Tanenbaum, “Data structures using C and C++”, Pearson Education, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Outline the essential features and elements of C++ programming. (PO – a, e, f, k)

2. Apply the concepts of class, method, constructor, instance, data abstraction, function

abstraction, inheritance, and virtual functions. (PO – d, e, f, k)

3. Understand operator overloading and the handling mechanism. (PO – d, e, f, k)

4. Apply data structures such as stacks and queues in programs. (PO – d, e, k)

5. Understand and apply fundamental algorithmic problems including tree traversals, graph

traversals, and shortest paths. (PO – d, e, k)

42

OPERATING SYSTEMS



Course objectives:

Understand the goals of OS

Study the different types of OS for different application



Study file handling and organization

UNIT – I

Introduction: Overview: goals, resource allocations, classes, batch processing. Multiprogramming, time

sharing real time and distributed OS

UNIT – II

Structure: Operation, structure of supervisor configuring and installing, OS with monolithic

structure, layered design virtual machine OS, kernel based OS

UNIT – III

Processes: Definition, programmers view and OS view, interacting processes, threads, processes in


UNIT – IV

File system: IOCS, directories, I/O organization, interface between file system and IOCS, allocation


UNIT – V




UNIX.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. D. Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems”, McGraw Hill, 2008

REFERENCES:

1. A. Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, G. Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”, Wiley, 8th Edition,

2008

2. M. Palmer, M. Walters, “Guide to Operating Systems”, 4th Edition, Course Technology, 2011

43

Course outcomes:

1. Understand the goals and application of OS. (PO – a, f, g)

2. Analyze a process and threads in UNIX. (PO – a, b, c, d)

3. Analyze memory handling. (PO – a, b, j, k)

4. Understand with file systems. (PO – a, b)

5. Design and organize scheduling. (PO – a, b, c, d, i)

44




Course Objectives:






Explain the basic concepts of interrupts and how interrupts are used to implement I/O control

and data transfers.

Explain the reasons for using different formats to represent numerical data.




UNIT – I





UNIT – II






UNIT – III



UNIT – IV

Basic Processing Unit: Register Transfers, Performing an Arithmetic or Logic operation, Fetching a

Word from Memory, Storing a Word in Memory, Execution of a Complete Instruction, Branch

instruction, Multiple Bus Organization, Hardwired Control, A Complete Processor, Micro

programmed Control.

UNIT – V



45




TEXT BOOKS:

1. Carl Hamacher, ZvonkoVranesic and SafwatZaky, “Computer Organization”, Fifth Edition,


REFERENCES:

1. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”,


2. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The

Hardware/Software interface”, Third Edition, Elsevier, 2005.

3. John P. Hayes, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,

1998.

4. V.P. Heuring, H.F. Jordan, “Computer Systems Design and Architecture”, Second Edition,


Course Outcomes:

1. Understand the basic hardware and internal architecture of a computer. (PO – a, e, f, i)

2. Employ various data representations and explain how arithmetic and logical operations are

performed by computer. (PO – a, b, c, d)

3. Design basic CPU, memory and I/O devices. (PO – d, e, f, k)

4. Design basic I/O system and interconnection structure of a computer. (PO – d, e, h, k)

5. Analyze performance of different architectural designs. (PO – b, e, h, j)

46

POWER ELECTRONICS


Pre requisites: Analog Electronic Circuits Contact Hours: 42 +14

Course Objectives:






Categorize different commutation techniques.



Understand the principles of inverters.

Course Outcomes:

UNIT – I






circuits.

UNIT – II




UNIT – III




UNIT – IV





47

UNIT – V



TEXT BOOKS:

1. M. H. Rashid, “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, 3rd Edition, Prentice

Hall, 2003.

2. G. K. Dubey, S. R. Doradla, A. Joshi, R. M. K. Sinha, “Thyristorized Power Controllers”, New

Age International Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, 1986.

REFERENCES:

1. P. S. Bhimbra, “Power Electronics”, Khanna Publication, 1995.

2. SCR GE Manual, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall, 1979.

Course outcomes:

1. Design drive controls for power semiconductor devices. (PO – a, b, c, e, f)

2. Analyze the operation of single phase and three phase rectifiers with various loads. (PO – b, c, d)

3. Design commutation circuits. (PO – c, d, e, k)

4. Design ac-voltage controllers for different configurations. (PO – c, d, e, k)

5. Analyze the operation of choppers and inverters. (PO – a, b, d, e, k)

48




Course Objectives:




instruments such as Voltmeters, Multimeters, Frequency meters, Phase meters, Tachometers,

PH meters etc.







UNIT – I








multimeter.

UNIT – II







UNIT – III





49

UNIT – IV





target system.



UNIT – V


choice (selection) of transducers, Digital Transducers -Optical encoders, Shaft (spatial) encoders.


Data loggers: Basic operation of data loggers.




TEXT BOOKS:

1. Albert D. Helfrick, William D. Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement

Techniques”, PHI, 2012.

2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements”, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2009.

3. M. M. S. Anand, “Electronic Instruments and Instrumentation Technology”, PHI, Eighth

printing, 2010.

4. H. S. Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation”, TMH, 3rd Edition, Seventh reprint, 2012.

REFERENCES:

1. A. J. Bouwens, “Digital Instrumentation”, PHI, 2007.

2. A. K. Sawhney, “Electrical and electronic Measurements and Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai&

Co, 19th Revised Edition 2011.

50

Course Outcomes:


electronic instrumentation systems. (PO – a, c, d, h)


designing and constructing the various new types of instruments for different applications. (PO – a, c, d, e, f, h, i, j, l)

3. Illustrate the applications such as design & testing of differential circuits and systems using

suitable instruments. (PO – c, d, f, h, i, j, l)

4. Select the instruments for observing the timing relationships, frequency spectrum, recording the

data and waveforms. (PO – c, d, f, h, i, j, l)


systems, digital process controllers etc. in the various industrial and electronic applications. (PO – b, e, f, h, i, j, l)

51




Course Objectives:




Design optimum and adaptive filters.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I


discrete time systems, Minimum phase and system invertibility

UNIT – II



random vectors.

UNIT – III

Non-parametric power spectrum estimation: Spectral analysis of deterministic signals, estimation


random signals.

UNIT – IV



UNIT – V



adaptive filters.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. D G Manolakis, V K Ingle and S M Kogon, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal Processing”,

MGH, 2000.

2. M H Hayes, “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”, John Wiley, 2002.

52

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe behavior of LTI systems to stationary signals. (PO – a, b, c, f, h)

2. Describe discrete time stochastic process. (PO – a, b, f, h)

3. Estimate autocorrelation and psd of stationary signals. (PO – a, b, c, f, h)

4. Design optimum FIR and IIR filters. (PO – a, b, c, d, f, k)

5. Understand and design optimum and adaptive filters. (PO – a, b, c, d, f, h)

53

IMAGE PROCESSING

Subject code: ECPE07 Credits: 3:0:1

Prerequisites: Digital Signal Processing Contact Hours: 42 + 14

Course objectives:





Study thresholding and different segmentation techniques.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I Introduction and Fundamentals: What is Digital Image Processing? Origins, Examples, Fundamental Steps, Components, Elements of visual perception, Image Sensing and acquisition, Image sampling and quantization, Basic relationship between pixels, Mathematical tools used in image processing.

UNIT – II

Intensity Transformations and Spatial Filtering: Basic intensity transformation functions. Histogram processing, Spatial filtering, smoothing spatial filters, Sharpening spatial filters.

UNIT – III


Transforms, 1D-DFT,2D-DFT, DCT, Basics of filtering in the frequency domain , Image Smoothing and

Image Sharpening using Frequency domain filters.

UNIT – IV Image Restoration: Model of image degradation/restoration process, noise models, Spatial filtering,



UNIT – V

Image Segmentation: Fundamentals, Edge detection, Edge linking via Hough Transform, Thresholding,

Region Based Segmentation, Segmentation using Morphological Watersheds.

List of Programs using Matlab:





Spatial Filtering



54




TEXT BOOKS:

1. R C. Gonzalez, R. E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd edition, Pearson Education, 2009.

2. R C. Gonzalez, R. E. Woods, S. L. Eddins, “Digital Image Processing using MATLAB”, 2nd

Edition, 2009.

REFERENCES:

1. Anil. K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Pearson, 2002.

Course outcomes:

1. Analyze general terminology of digital image processing. (PO – a, b, e, f)

2. Examine various types of images, intensity transformations and spatial filtering. (PO – d, e, f)

3. Employ Fourier Transform for image processing in frequency domain. (PO – a, d, e, f)

4. Evaluate the methodologies for image restoration and segmentation. (PO – d, e, f)

5. Apply image processing algorithms in practical applications. (PO – d, e, f)

55



Prerequisites: Analog Communication Contact Hours:56

Course Objectives:


systems.













UNIT – I








UNIT – II






UNIT – III





packing, Re-arrangeable networks, Strict sense three stage non-blocking networks.

56

UNIT – IV





UNIT – V











TEXT BOOKS:

1. J. E. Flood, “Telecommunication Switching Traffic and Networks”, Pearson Education, Fourth

impression, 2008.

2. Thiagarajan Viswanathan, “Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks”, PHI,

Thirty Fifth printing, August 2011.

3. Syed R. Ali, “Digital Switching Systems”, TMH, 2010.

REFERENCES:

1. John C. Bellamy, “Digital Telephony”, John Wiley, 3rd Edition, 2002.

Course Outcomes:


communication and apply the concept to different types of switching systems. (PO – a, b, g, h, j)


networks to provide required services to the customers at a satisfactory level. (PO – a, b, d, g, h,

j, k) 3. Estimate the optimum number of switching elements (cross points) from the knowledge of the

design of different switching networks. (PO – a, b, e, g, h, j, l)



networks. (PO – c, d, g, h, j)


maintainability of a switching system (Central Office). (PO – a, b, g, h, j, l)

57




Course Objectives:






Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Z plane analysis of discrete control systems: Impulse sampling and data hold, obtaining the Z-


plane, right half plane, obtaining ZT of function involving the term (1−𝑒−𝑇𝑠)

𝑠pulse transfer function;




PID Controller.

UNIT – II




response analysis.

UNIT – III



UNIT – IV




UNIT – V

Pole placement and observer design: Controllability, Observability, design via Pole Placement.

58

TEXT BOOK:

1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Discrete Time Control System”, PHI, Second Edition, 2008

REFERENCES:

1. C. L. Phillips, H. Troy Nagle, “Digital Control System Analysis and Design”, PHI, 1995.

2. M. Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Third edition, Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi, 2009.

3. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education, Eighth

Edition, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Develop pulse transfer function of discrete control systems. (PO – a, b, c)

2. Analyze the stability of DTCS. (PO – a, b, d)

3. Able to design DTCS using Root locus and frequency method. (PO – a, b, d)

4. Apply state space analysis to represent various canonical forms. (PO – a, b, c, d)

5. Able to design system using pole placement. (PO – b, c, d)

59

LINEAR ALGEBRA



Course Objectives:




simple proofs.


UNIT – I

Linear Equations in Linear Algebra: Systems of Linear Equations, Row reduction and Echelon

Forms, Vector Equations, Matrix Equation Ax = b, Solution Sets of Linear Systems, Linear

Independence, Introduction to Linear Transformations, Matrix of a Linear Transformation, Linear

Models in Engineering.

UNIT – II




UNIT – III

Eigen Values and Eigen Vectors: Characteristic equation, Diagonalization, eigenvectors and Linear

Transformations.

UNIT – IV



UNIT – V



TEXT BOOKS:

1. David C Lay, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2005.

2. Gilbert Strang, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, 3rd Edition, Thomson Learning Asia,

2003.

60

Course Outcomes:

1. Solve systems of linear equations using multiple methods, including Gaussian elimination

and matrix inversion. (PO – a, b)

2. Demonstrate understanding of the concepts of vector space and subspace. (PO – a, b, c, d)

3. Determine eigen values and eigenvectors and solve eigen value problems. (PO – a, b, c, d)

4. Apply principles of matrix algebra to linear transformations. (PO – a, b, c, d, h)

5. Demonstrate understanding of inner products and associated norms. (PO – a, b, c, d, h)

61



Prerequisites : Solid State Circuits and Devices Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:



Understand scaling laws.

Understand the principles of microsensors and microactuators.



Understand about RF MEMS and its applications.


Learn about ways to fabricate MEMS device

Understand the packaging needs for MEMS devices.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I





UNIT – II






UNIT – III


Nitride, Quartz, Poly silicon, Polymers, Materials for wafer processing, Packaging materials, Silicon

wafer processing, lithography, thin-film deposition, etching (wet and dry), wafer-bonding, Silicon

micromachining: surface, bulk, LIGA process, Wafer bonding process.

UNIT – IV






62

UNIT – V




TEXT BOOKS:

1. G. K. Ananthasuresh, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalakrishnan, K. N. Bhat, V. K. Aatre, “Micro and

Smart Systems”, Wiley India, First edition, 2010

2. T R Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacturing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd

Edition, 2008

3. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson International Edition, 2006

4. S D Senturia, “Microsystem Design”, Springer International Edition, 2001

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand microsystem and their applications. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, j)

2. Analyze Scaliy laws and operate of various practical MEMS systems. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, i, j, l)

3. Analyze the electrical and electronics aspect of MEMS system. (PO – a, b, c, i, j, l)

4. Employ various micromachining techniques for MEMS devices. (PO – a, b, c, d, i, j, k, l)

5. Describe various packages techniques for MEMS devices. (PO – b, h, i, k, l)

63



Prerequisites : Nil Contact Hours: 42 +14

Course Objectives:





UNIT – I


Architecture: Single Layer, Multi-layer Feed Forward Networks, Recurrent Networks, Learning

methods.

UNIT – II




UNIT – III




UNIT – IV


logic: Interpretations of predicate logic formula, inference in predicate logic.

Fuzzy logic: Fuzzy Quantifiers, Fuzzy inference. Fuzzy rule based system, defuzzification.

Applications: Greg Viot’s Fuzzy cruise controller, Air conditioner controller.

UNIT – V




TEXT BOOKS:

1. S. Rajasekaran, G. A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic

algorithms”, PHI, 2003.

64

2. S. N. Sivanandam, S. Sumathi, S N Deepa , “Introduction to Neural Networks using Matlab

6.0”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

3. Timothy Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, John Wiley and Sons, 2004.

REFERENCES:

1. Jacek M. Zurada , “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”, Jaico Publishing House.

2. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks- A Comprehensive Foundation”, Pearson Education, 2001.

3. B. Kosko, “Neural Networks and Fuzzy systems, Prentice Hall, 1991.

Course Outcomes:

1. Generate logic functions like AND, OR, XOR using learning rules. (PO – a, b, f)

2. Apply Hebb rule and perceptron learning rule for pattern classification problem. (PO – b, c, f, k)

3. Understand character recognition and data compression using back propagation network. (PO –

b, c, d, f, k)

4. Apply the rules of fuzzy logic for fuzzy controller. (PO – b, d, f, k)

5. Employ fuzzy set operations and defuzzification for control system applications. (PO – a, b, d, f,

k)

65



Prerequisites : Nil Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:


integrity.


Understand the basic categories of threats to computers and networks



Understand the principles of symmetric and asymmetric cryptography




UNIT – I

Introduction: Overview of modern cryptography, Number theory principles, Euclid’s algorithm,


techniques.

UNIT – II



UNIT – III



UNIT – IV


Decryption

UNIT – V


TEXT BOOKS:

1. W. Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.

2. B. A. Forouzan, “Cryptography & Network Security”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.

66

3. Neal Koblitz, “A Course in Number Theory and Cryptography”, Springer Verlag, New York

Inc. May 2001.

4. Hoffstein, Pipher, Silvermman, “An Introduction to Mathematical Cryptography”, Springer,

2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze and design classical encryption techniques, block ciphers and their applications for

computer networks. (PO – a, b, c, d, h)

2. Understand and analyze data encryption standard and advanced encryption standard.

(PO – b, c, d, e, h)

3. Design confidentiality schemes using symmetric encryption, public key cryptography, RSA.

(PO – a, b, c, d, h)

4. Design key management schemes, digital signatures and authentication protocols.

(PO – a, b, d, h)

5. Design steganographic schemes for various applications. (PO – a, b, g, h)

67




Course Objectives:




Understand the concepts of positioning of satellites in earth’s orbit.


Understand the concepts of wave propagation in the ionosphere.



UNIT – I





UNIT – II


Orbit Description, Keplerian Orbit, Kepler Elements, Satellite Visibility, Topo centric Motion,




UNIT – III





Ambiguity.

UNIT – IV



Clock Error, Cycle Slip, Noise Bias, Blunders, Tropospheric Effects on GPS oberservable, Multipath


68

UNIT – V




TEXT BOOKS:

1. B. Hoffman Wellenhof, H. Lichtenegger and J. Collins, “GPS: Theory and Practice”, 4th

revised edition, Springer, New York,1997

2. A. Leick, “GPS Satellites Surveying”, 2nd edition, John Wiley & Sons, NewYork,1995

3. B. Parkinson, J. Spilker, Jr.(Eds), “GPS: Theory and Applications”, Vol. I and Vol. II, AIAA,

1996

4. A. Kleusberg and P. Teunisen(Eds), “GPS for Geodesy”, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1996

5. L. Adams, “The GPS - A Shared National Asset”, Chair, National Academy Press, 1995

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ the concepts in the implementation of GPS system. (PO – b, h, k)

2. Describe the need for synchronizing GPS time with earth rotation. (PO – f, h, k)

3. Describe the importance of GPS navigation system in location identification. (PO – f, h, k)

4. Analyze the ionospheric effects on GPS observations. (PO – a, h, k)

5. Describe the interdisciplinary applications of GPS system. (PO – a, h, k)

69




Course Objectives:





Course Contents:

UNIT – I




UNIT – II





UNIT – III




balancing.

UNIT – IV





transition density.

UNIT – V




70

Software Design for Low Power: Sources of software power dissipation, gate level, architecture


TEXT BOOKS:

1. Gary Yeap, “Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design”, Kluwer, 1998.

2. K. Roy and S.C. Prasad, “Low Power CMOS VLSI Circuit Design”, Wiley, 2000.

REFERENCES:

1. Dimitrios Soudris, Chirstian Pignet, Costas Goutis, “Designing CMOS Circuits for Low

Power”, Kluwer, 2002

2. Jan M. Rabaey and Massoud Pedram, “Low Power Design Methodologies”, KAP, 1996.

3. P. Chandrakasan and R.W. Broadersen, “Low Power Digital CMOS Design”, Kluwer, 1995.

4. Abdellatif Bellaouar, Mohamed. I. Elmasry, “Low Power Digital VLSI Designs”, Kluwer,

1995.

Course Outcomes:

1. Investigate low power design techniques. (PO – b, d, f)

2. Classify the mechanisms of power dissipation in CMOS integrated circuits. (PO – a, b, d, i)

3. Model power dissipation and use optimization methods on various levels. (PO – b, e, f, h)


techniques. (PO – d, i, k )

5. Analyze and design low-power VLSI circuits using different circuit technologies and design

levels. (PO – b, d, e, h)

71



Prerequisites: Electronic Circuits Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:






system.

UNIT – I







UNIT – II


technique of translating user need to a well-defined requirement, Globalization and its impact on




UNIT – III





UNIT – IV





72

UNIT – V



TEXT BOOKS:

1. Merrill. I. Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2001.

2. Rao R Tum Mala, “Fundamentals of Microsystems Packaging”, McGraw Hill, NY 2001.

3. William D Brown, “Advanced Electronic Packaging”, IEEE Press, 1999.

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand the distinguishing features and difference between electronic system and circuits.

(PO – a, b, k, j)

2. Understand impact of global competition and innovation in system design. (PO – b, c, d)

3. Understand the process of translating user requirement to implementable steps and classify

systems as consumer, professional, defense. (PO – b, d, f, l)

4. Understand influence of microelectronics packaging on system performance and PCB

laminates structure and properties. (PO – d, f, i, h )


radar and work out system configuration for a consumer requirement. (PO – b, d, g, i)

73

DATA COMPRESSION



Course Objectives:




Apply compression methods to different data types which include audio, text and images.




and MPEG-7.

UNIT – I



UNIT – II




coefficients

UNIT – III


JBIG, JBIG2

UNIT – IV



UNIT – V



TEXT BOOKS:

1. Khalid Sayood, “Introduction to Data Compression”, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann

Publishers, 2006.

2. Ze-Nian Li, Mark S. Drew, “Fundamentals of Multimedia”, Pearson Education, 2004.

74

References:

1. David Saloman, “Data Compression: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, 2007.

2. M. Ghanbari, “Standard Codecs: Image Compression to Advanced Video Coding”, IEE, 2003.

3. Iain E. G. Richardson, “H. 264 and MPEG-4 Video Compression”, John Wiley, 2003.

Course Outcomes:

1. Explain the importance of data compression. (PO – a, b, k)


(PO – b, c, d, f, k)

3. Understand image compression standards like JPEG and JPEG 2000. (PO – b, c, d, f)

4. Describe different video compression standards. (PO – b, c, d, f, k)

5. Appreciate different audio compression standards. (PO – b, c, d, f, k)

75



Prerequisites: Microwaves and Antennas Contact hours: 56

Course Objectives:

Familiarize with the principle of radar and navigational aids

Understand the principles of radar and its use in military and civilian environment.

Familiarize with navigational aids available for navigation of aircrafts and ships

Obtain knowledge in radar applications

Design simple radar system for understanding vehicular movements.

Familiarize with different navigational systems and directional finders.

UNIT – I

Introduction to Radar: Basic Radar – The nature of Radar, Block diagram of simple Radar, Simple

form of the Radar Equation, Maximum Unambiguous range of Radar, Radar Block Diagram, Radar

Frequencies, Applications of Radar, Origins of Radar

The radar equation: Introduction, Range performance, minimum detectable signal, Receiver noise

and signal-to-noise ratio, Radar cross-section of Targets, Signal-to-noise ratio, PRF and Range

Ambiguities, System Losses, Plumbing loss, Beam Shape loss, Limiting loss, Collapsing loss, Non-

ideal Equipment, Operator loss, Field Degradation, Other loss factors, Straddling loss, Propagation

Effects.

UNIT – II

MTI and pulse doppler radar: The Doppler Effect, CW Doppler Radar, Coherent MTI, Delay Line

Cancelers, Filter characteristics of Delay-line canceller, Blind Speeds, Clutter attenuation, Blind

Phases, Digital MTI Processing, Pulse Doppler Radar, Moving Target Detector, Original MTD

Signal Processor, Performance and Limitations of MTI.

UNIT – III

Tracking radar: Tracking with Radar, Sequential Lobing, Conical Scan and Monopulse Tracking,

Tracking in Range, Target Acquisition, Comparison of Trackers, Automatic Tracking with

Surveillance Radars (ADT).

Radar Receivers: Radar Receiver, Receiver noise figure, Noise Figure of networks in cascade,

Effective Noise Temperature, Mixers, Low noise front ends, Radar Displays, Duplexers and

Receiver Protectors

76

UNIT – IV

Detection of signals in noise: Introduction, Matched Filter Receiver, Correlation Detectors,

Detection Criteria, Detector characteristics

Special Types of Radar: Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR), Air Surveillance Radar, Electronic

Counter Measure, Bistatic Radar, Millimeter Wave Radar.

UNIT – V

Navigational aids: Introduction, Four methods of Navigation.

Radio Direction Finding: The Loop Antenna, Goniometer, Adcock Direction Finders, Automatic

Direction Finders

Radio Ranges: Hyperbolic Systems of Navigation (Loran and Decca), Loran-A, Loran-C

Distance Measuring Equipment: Operation of DME, TACAN

Aids to Approach and Landing: Instrument Landing System, Ground Controlled Approach

System, Surveillance Radar Element, Precision Approach Radar

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Merrill I. Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd Edition, 2003.

2. N. S. Nagaraja, “Elements of Electronic Navigation Systems”, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2001.

REFERENCES:

1. Peyton Z. Peebles, “Radar Principles”, John Wiley, 2004

2. J. C. Toomay, “Principles of Radar”, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2004.

Course Outcomes:

1. Derive and discuss the range equation and the nature of detection. (PO – a, b, c, e, f)

2. Apply Doppler principle in the detection of moving targets and able to understand types of

Doppler radars. (PO – b, c, e, g, i, k)

3. Understand principles of tracking radars and refresh the principles of transmitters and receivers. (PO – a, d, f, h, k, l)

4. Analyze the presence of signals in noise and identify special types of radars. (PO – a, b, c, f, g, i, j, l)

5. Understand the principles of navigation, Radio direction finding, DME and TACAN systems. (PO – b, c, d, h, k, l)

77




Course Objectives:


Understand the significance of multiresolution analysis.



UNIT – I



UNIT – II


interpretation, Examples of orthogonal basis – generating wavelets, interpreting orthonormal MRAs


UNIT – III




UNIT – IV



UNIT – V



Textbooks:

1. Raghuveer M. Rao, Ajit S. Bopardikar, “Wavelet Transforms: Introduction to Theory &

Applications”, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2003

2. Agostino Abbate, Casimer M. DeCusatis and Pankaj K. Das, “Wavelets and Subbands

Fundamentals and Applications”,

3. K. P. Soman and K. L. Ramchandran, “Insight into Wavelets from theory to practice”, Eastern


78

4. Stephane G. Mallat, “A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing”, Academic Press, Second Edition,

1999.

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe scaling functions, continuous wavelet transform and different wavelet functions. (PO

– a, b) 2. Differentiate continuous wavelet and discrete wavelet transforms and analyze multi-resolution

analysis. (PO – c, d, k)

3. Develop bi-orthogonal wavelet basis function and apply to two dimensional signals. (PO – c, d,

e, f, k) 4. Apply wavelet transform for image and audio compression. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, k)

5. Employ wavelet transforms for denoising, speckle removal, object detection and data

communication. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, k)

79




Course Objectives:





Recognize the need for diversity techniques to overcome the effect of fading.

Appreciate the significance of multi-carrier CDMA system.

Understand the principle of CDMA and FHMA multiple access techniques.



Understand the concepts of detection of CDMA and FHMA signals.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I



Matched Filters, Rejection of Narrow band Interference

UNIT – II




UNIT – III



Rake Demodulator, Diversity and Spread Spectrum, Multicarrier Direct Sequence Systems, MC

CDMA System, DS CDMA System with Frequency Domain Equalization

UNIT – IV




80

UNIT – V



Signals

Textbooks:

1. Don Torrieri, “Principles of Spread-Spectrum Communication Systems”, 2nd Edition, Springer

Verlag, 2005.

2. Robert C. Dixion, “Spread Spectrum Systems with Commercial Applications”, John Wiley &

Sons, 3rd Edition, 1994.

3. Andrew J. Viterbi, “Principles of Spread Spectrum Communication”, Addison Wesley

Publishing Company, 2nd Edition, 1995.

Course Outcomes:


communication systems. (PO – b, c, h, i, k)

2. Employ the concept of frequency hopping to avoid jamming in digital communication systems.

(PO – b, c, h, i, k)

3. Analyze the significance of rake receiver in combating the effect of multi-path fading. (PO – b,

d, h, i, k)


control technique in CDMA system. (PO – b, h, i, k)


CDMA and FHMA signals. (PO – b, h, i, k)

81




Course Objectives:





Course Contents:

UNIT – I


Kepler’s 1st, 2nd and 3rd laws, Definitions of terms for Earth Orbiting Satellites, Orbital elements,

Apogee and Perigee heights, Orbit perturbations – effects of non-spherical Earth, Atmospheric Drag


UNIT – II



Transponders.

UNIT – III





UNIT – IV



UNIT – V



82

TEXT BOOK:

1. Dennis Roddy, “Satellite Communications”, MGH, 2nd Edition, 1996.

REFERENCES:

1. Richharia M, “Satellite Communication Systems”, 2nd Edition, MGH, 1999.

2. Timothy Pratt, Charles W. Bostian, Jeremy E. Allnut, “Satellite Communications”, John Wiley,

2nd Edition, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand the characteristics of satellite communication Orbits, Launching methods and

channels. (PO – c, g, h, i, k )

2. Apply analytical and empirical models in the design of satellite networks and space segments.

(PO – b, e, f, i, k, l)

3. Understand the traffic and queuing theory, space links, interference and analyze the

performance of satellite systems. (PO – e, g, h, i, j, l)

4. Understand the multiple division and modulation techniques for satellite access.

(PO – a, b, e, f, h, j, l)

5. Describe the various services offered in satellite communication systems. (PO – b, d, f, g, i, l )

83




Course Objectives:



Understand the transistor behavior for RF circuit design.



Identify the factors for bandwidth limitation.




Understand and design the RF Power amplifiers.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I






UNIT – II







UNIT – III

Smith chart and S-parameters: Introduction, The Smith chart, S-parameters, Band Width



84

UNIT – IV


amplifier, Bandwidth Enhancement with fT doublers, Tuned amplifiers, Neutralization and





range.

UNIT – V


mixers.



TEXT BOOK:

1. Thomas H. Lee, “The design of CMOS Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit”, Cambridge, 2nd

Edition, 2004.

REFERENCES:

1. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuit”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Design RLC networks and describe passive IC components characteristics. (PO – a, b, c, d)

2. Analyzer MOS behavior and distributed parameters for RF. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f)

3. Use Smith Chart for design of S-parameters. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f)

4. Analyze and design circuits for bandwidth extension and LNAs. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f)

5. Design mixers using LC networks and RF power amplifiers. (PO – c, d, e, f)

85

ADVANCED DIGITAL LOGIC DESIGN


Pre-requisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact hours: 42 + 14

Course Objectives:

Understand and apply the concepts involved in design of different logic elements and

building blocks in Digital circuits

Describe combinational and sequential circuits using the Verilog Language at behavioural

and structural levels

Understand and apply the concepts involved in the Digital design building blocks and

Verilog HDL.

Write Basic Test benches and verify the functionality of the designs.

Create Netlist and generate basic synthesis reports

UNIT – I

Digital Integrated Circuits: Moore’s law, Technology Scaling, Die size growth, Frequency, Power

dissipation, Challenges in digital design, Design metrics, Cost of Integrated circuits, ASIC,

Evolution of SoC ASIC Flow vs SoC Flow, SoC Design Challenges.

Introduction to CMOS Technology: PMOS & NMOS Operation, CMOS Operation principles,

Characteristic curves of CMOS, CMOS Inverter and characteristic curves, Delays in inverters,

Buffer Design, Power dissipation in CMOS, CMOS Logic, Stick diagrams and Layout diagrams.

Timing Concepts

UNIT – II

Digital Building Blocks: Basic Gates, Universal Gates, nand & nor implementations.

Decoder, encoder, code converters, Priority encoder, multiplexer, demultiplexer, Comparators,

Parity check schemes.

Multiplexer, De-multiplexer, Pass Transistor Logic, Application of multiplexer as a multi-purpose

logical element.

Asynchronous and synchronous up-down counters, Shift registers.

FSM Design, Mealy and Moore modeling

Adder & Multiplier concepts

86

UNIT – III

Logic Design Using Verilog: Evolution & importance of HDL, Introduction to Verilog, Levels of

Abstraction, Typical Design Flow, Lexical Conventions, Data Types

Modules, Nets, Values, Data Types, Comments, arrays in Verilog, Expressions, Operators,

Operands, Arrays, memories, Strings , Delays , parameterized designs

Procedural blocks, Blocking and Non-Blocking Assignment, looping, flow Control, Task, Function,

Synchronization, Event Simulation.

Need for Verification, Basic test bench generation and Simulation

UNIT – IV

Principles of RTL Design: Verilog Coding Concepts, Verilog coding guide lines: Combinational,

Sequential, FSM. General Guidelines, Synthesizable Verilog Constructs, Sensitivity List, Verilog

Events, RTL Design Challenges, Clock Domain Crossing.

Verilog modeling of combinational logic, Verilog modeling of sequential logic.

UNIT – V

Design and simulation of Architectural building blocks, Mini-project :Basic Building blocks

design using Verilog HDL: Arithmetic Components – Adder, Subtractor, and Multiplier design, Data

Integrity – Parity Generation circuits, Control logic – Arbitration, FSM Design – overlapping and

non-overlapping Mealy and Moore state machine design

Mini-Project: n bit Simple ALU design & verification

Text Books:

1. Morris Mano M “Digital Design” 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2014

2. Neil H. E. Weste, David Harris “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”

3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2004,

3. Samir Palnitkar, “VERILOG HDL – A Guide to digital design and synthesis”, 2nd edition,


References:

1. J. Bhasker, “Verilog HDL Synthesis: A Practical Primer” 3rd edition, Star Galaxy, 2005

2. A. Anand Kumar, “Fundamentals of Digital Circuits”, 2nd Edition, PHI Learning, 2012.

87

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand and apply Linux for Verilog simulator usage. (PO – b, c, e, f, h, k)

2. Understand basic VLSI principles. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f, h, j, l)

3. Understand and apply basic digital design principles. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, h, i, k)

4. Understand and apply the principles of verilog HDL. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, g, h , k, l)

5. Creating directed test benches, running simulations and analyse / debug results Netlist

creation, Basic Timing, Area and QOR Report generation. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, g, h, k, l)

88

ADVANCED DIGITAL LOGIC VERIFICATION



Course Objectives:

1. Get familiarized with the concepts of verification.

2. Identify different constructs, classes, assertions and coverage in System Verilog.

3. Acquire knowledge about layered test benches and Unified Verification methodology.

UNIT – I

Verification Concepts: Concepts of Verification, Importance of verification, Stimulus vs

Verification, Test bench generation, Functional verification approaches, Typical verification flow,

Stimulus generation, Direct testing ,Coverage: Code coverage and Functional coverage, Coverage

plan.

UNIT – II

System Verilog- language constructs: System Verilog Constructs- Data types: Two state data,

Strings, Arrays: Queues, Dynamic and Associative Arrays, Structs, Enumerated types. Program

blocks, modules, interfaces, Clocking ports, Mod ports.

UNIT – III

System Verilog-Classes and Randomization: SV classes: Language evolution, Classes and

Objects, Class Variables and Methods, Class Instantiation, Inheritance and Encapsulation,

Polymorphism.

Randomization: Directed vs Random Testing, Randomization: Constraint driven Randomization.

UNIT – IV

System Verilog- Assertions and Coverage: Assertions: Introduction to assertion based verification,

Immediate and concurrent assertions, Coverage driven assertion: Motivation, types of coverage,

Cover group, Cover point, Cross coverage, Concepts of binning and event sampling.

UNIT – V

Building Test bench: Layered test bench architecture, Introduction to Universal verification

methodology, Overview of UVM, Base classes and simulation phases in UVM and UVM macros,

Unified messaging in UVM, UVM environment structure, Connecting DUT-Virtual Interface.

References:

1. System Verilog 3.1a LRM, Accellera’s Extensions to Verilog

2. Chris Spear, Greogory J Tumbush, “System Verilog for Verification – A guide to learning test

bench language features”, Springer, 2012

89

3. “Step by Step functional verification with System Verilog and OVM”, Sasan Iman SiMantis Inc,

Santa Clara, CA Springer, 2008.

Course outcomes:

1. Understand the principle of verification. (PO – e, f, h, j, l)

2. Understand the OOPS concepts in System Verilog. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, h, j, k, l)

3. Build basic verification environment using system verilog. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, h, i, j, k, l)

4. Generate random stimulus and track functional coverage using System Verilog. (PO – b, c, d,

e, f, h, i, j, k, l)

5. Understand the concepts of layered test bench architecture and its components. (PO – b, c, d, e,

f, h, j, k, l)


BANGALORE


SYLLABUS




VII &VIII Semester B. E.

2

M. S. Ramaiah Institute of Technology, Bangalore-54 (Autonomous Institute, Affiliated to VTU)


Faculty List

Sl.







6. Dr. K. Manikantan Ph.D Associate Professor




10. Dr. V. Anandi Ph.D Associate Professor





15. S. L. Gangadharaiah M.Tech Assistant Professor














29. Jayashree S M. Sc Assistant Professor


31. Chitra M M.Tech Assistant Professor




M. S. RAMAIAH INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY, BANGALORE




SI. No.

Subject Code


L T P Total

1. EC701 IPR Electronics and Communication Engineering

2 0 0 2

2. EC702 Wireless Communication


3 0 0 3

3. EC703 Information Theory & Coding


3 0 0 3

4. Department Elective - IV


x x x 4

5. Department Elective - V


x x x 4

6. Open Elective Other Departments x x x 3

7. EC704 Project Work-I 0 0 6 6

Total 8+x x 6+x 25


VIII SEMESTER B. E. ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SI. No. Subject Code


L T P Total 1. EC801 Optical Fiber

Communication Electronics and Communication Engineering

3 0 0 3

2. EC802 Embedded System Design


3 0 1 4

3. Department Elective - VI


x x x 4

4. EC804 Project Work II Electronics and Communication Engineering

0 0 14 14

Total 6+x x 15+x 25


4




Subject Code

Subject Title L T P C























5




Course coordinator: Mrs. Jayashree

Course objectives:






Get introduced to various forms of Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs).

Know in detail about copyright and trademark.

Learn and acquire sufficient knowledge about patents, rights and obligations, procedure to

procure and maintain them.

Have basic training in drafting patent specification with special attention to claim drafting.

Get trained in patent search and use it for testing patentability of the invention.

Thoroughly understand the economic/commercial aspects of IPRs.


Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Basic principles of IPR laws: History of IPR – GATT, WTO, WIPO and TRIPs, Role of IPR in


Constitutional Aspects of Intellectual property, Different forms of IPR

UNIT – II




Case studies

UNIT – III




UNIT – IV

Patent: Criteria for patentability, Novelty, Utility and Inventive step, Non obviousness, Non

Patentable inventions. Pre-grant and post-grant oppositions, grant or refusal of patents, infringement

and prosecution in India,

6



UNIT – V



rights.


Case studies.

Text books:

1. P. Ganguli, “Intellectual Property Rights”, first edition, TMH, 2001.

2. Dr. B. L. Wadhera, “Intellectual Property Law Handbook”, 2nd edition, Universal Law

Publishing, 2002.

3. T. Ramakrishna, “Course Material for 1 year P. G Diploma in IPR”, First edition, NLSIU,

Bangalore.

References:

1. P. Narayan, “Intellectual Property Law”, 3rd Edition, Eastern Law House, 2001.

2. D. Baingridge, “Intellectual Property”, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.


Course Outcomes:

1. Appreciate contributions and limitations of GATT, reasons for formation of WTO and

functions of WIPO. (PO – e, g, h, i, j, l)

2. Describe concepts of original ideas not forgetting the copyright. (PO – e, g, h, i, j, l)

3. Use implication and protection for GI of goods. (PO – e, g, h, i, j, l) 4. Understand procedures to get Indian and other country patents by direct application or by PCT

route. (PO – e, g, h, i,) 5. Gain knowledge of various forms of IP, their infringements and their significance in

knowledge transfer and sharing. (PO – e, g, h, i, j)

7



Prerequisite(s): EC502-Digital Signal Processing, Contact Hours: 42

EC601-Digital Communication


Course Objectives







Course Contents:

UNIT – I





UNIT – II




UNIT – III


in a communication receiver, Survey of equalization techniques – Linear equalizations, Nonlinear


(MLSE) equalizer, Algorithms for adaptive equalization – Zero Forcing (ZF) algorithm, Least Mean


Diversity techniques: Practical space diversity considerations, polarization diversity, frequency


UNIT – IV




8

UNIT – V



TEXT BOOKS

1. T. S. Rappaport, "Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, Second Edition, Pearson


REFERENCES


2. W. C. Y. Lee, "Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory and applications, Second


Course Outcomes:


(PO – b, h, k)

2. Analyze the received power and field components of propagated EM waves.

(PO – a, b, c, h, k)


multi-path propagation. (PO – b, c, h, k)

4. Apply the different coding techniques and multiple access techniques in wireless

communication. (PO – b, c, h, k)

5. Describe the functional blocks of GSM architecture and Classify different types of channels in

IS-95 and CDMA-2000 standards. (PO – f, h, k)

9



Prerequisites : Probability and Statistical Theory Contact Hours: 42

Course Coordinator: Maya V Karki

Course Objectives:




Huffman algorithm

Discuss various types of channels used in transmitting information and explain the concepts of

mutual information, Shannon’s 1st and 2nd theorems.


Shannon’s limit

Discuss error detection and correction capabilities of Linear Block Codes, Cyclic Block codes

and implement them using feedback shift registers.

Use convolutional encoders for error control codes and appraise the concepts of state diagram,

tree diagram and trellis diagrams.


Course Contents:

UNIT – I




information content of symbols in long dependent sequences, Markov statistical model for

information sources

UNIT – II


Non-singular codes, Uniquely decodable codes, Instantaneous codes and optimal codes, Prefix of a



Shannon-Fano encoding algorithm (binary & r-ary coding), Huffman encoding algorithm (binary and

r-ary coding)

UNIT – III


channel, Joint entropy, Entropy function and equivocation, Priori and posteriori entropies,

equivocation, Mutual information, its properties, Rate of information transmission over a discrete

channel and Capacity of a discrete memoryless channel, Shannon’s theorem on channel capacity,

Special channels, Estimation of channel capacity by Muroga’s method, Continuous channels,

Maximization of entropy with peak signal limitation, Mutual information of a continuous noisy

channel, Shannon-Hartley law and its implications

10

UNIT – IV



LBCs, Encoding circuit for (n, k) LBC and related problems Syndrome and error correction,

Syndrome calculation circuit, Distance property, Error detection and correction capabilities of LBC,

SEC-Hamming codes, Hamming bound, Decoding using standard array

UNIT – V

High Level Error Control Codes: Binary cyclic codes, Structure and properties of cyclic codes, G

and H matrices for cyclic codes, Encoding using feedback shift registers, Syndrome Calculation

Circuit and Decoding using feedback shift registers, Syndrome calculation circuit, Binary BCH

codes Golay codes, Shortened cyclic codes, Burst error correcting codes, Convolutional codes –

encoders, State diagram, Code tree, Trellis diagram of convolutional codes, Decoding of

convolutional codes using Viterbi Algorithm.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. K. Sam Shanmugham, “Digital and analog communication Systems”, 2nd edition, John Wiley

Publications, 1996.

2. Shu Lin, Daniel J. Costello, “Error Control Coding”, Pearson / Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2004.

3. Simon Haykin, “Digital Communications”, 2nd edition, John Wiley Publications, 2003

REFERENCES:

1. Bernard Sklar, “Digital Communications”, 2nd edition, Pearson Education, 2007.

2. Simon Haykin, “Introduction to Analog and Digital Communications”, 2nd edition, John Wiley

Publications, 2003.

Course Outcomes:


Markov sources. (PO – a, b, c, k)

2. Use code properties to design Shannon-Fano codes and Huffman codes. (PO – a, b, c, d, k)

3. Categorize various channels for information transmission and interpret Shannon’s 1st, 2nd,


(PO – b, c, d, e, f)

4. Apply LBC and CBC in error detection and error correction. (PO – b, c, d, f)



(PO – b, c, d, e, f, h, k, l)

11



Prerequisites: Analog and Digital Communication Contact Hours: 42

Course Coordinator: Dr. T. D. Senthilkumar

Course Objectives:

Understand the basics of light propagation in fiber optic waveguide and optical signal


Learn the basics and applications of light sources and photo-detectors in optical

Communication.


optical link.

Learn the principles of WDM components, optical amplifiers, and optical networks.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I


communication, Basic optical laws and definitions, optical fiber modes and configurations, Mode

theory – overview of modes, key modal concepts, Single mode fibers - Mode field diameter,

propagation modes, Graded – index fiber structure.


loss, dispersion, Intra model dispersion, modal delay, group delay, material dispersion, waveguide

dispersion.

UNIT – II


efficiency and LED power, Laser Diodes – Laser diode modes and threshold conditions, Laser diode


Photo detectors: Pin photo detector, Avalanche photodiodes, photo detector noise, Detector

response time.



UNIT – III





12

UNIT – IV

Digital links: Introduction, point–to–point links, link power budget, rise time budget, Power

penalties.

WDM Concepts: WDM concepts, Optical couplers, 2 x 2 fiber couplers, star couplers, Isolators and

circulators, direct thin film filters, Active optical components – variable optical attenuators, tunable

optical filters.

UNIT – V





SONET/SDH rings.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communication”, 5th Edition, MGH, 2008.

2. John M. Senior, “Optical Fiber Communications”, Pearson Education, 2007.

REFERENCES:

1. Joseph C Palais, “Fiber Optic Communication”, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.

Course Outcomes

1. Apply the optical losses in the power budget estimation. (PO – a, b, h, k)

2. Employ suitable optical sources and detectors in the optical communication system to reduce

the coupling loss and joint loss. (PO – a, b, c, h, k)

3. Appreciate the importance of optical analog links. (PO – b, c, h, k)

4. Employ power budget and rise-time budget analysis in digital optical links. (PO – b, c,

h, k)

5. Demonstrate the principle of optical amplifiers, optical networks, and WDM components.

(PO – b, c, h, k)

13



Prerequisites: Nil Contact Hours: 42 + 14

Course Coordinator: Dr. K. Manikantan

Course Objectives

Introduce the difference between embedded systems and general purpose systems.

Optimize hardware designs of custom single-purpose processors.

Compare different approaches in optimizing general-purpose processors.

Introduce different peripheral interfaces to embedded systems.

Understand the design tradeoffs made by different models of embedded systems.

Apply knowledge gained in software-hardware integration in team-based projects.

Understand the concepts behind embedded software.

Design an embedded solution for a real world problem.

Select components to implement an embedded system.

Program the software for an embedded system together with its sensor and control

requirements.

Optimize an embedded system to meet design requirements of size, speed, and/or power

consumption.

UNIT – I





UNIT – II




UNIT – III






UNIT – IV




14

UNIT – V




TEXT BOOKS:


Introduction”, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.


REFERENCES:


Ltd, 2008.

Course Outcomes:


purpose, general-purpose, application specific processors). (PO – a, b)

2. Describe and compare the various types of peripherals used in embedded systems.

(PO – a, b, j)

3. Analyze a given embedded system and identify its critical performance. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f)


(PO – a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, j, l)


(PO – a, b, c)


BANGALORE


SYLLABUS (For the Academic year 2016 – 2017)



2




Faculty List


1. S Sethu Selvi Ph. D

Professor & Head

2. C R Raghunath M. Tech Professor

3. M S Srinivas M. Tech Professor

4. K Indira Ph. D Professor

5. B Sujatha M E (Ph. D) Associate Professor

6. Maya V Karki Ph. D Associate Professor

7. S Lakshmi M E (Ph. D) Associate Professor

8. V Anandi Ph. D Associate Professor

9. T D Senthilkumar Ph. D Associate Professor

10. Raghuram Srinivasan Ph. D Associate Professor

11. H Mallika M S (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

12. A R Priyarenjini M. Tech Assistant Professor

13. S L Gangadharaiah M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

14. M Nagabhushan M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

15. C G Raghavendra M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

16. Sadashiva V Chakrasali M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

17. Mamtha Mohan M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

18. V Nuthan Prasad M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

19. Reshma Verma M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

20. Shreedarshan K M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

21. Lakshmi Shrinivasan M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

22. Flory Francis M. Tech Assistant Professor

23. Sarala S M M. Tech Assistant Professor

24. Punya Prabha V M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

25. Suma K V M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

26. Jayashree S M. S Assistant Professor

27. Manjunath C Lakkannavar M. Tech Assistant Professor

28. Chitra M M. Tech Assistant Professor

29. Akkamahadevi M B M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor

30. Veena G N M. Tech Assistant Professor

31. Pavitha U S M. Tech Assistant Professor

32. Sara Mohan George M. Tech Assistant Professor

3




To evolve into an autonomous institution of international standing for imparting quality technical

education





To be, and be recognized as, an excellent Department in Electronics & Communication







degrees, and possess the technical knowledge, critical thinking skills, creativity, and ethical values.



4


PEO1: To train to be employed as successful professionals in a core area of their choice

PEO2: To participate in lifelong learning/ higher education efforts to emerge as expert researchers

and technologists

PEO3: To develop skills in ethical, professional, and managerial domains

Program Outcomes (POs)

PO1: Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.

PO2: Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex

engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics,

natural sciences, and engineering sciences.

PO3: Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and

design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate

consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental

considerations.

PO4: Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and

research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis

of the information to provide valid conclusions.

PO5: Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and

modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering

activities with an understanding of the limitations.

PO6: The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to

assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant

to the professional engineering practice.

PO7: Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering

solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for

sustainable development.

5

PO8: Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and

norms of the engineering practice.

PO9: Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or

leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.

PO10: Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the

engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write

effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive

clear instructions.

PO11: Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the

engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader

in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.

PO12: Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage

in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.

Programme Specific Outcomes (PSOs)

PSO1: Circuit Design Concepts: Apply basic and advanced electronics for implementing and

evaluating various circuit configurations

PSO2: VLSI and Embedded Domain: Demonstrate technical competency in the design and

analysis of components in VLSI and Embedded domains

PSO3: Communication Theory and Practice: Possess application level knowledge in theoretical

and practical aspects required for the realization of complex communication systems

6



SI.

No.

Subject

Code Subject

Teaching

Department

Credits

L T P SS Total

1. EC31 Mathematics – III Mathematics PS-C 4 0 0 0 4

2. EC32 Analog Electronic Circuits E & C PS-C 4 0 0 0 4

3. EC33 Digital Electronic Circuits E & C PS-C 4 0 0 0 4

4. EC34 Network Analysis E & C PS-C 3 1 0 0 4

5. EC35 Electromagnetics E & C PS-C 4 0 0 0 4

6. EC361 Computer Organization (Soft Core)

E & C

PS-SC 2 0 0 1 3 7. EC362 Data Structures using C

(Soft Core)

8. ECL37 Analog Electronic Circuits Lab E & C PS-C 0 0 1 0 1

9. ECL38 Digital Electronic Circuits Lab E & C PS-C 0 0 1 0 1

Total 21 1 2 1 25


SI.

No.

Subject

Code Subject

Teaching

Department

Credits

L T P SS Total

1. EC41 Mathematics – IV Mathematics PS-C 4 0 0 0 4

2. EC42 Linear Integrated Circuits E & C PS-C 3 0 0 1 4

3. EC43 Control Systems E & C PS-C 3 1 0 0 4

4. EC44 Microprocessors E & C PS-C 4 0 0 0 4

5. EC45 Signals and Systems E & C PS-C 4 0 0 0 4

6. EC461 Digital Electronic Measurements (Soft Core)

E & C PS-SC 3 0 0 0 3 7. EC462 Hardware Description

Language (Soft Core)

8. ECL47 Signals & Controls Lab E & C PS-C 0 0 1 0 1

9. ECL48 Microprocessor Lab E & C PS-C 0 0 1 0 1

Total 21 1 2 1 25

L: Lecture T: Tutorial P: Practical SS: Self-study

7

III SEMESTER

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III

Subject Code: EC31 Credits: 4:0:0:0

Prerequisite: Engineering Mathematics Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinator: Mr. Suresh Babu R

Course Objectives:

Learn to solve algebraic, transcendental and ordinary differential equations numerically

Learn to fit a curve, correlation, regression for a statistical data

Learn the concepts of consistency, methods of solution for linear system of equations and eigen

value problems.

Learn to represent a periodic function in terms of sines and cosines.

Understand the concepts of continuous and discrete integral transforms in the form of Fourier and Z-

transforms.

Learn the concept of series solutions of ODE and special functions.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Numerical solution of Algebraic and Transcendental equations: Method of false position,

Newton - Raphson method.

Numerical solution of Ordinary differential equations: Taylor series method, Euler and

modified Euler method, fourth order Runge-Kutta method.

Statistics: Curve fitting by the method of least squares, fitting a linear curve, fitting a parabola,

fitting a Geometric curve, Correlation and Regression.

UNIT – II

Linear Algebra: Elementary transformations on a matrix, Echelon form of a matrix, rank of a

matrix, Consistency of system of linear equations, Gauss elimination and Gauss – Siedal method to

solve system of linear equations, eigen values and eigen vectors of a matrix, Rayleigh power

method to determine the dominant eigen value of a matrix, diagonalization of a matrix, system of

ODEs as matrix differential equations.

UNIT – III

Fourier series: Convergence and divergence of infinite series of positive terms. Periodic function,

Dirichlet conditions, Fourier series of periodic functions of period 2π and arbitrary period, Half

range series, Fourier series and Half Range Fourier series of Periodic square wave, Half wave

8

rectifier, Full wave rectifier, Saw-tooth wave with graphical representation, Practical harmonic

analysis.

UNIT – IV


properties, Inverse transform, Convolution theorem, Parseval identity (statements only). Fourier



Z-Transforms: Definition, standard Z-transforms, Single sided and double sided, Linearity

property, Damping rule, Shifting property, Initial and final value theorem, Inverse Z-transform,

Application of Z-transform to solve difference equations.

UNIT – V

Series Solution of ODEs and Special Functions: Series solution, Frobenius method, Series

solution of Bessel differential equation leading to Bessel function of first kind, Series solution of

Legendre differential equation leading to Legendre polynomials, Rodrigues's formula.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Wiley Publication, 10th edition, 2015.

2. B. S. Grewal, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, 43rd

edition, 2015.

REFERENCES:

1. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, 4th

edition,

2010.

2. Dennis G. Zill, Michael R. Cullen, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Jones and Barlett

Publishers Inc., 3rd edition, 2009.

Course Outcomes:

1. Solve the problems of algebraic, transcendental and ordinary differential equations

using numerical methods and fit a suitable curve by the method of least squares and

determine the lines of regression for a set of statistical data. (PO – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

2. Find the rank of a matrix and testing the consistency and the solution by Gauss

Elimination and Gauss Siedel iteration methods. (PO – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

3. Find the Fourier series expansion of a function in both full range and half rang e

values of the variable and obtain the various harmonics of the Fourier series

expansion for the given numerical data. (PO – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

4. Find Fourier transform, Fourier sine and Fourier cosine transforms of functions and

solve difference equations using Z-transforms. (PO – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

5. Obtain the series solution of ordinary differential equations. (PO – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

9

ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS


Prerequisite: Basic Electronics Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Lakshmi Shrinivasan

Course objectives:

Analyze hybrid equivalent models of BJT amplifiers

Understand feedback amplifiers and oscillator circuits using BJT

Design different types of power amplifier circuits

Study of construction and characteristics of JFETs and MOSFETs

Apply various types of MOSFET biasing circuits to design MOSFET amplifiers

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Small signal low frequency transistor models: Two-port devices and hybrid model, the three

transistor configurations, determination of h-parameters from the characteristics, Advantages of h-

parameters, Analysis of a transistor amplifier circuit using h-parameters (CE Configuration only),

CE amplifier with emitter resistance, Miller’s theorem and its dual, Miller effect capacitance

Low frequency transistor amplifier circuits: Bootstrapped Darlington circuit, Cascode transistor

configuration.

Untuned amplifiers: Cascaded CE transistor stages.

UNIT – II

Feedback amplifiers: Feedback concept, advantages of Negative feedback, Transfer gain with

feedback, Loop gain, Feedback amplifier topologies, General characteristics of negative feedback

amplifiers, effect of negative feedback on input and output resistance in voltage series, Effect of

negative feedback on amplifier bandwidth.

Sinusoidal Oscillators: Barkhausen Criterion, LC oscillators (tuned oscillators) - Transistor

Colpitts oscillator, Hartley oscillator, Transistor Phase Shift Oscillator – RC Phase shift & Wien

Bridge oscillator (both without mathematical analysis), Crystal oscillator – Frequency Stability.

UNIT – III

Large Signal Amplifiers: Classification of power amplifiers, Class A Large signal amplifiers,

Second Harmonic distortion, conversion efficiency, Power Output, Transformer – Coupled Audio

Power Amplifier, Push – Pull Amplifiers, Advantages of a Push – Pull System, Class B amplifiers,

Complementary – Symmetry Circuits, Class AB operation, Class C and Class D Amplifier,

Problems, power transistor heat sink, thermal analogy of a power transistor.

10

UNIT – IV

Field Effect Transistors: Junction Field Effect Transistor, Pinch-Off Voltage Vp, JFET volt-

ampere characteristics, FET small signal model, Insulated Gate FET(MOSFET), Comparison of

MOSFET & JFET, Common Source Amplifier, Common Drain Amplifier, or Source Follower,

Generalized FET Amplifier, Biasing FET, FET as a Voltage Variable Resistor(VVR), Uni-junction

Transistor, Problems.

UNIT – V

The MOSFET as an amplifier and a switch: Large signal operation – transfer characteristic,

graphical derivation of the transfer characteristic, operation as a switch, operation as a linear

amplifier, Biasing in MOS amplifiers, biasing by fixing VGS, biasing by fixing VGS and

connecting a resistance in the source, biasing using a drain-to-gate feedback resistor, biasing using a

constant current source.

Small signal operation and models: Small signal equivalent circuit model, T equivalent circuit

model, Modeling the Body effect, Common source amplifier with and without source resistance,

high frequency model of MOSFET, unity gain frequency, frequency response – Low frequency,

mid-band and high frequency analysis of common-source amplifier.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Jacob Millman, Christos C. Halkias & Satyabrata Jit, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Tata -

McGraw Hill, 2nd

Edition, 2008

2. Adel Sedra, Kenneth Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits”, 1st

Indian Edition, Oxford University

Press, 2006.

REFERENCE:

1. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, PHI, 9th

Edition, 2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze BJT hybrid model and its significance in circuit analysis along with general BJT

amplifiers. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 12. PSO – 1)

2. Illustrate the importance of feedback amplifiers and oscillator circuits. (PO – 1, 2, 12. PSO – 1)

3. Compute the conversion efficiency of different types of power amplifiers. (PO – 1, 2. PSO – 1)

4. Compare different types of FET amplifiers. (PO – 1, 2, 4. PSO – 1)

5. Interpret the low and high frequency response of a common source amplifier using MOSFET.

(PO – 1, 2, 4. PSO – 1)

11

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS


Prerequisites: Basic Electronics Contact Hours: 56


Course Objectives:

Understand the electrical characteristics of logic gates and different logic families

Understand the operation of various combinational circuits and their applications

Describe the operation of several types of sequential circuits

Design and analysis of synchronous sequential machines

Understand different types of PLDs and their usage in the design of logic functions

Course Contents:

UNIT – I



product, TTL inverter – circuit description and operation, TTL NAND circuit description and

operation.

Combinational logic: Boolean algebra: Standard representation of logic functions – SOP and POS

forms, Minimization of 4 and 5 variable functions using Karnaugh maps, Multiplexing and

Demultiplexing, Multiplexers – Realization of 2:1, 4:1 and 8:1 multiplexers using gates,

applications, Demultiplexers: Realization of 1:2, 1:4, 1:8 using basic gates, applications.

UNIT – II

Combinational logic: Code converters: BCD to Excess 3 and vice versa, Binary to gray and vice

versa, Encoders, Priority Encoders, Decoders, BCD to Decimal and BCD to Seven segment

decoders, Parity circuits (generator and checker), Comparators: 1 bit and 2 bit comparators design,

cascade comparators.


using 2s complement and applications, Adder/Subtractor, BCD adder, binary multipliers.

UNIT – III

Flip Flops: Latches, Flip-Flops: Master Salve Flip Flops, Edge Triggered Flip Flop, setup and hold

time, Characteristic and Excitation Tables, Conversion from one flip flop to another.

12

Registers: Registers (basic, load control input, parallel load), Shift registers (basic, parallel load,

universal), SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, Applications of shift registers (serial adder, ring counter,

Johnson counter)

UNIT – IV

Sequential Circuits Analysis and Design:

Ripple counter: Up counter, down counter, up/down counter using flip flops, design of Mod N

counter.

Synchronous counters: Design of synchronous counters (self-starting counter)

Synchronous sequential Machines: State table, state diagram, Mealy and Moore Machines,

Design and Analysis of Sequential Circuits using D /T Flip Flops.

UNIT – V

Synchronous Sequential Machines: Sequence recognizer, State assignment, State reduction,

design procedure.

Memory and Programmable Logic Devices: Random Access-Memory, Timing waveforms, Read

Only Memory, Programmable logic devices (PROM, Programmable Logic Array, Programmable

Array Logic Devices), implementation of combinational circuits using PLDs.

TEXTBOOKS:


Education, 3rd

Edition, 2006.

2. Charles Roth Jr, and Larry L Kinney, “Fundamental of Logic Design”, Cengage Learning, 7th

Edition, 2014.

REFERENCES:


2. John Yarbrough, “Digital Logic Applications and Principles”, Cengage Learning, 1st Edition,

2006.

Course Outcomes:


and NOR gates.(PO – 1, 2 PSO – 2)

2. Analyze and design combinational logic circuits. (PO – 1, 2 PSO – 2)

3. Analyze and design sequential circuits. (PO – 1, 2, 3 PSO – 2)

4. Design and analyze synchronous sequential machines. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 4 PSO – 2)

5. Implement combinational logic circuits using PLD. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 4 PSO – 2)

13

NETWORK ANALYSIS


Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinator: Prof. M. S. Srinivas

Course Objectives:

Analyze various circuits in the electronics and communication area

Apply network topology concepts in developing VLSI circuits

Apply network synthesis concepts for designing filters

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Voltage and Current Laws: Kirchoff’s Laws; Single Loop and Node-Pair Circuits; Connected

Independent Sources; Voltage and Current Division.

Circuit Analysis: Nodal and Mesh Analysis; Super Node; Super Mesh; Delta-Wye Conversion.

UNIT – II


Maximum Power Transfer Theorems; Source Transformation.

Sinusoidal Steady-State Analysis: Forced Response; Complex Forcing Function; Phasor

relationships for R, L and C; Impedances and Admittances in Nodal and Mesh Analysis;


UNIT – III

Initial Conditions in Networks: Initial Conditions in Elements; Evaluating Initial Conditions.

Laplace Transformation: Basic Theorems; Partial Fraction Expansion; Solution by the Laplace

Transformation.

Transforms of Signal Waveforms: Shifted Unit Step Function; Ramp and Impulse Functions;

Waveform Synthesis; Initial and Final Value theorems, Convolution Integral.

UNIT – IV

Network Topology and Equations: Basic Definitions; Matrices of Graphs; Node and Mesh

Transformations; Generalized Element; Formulation of Network Equations.

Two-Port Parameters: Impedance, Admittance, Transmission and Hybrid Parameters;

Relationships between Parameter Sets.

UNIT – V

14

Synthesis of One-Port Networks: Synthesis of L-C Driving-Point Immittances, R-C (R-L)

Impedances (Admittances). Filter design: Butterworth and Chebyshev approximations.

Frequency Response: Parallel and Series Resonance Forms.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. W. H. Hayt Jr., J. E. Kemmerly, S. M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, Sixth Edition,

Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002.

2. F. F. Kuo, “Network Analysis and Synthesis”, Second Edition; Wiley, 1966.

REFERENCES:

1. V. K. Aatre, “Network Theory and Filter Design” Second Edition, New Age International,

1980.

2. M. E. Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”, Third Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 1974.

3. M. Nahvi, J. A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.

4. C. K. Alexander, M. N. O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, Third Edition, Tata

McGraw-Hill, 2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ nodal and mesh analysis techniques to various electric circuits. (PO – 1, 2, 5. PSO – 1)

2. Analyze electrical circuits using network theorems. (PO – 1, 2, 5. PSO – 1)

3. Solve electric circuits using Laplace transform and network topology. (PO – 1, 2, 5. PSO – 1)

4. Determine two-port network parameters. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5. PSO – 1)

5. Synthesize one-port networks using lumped elements. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5. PSO – 1)

ELECTROMAGNETICS


Prerequisites: Vector Analysis Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Sujatha B

Course Objectives:

Apply the concept of Coulomb’s law and Gauss law in determining static electric field

Understand the concept of divergence, potential and energy densities in electrostatic field

Apply boundary conditions and Laplace’s/Poisson’s equations in electrostatic field

Apply Biot-Savart’s law, Ampere’s law and Lorentz force equation in magnetostatics

Illustrate Maxwell’s equations for time-varying fields and wave propagation

15

Course Contents:

UNIT – I


intensity, Field Arising from a Continuous Volume Charge Distribution, Field of Line Charge, Field

of a Sheet of Charge.

Electric Flux Density, Gauss's Law: Electric Flux Density, Gauss's Law, Application of Gauss's

Law, Some Symmetrical Charge distributions.

UNIT – II

Divergence: Differential Volume element, Divergence, Maxwell's First Equation (Electrostatics),

vector operator and Divergence Theorem.

Energy and Potential: Energy expended in moving a point charge in an electric field, Line

integral, Definition of Potential Difference and Potential, Potential field of a point charge, Potential

field of a system of charges: conservative property, Potential Gradient, Energy Density in the

Electrostatic Field.

UNIT – III




Poisson's equation.

Steady Magnetic Field: Biot-Savart's Law, Ampere's circuital law, Curl, Stokes’ theorem.

UNIT – IV

Magnetic Forces, Time-varying Fields and Maxwell's Equations: Magnetic flux and Magnetic

flux Density, Scalar and Vector Magnetic Potentials, Force on a Moving Charge, Force on a

Differential Current Element, Force between Differential Current Elements, Faraday's law,

Displacement Current, Maxwell's Equations in Point Form, Maxwell's Equations in Integral Form,

Retarded Potential.

UNIT – V

Uniform Plane Wave: Wave propagation in Free Space, Wave propagation in Dielectrics,


Polarization (Qualitative treatment).

16

Waveguides: Rectangular Waveguides, Analysis of field components, cut off frequency, group and

phase velocities, phase constants, dominant modes.

TEXTBOOK:

1. William H. Hayt Jr., John A. Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, McGraw-Hill

Publications, 8th Edition, 2010.

REFERENCE:

1. Mathew N. O. Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press, 4th

Edition,

2006.

Course Outcomes:

1. Apply Coulomb’s law and Gauss’s law to various charge distributions. (PO – 1, 2, 10. PSO – 3)

2. Analyze the concept of divergence, potential and energy density in electrostatic field. (PO – 1,

2, 10. PSO – 3)

3. Employ boundary conditions, Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations to determine capacitance of

various configurations. (PO –1, 2, 3, 10. PSO – 2, 3)

4. Use Biot-Savart’s law and Ampere’s law to determine magnetic field for various current

distributions. (PO – 1, 2, 10. PSO –3)

5. Interpret Maxwell’s equations for time varying fields and in wave propagation. (PO – 1, 2, 10,

12. PSO – 2, 3)

COMPUTER ORGANIZATION



Course Coordinator: Dr. V. Anandi

Course Objectives:

Describe the progression of computer architecture

Explain the basic concepts of interrupts, I/O control and data transfers

Study basic concepts of memory systems

Understand basic processing units

Analyze arithmetic operations

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Basic Structures of Computers: Computer types, Basic Operational Concepts, Performance,

Processor clock, Pipelining and Superscalar operation, Basic performance equation.

17

UNIT – II

Input/Output Organization: Accessing I/O devices, Interrupts: Interrupt Hardware, Enabling &

Disabling Interrupt, Handling Multiple Devices, Controlling Device Requests, exceptions, Direct

Memory Access, Bus Arbitration; Parallel Port, Serial Port, PCI bus.

UNIT – III

Memory System: Some Basic Concepts, Cache memories, Virtual memories and performance

considerations.

UNIT – IV

Basic Processing Unit: Some fundamental concepts: Register Transfers, Performing an Arithmetic

or Logic operation, Fetching a Word from Memory, Storing a Word in Memory, Execution of a

Complete Instruction, Branch instruction.

UNIT – V

Arithmetic Addition & Subtraction of Signed Numbers: Addition /Subtraction Logic Unit,

Multiplication of Positive numbers: Signed-Operand Multiplication, Booth Algorithm,

Fast Multiplication: Bit-pair Recording of Multipliers; Floating-point Numbers & Operations,

IEEE Standard for Floating-point Numbers

Self-Study: Functional units: Input unit, Memory unit, Arithmetic and logic unit, Control unit,

Output unit, standard I/O Interfaces, PCI bus, semiconductor RAM memories, Read only memories,

Speed size and cost, Design of fast adder: Carry-Look-ahead Addition.

TEXTBOOK:

1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat Zaky, “Computer Organization”, Fifth Edition,


REFERENCES:




Hardware/Software Interface”, Third Edition, Elsevier, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Recall the basic structure and functional units of a computer. (PO – 1, 2, 6. PSO – 2)

18

2. Describe the I/O organization and interface standards used in a computer.(PO – 2, 3, 4, 12. PSO

– 2)

3. List different types of memories used in computers. (PO – 2, 3, 6. PSO – 2)

4. Explain the basic processing schemes and data handling capability in a computer. (PO – 1, 2, 3,

5. PSO – 2)

5. Illustrate arithmetic logic unit and operations on floating point numbers. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. PSO

– 2)

DATA STRUCTURES USING C


Prerequisite Courses : Fundamentals of Computing Contact hours: 28

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Reshma Verma

Course Objectives

Understand and implement the different types of linked list

Learn the concept of stacks and queues

Study the various operations performed on trees

Illustrate searching and sorting methods

Demonstrate the applications of graphs

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Stack and Queues: Basic stack operations (Push, Pop, stack top), Stack algorithms and C functions

(create, push, pop, display), stack applications (Infix to postfix, evaluating postfix expression),

Queue Operations (enqueue, dequeue) algorithms and C functions (queue front and rear)

UNIT – II

Linked List: General linear lists: Basic Operations (Insertion, deletion, retrieval, traversal),

Implementation, data structure (Head node, data node), algorithms and C functions (create list,

insert node, delete node, search node, display, traverse list), complex implementation (doubly

linked list, create list, insert node, delete node, search node, display, traverse list).

UNIT – III

Sorting and Searching: Sort concepts, algorithms and C functions, selection sort (straight

selection sort), insertion sort (straight selection sort), searching (sequential and binary search)

UNIT – IV

19

Trees: Basic tree concepts, binary tree, binary tree (concept only), binary tree traversals (depth first

traversals, breadth first traversals), expression trees (infix, postfix and prefix traversals)

UNIT – V

Graphs: Basic concepts, operations (insert and delete vertex, add and delete edge), traverse graph

(Depth-first traversal), Graph storage structures (Adjacency matrix), Networks: minimum spanning

tree (Prim’s algorithm), shortest path algorithm (Dijkstra’s)

Self-Study: Stack applications (Infix to prefix), Circular singly list (create list, insert node, delete

node, search node, display, traverse list), Sort order, stability, efficiency, exchange sort (bubble and

quick sort), Binary search trees (Basic concepts, BST operations, traversals, C functions), Breadth-

first traversal, Adjacency list, minimum spanning tree (Kruskal’s algorithm)

TEXTBOOK:

1. Richard Gilberg and Behrouz Forouzan, “Data Structures: A pseudo code approach with C”, 2nd

edition, Thomson Publishing, 2007.

REFERENCE:

1. Tanenbaum, “Data Structures with C”, McGraw Hill, 2000.

Course Outcomes:

1. Implement stacks and queues. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12. PSO – 2)

2. Create various linked list applications. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 12. PSO – 2)

3. Apply searching and sorting algorithms to sort data. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12. PSO – 2)

4. Illustrate the concepts of trees with suitable algorithm. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12. PSO – 2)

5. Develop algorithm to solve real world problems using graphs. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12. PSO – 2)

ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LAB

Subject Code: ECL37 Credits: 0:0:1:0

Prerequisite: Basic electronics Contact Sessions: 14


Course Objectives:

Understand the two port transistor model and h –parameters based transistor analysis

Understand the importance of Bridge rectifier with and without filter

20

Learn to design diode clipping and clamping circuits, oscillators and benefits of negative

feedback

Understand the frequency response of BJT & FET amplifiers and significance of power

amplifiers

Appreciate usage of simulation tools for hardware designs

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Verification of Thevinin’s theorem and Maximum Power Transfer Theorem

2. Study the input output characteristics of BJT CE Amplifier and determine the h-parameters

3. Study of drain characteristics and transfer characteristics of n-channel MOSFET

4. Design and test Bridge Rectifier with and without C filter

5. Design and test diode clipping and clamping circuits

6. Design and test RF oscillators (i) Hartley (ii) Colpitts

7. Design and test RC Phase Shift oscillators

8. Design and test a BJT- RC coupled amplifier. Plot the frequency response.

9. Design and test a FET- RC coupled amplifier. Plot the frequency response.

10. Design a voltage series feedback amplifier. Compare the parameters with and without feedback.

11. Design and test power amplifiers (i) Class A transformer coupled audio power amplifier (ii)

Class B Push Pull power amplifier.

12. Design and test Darlington pair emitter follower with bootstrap capacitor


Softwares suggested: MultiSim or any other suitable simulation tool.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. “Integrated Electronics”, Millman & Halkias, Tata McGraw Hill International Edition, 2001.

2. “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, 6th

Edition

PHI, 2002.

3. “RF Microelectronics”, Behzad Razavi, Prentice Hall Communications Engineering and


Course Outcomes:

1. Design amplifier circuits using BJT and FET devices. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10. PSO – 1)

2. Design power amplifiers, negative feedback amplifiers and oscillator circuits. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5,

8, 9, 10. PSO – 1)

3. Design diode clipping, clamping and rectifier circuits. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10. PSO – 1)

4. Simulate and verify hardware designs. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10. PSO – 1)

5. Prepare a report with design procedure and experimental results. (PO – 5, 8, 10. PSO – 1)

21

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY




Course Objectives

Understand the operation of combinational circuits and its applications

Demonstrate the operation of several types of edge-triggered flip-flops

Design and analyze different types of counters and sequence generator

Understand the basic principles of shift registers and RAM

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. i) Verification of basic, universal and XOR gates.

ii) Simplification, realization of Boolean expressions using universal gates.

2. Realization of Half/Full adder and Half/Full Subtractor using NAND Gates.

3. i) Realization of BCD to Excess 3 code converter.

ii) Realization of Binary to Gray code converter.

4. Study of Decoder chip to drive LED display and priority encoder using IC 74147.

5. Multiplexer using IC74153 and its applications

6. Demultiplexer using IC74139 and its applications

7. i) Parallel Adder/Subtractor using IC7483

ii) BCD Adder using IC7483

iii) One bit comparator and study of IC7485 magnitude comparator

8. i) JK Master slave, T-Type and D-Type Flip Flop using IC7476

ii) Ripple counter using IC7476

9. i) Study of asynchronous decade counter using IC 7490

ii) Synchronous counter using IC7476

iii) Study of synchronous decade counter using IC 74192

10. i) Shift left, Shift right, SIPO, SISO, PISO, PIPO operations using IC7495 shift register

ii) Study of Ring/Twisted counter using IC7495

iii) Sequence generator using IC7495

iv) Programming RAM using IC6116

TEXTBOOKS:


Education, 3rd

Edition, 2006.

2. R. P. Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics”, TMH, 4th Edition, 2010.

22

REFERENCES:


2. Tocci, “Digital Systems, Principles and Applications”, PHI/Pearson Education, 6th

Edition,

1997.

Course Outcomes:

1. Design combinational logic circuits using gates. (PO – 1, 2, 9. PSO – 2)

2. Design combinational logic circuits using MUX/DEMUX/ADDER ICs (PO – 1, 2, 9. PSO –

2)

3. Design sequential logic circuits. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 2)

4. Demonstrate the operation of RAM. (PO – 3, 9. PSO – 2)

5. Prepare a report with design procedure and experimental results. (PO – 5, 8, 10. PSO – 1)

23

IV SEMESTER

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – IV


Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics Contact Hours: 56

Course Coordinator: Mr. Vijaya Kumar

Course Objectives:

Learn the concepts of finite differences, interpolation and it applications.


Understand the concepts of calculus of functions of complex variables.

Learn the concepts of random variables and probability distributions.


Course Contents:

UNIT – I





forward and backward interpolation formulae, Newton-Cotes quadrature formula, Trapezoidal rule,

Simpson 1/3rd rule, Simpson 3/8th rule.

Partial Differential Equations: Introduction to PDE, Solution of PDE – Direct integration,


UNIT – II

Complex Variables – I: Functions of complex variables, Analytic function, Cauchy-Riemann



Transformations: Conformal transformation, Discussion of the transformations - ,,2 zewzw

and )0(2

zz


UNIT – III

Complex Variables – II: Complex integration, Cauchy theorem, Cauchy integral formula, Taylor

and Laurent series (statements only), Singularities, Poles and residues, Cauchy residue theorem

(statement only).

24

UNIT – IV


Cumulative distribution function, Mean, Variance, Moment generating function..



Conditional expectation, Simulation of random variables.

UNIT – V

Stochastic Processes: Introduction, Classification of stochastic processes, discrete time processes,

Stationary, Ergodicity, Autocorrelation, Power spectral density.




TEXTBOOKS:

1. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Wiley Publication, 10th edition, 2015


edition, 2015.

3. R. E. Walpole, R. H. Myers, R. S. L. Myers and K. Ye, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers

and Scientists”, Pearson Education, Delhi, 9th edition, 2012.

REFERENCES:

1. Dennis G. Zill and Patric D. Shanahan, “A first course in complex analysis with applications”,

Jones and Bartlett Publishers, Second edition, 2009.


edition,

2010

3. Kishor S. Trivedi, “Probability & Statistics with Reliability, Queuing and Computer Science

Applications” John Wiley & Sons, 2nd

edition, 2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Use a given data for equal and unequal intervals to find a polynomial function for estimation.

(PO – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

2. Analyze functions of complex variable in terms of continuity, differentiability and analyticity.

(PO – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

3. Evaluate line integrals, curve integrals, singularities and determine the values of integrals using

residues. (PO – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

4. Express the probability distribution arising in the study of engineering problems and their

applications. (PO – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

25

5. Apply the stochastic process and Markov Chain in predictions of future events. (PO – 1, 2,

PSO – 1, 3)

LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS


Prerequisites: Analog Electronic Circuits Contact Hours: 42


Course objectives:

Understand the fundamentals of Op-Amp and its use as amplifiers

Learn the linear and nonlinear applications of Op-Amp with the design aspects

Understand various functional features and specifications of IC555, IC voltage regulators, PLL

and their applications

Study the theory, characteristics and applications of DAC and ADCs

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Operational Amplifier Fundamentals: Basic Op-Amp circuits, Op-amp parameters: input and

Output voltage, CMRR and PSRR, offset voltages and currents, Input and Output Impedances,

Slew rate and Frequency limitations.

Op-amp as DC Amplifiers: Biasing Op-amps, Direct Coupled Voltage follower, Non Inverting

Amplifiers, Inverting Amplifiers, Summing Amplifiers, Difference Amplifiers, Instrumentation

Amplifiers.

UNIT – II

Op-Amp as AC amplifiers: Capacitor coupled Voltage followers, High Input Impedance



setting the upper cut off frequency, capacitor coupled difference amplifiers.

UNIT – III

Op-Amp switching, differentiating and integrating circuits: Zero crossing detectors, Inverting

Schmitt trigger circuits, Integrating circuits and Differentiating circuits.

Signal processing circuits using Op-Amp: Precision half-wave rectifier, Precision full-wave

rectifier, Limiting Circuits, Clamping circuits, Peak Detectors, Sample and Hold circuits.

26

UNIT – IV

Signal generators: Triangular/Rectangular wave generator, Phase shift Oscillator, Wein Bridge

Oscillator, Monostable and Astable multivibrator.

Active filters: First and second order Low and High pass filter, First order two op-amp band pass

and band reject filters.

UNIT – V

Applications of other Linear ICs: Series Op-amp Regulator, IC 723 general purpose Regulator,

555 Timer – Basic Timer circuit used as astable multivibrator and monostable multivibrator, PLL

operating principles

D-A and A-D Converters: DAC/ADC Specifications, R-2R DAC, Monolithic DAC, Successive

Approximation ADC and Dual Slope ADC.

Self-Study: Use of single polarity voltage supply, Op-amp frequency response and compensation

methods, Log and Antilog amplifier, multiplier and divider, Non-Inverting Schmitt trigger,

weighted resistor DAC, Flash type ADC and Counter type ADC

TEXTBOOKS:

1. David A. Bell, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear ICs”, PHI/Pearson, 3rd

Edition, 2011.


Edition, Reprint 2006.

REFERENCES:

1. Robert. F. Coughlin & Fred.F. Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated

Circuits”, PHI/Pearson, 2006.

2. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, “Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits”, PHI/Pearson, 4th Edition,

2004.

Course Outcomes:

1. Explain the fundamentals of operational amplifier, signal generators, active filters, dc

amplifiers, other linear ICs and data converters. (PO – 1, PSO – 1)

2. Evaluate the parameters for different Op-Amp circuits. (PO – 1, 2, 3, PSO – 1)

3. Design and analyze the circuits using Op-Amp. (PO – 1, 2, 3. PSO – 1)

4. Design and analyze the circuits using IC 555 timer. (PO – 1, 2, 3. PSO – 1)

5. Build and demonstrate in teams the working of circuits involving linear ICs. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 4,

9, 10, 12. PSO – 1)

27

CONTROL SYSTEMS


Prerequisites: Network Analysis, Engineering Mathematics Contact Hours: 56

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Punya Prabha. V

Course Objectives

Learn the mathematical modeling of control systems

Understand the time response of first, second order systems and steady state errors

Analyze the stability of control systems using RH Criterion, Nyquist Criterion, root locus and

Bode plots

Understand the basic concepts of modern control systems and classification of controllers

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Introduction: Examples of control systems, closed loop vs open loop control systems,

classification of control systems.

Mathematical modeling of linear systems: Review of Laplace transforms, transfer function and

impulse response: Block diagram and signal flow graph.

UNIT – II

Mathematical modeling of linear systems: Analogous systems, Translational and Rotational

Mechanical systems.




UNIT – III



assessment of relative stability using Nyquist criterion.

UNIT – IV


Introduction to state variable analysis: Concepts of state, state variables and state model for

electrical systems, Solution of state equations.

28

UNIT – V


Bode plots. Controllers: Classification of controllers, Brief analysis of different types of

controllers.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. K. Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, 4th


2. David K. Cheng, “Analysis of Linear Systems”, Narosa Publishing House, 5th Edition, 1986.

3. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, “Control System Engineering”, 5th


Publishers, 2007.

REFERENCES:

1. Ajit. K. Mandal, “Introduction to Control Engineering Modeling, Analysis and Design”, 2nd

Edition, New Age International Publishers, 2012.

2. Dhanesh N. Manik, “Control Systems”, Cengage Learning, 1st Edition, 2012.

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ mathematical modeling techniques to determine the transfer function of a system. (PO

– 1, 2, 5. PSO – 1)

2. Analyze the time response of first and second order systems. (PO – 1, 2, 5. PSO – 1)

3. Apply the concept of RH Criterion and root locus technique to determine the stability of a

system. (PO – 1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 1)

4. Interpret the frequency response using Bode’s plot and Nyquist stability criterion. (PO –1, 2, 4,

5. PSO – 1)

5. Describe the state models and various controllers. (PO – 1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 1)

MICROPROCESSORS


Prerequisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact Hours: 56


Course Objectives:

Acquire the knowledge of the basics of microprocessor

Describe the addressing modes and instruction set of 8086 microprocessor

Analyze macros, DOS functions and clock generation

29

Familiarize with higher end processors, peripherals and interfacing with 8086 microprocessor

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Microprocessor and its architecture: Introduction, internal architecture of 8086, PSW, Real mode

memory addressing.

Addressing modes: Data, Program memory, Stack memory.

UNIT – II

Instruction set of 8086: Data move, Arithmetic and Logic, Program control, Assembler directives,

Assembly language programming, Programs using BIOS and DOS interrupts.

UNIT – III

Modular Programming: Assembler & linker, PUBLIC & EXTRN, libraries, macros, DOS

function calls, Programming examples using macros & DOS function calls.

8086 Hardware Specifications: Pin outs and Pin functions of 8086, clock generator 8284A, Bus

buffering and latching, Bus timing, READY and wait state, minimum mode versus maximum

mode. (Basic comparison only)

UNIT – IV

Memory interfacing: Address decoding, memory interfacing for 8086, Introduction to dynamic

memory interfacing.

I/O interfacing: Introduction, I/O port address decoding (8 bit and 16 bit). Simple programs related

to I/O interface.

Interrupts: Basic Interrupt Processing, Hardware Interrupts.

UNIT – V

Peripherals and their interfacing with 8086: Study of 8255 PPI, 8253 timer and 8279 keyboard,

Numeric Co-processor 8087: Data formats, numerical processors, architecture & programming.

(Simple programs)

High end processors: Introduction to 80386, 80486 and Pentium.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Barry B Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors-Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, Eighth


30

2. A. K. Ray and K. M. Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessor and Peripherals”, Third Edition,


REFERENCES:

1. Yu Cheng Liu & Glenn A Gibson, “Microcomputer systems 8086/8088 family, Architecture,

Programming and Design”, Prentice Hall of India, Second Edition, July, 2003.

2. Douglas V. Hall, “Microprocessors & Interfacing, Programming & Hardware”, Penram

International, 2006.

Course Outcomes:

1. Explain the architecture of various processors. (PO – 1. PSO – 2)

2. Describe the addressing modes and instruction sets of 8086 processor. (PO – 2. PSO – 2)

3. Develop assembly language programs for different applications using instruction sets of 8086.

(PO – 2, 3, 5. PSO – 2)

4. Use macros and DOS function calls in assembly language programs. (PO – 2, 3, 5. PSO – 2)

5. Design interfacing circuits for 8086 processor. (PO – 2, 3, 5. PSO – 2)

SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS




Course Objectives

Appreciate the significance of signals, systems and properties

Employ differential and difference equations in describing an LTI system

Appreciate the significance of Fourier Transform and Z-transform in representing signals and

systems

Discuss the various properties of Fourier Transform and Z-transform

Express the system in block diagram representation

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Introduction to signals and systems: Continuous and Discrete time signals, transformation of the

independent variables, Exponential and Sinusoidal signals, unit impulse and step signals, CT and

DT systems, basic system properties.

UNIT – II

31

LTI Systems: Discrete time LTI systems, continuous time LTI systems, properties of LTI systems,


UNIT – III


periodic signals, Properties of CTFT: Linearity, time shifting, conjugation and conjugate symmetry,

differentiation and integration, time and frequency scaling, duality, Parseval’s relation, convolution

and multiplication

UNIT – IV


periodic signals

Z-Transform, ROC of Z-Transform, Inverse Z-Transform: Partial fraction and power series only,

Geometric evaluation of FT from pole zero plot, Properties of ZT: Linearity, time shifting, scaling

in the Z-domain, time reversal, time expansion

UNIT – V

Properties of ZT and analysis of LTI Systems: Properties of ZT: conjugation, convolution,

differentiation in Z-domain, initial value theorem, analysis and characterization of LTI system using

Z-transform, system function, algebraic and block diagram representation, unilateral Z-transform.

TEXTBOOK:

1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Alan S. Wilsky with Hamid Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd

Edition,

PHI Publications, 2011.

REFERENCES:

1. John G. Proakis and Dimitris G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing, Principles,

Algorithms, and Applications”, Fourth edition, PHI Publications, 2006.

2. Haykin and B. Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, Second Edition, Wiley, 2003.

Course Outcomes:

1. Classify and analyze continuous, discrete time signals and systems. (PO – 1, 2, 9. PSO – 3)

2. Compute the response of a system using convolution. (PO – 1, 2, 9. PSO – 3)

3. Analyze the system by difference and differential equations. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 3)

32

4. Employ Fourier Transform to analyze signals and systems. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 3)

5. Apply Z-Transform and analyze the signals and systems. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 3)



Pre-requisites: Digital Electronic & Linear Integrated Circuits

Contact Hours: 42


Course Objectives:

Discuss the various errors and standards of measurements used in the electronic instrumentation

systems


instruments

Describe the principle of working, features and usage of different types of electronic

instruments in various applications

Discuss the working and use of data acquisition systems, digital transducers, telemetry systems,

digital process controllers in industrial applications

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Measurement and Error: Definitions, Accuracy and precision, Significant figures, Types of

errors, Limiting errors, Classification of standards of measurement, Time and frequency standards.




approximation type DVM. Digital meter displays – LED and LCD displays, Range changing

methods for DVM, Digital multimeter.

UNIT – II


frequency measurement (extending the frequency range), Time (period) measurement, Time

interval measurement, Frequency ratio measurement, Totalizing mode of measurement. Universal

counter, Automatic and computing counters, Reciprocal electronic counters, Sources of

measurement errors, Specifications of electronic counters – Input characteristics and operating

mode specifications, Digital phase meter.

33

UNIT – III


frequency, Digital L, C and R measurements – Digital RCL meter.



UNIT – IV

Digital Signal Generators: Arbitrary waveform generators (AWG), Key characteristics of digital

signal generators and Data generator.


Logic Analyzer: Types of logic analyzer - Logic time analyzer. Logic state analyzer, interfacing a

target system,



UNIT – V


choice (selection) of transducers.



Digital Controllers: Direct digital and computer supervisory control, Digital process controllers.

TEXTBOOK:


Techniques”, US Edition, PHI, 2012.

REFERENCE:

1. H. S. Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation”, TMH, 3rd Edition, Seventh reprint, 2012.

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ the concept of errors to study the performance of electronic instrumentation systems.

(PO – 1, 2, 5, 6, 12. PSO – 1)

2. Apply the basic principles of electronic instruments to design and construct new instruments.

(PO – 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 12. PSO – 1)

34

3. Interpret the suitability of instruments in various applications. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 12. PSO – 1)

4. Select the instruments to observe waveforms and spectrum. (PO – 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 12. PSO – 1, 3)

5. Describe transducers, data acquisition systems and digital process controllers in electronic

applications. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12. PSO – 1, 3)

HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE



Course coordinator: Mrs. A. R. Priyarenjini

Course Objectives:

Understand the basics of Verilog HDL

Implement existing SSI and MSI digital circuits using HDL

Develop skills, techniques and learn state-of-the-art CAD tools to design, implement and test

modern-day digital circuits

Interpret logic synthesis and the synthesizable Verilog constructs

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Overview of Digital Design with Verilog HDL: Evolution of computer aided digital design,

Emergence of HDLs, Importance of HDLs, Verilog HDL and Typical design flow, Design

methodologies, modules, instances, components of simulation, example, basic concepts.

UNIT – II

Modules and ports: Modules, ports, Rules, Hierarchical Names.

Data flow modeling: Continuous assignment, Delays, Expressions, Operators, Operands, and

Operator types, Gate level modeling.

UNIT – III

Behavioral modeling: Structured procedures, Procedural assignments, Timing controls,

conditional statement, Multi way branching, Loops, Sequential and parallel blocks, generate blocks,

Examples.

UNIT – IV



UNIT – V

35


Verilog Constructs, Modeling tips for logic synthesis, Synthesis Design flow, examples,

verification of the gate level netlist.

Timing and delays: Types of delay models, modeling, timing checks and delay back annotation.

TEXTBOOK:

1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL – A guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall,

Second Edition, 2010.

REFERENCES:

1. Stephen Brown, Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital logic with Verilog design”, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2003.

2. Michael D. Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with Verilog HDL”, Pearson Education, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Recall the basics of digital design and lexical conventions of HDL. (PO – 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, PSO – 2)

2. Design, apply and test combinational circuits in HDL to verify the functionality. (PO – 1, 3, 4,

5, 8, 9, 10, 12. PSO – 2)

3. Write efficient RTL codes for sequential circuits and test using test benches. (PO – 1, 3, 4, 5, 8,

9, 10, 12. PSO – 2)

4. Apply the concepts of tasks and functions in designing large digital systems. (PO – 1, 3, 4, 5, 8,

9, PSO – 2)

5. Justify the usage of EDA tools in digital circuit functional verification and logic synthesis with

design tradeoffs. (PO – 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 12, PSO – 2)

SIGNALS AND CONTROLS LAB


Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics Contact Sessions: 14


Course Objectives:

Explore various functions available in MATLAB.

Understand the various signal operations and to demonstrate convolution.

Compute the response of system described by difference equation and transfer function.

Analyse system stability from root locus, Bode and Nyquist plots.

Model control systems in Simulink.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

36

1. Introduction to MATLAB: different operators and functions

2. Generation of both discrete and continuous time signals.

3. Operations on discrete time signals.

4. Convolution of discrete and continuous time signals.

5. Z-Transform and pole zero plot, frequency response and solving difference equation.

6. Representation of control system by transfer function, partial fraction expansion and pole zero

map.

7. Block diagram reduction.

8. System response (with step, impulse, ramp and parabolic inputs).

9. System analysis: Root locus, Bode plot and Nyquist plot.

10. Simulink model of a control system and its response.

11. Simulink model of a control system with PID controller.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Dr. Shailendra Jain, “Modeling and Simulation using MATLAB-Simulink”, Wiley, Second

Edition, 2014.

2. P. Ramakrishna Rao and Shankar Prakriya, “Signals and Systems”, McGraw Hill Education,

Second Edition, 2013.

3. Anoop K. Jairath and Saketh Kumar, “Control Systems – The state variable approach

(Conventional and MATLAB)”, Ane’s Students Edition, 2nd

Edition, 2010.

Course Outcomes:

1. Recall various functions available in MATLAB for signal processing and control systems. (PO

– 1, 2, 5, 9. PSO – 3)

2. Demonstrate the various operations on signals. (PO – 1, 2, 5. PSO – 3)

3. Solve the response of a system by difference equation and transfer functions. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5.

PSO – 2)

4. Analyze the system stability from root locus, Bode and Nyquist plots. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9. PSO

– 2)

5. Employ simulink model for control systems. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9. PSO – 2)

MICROPROCESSOR LAB


Prerequisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact Sessions: 14


Course Objectives:

37

Understand various instruction sets involved in programming

Learn interfacing for different applications

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

A. Assembly Language Programs

1. Programs involving Data Transfer Instructions

i) Block move without overlapping.

ii) Block move with overlapping.

iii) Block move interchange.

2. Programs involving Arithmetic Operation.

i) 16 Bit Addition and Subtraction

ii) N-bit multi precision numbers (N ≥ 32bits)

iii) Multiplication of 32- bits unsigned hexadecimal number using successive addition and

using shift left and add

iv) Division of 16-bits number by 8-bits number

3. Programs involving Bit Manipulation Instructions.

i) To identify whether the given number is Positive or Negative and Odd or Even

ii) 2 out of 5 Codes

iii) Bitwise and nibble wise palindrome

iv) Find the logical 1’s and 0’s in the given data

4. To Find Square, Cube, LCM, HCF and Factorial

i) Program to find square and cube of a given number

ii) Program to find LCM of a given number

iii) Program to HCF of a given number

iv) Program to factorial of a given number

5. Code Conversion

i) BCD to Hexadecimal

ii) Hexadecimal to BCD

iii) Addition and subtraction of two string ASCII digits

iv) Multiplication of a string of ASCII digits by a single ASCII digit

v) Division of a string of ASCII digits by a single ASCII digit

6. Programs Involving Branch /Loop Instruction

i) Program to sort the numbers in ascending order (bubble sorting)

ii) Program to sort the numbers in descending order (bubble sorting)

iii) Program to find the smallest and largest 16-bit signed number in an array

7. Programs Involving String Manipulation

i) Program for string transfer using primitive instruction

ii) Program to reverse a string

38

8. Program to search the occurrence of a character in the given string using DOS interrupt INT

21

B. Interface Experiments

1. Delay calculation and generation of a square wave, triangular wave generation and stair

case waveform using DAC. Display the waveform on a CRO.

2. Program to generate a square wave using 8253.

3. Program Using 8279 Chip

i) Program to display a message on the display unit

ii) Program to display the ASCII equivalent of the key pressed

4. Interfacing the stepper motor

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Barry B Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors-Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, Eighth


2. A. K. Ray and K.M. Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessor and Peripherals”, Third Edition,


REFERENCES:


Programming and Design”, Prentice Hall of India, Second Edition, 2003.



Course Outcomes:

1. Employ hardware and software development and debugging tool. (PO – 3, 5. PSO – 2)

2. Write, compile and debug assembly language program using arithmetic instructions. (PO – 1, 2,

3, 5. PSO – 2)

3. Develop programs using string and loop instructions. (PO – 1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 2)

4. Write assembly language programs to interface modules to 8086 microprocessor. (PO – 1, 2, 4,

5. PSO – 2)

5. Prepare a report with algorithm and expected output. (PO – 5, 10. PSO – 2)


BANGALORE




V & VI Semester B. E.

2




Faculty List



Professor & Head




















21. Lakshmi Srinivasan M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor












3





education





To be, and be recognized as, an excellent Department in Electronics & Communication Engineering










4








a. Fundamental Concepts: Recollect the essential descriptions from basic sciences, and apply them

in E & C streams.

b. Analysis: Demonstrate ability to identify, interpret and solve engineering problems.

c. Design Concepts: Design circuits and conduct experiments with electronic systems,

communication equipment, analyze and interpret the result

d. Design Applications: Design systems/subsystems and devices

e. Team Work: Demonstrate the capability to visualize, organize and work in laboratory and

interdisciplinary tasks.

f. Technical Skills: Demonstrate skills using software tools and other modern equipment.

g. Professional Ethics: Inculcate the ethical, social and professional responsibilities such as project

management and finance.

h. Communication Skills: Communicate effectively in oral /written form of scientific analysis or

data.

i. Contemporary Issues: Understand the impact of engineering solutions on the society and also

will be aware of contemporary issues and criticisms.

j. Entrepreneurship: Develop self-confidence and become excellent multi-skilled engineer,

manager, leader and entrepreneur and display ability for life-long learning.

k. Competitive Ability: Participate and succeed in competitive examinations/placement and show

potential research capability.

l. Leadership Quality: An understanding of engineering and management principles and apply

these to one’s work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects.

5



SI.

No.

Subject

Code Subject

Teaching

Department

Credits

L T P Total

1. EC501 Analog Communication E & C PS-C 3 0 0 3

2. EC502 Digital Signal Processing E & C PS-C 4 0 0 4

3. EC503 VLSI Design and Circuits E & C PS-C 4 0 0 4

4. EC504 Microcontrollers E & C PS-C 4 0 0 4

5. EC505 Microwave Components & Circuits E & C PS-C 4 0 0 4

6. Departmental Elective – I E & C PS-E x x x 4

7. EC501L Analog Communication Lab E & C PS-C 0 0 1 1

8. EC502L Digital Signal Processing Lab E & C PS-C 0 0 1 1

9. EC504L Microcontroller Lab E & C PS-C 0 0 1 1

Total 19+x x 3+x 26


SI.

No.

Subject

Code Subject

Teaching

Department

Credits

L T P Total

1. EC601 Digital Communication E & C PS-C 4 0 0 4

2. EC602 Analog and Mixed Mode VLSI

Design

E & C PS-C 3 0 0 3

3. EC603 Computer Communication

Networks

E & C PS-C 3 0 0 3

4. EC604 Antennas and Propagation E & C PS-C 3 0 0 3


Management

E & C HSS 2 0 0 2

6. Departmental Elective – II E & C PS-E x x x 4

7. Departmental Elective – III E & C PS-E x x x 4

8. EC601L Digital Communication Lab E & C PS-C 0 0 1 1

9. EC602L VLSI Lab E & C PS-C 0 0 1 1

Total 15+x x 2+x 25

L: Lecture T: Tutorial P: Practical

6




Subject Code Subject Title Credits

L T P C























ECPE23 Advanced Digital Logic Design Course PS-E 3 0 1 4


7




Course Coordinator: Dr. T.D. Senthilkumar

Course objectives:






Course Contents:

UNIT – I







UNIT – II





SSB waves



carrier

UNIT – III




locked loop, non-linear model of phase locked loop, linear model of the phase locked loop, non-

linear effect in FM systems

UNIT – IV

8

Applications of AM and FM: AM radio (super heterodyne): block diagram of transmitter and


receiver.

Elements of Color TV: Frequency range and channel bandwidth, scanning and synchronization,


UNIT – V






TEXTBOOKS:

1. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 3rd


2. Simon Haykin, “An Introduction to Analog and Digital Communication”, 2nd

edition,

John Wiley, 2003

3. R. R. Gulati, “Monochrome and Colour TV”, 3rd

edition, New Age International (P) Ltd.

2004

REFERENCES:

1. B. P. Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, 3rd edition, Oxford


2. H. Taub, D. L. Schilling, “Principles of Communication Systems” 2nd edition, Mc-Graw

Hill, 1986

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe the generation and demodulation of AM and DSBSC systems. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)

2. Describe the generation and demodulation of SSB and VSB. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)

3. Describe the direct and indirect method of generation of FM and its detection. (PO – a, b, c, d,

h, k)

4. Employ AM and FM in radio and TV systems. (PO – b, c, h, i, k)

5. Understand noise performance of receivers. (PO – a, b, h, i, k)

1.

9



Prerequisites: Signals and Systems Contact hours: 56


Course objectives:


Illustrate filtering of long data sequence using overlap add and overlap save method.







Course Contents:

UNIT – I






UNIT – II

FIR Filters: Design of FIR filters: Symmetric and anti-symmetric FIR filters, Design of linear-phase



Structures.

UNIT – III


filters, frequency transformations, design of analog filters, Digital IIR filter design using impulse



UNIT – IV


Hardware multiplier-accumulator, On-chip memory/cache, Extended Parallelism-SIMD, VLIW and



10

UNIT – V

TMS320C54xProcessor: Architecture of 54x, Addressing modes: direct, Indirect addressing,

absolute addressing, memory mapped register addressing, stack addressing, circular and bit reversal

addressing. Instruction set: Load/store operations, Arithmetic operations, Logical Operations,

Program control operations. Implementation of FIR and IIR filters.

TEXTBOOKS:


Applications,” Pearson Education Asia/Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

2. Sanjit K. Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

3. Sen M. Kuo, Woon-Seng Gan, “Digital Signal Processors: Architectures,

Implementations and Applications”, Pearson Education Asia, 1st Edition, 2005.

4. Emmanuel Ifeachor, Barrie W. Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing: A Practical Approach”,

Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2002.

REFERENCES:

1. Oppenheim and Schafer, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”, Pearson Education, 2003.

2. Venkataramani B, Bhaskar M, “Digital Signal Processors: Architecture, Programming and

Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze the importance and application of FFT algorithm. (PO – a, b, c, k)

2. Design FIR and IIR filters which are used for various applications. (PO – b, c, d, k)

3. Employ digital filter structure to implement FIR and IIR expression. (PO – b, d, k)

4. Analyze the significance of DSP processor in real time application. (PO – a, b, h)

5. Describe processor architecture using macro model. (PO – b, d, h)



Prerequisites: Solid State Devices and Technology Contact hours: 56


Course objectives:




Calculate propagation delay, noise margins, and power dissipation in the digital VLSI circuits.

Design Combinational (e.g., arithmetic) and sequential circuit.

Course Contents:

11

UNIT – I

Introduction: Historical perspective, circuit design example, VLSI Design methodologies,

hierarchy, Concept of modularity, regularity, locality, Design styles, Packaging, CAD. Fabrication of


UNIT – II

MOS Transistor: Structure, external biasing, operation, V I Characteristics, scaling, MOS

Capacitor, MOS Inverter: Static characteristics: Resistive load inverter, N type load, CMOS Inverter.

UNIT – III


resistance, capacitance estimation, Switching power dissipation, super buffers.

UNIT – IV






UNIT V



TEXTBOOK:

1. Sung – Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici, “CMOS digital integrated circuits – Analysis and Design”,

Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd

Edition, 2003.

REFERENCES:

1. Kamran Eshraghian, Dougles and A. Pucknell, “Essentials of VLSI circuits and systems”, PHI,

2005 Edition.

2. Weste and Eshraghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design” - Pearson Education, 1999.

3. John P. Uyemura, “Chip Design for Submicron VLSI: CMOS Layout & Simulation”, Thomson

Learning, 2005.

4. John P. Uyemura, “Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems”, John Wiley, 2003.

5. Jan M. Rabaey, “Digital Integrated Circuits”, PHI, EEE, 1997. 6. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design”, Pearson Education, 3

rd Edition, 1997.

Course Outcomes:

1. Explain chip design options and design rules in VLSI. Illustrate the steps in CMOS VLSI

fabrication. (PO – c, d, h)

12

2. Apply basic principles to derive threshold voltages, and hence predict performance of various

inverter structures. (PO – a, b, c, h, k)

3. Describe the source of parasitics in MOS structures and their effect on circuit performance.

(PO – a, b, c, d, h)

4. Employ different logic styles for circuit design and compare and contrast their performance.

(PO – b, c, d, h)

5. Define different terms in the DFT domain and describe some important methods for DFT.

(PO – d, h)

MICROCONTROLLERS


Prerequisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact hours: 56

Course coordinator: Mrs. K. V. Suma

Course objectives:











Course Contents:

UNIT – I



architectures.





Programs.

UNIT – II



13


programs.





UNIT – III





UNIT – IV





Motor Interfacing.

UNIT – V

Introduction to MSP430: Low power features, Pin-out, Functional block diagram, Memory map,

MSP430 families.



modes of operation.




LCD.


TEXTBOOKS:


Second Edition, Penram International 1996 / Thomson Learning, 2005.

14

2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin D McKinlay,“The 8051 Microcontroller



REFERENCES:



Course outcomes:


microcontrollers. (PO – a, b, k)


ROM addresses, exchange data, predict the ranges of Jump.(PO – a, b, c)

3. Develop8051 assembly language and C programs for time delays, I/O operations, and Serial

communication. (PO – a, b, c, f, h, k)

4. Develop programs using interrupts and write C programs to interface 8051 chip to interfacing

modules to develop single chip solutions.(PO – a, b, c, d, f, h, k)


microcontrollers to design low power embedded applications using MSP430.

(PO – a, b, c, d, f, h)





Course Objectives:

Apply knowledge of impedance matching for designing feed networks for devices like

antennas that may be fed using different transmission line.

Extend the applicability of Smith charts for analyzing active circuits.

Analyze systems that contain a combination of various microwave components like

directional couplers, filters, mixers etc.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I





15

UNIT – II






UNIT – III



networks and lossless networks, shift in reference planes; Basic properties of dividers and couplers –

three-port networks, four-port networks; T-junction power divider – lossless divider, resistive

divider; Wilkinson power divider – even-odd mode analysis.

UNIT – IV





UNIT – V





bunching process. (No Mathematical Analysis)

TEXTBOOKS:

1. David M Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, 3rd

edition, Wiley, 2011.

2. Samuel Y Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”, 3rd

edition, Pearson, 2011.

REFERENCES:

1. Annapurna Das and Sisir K Das, “Microwave Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 2006.

2. John Ryder D, “Networks, Lines and Fields”, 2nd

edition, PHI, 2010.

3. R. E. Collin, “Foundations for Microwave Engineering”, 2nd

edition, John Wiley, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Define line parameters and analyze various transmission lines and resonators.(PO – a, b, h, k)

16


impedance matching networks.(PO – a, b, c, h, k)

3. Employ microwave network analysis in design of multiport microwave networks.(PO – a, b, c,

d, e, h, k)

4. Describe and design microwave filters.(PO – a, b, c, d, e, h, k)

5. Apply different microwave diodes and mixers in microwave systems.(PO – a, b, c, d, e, h, k)





Course Objectives:

Obtain a practical perspective of various communication modules

Implement various analog modulation and demodulation schemes using discrete components

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS





3. Class-C amplifier. Plot of efficiency vs load resistance.

4. Generation of AM using collector modulation. Plot of modulation signal amplitude vs

modulation index.

5. Demodulation of AM using envelope detector. Plot of AM output vs input signal



8. Generation of FM using IC 8038. Plot of frequency vs input dc and estimation of modulation

index





TEXTBOOKS:

1. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 3rd



edition,

John Wiley, 2003

Course Outcomes:

1. Construct second order active filters for various frequency bands. (PO – b, c, e, f, h, j)

2. Design and implement modulation and demodulation circuit for amplitude modulation.(PO – a,

c, d, e, f, h, j)

17

3. Design and implement modulation and demodulation circuit for frequency modulation.(PO – c,

e, f, h, j)

4. Construct the circuit and study the characteristics of pre-emphasis and de-emphasis circuit.(PO

– c, e, f, h, j)

5. Construct RF up and down converter.(PO – c, e, f, h, j)





Course Objectives:

Gain a working knowledge of the design & implementation on various DSP operations using

MATLAB.

Obtain a practical perspective of convolution and filtering operations using DSP processor

A. LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING MATLAB


Folding)



a) Linear b) Circular

4. Solving a given difference equation with and without initial conditions

5. Computation of N point DFT of a given sequence and to plot magnitude and phase spectrum,






sampling method)


Bilinear Transform)






5. Realization of an FIR filter (any type) to meet given specifications. The input can be a signal


TEXTBOOKS:

1. “Digital Signal Processing using MATLAB”, J. G. Proakis, Ingle, MGH, 2000.

2. “Digital Signal Processors”, B. Venkataramani and Bhaskar, TMH, 2002.

18

REFERENCES:

1. “Digital Signal Processing using MATLAB”, Sanjit K Mitra, TMH, 2001.

Course Outcomes

1. Perform basic operations on a given signal.(PO – a, b, f)

2. Implement linear convolution and circular convolution.(PO – b, f)

3. Implement FIR filter and IIR to meet the given specifications.(PO – b, c, d, f)

4. Implement IIR filters to meet the given specification.(PO – b, c, d, f)

5. Implement convolution and filtering using DSP processor.(PO – b, f)

MICROCONTROLLER LAB



Course Coordinator: Mrs. K. V. Suma

Course Objectives:









Understand assembly level programming and the C data types for MSP430&write C programs

& assembly language programs using Code Composer Studio IAR workbench development

software.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS



2. Counters



PART B: INTERFACING






19




TEXTBOOKS:



2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin D McKinlay,“The 8051 Microcontroller



REFERENCES:



Course Outcomes:

1. Use hardware and software development and debugging tools.(PO – b, c, d, e, f, )



tools.(PO – a, b, c, e, f)




generate waveforms using DAC. (PO – a, b, c, e, f)


8051 microcontroller.(PO – b, c, d, e, f, k)

5. Design low power embedded applications using MSP430.(PO – b, d, e, f, k)

20



Prerequisites: Analog Communication, Signals and Systems Contact Hours: 56

Course Coordinator: Lakshmi S.

Course Objectives:










Course Contents:

UNIT – I




UNIT – II



UNIT – III




UNIT – IV




ASK, FSK and BPSK.

UNIT – V

21



BPSK, Synchronization: Carrier synchronization Symbol Synchronization.

TEXTBOOKS:


2. J. Proakis, “Digital Communication”, 4th

Edition, McGraw Hill, 2000.

REFERENCES:

1. K. Sam Shanmugam, “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, John Wiley, 1996.



4. K. Sam Shanmugam, A. M. Breipohl, “Random Signals: Detection, Estimation and Data

Analysis”, Wiley, 1988.

Course Outcomes:

1. Sample a signal and reconstruct it at receiver.(PO – a, b, c, h, k)

2. Design a PCM, DPCM, DM and ADM systems.(PO – a, b, c, d,h, k)

3. Design Base Band shaping for data transmission.(PO – a, b, c, k)

4. Describe system level blocks for BPSK, ASK, DPSK and QPSK systems.(PO – a, b, c, h, k)

5. Using GSDP procedure, analyze coherent and no-coherent digital modulation systems and

understand the basics of spread spectrum technology. (PO – a, b, c, h, k)

22

ANALOG AND MIXED MODE SIGNAL VLSI DESIGN


Prerequisites: Solid State Devices and Technology Contact hours: 42


Course Objectives:

Design single stage amplifiers using PMOS & NMOS driver circuits with different loads.

Quantitatively analyze a differential pair amplifier with differential loads.

Analyze the frequency response of single stage and multistage amplifiers.

Analyze the op-amp characteristics and its performance parameters.

Analyze the stability and frequency compensation of op-amp.

Study the fundamentals of data converters.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Introduction &Single Stage Amplifiers: MOS Device Basics, MOS Device, Models, RC Circuits,



UNIT – II

Differential Amplifier & Current Mirrors: Introduction to Differential Pair Amplifier,


Amplifiers with Different Loads, Effects of Mismatches. Simple Current Mirrors, Cascode Current

Mirrors, Differential Pair with Current Mirror Load.

UNIT – III

Operational Amplifiers & Frequency Response: Op Amps Low Frequency Analysis, Two Stage

Op Amps, Common Mode Feedback, Frequency Response of Common Source Amplifiers, Source



UNIT – IV

Frequency Compensation & Stability: General considerations, multi-pole systems, Phase Margin,



UNIT – V

Data Converters: Analog vs Digital Discrete Time-Signals, Converting Analog Signals to Digital




Flash, Pipeline ADC, Integrating ADC, Successive Approximation methods, Problems.

23

TEXTBOOKS:

1. B Razavi ,”Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, First Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001



REFERENCES:

1. Johns and Martin “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, John Wiley Publications, 1997

2. P E Allen and D R Holberg “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Second Edition, Oxford

University Press, 2002.


Course Outcomes:

1. Design a simple current mirror & cascaded current mirrors.(PO – a, b, c, d, f, j, k)

2. Design a multistage amplifier using single stage amplifier concept.(PO – a, b, c, d, f, j, k)

3. Determine the poles and zeros of a multi pole system & analyze the frequency response,

stability of the system.(PO – a, b, c, d, f, h, j, k)

4. Design an operational amplifier to optimize its performance metrics.(PO – a, b, c, d, f, h, j, k)

5. Analyze different ADC/DAC architectures.(PO – a, b, c, d, h, j, k)

COMPUTER COMMUNICATION NETWORKS


Prerequisites: Fundamentals of Computing and Data Structures Contact Hours: 42


Course Objectives:

Understand the fundamentals of OSI model and the TCP/IP suite


Basic concept about the protocols for the transmission of frames.

Understanding the concepts of multiple access such as Random access, Controlled access and

Channelization

Discuss the basic concepts of IEEE standards for wired and wireless LAN, and its architecture,

Connecting devices.



Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Network Models: Introduction, Layered tasks, OSI Model Layers in OSI model: TCP/IP Suite,

Addressing, Telephone Network, Dial up Modem DSL, Cable TV for Data Transmission, FDDI,

SONET.

UNIT – II

24

Data Link Control: Framing, Flow and error control, Protocols, Noiseless channels and noisy


UNIT – III

Multiple access: Random access: CSMA, CSMA/CD, CSMA/CA, Controlled access Channelization

UNIT – IV

Wired, Wireless LAN and Connecting LANs: Ethernet, IEEE standards, Standard Ethernet, IEEE

802.11Bluetooth, Connecting LANS Connecting Devices, Back Bone Networks

UNIT –V





TEXTBOOK:

1. B. Forouzan, “Data Communication Networking”, 4th

Edition, TMH, 2006.

REFERENCES:

1. James F. Cruz, Keith. W. Ross, “Computer Networks”, Pearson Education, 2nd

Edition,2003.

2. Wayne Tomasi, “Introduction to Data communication and networking”, Pearson Education,

2007.

Course Outcomes:

1. Discriminate the functionality between the layers in OSI model and TCP/IP suite.(PO – b, h, k)


protocols. (PO – a, b, d, f, h, k)

3. Distinguish the IEEE standards designed to understand the interconnectivity between different

LANs.(PO – b, h, k)

4. Analyze the global addressing schemes in the Internet to configure the addresses for the

subnet.(PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)

5. Employ different algorithms to route a packet to the destination in different networks needed

for process to process delivery. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)




Course Coordinator: Mr. V Nuthan Prasad

Course Objectives:

25







application.


propagation.

UNIT – I

Antenna basics: Introduction, basic antenna parameters, patterns, beam area, radiation intensity,

beam efficiency, directivities and gain, antenna apertures, effective height, bandwidth, radiation

efficiency, antenna temperature and antenna field zones.

UNIT – II

Point sources and arrays: Introduction, point sources, power patterns, power theorem, radiation

intensity, field patterns, phase patterns, Array of two isotropic point sources, principles of pattern

multiplication, broad side, end fire array and Hasen and Woodyard array.

UNIT – III

Electric dipoles and thin linear antennas: Introduction, short electric dipole, fields of a short

dipole, radiation resistance of short dipole, field patterns of dipole in general, λ/2 dipole, radiation

resistances of λ/2 thin linear antenna, long wire antenna, folded dipole antennas.



UNIT – IV

Antenna types: Yagi-Uda array, parabolic reflectors, log periodic dipole antenna, lens antenna,

rectangular horn antennas, introduction to smart antennas.

Microstrip Antennas: Salient features, Advantages and limitations, Rectangular microstrip

antennas, Feed methods, Characteristics of microstrip antennas.

UNIT – 5

Radio wave propagation: Introduction, free space propagation, ground reflection, surface wave,

diffraction, space wave propagation.



TEXTBOOK:

26

1. John D Kraus, Ronald J Marhetka, Ahmad S Khan, “Antenna and Wave Propagation”, Fourth

edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

REFERENCES:

1. John D Kraus, “Antennas”, McGraw Hill, 2nd

edition, 1988.

2. Lamont V Blake, “Antennas: Fundamentals, Design, Measurement”, 3rd

edition, Scitech

Publishing, 2009.

3. Constantine A Balanis, “Antenna, Theory, Analysis & Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd

edition, 1997.

Course Outcomes:

1. Evaluate various far-field antenna parameters and apply the Friis transmission formula.

(PO – a, b, c, d, j, k, l)

2. Analyze various linear arrays of point sources and apply the pattern multiplication principle.

(PO – a, b, c, h, i, j, k)

3. Classify different field patterns on dipole and loop antenna.(PO – a, b, c, d, h, i, k)

4. Describe the operation and applications of various aperture antennas. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, k)

5. Characterize the propagation of radio waves in the atmosphere.(PO – a, b, e, h, i)




Course Coordinator: Mr. C. G. Raghavendra

Course Objectives:




context.






Course Contents:

UNIT – I



Roles of management, Levels of management. Development of management thought, early


27

Planning: Nature, Importance and purpose of planning process, Objectives, Types of plans (meaning

only), Decision making, Importance of planning, Steps in planning and planning premises, Hierarchy

of plans.

UNIT – II


organization, Departmentation, Committees, Centralization vs Decentralization of authority and

responsibility, Span and control, MBO and MBE (meaning).Nature and importance of staffing,


UNIT – III


Communication meaning and importance, Techniques and importance of coordination, Meaning and


UNIT – IV


concept, Functions of an entrepreneur, Evolution of Entrepreneur, Development of Entrepreneurship,

Entrepreneur vs Intrapreneur, Entrepreneurship and Manager, Attributes and Characteristics of a

successful Entrepreneur, Role of Entrepreneur in Indian economy and developing economies with

reference to Self-Employment development, Entrepreneurship in India, Entrepreneurship – its




– government policy towards SSI, Different policies of SSI, Government support during 5 years



UNIT – V

Project Management: Meaning of project, Project Identification, Project selection, Project report -









TEXTBOOKS:

1. P. C. Tripathi, P. N. Reddy, “Principles of Management”, McGraw Hill, 2008.

2. Vasant Desai, “Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development & Management”, Himalaya

Publishing House, 4th Edition, 2010.

3. Poornima M Charantimath, “Entrepreneurship Development – Small Business Enterprises”,

Pearson Education, 3rd

edition, 2006.

28

REFERENCES:

1. Robert Lusier, “Management Fundamentals – Concepts, Application, Skill Development”,

Thomson, 2006.

2. S. S. Khanka, “Entrepreneurship Development”, S Chand & Co, 3rd

edition, 2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Identify, analyze and solve organizational problems. (PO – a, b, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, l)

2. Apply knowledge and skills required to function in a specific managerial discipline. (PO – a, b,

e, g, h, i, j, k, l)

3. Recognize and apply knowledge of environmental friendly resources and to utilize them

effectively and efficiently in a workplace environment. (PO – a, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, l)

4. Acquired all the necessary skills and knowledge to be a successful entrepreneur.(PO – a, b, d, e,

g, h, i, j, k, l)

5. Effectively prepare and present project appraisal and report.(PO – a, b, c, d, f, g, h, i, j, k, l)

DIGITAL COMMUNICATION AND MICROWAVE LABORATORY


Prerequisite: Analog Communication Contact Sessions: 12


Course Objectives:

Verify sampling theorem

Implement various Digital modulation and demodulation schemes using discrete components

Multiplex signals in time-domain

Verify microwave three port and four port network analysis using scattering

parameters.(Power dividers and directional couplers)

Understand the wave propagation through the rectangular waveguide and to measure VSWR,

impedance and operating frequency.

Determine the gain and directivity and beam width of dipole and yagi antennas using strip or

micro strip line.

Observe the losses in optical fiber communication link.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Verification of Sampling theorem using natural sampling and Flat Top sampling circuits


receiver.








29

7. To verify the power division and calculate insertion loss, isolation of Hybrid network (Magic

tee).

8. Measurement of losses in a given optical fiber (propagation loss, bending loss) and numerical

aperture.


test bench.

10. Measurement of directivity and gain of antennas: Standard dipole (or printed dipole), and Yagi

antenna (printed).

11. Determination of coupling and isolation characteristics of a stripline (or microstrip)directional

coupler

12. (a) Measurement of resonance characteristics of a microstrip ring resonator and determination

of dielectric constant

(b) Measurement of power division and isolation characteristics of a microstrip 3 dB power

divider.

TEXTBOOKS:


2. J. Proakis, “Digital Communication”, 4th


Course Outcomes:

1. Implement a natural sampling and flat-top sampling circuit to find Nyquist rate.(PO – a, b, c, e,

f, h, k)

2. Design and implement ASK, PSK, FSK, DPSK digital modulation schemes.(PO – c, d, e, f, h,

k)

3. Obtain the transmission line parameters of different types of transmission lines.(PO – c, d, e, f,

h, k,)

4. Employ microwave network analysis in design of multiport microwave networks.(PO – b, c, d,

e, f, h, k)

5. Obtain the radiation pattern and calculate antenna parameters.(PO – b, c, d, e, f, h, k)

VLSI LAB




Course Objectives:

VLSI design and MOS concepts are employed in various MOS amplifier applications

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

I: Digital Circuits using Microwind Tool


(i) Not gate (ii) 2 input nand gate and nor gate (iii) Ex-or gate (iv) full adder (v) 4-bit parallel

adder

30


(i) JK Flip Flop using nand gates (ii) JK Master slave flip flop (iii) 3bit asynchronous up counter

(iv) 3 bit SIPO shift register

3. Preparing Layout and checking DRC for combinational circuits/sequential circuits (i) Inverter (ii)

Full adder (iii) JK Flipflop


1. Design an Inverter with given specifications, completing the design flow mentioned below:


i) DC Analysis



c. Check for LVS


e. Verify & Optimize for Time, Power and Area to the given constraint


below:


i) DC Analysis

ii) AC Analysis



c. Check for LVS





below:


i) DC Analysis

ii) AC Analysis



c. Check for LVS


i) Current mirrors


4. Design an op-amp with given specification using given differential amplifier Common source

and Common Drain amplifier in library and completing the design flow mentioned below:


i) DC Analysis

ii) AC Analysis



c. Check for LVS


31

TEXTBOOKS:

1. “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, B Razavi, First Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001.



REFERENCES:

1. Johns and Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, John Wiley Publications, 1997.

2. P E Allen and D R Holberg, “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Second Edition, Oxford



Course Outcomes

1. Practically simulate the theory concepts using microwind and cadence simulators. (PO – c, d, e,

f, h, j)

2. Simulate the basic building blocks for required gain and stability. (PO – c, d, e, f, h, j)

3. Implement the basic building blocks used for construction of opamp. (PO – c, d, e, f, h, j)

4. Use op-amp and various components for constructing any data converter applications. (PO – a,

b, c, d, e, f, h, j)

5. Implement any digital circuit using microwind tool. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f, h, j)

32





L T P C























ECPE23 Advanced Digital Logic Design Course PS-E 3 0 1 4


33




Prerequisites : Data Structures using C Contact Hours: 42 + 14

Course Objectives:

Understand OOP concepts –classes, objects



Course Contents:

UNIT – I





friendly functions

UNIT – II





UNIT – III



UNIT – IV


Applications


UNIT V

Skip lists and hashing: Linear representation, skip list and hash table representation



34

List of Programs:

1. Simple C++ program, use of cin and cout statements, program using setw manipulator.

2. Programs using functions: Passing arguments such as variables, reference arguments, pointers.

3. Programs using return from functions: reference arguments, structures, Recursions

4. Simple program using class and objects, nesting of member functions, Arrays within a class.







11. Construction of singly linked list and perform operations such as insertion, deletion,

searching and displaying.

12. Program to construct binary search tree, to insert a node, delete a node, display the tree

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Robert Lafore, “Introduction to OOPs with C++”, 4th edition, Sams Publishing, 2001.

2. E. Balaguruswamy, “Object oriented programming with C++”, TMH, 4th edition, 2011.

3. D. S. Malik, “Data Structures using C++”, India edition, Cengage Learning, 2003.

REFERENCES:

1. Gray Litwin, “Programming with C++ and Data Structures”, Vikas Publications, 2003.

2. Aaron M. Tanenbaum, “Data structures using C and C++”, Pearson Education, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Outline the essential features and elements of C++ programming.(PO – a, e, f, k)

2. Apply the concepts of class, method, constructor, instance, data abstraction, function

abstraction, inheritance, and virtual functions.(PO – d, e, f, k)

3. Understand operator overloading and the handling mechanism.(PO – d, e, f, k)

4. Apply data structures such as stacks and queues in programs.(PO – d, e, k)

5. Understand and apply fundamental algorithmic problems including tree traversals, graph

traversals, and shortest paths.(PO – d, e, k)

OPERATING SYSTEMS



Course objectives:

Understand the goals of OS

Study the different types of OS for different application



Study file handling and organization

35

UNIT – I

Introduction: Overview: goals, resource allocations, classes, batch processing. Multiprogramming,

time sharing real time and distributed OS

UNIT – II

Structure: Operation, structure of supervisor configuring and installing, OS with monolithic

structure, layered design virtual machine OS, kernel based OS

UNIT – III

Processes: Definition, programmers view and OS view, interacting processes, threads, processes in


UNIT– IV

File system: IOCS, directories, I/O organization, interface between file system and IOCS, allocation


UNIT – V




UNIX.

TEXTBOOK:

1. D. Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems”, McGraw Hill, 2008

REFERENCES:

1. A. Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, G. Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”, Wiley, 8th

Edition,

2008

2. M. Palmer, M. Walters, “Guide to Operating Systems”, 4th Edition, Course Technology, 2011

Course Outcomes:

1. Appreciate the goals and application of OS. (PO – a, f, g)

2. Analyze a process and threads in UNIX. (PO – a, b, c, d)

3. Analyze memory handling. (PO – a, b, j, k)

4. Explore file systems. (PO – a, b)

5. Design and organize scheduling. (PO – a, b, c, d, i)




36

Course Objectives:









UNIT – I





UNIT – II






UNIT – III



UNIT – IV

Basic Processing Unit: Register Transfers, Performing an Arithmetic or Logic operation, Fetching a

Word from Memory, Storing a Word in Memory, Execution of a Complete Instruction, Branch

instruction, Multiple Bus Organization, Hardwired Control, A Complete Processor, Micro

programmed Control.

UNIT – V






TEXTBOOK:

1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat Zaky, “Computer Organization”, Fifth Edition,


37

REFERENCES:




Hardware/Software Interface”, Third Edition, Elsevier, 2005.

3. John P. Hayes, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,

1998.

4. V.P. Heuring, H.F. Jordan, “Computer Systems Design and Architecture”, Second Edition,


Course Outcomes:

1. Understand the basic hardware and internal architecture of a computer.(PO – a, e, f, i)

2. Employ various data representations and explain how arithmetic and logical operations are

performed by computer.(PO – a, b, c, d)

3. Design basic CPU, memory and I/O devices. (PO – d, e, f, k)

4. Design basic I/O system and interconnection structure of a computer.(PO – d, e, h, k)

5. Analyze performance of different architectural designs.(PO – b, e, h, j)

POWER ELECTRONICS


Pre requisites: Analog Electronic Circuits Contact Hours: 42 +14

Course Objectives:








Course Contents:

UNIT – I






circuits.

UNIT – II

38




UNIT – III




UNIT – IV





UNIT – V



TEXTBOOKS:

1. M. H. Rashid, “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, 3rd

Edition, Prentice

Hall, 2003.

2. G. K. Dubey, S. R. Doradla, A. Joshi, R. M. K. Sinha, “Thyristorized Power Controllers”, New

Age International Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, 1986.

REFERENCES:

1. P. S. Bhimbra, “Power Electronics”, Khanna Publication, 1995.

2. SCR GE Manual, 6th


Course Outcomes:

1. Design drive controls for power semiconductor devices. (PO – a, b, c, e, f)

2. Analyze the operation of single phase and three phase rectifiers with various loads. (PO – b, c, d)

3. Design commutation circuits. (PO – c, d, e, k)

4. Design ac-voltage controllers for different configurations. (PO – c, d, e, k)

5. Analyze the operation of choppers and inverters. (PO – a, b, d, e, k)




Course Objectives:

39




instruments such as Voltmeters, Multimeters, Frequency meters, Phasemeters, Tachometers,

PHmeters etc.







Course Contents:

UNIT – I








multimeter.

UNIT – II







UNIT – III





UNIT – IV



40



target system.



UNIT – V


choice (selection) of transducers, Digital Transducers -Optical encoders, Shaft (spatial) encoders.


Data loggers: Basic operation of data loggers.




TEXTBOOKS:


Techniques”, PHI, 2012.

2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements”, 2nd

Edition, PHI, 2009.

3. M. M. S. Anand, “Electronic Instruments and Instrumentation Technology”, PHI, Eighth

printing, 2010.

4. H. S. Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation”, TMH, 3rd


REFERENCES:

1. A. J. Bouwens, “Digital Instrumentation”, PHI, 2007.

2. A. K. Sawhney, “Electrical and electronic Measurements and Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai&

Co, 19th Revised Edition 2011.

Course Outcomes:


electronic instrumentation systems.(PO – a, c, d, h)


designing and constructing the various new types of instruments for different applications.(PO

– a, c, d, e, f, h, i, j, l)

3. Illustrate the applications such as design & testing of differential circuits and systems using

suitable instruments.(PO – c, d, f, h, i, j, l)

41

4. Select the instruments for observing the timing relationships, frequency spectrum, recording the

data and waveforms.(PO – c, d, f, h, i, j, l)


systems, digital process controllers etc. in the various industrial and electronic applications.(PO

– b, e, f, h, i, j, l)




Course Objectives:




Design optimum and adaptive filters

Course Contents:

UNIT – I


discrete time systems, Minimum phase and system invertibility

UNIT – II



random vectors.

UNIT – III

Non-parametric power spectrum estimation: Spectral analysis of deterministic signals, estimation


random signals.

UNIT – IV



UNIT – V



adaptive filters.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. D G Manolakis, V K Ingle and S M Kogon, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal Processing”,

MGH, 2000.

42

2. M H Hayes, “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”, John Wiley, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe behavior of LTI systems to stationary signals. (PO – a, b, c, f, h)

2. Describe discrete time stochastic process. (PO – a, b, f, h)

3. Estimate autocorrelation and psd of stationary signals. (PO – a, b, c, f, h)

4. Design optimum FIR and IIR filters. (PO – a, b, c, d, f, k)

5. Design optimum and adaptive filters. (PO – a, b, c, d, f, h)

IMAGE PROCESSING

Subject code: ECPE07 Credits: 3:0:1

Prerequisites: Digital Signal Processing Contact Hours: 42 + 14

Course Objectives:





Study thresholding and different segmentation techniques.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I Introduction and Fundamentals: What is Digital Image Processing? Origins, Examples,

Fundamental Steps, Components, Elements of visual perception, Image Sensing and acquisition,

Image sampling and quantization, Basic relationship between pixels, Mathematical tools used in

image processing.

UNIT – II

Intensity Transformations and Spatial Filtering: Basic intensity transformation functions.

Histogram processing, Spatial filtering, smoothing spatial filters, Sharpening spatial filters.

UNIT – III


Transforms, 1D-DFT,2D-DFT, DCT, Basics of filtering in the frequency domain , Image Smoothing

and Image Sharpening using Frequency domain filters.

UNIT – IV

Image Restoration: Model of image degradation/restoration process, noise models, Spatial filtering,



43

UNIT – V

Image Segmentation: Fundamentals, Edge detection, Edge linking via Hough Transform,

Thresholding, Region Based Segmentation, Segmentation using Morphological Watersheds.

List of Programs:





Spatial Filtering






TEXTBOOKS:

1. R C. Gonzalez, R.E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd

edition, Pearson Education, 2009.

2. R C. Gonzalez, R.E. Woods, S.L.Eddins, “Digital Image Processing using MATLAB”, 2nd

Edition, 2009.

REFERENCE:

1. Anil. K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Pearson, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze general terminology of digital image processing.(PO – a, b, e, f)

2. Examine various types of images, intensity transformations and spatial filtering. (PO – d, e, f)

3. Employ Fourier Transform for image processing in frequency domain.(PO – a, d, e, f)

4. Evaluate the methodologies for image restoration and segmentation.(PO – d, e, f)

5. Apply image processing algorithms in practical applications.(PO – d, e, f)



Prerequisites: Analog Communication Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:


systems.




44










Course Contents:

UNIT – I








UNIT – II






UNIT – III





packing, Re-arrangeable networks, Strict sense three stage non-blocking networks.

UNIT – IV





UNIT – V



45









TEXTBOOKS:

1. J. E. Flood, “Telecommunication Switching Traffic and Networks”, Pearson Education, Fourth

impression, 2008.

2. Thiagarajan Viswanathan, “Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks”, PHI,

Thirty Fifth Printing, August 2011.

3. Syed R. Ali, “Digital Switching Systems”, TMH, 2010.

REFERENCE:

1. John C. Bellamy, “Digital Telephony”, John Wiley, 3rd

Edition, 2002.

Course Outcomes:


communication and apply the concept to different types of switching systems.(PO – a, b, g, h, j)


networks to provide required services to the customers at a satisfactory level.(PO – a, b, d, g, h,

j, k)

3. Estimate the optimum number of switching elements (cross points) from the knowledge of the

design of different switching networks.(PO – a, b, e, g, h, j, l)



networks.(PO – c, d, g, h, j)


maintainability of a switching system (Central Office).(PO – a, b, g, h, j, l)




Course Objectives:






46

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Zplane analysis of discrete control systems: Impulses ampling and data hold, obtaining the Z-


plane, right half plane, obtaining ZT of function involving the term ( )

pulse transfer function;




PID Controller.

UNIT – II




response analysis.

UNIT – III



UNIT – IV




UNIT – V

Pole placement and observer design: Controllability, Observability, design via pole placement.

TEXTBOOK:

1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Discrete Time Control System”, PHI, Second Edition, 2008

REFERENCES:

1. C. L. Phillips, H. Troy Nagle, “Digital Control System Analysis and Design”, PHI, 1995.

2. M. Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Third edition, Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi, 2009.

3. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education, Eighth

Edition, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

47

1. Develop pulse transfer function of discrete control systems. (PO – a, b, c)

2. Analyze the stability of DTCS. (PO – a, b, d)

3. Design DTCS using Root locus and frequency method. (PO – a, b, d)

4. Apply state space analysis to represent various canonical forms. (PO – a, b, c, d)

5. Design systems using pole placement. (PO – b, c, d)

LINEAR ALGEBRA



Course Objectives:




simple proofs.


Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Linear Equations: Systems of Linear Equations, Row reduction and Echelon Forms, Vector

Equations, Matrix Equation Ax=b, Solution Sets of Linear Systems, Linear Independence,

Introduction to Linear Transformations, Matrix of a Linear Transformation, Linear Models in

Engineering.

UNIT – II




UNIT – III

Eigen Values and Eigen Vectors: Characteristic equation, Diagonalization, eigenvectors and Linear

Transformations.

UNIT – IV



UNIT – V



48

TEXTBOOKS:

1. David C Lay, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, 3rd


2. Gilbert Strang, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, 3rd


2003.

Course Outcomes:

1. Solve systems of linear equations using multiple methods, including Gaussian elimination

and matrix inversion.(PO – a, b)

2. Demonstrate understanding of the concepts of vector space and subspace.(PO – a, b, c, d)

3. Determine eigen values and eigenvectors and solve eigen value problems.(PO – a, b, c, d)

4. Apply principles of matrix algebra to linear transformations.(PO – a, b, c, d, h)

5. Demonstrate understanding of inner products and associated norms.(PO – a, b, c, d, h)



Prerequisites : Solid State Circuits and Devices Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:






Course Contents:

UNIT – I





UNIT – II






UNIT – III


Nitride, Quartz, Poly silicon, Polymers, Materials for wafer processing, Packaging materials, Silicon

wafer processing, lithography, thin-film deposition, etching (wet and dry), wafer-bonding, Silicon

micromachining: surface, bulk, LIGA process, Wafer bonding process.

49

UNIT – IV






UNIT – V




TEXTBOOKS:


Smart Systems”, Wiley India, First edition, 2010

2. T R Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacturing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd

Edition, 2008

3. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson International Edition, 2006

4. S D Senturia, “Microsystem Design”, Springer International Edition, 2001

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand microsystem and their applications. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, j)

2. Analyze Scaliy laws and operate of various practical MEMS systems. (PO – a, b, c, d, h, i, j, l)

3. Analyze the electrical and electronics aspect of MEMS system. (PO – a, b, c, i, j, l)

4. Employ various micromachining techniques for MEMS devices. (PO – a, b, c, d, i, j, k, l)

5. Describe various packages techniques for MEMS devices. (PO – b, h, i, k, l)



Prerequisites : Nil Contact Hours: 42 + 14

Course Objectives:





Course Contents:

UNIT – I

50


Architecture: Single Layer, Multi-layer Feed Forward Networks, Recurrent Networks, Learning

methods.

UNIT – II




UNIT – III




UNIT – IV


logic: Interpretations of predicate logic formula, inference in predicate logic.

Fuzzy logic: Fuzzy Quantifiers, Fuzzy inference. Fuzzy rule based system, defuzzification.

Applications: Greg Viot’s Fuzzy cruise controller, Air conditioner controller.

UNIT – V




TEXTBOOKS:

1. S. Rajasekaran, G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic

algorithms”, PHI, 2003.



3. Timothy Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, John Wiley and Sons, 2004.

REFERENCES:

1. Jacek M. Zurada, “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”, Jaico Publishing House.

2. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks- A Comprehensive Foundation”, Pearson Education, 2001.

3. B. Kosko, “Neural Networks and Fuzzy systems, Prentice Hall, 1991.

Course Outcomes:

1. Generate logic functions like AND,OR, XOR using learning rules.(PO – a, b, f)

2. Apply Hebb rule and perceptron learning rule for pattern classification problem.(PO – b, c, f, k)

51

3. Understand character recognition and data compression using back propagation network.(PO –

b, c, d, f, k)

4. Apply the rules of fuzzy logic for fuzzy controller.(PO – b, d, f, k)

5. Employ fuzzy set operations and defuzzification for control system applications. (PO – a, b, d,

f, k)




Course Objectives:


integrity.







Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Introduction: Overview of modern cryptography, Number theory principles, Euclid’s algorithm,


techniques.

UNIT – II



UNIT – III



UNIT – IV


Decryption

UNIT – V


52

TEXTBOOKS:

1. W. Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.

2. B. A. Forouzan, “Cryptography & Network Security”, 2nd


3. Neal Koblitz, “A Course in Number Theory and Cryptography”, Springer Verlag, New York

Inc. May 2001.

4. Hoffstein, Pipher, Silvermman, “An Introduction to Mathematical Cryptography”, Springer,

2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze and design classical encryption techniques, block ciphers and their applications for

computer networks.(PO – a, b, c, d, h)

2. Understand and analyze data encryption standard and advanced encryption standard.

(PO – b, c, d, e, h)

3. Design confidentiality schemes using symmetric encryption, public key cryptography,

RSA.(PO – a, b, c, d, h)

4. Design key management schemes, digital signatures and authentication protocols.

(PO – a, b, d, h)

5. Design steganographic schemes for various applications.(PO – a, b, g, h)




Course Objectives:







Course Contents:

UNIT – I





UNIT – II

53


Orbit Description, Keplerian Orbit, Kepler Elements, Satellite Visibility, Topocentric Motion,




UNIT – III





Ambiguity.

UNIT – IV



Clock Error, Cycle Slip, Noise Bias, Blunders, Tropospheric Effects on GPS observable, Multipath


UNIT – V




TEXTBOOKS:

1. B. Hoffman Wellenhof, H. Lichtenegger and J. Collins, “GPS: Theory and Practice”, 4th

revised

edition, Springer, New York,1997

2. A. Leick, “GPS Satellites Surveying”, 2nd

edition, John Wiley & Sons,NewYork,1995

3. B. Parkinson, J. Spilker, Jr.(Eds), “GPS: Theory and Applications”, Vol. I and Vol. II, AIAA,

1996

4. A. Kleusberg and P. Teunisen (Eds), “GPS for Geodesy”, Springer-Verlag, Berlin,1996

5. L. Adams, “The GPS - A Shared National Asset”, Chair, National Academy Press, 1995

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ the concepts in the implementation of GPS system. (PO – b, h, k)

2. Describe the need for synchronizing GPS time with earth rotation.(PO – f, h, k)

3. Describe the importance of GPS navigation system in location identification.(PO – f, h, k)

4. Analyze the ionospheric effects on GPS observations.(PO – a, h, k)

5. Describe the interdisciplinary applications of GPS system.(PO – a, h, k)

54




Course Objectives:





Course Contents:

UNIT – I




UNIT – II





UNIT – III




balancing.

UNIT – IV





transition density.

UNIT – V




55

Software Design for Low Power: Sources of software power dissipation, gate level, architecture


TEXTBOOKS:

1. Gary Yeap, “Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design”, Kluwer, 1998.


REFERENCES:

1. Dimitrios Soudris, Chirstian Pignet, Costas Goutis, “Designing CMOS Circuits for Low

Power”, Kluwer, 2002

2. Jan M. Rabaey and Massoud Pedram, “Low Power Design Methodologies”, KAP, 1996.

3. P. Chandrakasan and R.W. Broadersen, “Low Power Digital CMOS Design”, Kluwer, 1995.

4. Abdellatif Bellaouar, Mohamed. I. Elmasry, “Low Power Digital VLSI Designs”, Kluwer,

1995.

Course Outcomes:

1. Investigate low power design techniques.(PO – b, d, f)

2. Classify the mechanisms of power dissipation in CMOS integrated circuits. (PO – a, b, d, i)

3. Model power dissipation and use optimization methods on various levels. (PO – b, e, f, h)


techniques.(PO – d, i, k )

5. Analyze and design low-power VLSI circuits using different circuit technologies and design

levels.(PO – b, d, e, h)



Prerequisites: Electronic Circuits Contact Hours: 56

Course Objectives:






system.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I



56





UNIT – II


technique of translating user need to a well-defined requirement, Globalization and its impact on




UNIT – III





UNIT – IV





UNIT – V



TEXTBOOKS:

1. Merrill. I. Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd

Edition, 2001.

2. Rao R Tum Mala, “Fundamentals of Microsystems Packaging”, McGraw Hill, NY 2001.

3. William D Brown, “Advanced Electronic Packaging”, IEEE Press, 1999.

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand the distinguishing features and difference between electronic system and circuits.

(PO – a, b, k, j)

2. Understand impact of global competition and innovation in system design. (PO – b, c, d)

3. Understand the process of translating user requirement to implementable steps and classify

systems as consumer, professional, defense.(PO – b, d, f, l)

4. Understand influence of microelectronics packaging on system performance and PCB

laminates structure and properties.(PO – d, f, i, h )

57


radar and work out system configuration for a consumer requirement.(PO – b, d, g, i)

DATA COMPRESSION



Course Objectives:







and MPEG-7.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I



UNIT – II




coefficients

UNIT – III


JBIG, JBIG2

UNIT – IV



UNIT – V



TEXTBOOKS:

58

1. Khalid Sayood, “Introduction to Data Compression”, 3rd

Edition, Morgan Kaufmann

Publishers, 2006.

2. Ze-Nian Li, Mark S. Drew, “Fundamentals of Multimedia”, Pearson Education, 2004.

REFERENCES:

1. David Saloman, “Data Compression: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, 2007.

2. M. Ghanbari, “Standard Codecs: Image Compression to Advanced Video Coding”, IEE, 2003.

3. Iain E. G. Richardson, “H. 264 and MPEG-4 Video Compression”, John Wiley, 2003.

Course Outcomes:

1. Explain the importance of data compression. (PO – a, b, k)


(PO – b, c, d, f, k)

3. Explore image compression standards like JPEG and JPEG 2000. (PO – b, c, d, f)

4. Describe different video compression standards. (PO – b, c, d, f, k)

5. Appreciate different audio compression standards. (PO – b, c, d, f, k)



Prerequisites: Microwaves and Antennas Contact hours: 56

Course Objectives:

Familiarize with the principle of radar and navigational aids

Understand the principles of radar and its use in military and civilian environment.

Familiarize with navigational aids available for navigation of aircrafts and ships

Obtain knowledge in radar applications

Design simple radar system for understanding vehicular movements.

Familiarize with different navigational systems and directional finders.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Introduction to Radar: Basic Radar –The nature of Radar, Block diagram of simple Radar, Simple

form of the Radar Equation, Maximum Unambiguous range of Radar, Radar Block Diagram, Radar

Frequencies, Applications of Radar, Origins of Radar

The radar equation: Introduction, Range performance, minimum detectable signal, Receiver noise

and signal-to-noise ratio, Radar cross-section of Targets, Signal-to-noise ratio, PRF and Range

Ambiguities, System Losses, Plumbing loss, Beam Shape loss, Limiting loss, Collapsing loss, Non-

ideal Equipment, Operator loss, Field Degradation, Other loss factors, Straddling loss, Propagation

Effects.

59

UNIT – II

MTI and pulse doppler radar: The Doppler Effect, CW Doppler Radar, Coherent MTI, Delay Line

Cancelers, Filter characteristics of Delay-line canceller, Blind Speeds, Clutter attenuation, Blind

Phases, Digital MTI Processing, Pulse Doppler Radar, Moving Target Detector, Original MTD

Signal Processor, Performance and Limitations of MTI.

UNIT – III

Tracking radar: Tracking with Radar, Sequential Lobing, Conical Scan and Monopulse Tracking,

Tracking in Range, Target Acquisition, Comparison of Trackers, Automatic Tracking with

Surveillance Radars (ADT).

Radar Receivers: Radar Receiver, Receiver noise figure, Noise Figure of networks in cascade,

Effective Noise Temperature, Mixers, Low noise frontends, Radar Displays, Duplexers and Receiver

Protectors

UNIT – IV

Detection of signals in noise: Introduction, Matched Filter Receiver, Correlation Detectors,

Detection Criteria, Detector characteristics

Special Types of Radar: Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR), Air Surveillance Radar, Electronic

Counter Measure, Bistatic Radar, Millimeter Wave Radar.

UNIT – V

Navigational aids: Introduction, Four methods of Navigation.

Radio Direction Finding: The Loop Antenna, Goniometer, Adcock Direction Finders, Automatic

Direction Finders

Radio Ranges: Hyperbolic Systems of Navigation (Loran and Decca), Loran-A, Loran-C

Distance Measuring Equipment: Operation of DME, TACAN

Aids to Approach and Landing: Instrument Landing System, Ground Controlled Approach

System, Surveillance Radar Element, Precision Approach Radar

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Merrill I. Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd

Edition, 200

2. N. S. Nagaraja, “Elements of Electronic Navigation Systems”, 2nd

Edition, TMH, 2001.

REFERENCES:

1. Peyton Z. Peebles, “Radar Principles”, John Wiley, 2004

60

2. J. C. Toomay, “Principles of Radar”, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2004.

Course Outcomes:

1. Derive and discuss the range equation and the nature of detection.(PO – a, b, c, e, f)

2. Apply Doppler principle in the detection of moving targets. (PO – b, c, e, g, i, k)

3. Understand principles of tracking radars and refresh the principles of transmitters and

receivers.(PO – a, d, f, h, k, l)

4. Analyze the presence of signals in noise and identify special types of radars. (PO – a, b, c, f, g, i,

j, l)

5. Appreciate the principles of navigation, Radio direction finding, DME and TACAN systems.(PO

– b, c, d, h, k, l)




Course Objectives:


Understand the significance of multiresolution analysis.



Course Contents:

UNIT – I



UNIT – II


interpretation, Examples of orthogonal basis –generating wavelets, interpreting orthonormal MRAs


UNIT – III




UNIT – IV



61

UNIT – V



TEXTBOOKS:

1. Raghuveer M. Rao, Ajit S. Bopardikar, “Wavelet Transforms: Introduction to Theory &

Applications”, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2003

2. Agostino Abbate, Casimer M. DeCusatis and Pankaj K. Das, “Wavelets and Subbands

Fundamentals and Applications”,

3. K.P. Soman and K.L. Ramchandran, “Insight into Wavelets from theory to practice”, Eastern


4. Stephane G. Mallat, “A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing”, Academic Press, Second Edition,

1999.

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe scaling functions, continuous wavelet transform and different wavelet functions.(PO –

a, b)

2. Differentiate continuous wavelet and discrete wavelet transforms and analyze multi-resolution

analysis.(PO – c, d, k)

3. Develop bi-orthogonal wavelet basis function and apply to two dimensional signals.(PO – c, d,

e, f, k)

4. Apply wavelet transform for image and audio compression.(PO – b, c, d, e, f, k)

5. Employ wavelet transforms for denoising, speckle removal, object detection and data

communication.(PO – b, c, d, e, f, k)




Course Objectives:







Course Contents:

UNIT – I



Matched Filters, Rejection of Narrow band Interference

62

UNIT – II




UNIT – III



Rake Demodulator, Diversity and Spread Spectrum, Multicarrier Direct Sequence Systems,

MCCDMA System, DSCDMA System with Frequency Domain Equalization

UNIT – IV




UNIT – V



Signals

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Don Torrieri, “Principles of Spread-Spectrum Communication Systems”, 2nd

Edition, Springer

Verlag, 2005.

2. Robert C. Dixion, “Spread Spectrum Systems with Commercial Applications”, John Wiley &

Sons, 3rd

Edition, 1994.

3. Andrew J. Viterbi, “Principles of Spread Spectrum Communication”, Addison Wesley

Publishing Company, 2nd

Edition, 1995.

Course Outcomes:


communication systems. (PO – b, c, h, i, k)

2. Employ the concept of frequency hopping to avoid jamming in digital communication

systems.(PO – b, c, h, i, k)

3. Analyze the significance of rake receiver in combating the effect of multi-path fading.(PO – b,

d, h, i, k)


control technique in CDMA system.(PO – b, h, i, k)


CDMA and FHMA signals. (PO – b, h, i, k)

63




Course Objectives:





Course Contents:

UNIT – I


Kepler’s 1st, 2

nd and 3

rd laws, Definitions of terms for Earth Orbiting Satellites, Orbital elements,

Apogee and Perigee heights, Orbit perturbations – effects of non-spherical Earth, Atmospheric Drag


UNIT – II



Transponders.

UNIT – III





UNIT – IV



UNIT – V



64

TEXTBOOK:

1. Dennis Roddy, “Satellite Communications”, MGH, 2nd

Edition, 1996.

REFERENCES:

1. Richharia M, “Satellite Communication Systems”, 2nd

Edition, MGH, 1999.

2. Timothy Pratt, Charles W. Bostian, Jeremy E. Allnut, “Satellite Communications”, John Wiley,

2nd

Edition, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Appreciate the characteristics of satellite communication Orbits, Launching methods and

channels. (PO – c, g, h, i, k )

2. Apply analytical and empirical models in the design of satellite networks and space

segments.(PO – b, e, f, i, k, l)

3. Explore the traffic and queuing theory, space links, interference and analyze the performance of

satellite systems. (PO – e, g, h, i, j, l)

4. Explain multiple division and modulation techniques for satellite access. (PO – a, b, e, f, h, j, l)

5. Describe the various services offered in satellite communication systems.(PO – b, d, f, g, i, l )




Course Objectives:








Course Contents:

UNIT – I






65

UNIT – II







UNIT – III

Smith chart and S-parameters: Introduction, The Smith chart, S-parameters, Band Width



UNIT – IV


amplifier, Bandwidth Enhancement with fTdoublers, Tuned amplifiers, Neutralization and





range.

UNIT – V


mixers.



TEXTBOOK:

1. Thomas H. Lee, “The design of CMOS Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit”, Cambridge, 2nd

Edition, 2004.

REFERENCES:

1. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuit”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Design RLC networks and describe passive IC components characteristics. (PO – a, b, c, d)

66

2. Analyzer MOS behavior and distributed parameters for RF.(PO – a, b, c, d, e, f)

3. Use Smith Chart for design of S-parameters.(PO – a, b, c, d, e, f)

4. Analyze and design circuits for bandwidth extension and LNAs. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f)

5. Design mixers using LC networks and RF power amplifiers.(PO – c, d, e, f)




Course Objectives:

Understand and apply the concepts involved in design of different logic elements and

building blocks in Digital circuits

Describe combinational and sequential circuits using the Verilog Language at behavioural

and structural levels

Understand and apply the concepts involved in the Digital design building blocks and

Verilog HDL.

Write Basic Test benches and verify the functionality of the designs.

Create Netlist and generate basic synthesis reports

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Digital Integrated Circuits: Moore’s law, Technology Scaling, Die size growth, Frequency, Power


Evolution of SoC ASIC Flow vs SoC Flow, SoC Design Challenges.

Introduction to CMOS Technology: PMOS & NMOS Operation, CMOS Operation principles,

Characteristic curves of CMOS, CMOS Inverter and characteristic curves, Delays in inverters,

Buffer Design, Power dissipation in CMOS, CMOS Logic, Stick diagrams and Layout diagrams.

Timing Concepts

UNIT – II

Digital Building Blocks: Basic Gates, Universal Gates, nand & nor implementations.

Decoder, encoder, code converters, Priority encoder, multiplexer, demultiplexer, Comparators,

Parity check schemes.

Multiplexer, De-multiplexer, Pass Transistor Logic, Application of multiplexer as a multi-purpose

logical element.

Asynchronous and synchronous up-down counters, Shift registers.

FSM Design, Mealy and Moore modeling

67

Adder & Multiplier concepts

UNIT – III

Logic Design Using Verilog: Evolution & importance of HDL, Introduction to Verilog, Levels of

Abstraction, Typical Design Flow, Lexical Conventions, Data Types

Modules, Nets, Values, Data Types, Comments, arrays in Verilog, Expressions, Operators,

Operands, Arrays, memories, Strings , Delays , parameterized designs

Procedural blocks, Blocking and Non-Blocking Assignment, looping, flow Control, Task, Function,

Synchronization, Event Simulation.

Need for Verification, Basic test bench generation and Simulation

UNIT – IV

Principles of RTL Design: Verilog Coding Concepts, Verilog coding guide lines: Combinational,

Sequential, FSM. General Guidelines, Synthesizable Verilog Constructs, Sensitivity List, Verilog

Events, RTL Design Challenges, Clock Domain Crossing.

Verilog modeling of combinational logic, Verilog modeling of sequential logic.

UNIT – V

Design and simulation of Architectural building blocks, Mini-project :Basic Building blocks

design using Verilog HDL: Arithmetic Components – Adder, Subtractor, and Multiplier design, Data

Integrity – Parity Generation circuits, Control logic – Arbitration, FSM Design – overlapping and

non-overlapping Mealy and Moore state machine design

Mini-Project: n bit Simple ALU design & verification

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Morris Mano M “Digital Design” 4th

Edition, Pearson Education, 2014

2. Neil H. E. Weste, David Harris “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective” 3rd

Edition, Pearson Education, 2004,

3. Samir Palnitkar, “VERILOG HDL – A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, 2nd

edition,


REFERENCES:

1. J. Bhasker, “Verilog HDL Synthesis: A Practical Primer” 3rd

edition, Star Galaxy, 2005

2. A. Anand Kumar, “Fundamentals of Digital Circuits”, 2nd

Edition, PHI Learning, 2012.

68

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ Linux for Verilog simulator usage. (PO – b, c, e, f, h, k)

2. Appreciate basic VLSI principles. (PO – a, b, c, d, e, f, h, j, l)

3. Use basic digital design principles. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, h, i, k)

4. Describe the principles of verilog HDL. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, g, h , k, l)

5. Create directed test benches, running simulations and analyse / debug results Netlist

creation, basic timing, area and QOR report generation. (PO – b, c, d, e, f, g, h, k, l)




Course Objectives:

1. Familiarize with the concepts of verification.

2. Identify different constructs, classes, assertions and coverage in System Verilog.

3. Acquire knowledge about layered test benches and Unified Verification methodology.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

Verification Concepts: Concepts of Verification, Importance of verification, Stimulus vs

Verification, Test bench generation, Functional verification approaches, Typical verification flow,

Stimulus generation, Direct testing ,Coverage: Code coverage and Functional coverage, Coverage

plan.

UNIT – II

System Verilog- language constructs: System Verilog Constructs- Data types: Two state data,

Strings, Arrays: Queues, Dynamic and Associative Arrays, Structs, Enumerated types. Program

blocks, modules, interfaces, Clocking ports, Mod ports.

UNIT – III

System Verilog-Classes and Randomization: SV classes: Language evolution, Classes and

Objects, Class Variables and Methods, Class Instantiation, Inheritance and Encapsulation,

Polymorphism.

Randomization: Directed vs Random Testing, Randomization: Constraint driven Randomization.

UNIT – IV

System Verilog- Assertions and Coverage: Assertions: Introduction to assertion based verification,

Immediate and concurrent assertions, Coverage driven assertion: Motivation, types of coverage,

Cover group, Cover point, Cross coverage, Concepts of binning and event sampling.

69

UNIT – V

Building Test bench: Layered test bench architecture, Introduction to Universal verification

methodology, Overview of UVM, Base classes and simulation phases in UVM and UVM macros,

Unified messaging in UVM, UVM environment structure, Connecting DUT-Virtual Interface.

REFERENCES:

1. System Verilog 3.1a LRM, Accellera’s Extensions to Verilog

2. Chris Spear, Greogory J Tumbush, “System Verilog for Verification – A guide to learning test

bench language features”, Springer, 2012

3. “Step by Step functional verification with System Verilog and OVM”, Sasan Iman SiMantis Inc,

Santa Clara, CA Springer, 2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Appreciate the principle of verification.(PO – e, f, h, j, l)

2. Explore the OOPS concepts in System Verilog.(PO – b, c, d, e, f, h, j, k, l)

3. Build basic verification environment using system verilog.(PO – b, c, d, e, f, h, i, j, k, l)

4. Generate random stimulus and track functional coverage using System Verilog.(PO – b, c, d, e, f,

h, i, j, k, l)

5. Explain layered test bench architecture and its components.(PO – b, c, d, e, f, h, j, k, l)


BANGALORE




VII & VIII Semester B. E.

2




Faculty List



Professor & Head




















21. Lakshmi Shrinivasan M. Tech (Ph. D) Assistant Professor












3





education





To be, and be recognized as, an excellent Department in Electronics & Communication Engineering










4


PEO 1: To provide all basic fundamental prerequisites in mathematical, scientific and engineering fields required to solve technical problems. PEO 2: To train in analyzing, designing and creating new scientific tools and other software so as to gain good engineering breadth. PEO 3: To involve in professional and ethical environment, to build effective communication skills, multidisciplinary and teamwork skills and to relate engineering issues to broader social context. PEO 4: To provide an academic environment, awareness to excel and to lead a successful professional career in lifelong learning. PEO 5: To communicate/work with research and development, to design/develop and to formulate/integrate various products.


a. Fundamental Concepts: Recollect the essential descriptions from basic sciences, and apply them

in E & C streams.

b. Analysis: Demonstrate ability to identify, interpret and solve engineering problems.

c. Design Concepts: Design circuits and conduct experiments with electronic systems,

communication equipment, analyze and interpret the result

d. Design Applications: Design systems/subsystems and devices

e. Team Work: Demonstrate the capability to visualize, organize and work in laboratory and

interdisciplinary tasks.

f. Technical Skills: Demonstrate skills using software tools and other modern equipment.

g. Professional Ethics: Inculcate the ethical, social and professional responsibilities such as project

management and finance.

h. Communication Skills: Communicate effectively in oral /written form of scientific analysis or

data.

i. Contemporary Issues: Understand the impact of engineering solutions on the society and also

will be aware of contemporary issues and criticisms.

j. Entrepreneurship: Develop self-confidence and become excellent multi-skilled engineer,

manager, leader and entrepreneur and display ability for life-long learning.

k. Competitive Ability: Participate and succeed in competitive examinations/placement and show

potential research capability.

l. Leadership Quality: An understanding of engineering and management principles and apply

these to one’s work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects.

5



SI. No.

Subject Code

Subject Teaching

Department Credits

L T P Total

1. EC701 IPR E & C Humanities 2 0 0 2 2. EC702 Wireless Communication E & C PS-C 3 0 0 3

3. EC703 Information Theory & Coding E & C PS-C 3 0 0 3

4. Department Elective – IV E & C PS-E x x x 4

5. Department Elective – V E & C PS-E x x x 4

6. Open Elective Other departments

PS-OE x x x 3

7. EC704 Project Work – I E & C PS-C 0 0 6 6 Total 8+x x 6+x 25

VIII SEMESTER B. E. ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING SI. No.

Subject Code

Subject Teaching

Department Credits

L T P Total

1. EC801 Optical Fiber Communication

E & C PS-C 3 0 0 3

2. EC802 Embedded System Design E & C PS-C 3 0 1 4 3. Department Elective – VI E & C PS-E x x x 4 4. EC804 Project Work – II E & C PS-C 0 0 14 14

Total 6+x x 15+x 25

L: Lecture T: Tutorial P: Practical

6





L T P C























7





Course Objectives:






Know in detail about copyright and trademark.

Learn and acquire sufficient knowledge about patents, rights and obligations, procedure to

procure and maintain them.

Have basic training in drafting patent specification with special attention to claim drafting.


Course Contents:

UNIT – I




UNIT – II




Case studies

UNIT – III




UNIT – IV




8



UNIT – V



rights.


Case studies.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. P. Ganguli, “Intellectual Property Rights”, First edition, TMH, 2001.

2. Dr. B. L. Wadhera, “Intellectual Property Law Handbook”, 2nd

edition, Universal Law

Publishing, 2002.

3. T. Ramakrishna, “Course Material for 1 year P. G Diploma in IPR”, First edition, NLSIU,

Bangalore.

REFERENCES:



2. D. Baingridge, “Intellectual Property”, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.


Course Outcomes:




3. Use implication and protection for GI of goods. (PO – e, g, h, i, j, l) 4. Employ procedures to get Indian and other country patents by direct application or by PCT

route. (PO – e, g, h, i,) 5. Gain knowledge of various forms of IP, their infringements and their significance in


9



Prerequisite(s): Digital Communication Contact Hours: 42


Course Objectives:







Course Contents:

UNIT – I





UNIT – II




UNIT – III








UNIT – IV




UNIT – V

10



TEXTBOOK:



REFERENCES:


2. W. C. Y. Lee, "Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory and applications, Second


Course Outcomes:


(PO – b, h, k)

2. Analyze the received power and field components of propagated EM waves.

(PO – a, b, c, h, k)


multi-path propagation. (PO – b, c, h, k)



5. Describe the functional blocks of GSM architecture and classify different types of channels in

IS-95 and CDMA-2000 standards. (PO – f, h, k)

11



Prerequisites: Probability and Statistical Theory Contact Hours: 42

Course Coordinator: Dr. Maya V Karki

Course Objectives:




Huffman algorithm


Shannon’s limit

Use convolutional encoders for error control codes and appraise the concepts of state diagram,

tree diagram and trellis diagrams.


Course Contents:

UNIT – I





information sources

UNIT – II




problems, Code efficiency and redundancy, Shannon’s first theorem (Noiseless coding theorem) ,


r-ary coding)

UNIT – III








UNIT – IV






12

UNIT – V







TEXTBOOKS:

1. K. Sam Shanmugham, “Digital and analog communication Systems”, 2nd

edition, John Wiley

Publications, 1996.


Edition, 2004.

3. Simon Haykin, “Digital Communications”, 2nd

edition, John Wiley Publications, 2003

REFERENCES:

1. Bernard Sklar, “Digital Communications”, 2nd

edition, Pearson Education, 2007.

2. Simon Haykin, “Introduction to Analog and Digital Communications”, 2nd

edition, John Wiley

Publications, 2003.

Course Outcomes:





nd,


(PO – b, c, d, e, f)




(PO – b, c, d, e, f, h, k, l)





Course Objectives:

Understand the basics of light propagation in fiber optic waveguide and optical signal


Learn the basics and applications of light sources and photo-detectors in optical

Communication.


optical link.

Learn the principles of WDM components, optical amplifiers, and optical networks.

Course Contents:

UNIT – I

13







dispersion.

UNIT – II





response time.



UNIT – III





UNIT – IV


penalties.



optical filters.

UNIT – V



14



SONET/SDH rings.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communication”, 5th Edition, MGH, 2008.


REFERENCE:

1. Joseph C Palais, “Fiber Optic Communication”, 5th


Course Outcomes:





4. Employ power budget and rise-time budget analysis in digital optical links. (PO – b, c,

h, k)


(PO – b, c, h, k)



Prerequisites: Nil Contact Hours: 42 + 14


Course Objectives:

Introduce the difference between embedded systems and general purpose systems.

Optimize hardware designs of custom single-purpose processors.

Introduce different peripheral interfaces to embedded systems.

Apply knowledge gained in software-hardware integration in team-based projects.

Design an embedded solution for a real world problem.

Select components to implement an embedded system.

Program the software for an embedded system together with its sensor and control

requirements.

Optimize an embedded system to meet design requirements of size, speed, and/or power

consumption.

UNIT – I



15



UNIT – II




UNIT – III






UNIT – IV




UNIT – V




TEXTBOOKS:


Introduction”, 3rd

edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.


REFERENCE:


Ltd, 2008.

Course Outcomes:




(PO – a, b, j)



(PO – a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, j, l)


(PO – a, b, c)

CURRICULUM

for the Academic year 2017 – 2018

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND

COMMUNICATION

RAMAIAH INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY


BANGALORE – 54


2

About the Institute

Ramaiah Institute of Technology (RIT) (formerly known as M. S. Ramaiah Institute of Technology)

is a self-financing institution established in Bangalore in the year 1962 by the industrialist and

philanthropist, Late Dr. M S Ramaiah All engineering departments offering bachelor degree

programs have been accredited by NBA. RIT is one of the few institutes with faculty student ratio of

1:15 and achieves excellent academic results. The institute is a participant of the Technical

Education Quality Improvement Program (TEQIP), an initiative of the Government of India. All the

departments are full with competent faculty, with 100% of them being postgraduates or doctorates.

Some of the distinguished features of RIT are: State of the art laboratories, individual computing

facility to all faculty members. All research departments are active with sponsored projects and more

than 130 scholars are pursuing PhD. The Centre for Advanced Training and Continuing Education

(CATCE), and Entrepreneurship Development Cell (EDC) have been set up on campus. RIT has a

strong Placement and Training department with a committed team, a fully equipped Sports

department, large air-conditioned library with over 80,000 books with subscription to more than 300

International and National Journals. The Digital Library subscribes to several online e-journals like

IEEE, JET etc. RIT is a member of DELNET, and AICTE INDEST Consortium. RIT has a modern

auditorium, several hi-tech conference halls, all air-conditioned with video conferencing facilities. It

has excellent hostel facilities for boys and girls. RIT Alumni have distinguished themselves by

occupying high positions in India and abroad and are in touch with the institute through an active

Alumni Association. RIT obtained Academic Autonomy for all its UG and PG programs in the year

2007.As per the National Institutional Ranking Framework, MHRD, Government of India, Ramaiah

Institute of Technology has achieved 45th

rank in 2017 among the top 100 engineering colleges

across India and occupied No. 1 position in Karnataka, among the colleges affiliated to VTU,

Belagavi.

About the Department

The Department of Electronics and Communication was started in 1975 and has grown over the

years in terms of stature and infrastructure. The department has well equipped simulation and

electronic laboratories and is recognized as a research center under VTU. The department currently

offers a B. E. program with an intake of 120, and two M. Tech programs, one in Digital Electronics

and Communication, and one in VLSI Design and Embedded Systems, with intakes of 30 and 18

respectively. The department has a Center of Excellence in Food Technologies sponsored by VGST,

Government of Karnataka. The department is equipped with numerous UG and PG labs, along with

R & D facilities. Past and current research sponsoring agencies include DST, VTU, VGST and

AICTE with funding amount worth Rs. 1 crore. The department has modern research ambitions to

develop innovative solutions and products and to pursue various research activities focused towards

national development in various advanced fields such as Signal Processing, Embedded Systems,

Cognitive Sensors and RF Technology, Software Development and Mobile Technology.

3


To evolve into an autonomous institution of international standing for imparting quality

technical education




Quality Policy

We at M. S. Ramaiah Institute of Technology strive to deliver comprehensive, continually

enhanced, global quality technical and management education through an established Quality

Management System complemented by the synergistic interaction of the stake holders concerned


To be, and be recognized as, an excellent Department in Electronics& Communication








values.



4

Program Educational Objectives (PEOs):

PEO1: To train to be employed as successful professionals in a core area of their choice

PEO2: To participate in lifelong learning/ higher education efforts to emerge as expert

researchers and technologists

PEO3: To develop their skills in ethical, professional, and managerial domains

Program Outcomes (POs):


fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering

problems.




PO3: Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems

and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate


considerations.


research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and

synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.




PO6: The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to

assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities

relevant to the professional engineering practice.


solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need

for sustainable development.

PO8: Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities

and norms of the engineering practice.

5






clear instructions.


engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and

leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.

PO12: Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to

engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.

Program Specific Outcomes (PSOs):





PSO3: Communication Theory and Practice: Possess application level knowledge in

theoretical and practical aspects required for the realization of complex communication systems

6

CURRICULUM COURSE CREDITS DISTRIBUTION

Semester Humanities

& Social

Sciences

(HSS)

Basic

Sciences

/ Lab

(BS)

Engineering

Sciences/

Lab

(ES)

Professional

Courses -

Core (Hard

core, soft

core, Lab)

(PC-C)

Profession

al Courses

- Electives

(PC-E)

Other

Electives

(OE)

Project

Work/Int

ernship

(PW/IN)

Extra &

Co-

curricul

ar

activities

(EAC)

Total

Credits

in a

Semester

First 2 9 14 25

Second 4 9 12 25

Third 8 07 10 25

Fourth 4 21 25

Fifth 2 19 04 25

Sixth 15 04 06 25

Seventh 14 12 26

Eighth 4 18 02 24

Total 08 30 33 79 20 04 24 02 200

7

SCHEME OF TEACHING

III SEMESTER

SI.

No.

Course

Code Course Title Category

Credits Contact

Hours L T P S Total

1. EC31 Mathematics – III BS 4 0 0 0 4 4

2. EC32 Analog Electronic Circuits PC-C 4 0 0 0 4 4

3. EC33 Digital Electronic Circuits PC-C 4 0 0 0 4 4

4. EC34 Network Analysis ES 3 1 0 0 4 5

5. EC35 Electromagnetics BS 4 0 0 0 4 4


PC-C 2 0 0 1 3 6 7. EC362 Data Structures using C

(Soft Core)

8. ECL37 Analog Electronic Circuits Laboratory

PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

9. ECL38 Digital Electronic Circuits Laboratory

PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

Total 21 1 2 1 25 31

IV SEMESTER

SI.

No.

Course


Credits Contact

Hours L T P S Total

1. EC41 Mathematics – IV BS 4 0 0 0 4 4

2. EC42 Linear Integrated Circuits PC-C 3 0 0 1 4 7

3. EC43 Control Systems PC-C 3 1 0 0 4 5

4. EC44 Microprocessors PC-C 4 0 0 0 4 4

5. EC45 Signals and Systems PC-C 4 0 0 0 4 4


PC-C 3 0 0 0 3 3 7. EC462 Hardware Description

Language (Soft Core)

8. ECL47 Signals & Controls Laboratory PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

9. ECL48 Microprocessor Laboratory PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

Total 21 1 2 1 25 31

8

III SEMESTER

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III

Course Code: EC31 Credits: 4:0:0:0

Prerequisite: Engineering Mathematics I and II Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinators: Dr. Monica Anand & Mr. Vijaya Kumar

UNIT – I

Numerical solution of Algebraic and Transcendental equations: Method of false position,

Newton - Raphson method.

Numerical solution of Ordinary differential equations: Taylor series method, Euler and

modified Euler method, fourth order Runge-Kutta method.

Statistics: Curve fitting by the method of least squares, fitting a linear curve, fitting a parabola,

fitting a geometric curve, correlation and regression.

UNIT – II

Linear Algebra: Elementary transformations on a matrix, Echelon form of a matrix, rank of a

matrix, Consistency of system of linear equations, Gauss elimination and Gauss – Siedel method

to solve system of linear equations, eigen values and eigen vectors of a matrix, Rayleigh power

method to determine the dominant eigen value of a matrix, diagonalization of a matrix, system of

ODEs as matrix differential equations.

UNIT – III

Fourier series: Convergence and divergence of infinite series of positive terms, Periodic

function, Dirichlet conditions, Fourier series of periodic functions of period 2π and arbitrary

period, Half range series, Fourier series and Half range Fourier series of periodic square wave,

Half wave rectifier, Full wave rectifier, Saw tooth wave with graphical representation, Practical

harmonic analysis.

UNIT – IV


properties, Inverse transform, Convolution theorem, Parseval identity (statements only), Fourier

transform of rectangular pulse with graphical representation and its output discussion,

Continuous Fourier spectra – Example and physical interpretation.

9

Z-Transforms: Definition, standard Z-transforms, Single sided and double sided, Linearity

property, Damping rule, Shifting property, Initial and final value theorem, Inverse Z-transform,

Application of Z-transform to solve difference equations.

UNIT – V

Series Solution of ODEs and Special Functions: Series solution, Frobenius method, Series

solution of Bessel differential equation leading to Bessel function of first kind, Series solution of

Legendre differential equation leading to Legendre polynomials, Rodrigues's formula.

Textbooks:

1. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Wiley Publication, 10th

edition, 2015.


edition, 2015.

References:


edition,

2010.

2. Dennis G. Zill, Michael R. Cullen, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Jones and

Barlett Publishers Inc., 3rd

edition, 2009.

Course Outcomes:

1. Solve the problems of algebraic, transcendental and ordinary differential equations

using numerical methods and fit a suitable curve by the method of least squares and

determine the lines of regression for a set of statistical data. (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

2. Analyze the concept of rank of a matrix and testing the consistency and the solution by Gauss

elimination and Gauss Siedel iteration methods. (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

3. Apply the knowledge of Fourier series and expand a given function in both full range and half

range values of the variable and obtain the various harmonics of the Fourier series expansion

for the given numerical data. (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

4. Evaluate Fourier transforms, Fourier sine and Fourier cosine transforms of functions and solve

difference equations using Z-transforms. (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

5. Obtain the series solution of ordinary differential equations. (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 1, 3)

10

ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS


Prerequisite: Basic Electronics Contact hours: 56


UNIT – I

Small signal low frequency transistor models: Two-port devices and hybrid model, the three

transistor configurations, determination of h-parameters from the characteristics, Advantages of

h-parameters, Analysis of a transistor amplifier circuit using h-parameters (CE Configuration

only), CE amplifier with emitter resistance, Miller’s theorem and its dual, Miller effect

capacitance

Low frequency transistor amplifier circuits: Bootstrapped Darlington circuit, Cascode

transistor configuration.

Untuned amplifiers: Cascaded CE transistor stages.

UNIT – II

Feedback amplifiers: Feedback concept, advantages of Negative feedback, Transfer gain with

feedback, Loop gain, Feedback amplifier topologies, General characteristics of negative

feedback amplifiers, effect of negative feedback on input and output resistance in voltage series,

Effect of negative feedback on amplifier bandwidth.

Sinusoidal Oscillators: Barkhausen Criterion, LC oscillators (tuned oscillators) - Transistor

Colpitts oscillator, Hartley oscillator, Transistor Phase Shift Oscillator – RC Phase shift & Wien

Bridge oscillator (both without mathematical analysis), Crystal oscillator – Frequency Stability.

UNIT – III

Large Signal Amplifiers: Classification of power amplifiers, Class A Large signal amplifiers,

Second Harmonic distortion, conversion efficiency, Power Output, Transformer – Coupled

Audio Power Amplifier, Push – Pull Amplifiers, Advantages of a Push–Pull System, Class B

amplifiers, Complementary –Symmetry Circuits, Class AB operation, Class C and Class D

Amplifier, Problems, power transistor heat sink, thermal analogy of a power transistor.

11

UNIT – IV

Field Effect Transistors: Junction Field Effect Transistor, Pinch-Off Voltage Vp, JFET volt-

ampere characteristics, FET small signal model, Insulated Gate FET(MOSFET), Comparison of

MOSFET & JFET, Common Source Amplifier, Common Drain Amplifier, or Source Follower,

Generalized FET Amplifier, Biasing FET, FET as a Voltage Variable Resistor(VVR), Uni-

junction Transistor, Problems.

UNIT – V

MOSFET as an amplifier and a switch: Large signal operation – transfer characteristic,

graphical derivation of the transfer characteristic, operation as a switch, operation as a linear

amplifier, Biasing in MOS amplifiers, biasing by fixing VGS, biasing by fixing VGS and

connecting a resistance in the source, biasing using a drain-to-gate feedback resistor, biasing

using a constant current source.

Small signal operation and models: Small signal equivalent circuit model, T equivalent circuit

model, Modeling the Body effect, Common source amplifier with and without source resistance,

high frequency model of MOSFET, unity gain frequency, frequency response – Low frequency,

mid-band and high frequency analysis of common-source amplifier.

Textbooks:

1. Jacob Millman, Christos C. Halkias & Satyabrata Jit, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2nd

Edition, 2008

2. Adel Sedra, Kenneth Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits”, 1st

Indian Edition, Oxford University

Press, 2006.

References:

1. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, PHI, 9th

Edition, 2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze BJT hybrid model and its significance in circuit analysis along with general BJT

amplifiers. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 12. PSO –1)

2. Illustrate the importance of feedback amplifiers and oscillator circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 12.

PSO – 1)

3. Compute the conversion efficiency of different types of power amplifiers. (POs – 1, 2.

PSO – 1)

12

4. Compare different types of FET amplifiers. (POs – 1, 2, 4. PSO – 1)

5. Interpret the low and high frequency response of a common source amplifier using

MOSFET. (POs – 1, 2, 4. PSO – 1)

13





UNIT – I

Introduction to different logic families: Electrical characteristics of logic gates – logic levels

and noise margins, fan-out, propagation delay, transition time, power consumption and power

delay product, TTL inverter – circuit description and operation, TTL NAND circuit description

and operation.

Combinational logic: Boolean algebra: Standard representation of logic functions – SOP and

POS forms, Minimization of 4 and 5 variable functions using Karnaugh maps, Multiplexing and

Demultiplexing, Multiplexers – Realization of 2:1, 4:1 and 8:1 multiplexers using gates,

applications, Demultiplexers: Realization of 1:2, 1:4, 1:8 using basic gates, applications.

UNIT – II

Combinational logic: Code converters: BCD to Excess 3 and vice versa, Binary to gray and vice

versa, Encoders, Priority Encoders, Decoders, BCD to Decimal and BCD to Seven segment

decoders, Parity circuits (generator and checker), Comparators: 1 bit and 2 bit comparators

design, cascade comparators.

Combinational Functions: Arithmetic operations: Adders, Parallel adders, Fast adders,

Subtractor: using 2s complement and applications, Adder/Subtractor, BCD adder, binary

multipliers.

UNIT – III

Flip Flops: Latches, Flip-Flops: Master Salve Flip Flops, Edge Triggered Flip Flop, setup and

hold time, Characteristic and Excitation Tables, Conversion from one flip flop to another.

Registers: Registers (basic, load control input, parallel load), Shift registers (basic, parallel load,

universal), SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, Applications of shift registers (serial adder, ring counter,

Johnson counter)

UNIT – IV

Sequential Circuits Analysis and Design:

Ripple counter: Up counter, down counter, up/down counter using flip flops, design of Mod N

counter.

Synchronous counters: Design of synchronous counters (self-starting counter)

14

Synchronous sequential Machines: State table, state diagram, Mealy and Moore Machines,

Design and Analysis of Sequential Circuits using D /T Flip Flops.

UNIT – V

Synchronous Sequential Machines: Sequence recognizer, State assignment, State reduction,

design procedure.

Memory and Programmable Logic Devices: Random Access-Memory, Timing waveforms,

Read Only Memory, Programmable logic devices (PROM, Programmable Logic Array,

Programmable Array Logic Devices), implementation of combinational circuits using PLDs.

Textbooks:

1. M. Morris Mano and Charles R. Kime, “Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals”,


Edition, 2006.

2. Charles Roth Jr, and Larry L Kinney, “Fundamental of Logic Design”, Cengage Learning, 7th

Edition, 2014.

References:


2. John Yarbrough, “Digital Logic Applications and Principles”, Cengage Learning, 1st

Edition, 2006.

Course Outcomes:


and NOR gates. (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 2)

2. Analyze and design combinational logic circuits. (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 2)

3. Analyze and design sequential circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 3, PSO – 2)

4. Design and analyze synchronous sequential machines. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSO – 2)

5. Implement combinational logic circuits using PLD. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSO – 2)

15

NETWORK ANALYSIS


Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics Contact hours: 56

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Punya Prabha

UNIT – I

Voltage and Current Laws: Kirchoff’s Laws; Single Loop and Node-Pair Circuits; Connected

Independent Sources; Voltage and Current Division.

Circuit Analysis: Nodal and Mesh Analysis; Super Node; Super Mesh; Delta-Wye Conversion.

UNIT – II


Maximum Power Transfer Theorems; Source Transformation.

Sinusoidal Steady-State Analysis: Forced Response; Complex Forcing Function; Phasor

relationships for R, L and C; Impedances and Admittances in Nodal and Mesh Analysis;


UNIT – III

Initial Conditions in Networks: Initial Conditions in Elements; Evaluating Initial Conditions.

Laplace Transformation: Basic Theorems; Partial Fraction Expansion; Solution by the Laplace

Transformation.

Transforms of Signal Waveforms: Shifted Unit Step Function; Ramp and Impulse Functions;

Waveform Synthesis; Initial and Final Value theorems, Convolution Integral.

UNIT – IV

Network Topology and Equations: Basic Definitions; Matrices of Graphs; Node and Mesh

Transformations; Generalized Element; Formulation of Network Equations.

Two-Port Parameters: Impedance, Admittance, Transmission and Hybrid Parameters,

Relationships between Parameter Sets.

16

UNIT – V

Synthesis of One-Port Networks: Synthesis of L-C Driving-Point Immittances, R-C (R-L)

Impedances (Admittances). Filter design: Butterworth and Chebyshev approximations.

Frequency Response: Parallel and Series Resonance Forms.

Textbooks:

1. W. H. Hayt Jr., J. E. Kemmerly, S. M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, 6th

Edition,

Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002.

2. F. F. Kuo, “Network Analysis and Synthesis”, 2nd

Edition; Wiley, 1966.

References:

1. V. K. Aatre, “Network Theory and Filter Design” 2nd

Edition, New Age International, 1980.

2. M. E. Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”, 3rd

Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 1974.

3. M. Nahvi, J. A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, 4th

Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.

4. C. K. Alexander, M. N. O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, 3rd

Edition, Tata

McGraw-Hill, 2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ nodal and mesh analysis techniques to various electric circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 5.

PSO – 1)

2. Analyze electrical circuits using network theorems. (POs – 1, 2, 5. PSO – 1)

3. Solve electric circuits using Laplace transform and network topology. (POs – 1, 2, 5.

PSO – 1)

4. Determine two-port network parameters. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5. PSO – 1)

5. Synthesize one-port networks using lumped elements. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5. PSO – 1)

17

ELECTROMAGNETICS


Prerequisites: Vector Analysis Contact hours: 56


UNIT – I


intensity, Field Arising from a Continuous Volume Charge Distribution, Field of Line Charge,

Field of a Sheet of Charge.

Electric Flux Density, Gauss's Law: Electric Flux Density, Gauss's Law, Application of

Gauss's Law, Some Symmetrical Charge distributions.

UNIT – II

Divergence: Differential Volume element, Divergence, Maxwell's First Equation

(Electrostatics), vector operator and Divergence Theorem.

Energy and Potential: Energy expended in moving a point charge in an electric field, Line

integral, Definition of Potential Difference and Potential, Potential field of a point charge,

Potential field of a system of charges: conservative property, Potential Gradient, Energy Density

in the Electrostatic Field.

UNIT – III




Poisson's equation.

Steady Magnetic Field: Biot-Savart's Law, Ampere's circuital law, Curl, Stokes’ theorem.

UNIT – IV

Magnetic Forces, Time-varying Fields and Maxwell's Equations: Magnetic flux and

Magnetic flux Density, Scalar and Vector Magnetic Potentials, Force on a Moving Charge, Force

on a Differential Current Element, Force between Differential Current Elements, Faraday's law,

Displacement Current, Maxwell's Equations in Point Form, Maxwell's Equations in Integral

Form, Retarded Potential.

18

UNIT – V

Uniform Plane Wave: Wave propagation in Free Space, Wave propagation in Dielectrics,


Polarization (Qualitative treatment).

Waveguides: Rectangular Waveguides, Analysis of field components, cut off frequency, group

and phase velocities, phase constants, dominant modes.

Textbook:

1. William H. Hayt Jr., John A. Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, McGraw-Hill

Publications, 8th

Edition, 2010.

Reference:

1. Mathew N. O. Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press, 4th

Edition,

2006.

Course Outcomes:

1. Apply Coulomb’s law and Gauss’s law to various charge distributions. (POs – 1, 2, 10.

PSO – 3)

2. Analyze the concept of divergence, potential and energy density in electrostatic field. (POs –

1, 2, 10. PSO – 3)

3. Employ boundary conditions, Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations to determine capacitance of

various configurations. (POs –1, 2, 3, 10. PSOs – 2, 3)

4. Use Biot-Savart’s law and Ampere’s law to determine magnetic field for various current

distributions. (POs – 1, 2, 10. PSOs –3)

5. Interpret Maxwell’s equations for time varying fields and in wave propagation. (POs – 1, 2,

10, 12. PSOs – 2, 3)

19

COMPUTER ORGANIZATION




UNIT – I

Basic Structures of Computers: Computer types, Basic Operational Concepts, Performance,

Processor clock, Pipelining and Superscalar operation, Basic performance equation.

UNIT – II

Input/Output Organization: Accessing I/O devices, Interrupts: Interrupt Hardware, Enabling &

Disabling Interrupt, Handling Multiple Devices, Controlling Device Requests, exceptions, Direct

Memory Access, Bus Arbitration; Parallel Port, Serial Port.

UNIT – III

Memory System: Some Basic Concepts, Cache memories, Virtual memories and performance

considerations.

UNIT – IV

Basic Processing Unit: Some fundamental concepts: Register Transfers, Performing an

Arithmetic or Logic operation, Fetching a Word from Memory, Storing a Word in Memory,

Execution of a Complete Instruction, Branch instruction.

UNIT – V

Arithmetic Addition & Subtraction of Signed Numbers: Addition /Subtraction Logic Unit,

Multiplication of Positive numbers: Signed-Operand Multiplication, Booth Algorithm,

Fast Multiplication: Bit-pair Recording of Multipliers; Floating-point Numbers & Operations,

IEEE Standard for Floating-point Numbers

Self-Study: Functional units: Input unit, Memory unit, Arithmetic and logic unit, Control unit,

Output unit, standard I/O Interfaces, PCI bus, semiconductor RAM memories, Read only

memories, Speed size and cost, Design of fast adder: Carry-Look-ahead Addition.

20

Textbook:

1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat Zaky, “Computer Organization”, 5th

Edition,


References:


6th



Hardware/Software Interface”, 3rd

Edition, Elsevier, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Recall the basic structure and functional units of a computer. (POs – 1, 2, 6. PSO – 2)

2. Describe the I/O organization and interface standards used in a computer. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 12.

PSO – 2)

3. List different types of memories used in computers. (POs – 2, 3, 6. PSO – 2)

4. Explain the basic processing schemes and data handling capability in a computer. (POs – 1,

2, 3, 5. PSO – 2)

5. Illustrate arithmetic logic unit and operations on floating point numbers. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.

PSO – 2)

21

DATA STRUCTURES USING C


Prerequisite Courses : Fundamentals of Computing Contact hours: 28


UNIT – I

Stack and Queues: Basic stack operations (Push, Pop, stack top), Stack algorithms and C

functions (create, push, pop, display), stack applications (Infix to postfix, evaluating postfix

expression), Queue Operations (enqueue, dequeue) algorithms and C functions (queue front and

rear)

UNIT – II

Linked List: General linear lists: Basic Operations (Insertion, deletion, retrieval, traversal),

Implementation, data structure (Head node, data node), algorithms and C functions (create list,

insert node, delete node, search node, display, traverse list), complex implementation (doubly

linked list, create list, insert node, delete node, search node, display, traverse list).

UNIT – III

Sorting and Searching: Sort concepts, algorithms and C functions, selection sort (straight

selection sort), insertion sort (straight selection sort), searching (sequential and binary search)

UNIT – IV

Trees: Basic tree concepts, binary tree, binary tree (concept only), binary tree traversals (depth

first traversals, breadth first traversals), expression trees (infix, postfix and prefix traversals)

UNIT – V

Graphs: Basic concepts, operations (insert and delete vertex, add and delete edge), traverse

graph (Depth-first traversal), Graph storage structures (Adjacency matrix), Networks: minimum

spanning tree (Prim’s algorithm), shortest path algorithm (Dijkstra’s)

Self-Study: Stack applications (Infix to prefix), Circular singly list (create list, insert node,

delete node, search node, display, traverse list), Sort order, stability, efficiency, exchange sort

(bubble and quick sort), Binary search trees (Basic concepts, BST operations, traversals, C

functions), Breadth-first traversal, Adjacency list, minimum spanning tree (Kruskal’s algorithm)

22

Textbook:

1. Richard Gilberg and Behrouz Forouzan, “Data Structures: A pseudo code approach with C”,

2nd

edition, Thomson Publishing, 2007.

Reference:

1. A. Tanenbaum, “Data Structures with C”, McGraw Hill, 2000.

Course Outcomes:

1. Implement stacks and queues. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12. PSO – 2)

2. Create various linked list applications. (POs –1, 2, 3, 12. PSO – 2)

3. Apply searching and sorting algorithms to sort data. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12. PSO – 2)

4. Illustrate the concepts of trees with suitable algorithm. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12. PSO – 2)

5. Develop algorithm to solve real world problems using graphs. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12. PSO – 2)

23

ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY

Course Code: ECL37 Credits: 0:0:1:0

Prerequisite: Basic Electronics Contact Sessions: 14


LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Verification of Thevinin’s theorem and Maximum Power Transfer Theorem

2. Study the input output characteristics of BJT CE Amplifier and determine the h-

parameters

3. Study of drain characteristics and transfer characteristics of n-channel MOSFET

4. Design and test Bridge Rectifier with and without C filter

5. Design and test diode clipping and clamping circuits

6. Design and test RF oscillators (i) Hartley (ii) Colpitts

7. Design and test RC Phase Shift oscillators

8. Design and test a BJT- RC coupled amplifier. Plot the frequency response.

9. Design and test a FET- RC coupled amplifier. Plot the frequency response.

10. Design a voltage series feedback amplifier. Compare the parameters with and without

feedback.

11. Design and test power amplifiers (i) Class A transformer coupled audio power amplifier

(ii) Class B Push Pull power amplifier.

12. Design and test Darlington pair emitter follower with bootstrap capacitor


Softwares suggested: MultiSim or any other suitable simulation tool.

Textbooks:

1. “Integrated Electronics”, Millman & Halkias, Tata McGraw Hill International Edition, 2001.

2. “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, 6th

Edition PHI, 2002.

3. “RF Microelectronics”, Behzad Razavi, Prentice Hall Communications Engineering and


Course Outcomes:

1. Design amplifier circuits using BJT and FET devices. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10. PSO – 1)

2. Design power amplifiers, negative feedback amplifiers and oscillator circuits. (POs –1, 2, 3,

5, 8, 9, 10. PSO – 1)

24

3. Design diode clipping, clamping and rectifier circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10.

PSO – 1)

4. Simulate and verify hardware designs. (POs –1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10. PSO – 1)

5. Prepare a report with design procedure and experimental results. (POs – 5, 8, 10. PSO – 1)

25

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY




LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. (i) Verification of basic, universal and XOR gates

(ii) Simplification, realization of Boolean expressions using universal gates

2. Realization of Half/Full adder and Half/Full Subtractor using NAND gates

3. (i) Realization of BCD to Excess 3 code converter

(ii) Realization of Binary to Gray code converter

4. Study of Decoder chip to drive LED display and priority encoder using IC 74147

5. Multiplexer using IC74153 and its applications

6. Demultiplexer using IC74139 and its applications

7. (i) Parallel Adder/Subtractor using IC7483

(ii) BCD Adder using IC7483

(iii) One bit comparator and study of IC7485 magnitude comparator

8. (i) JK Master slave, T-Type and D-Type Flip Flop using IC7476

(ii) Ripple counter using IC7476

9. (i) Study of asynchronous decade counter using IC 7490

(ii) Synchronous counter using IC7476

(iii) Study of synchronous decade counter using IC 74192

10. (i) Shift left, Shift right, SIPO, SISO, PISO, PIPO operations using IC7495 shift register

(ii) Study of Ring/Twisted counter using IC7495

(iii) Sequence generator using IC7495

(iv) Programming RAM using IC6116

Textbooks:

1. M. Morris Mano and Charles R. Kime, “Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals”,


Edition, 2006.

2. R. P. Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics”, TMH, 4th

Edition, 2010.

References:


2. Tocci, “Digital Systems, Principles and Applications”, PHI/Pearson Education, 6th

Edition,

1997.

26

Course Outcomes:

1. Design combinational logic circuits using gates. (POs – 1, 2, 9. PSO – 2)

2. Design combinational logic circuits using MUX/DEMUX/ADDER ICs (POs – 1, 2, 9.

PSO – 2)

3. Design sequential logic circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 2)

4. Demonstrate the operation of RAM. (POs – 3, 9. PSO – 2)

5. Prepare a report with design procedure and experimental results. (POs – 5,8,10. PSO – 1)

27

IV SEMESTER

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – IV


Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics I and II Contact Hours: 56

Course Coordinators: Dr. Monica Anand & Mr. Vijaya Kumar

UNIT – I





forward and backward interpolation formulae, Newton-Cotes quadrature formula, Trapezoidal

rule, Simpson 1/3rd rule, Simpson 3/8th rule.

Partial Differential Equations: Introduction to PDE, Solution of PDE –Direct integration,


UNIT – II

Complex Variables – I: Functions of complex variables, Analytic function, Cauchy-Riemann

equations in Cartesian and polar coordinates, Consequences of Cauchy-Riemann equations,


Transformations: Conformal transformation, Discussion of the transformations –

,,2 zewzw and )0(2

zz


UNIT – III

Complex Variables – II: Complex integration, Cauchy theorem, Cauchy integral formula,

Taylor and Laurent series (statements only), Singularities, Poles and residues, Cauchy residue

theorem (statement only).

28

UNIT – IV


Cumulative distribution function, Mean, Variance, Moment generating function.

Probability Distributions: Binomial and Poisson distributions, Normal distribution,

Exponential distribution, Uniform distribution, Joint probability distribution (both discrete and

continuous), Conditional expectation, Simulation of random variables.

UNIT – V

Stochastic Processes: Introduction, Classification of stochastic processes, discrete time

processes, Stationary, Ergodicity, Autocorrelation, Power spectral density.




Textbooks:


edition, 2015.

2. R. E. Walpole, R. H. Myers, R. S. L. Myers and K. Ye, “Probability and Statistics for

Engineers and Scientists”, Pearson Education, Delhi, 9th

edition, 2012.

References:

1. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Wiley Publication, 10th

edition,

2015

2. Dennis G. Zill and Patric D. Shanahan, “A first course in complex analysis with

applications”, Jones and Bartlett Publishers, Second edition, 2009.


edition,

2010

4. Kishor S. Trivedi, “Probability & Statistics with Reliability, Queuing and Computer Science

Applications” John Wiley & Sons, 2nd

edition, 2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Use a given data for equal and unequal intervals to find a polynomial function for estimation

(POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

29

2. Analyze functions of complex variable in terms of continuity, differentiability and analyticity

(POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

3. Find singularities of complex functions and determine the values of integrals using residues

(POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

4. Apply the concept of probability distribution to solve engineering problems. (POs – 1, 2,

PSOs – 1, 3)

5. Apply the stochastic process and Markov Chain in predictions of future events. (POs –

1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

30





UNIT – I

Operational Amplifier Fundamentals: Basic Op-Amp circuits, Op-amp parameters: input and

Output voltage, CMRR and PSRR, offset voltages and currents, Input and Output Impedances,

Slew rate and Frequency limitations.

Op-amp as DC Amplifiers: Biasing Op-amps, Direct Coupled Voltage follower, Non Inverting

Amplifiers, Inverting Amplifiers, Summing Amplifiers, Difference Amplifiers, Instrumentation

Amplifiers.

UNIT – II

Op-Amp as AC amplifiers: Capacitor coupled Voltage followers, High Input Impedance



setting the upper cut off frequency, capacitor coupled difference amplifiers.

UNIT – III

Op-Amp switching, differentiating and integrating circuits: Zero crossing detectors,

Inverting Schmitt trigger circuits, Integrating circuits and Differentiating circuits.

Signal processing circuits using Op-Amp: Precision half-wave rectifier, Precision full-wave

rectifier, Limiting Circuits, Clamping circuits, Peak Detectors, Sample and Hold circuits.

UNIT – IV

Signal generators: Triangular/Rectangular wave generator, Phase shift Oscillator, Wein Bridge

Oscillator, Monostable and Astable multivibrator.

Active filters: First and second order Low and High pass filter, First order two op-amp band

pass and band reject filters (block diagrams only)

31

UNIT – V

Applications of other Linear ICs: Series Op-amp Regulator, IC 723 general purpose Regulator,

555 Timer – Basic Timer circuit used as astable multivibrator and monostable multivibrator, PLL

operating principles

D – A and A – D Converters: DAC/ADC Specifications, R-2R DAC, Monolithic DAC,

Successive Approximation ADC and Dual Slope ADC.

Self-Study: Use of single polarity voltage supply, Op-amp frequency response and

compensation methods, Log and Antilog amplifier, multiplier and divider, Non-Inverting

Schmitt trigger, weighted resistor DAC, Flash type ADC and Counter type ADC

Textbooks:

1. David A. Bell, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear ICs”, PHI/Pearson, 3rd

Edition, 2011.


Edition, Reprint 2006.

References:

1. Robert. F. Coughlin & Fred. F. Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated

Circuits”, PHI/Pearson, 2006.

2. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, “Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits”, PHI/Pearson, 4th

Edition, 2004.

Course Outcomes:

1. Explain the fundamentals of operational amplifier, signal generators, active filters, dc

amplifiers, other linear ICs and data converters. (PO – 1, PSO – 1)

2. Evaluate the parameters for different Op-Amp circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 3. PSO – 1)

3. Design and analyze the circuits using Op-Amp. (POs – 1, 2, 3. PSO – 1)

4. Design and analyze the circuits using IC 555 timer. (POs – 1, 2, 3. PSO – 1)

5. Build and demonstrate in teams the working of circuits involving linear ICs. (POs – 1, 2,

3, 4, 9, 10, 12. PSO – 1)

32

CONTROL SYSTEMS


Prerequisites: Network Analysis, Engineering Mathematics Contact Hours: 56


UNIT – I

Introduction: Examples of control systems, closed loop vs open loop control systems,

classification of control systems.

Mathematical modeling of linear systems: Review of Laplace transforms, transfer function and

impulse response: Block diagram and signal flow graph.

UNIT – II

Mathematical modeling of linear systems: Analogous systems, Translational and Rotational

Mechanical systems.

Time response of feedback control systems: Test input signals, time response of first and

second order systems, Transient response specification of second order system, Steady state error

and error constants. Applications: Design and analysis of second order system.

UNIT – III



assessment of relative stability using Nyquist criterion.

UNIT – IV


Introduction to state variable analysis: Concepts of state, state variables and state model for

electrical systems, Solution of state equations.

UNIT – V

Frequency response analysis: Introduction, Bode diagrams, assessment of relative stability

using Bode plots.

33

Controllers: Classification of controllers, Brief analysis of different types of controllers.

Textbooks:

1. K. Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, 4th


2. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, “Control System Engineering”, 5th

Edition, New Age

International Publishers, 2007.

References:

1. Ajit. K. Mandal, “Introduction to Control Engineering Modeling, Analysis and Design”, 2nd

Edition, New Age International Publishers, 2012.

2. Dhanesh N. Manik, “Control Systems”, Cengage Learning, 1st Edition, 2012.

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ mathematical modeling techniques to determine the transfer function of a system.

(POs – 1, 2, 5. PSO – 1)

2. Analyze the time response of first and second order systems. (POs – 1, 2, 5. PSO – 1)

3. Apply the concept of RH Criterion and root locus technique to determine the stability of a

system. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 1)

4. Interpret the frequency response of a system using Bode’s plot and Nyquist stability criterion.

(POs –1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 1)

5. Describe the state models and various controllers. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 1)

34

MICROPROCESSORS




UNIT – I

Microprocessor and its architecture: Introduction, internal architecture of 8086, PSW, Real

mode memory addressing.

Addressing modes: Data, Program memory, Stack memory

UNIT – II

Instruction set of 8086: Data move, arithmetic and logic, program control, assembler directives,

assembly language programming, programs using BIOS and DOS interrupts.

UNIT – III

Modular Programming: Assembler & linker, PUBLIC & EXTRN, libraries, macros, DOS

function calls, programming examples using macros & DOS function calls.

8086 Hardware Specifications: Pin outs and Pin functions of 8086, clock generator 8284A, Bus

buffering and latching, bus timing, READY and wait state, minimum mode versus maximum

mode. (Basic comparison only)

UNIT – IV

Memory interfacing: Address decoding, memory interfacing for 8086, Introduction to dynamic

memory interfacing.

I/O interfacing: Introduction, I/O port address decoding (8 bit and 16 bit). Simple programs

related to I/O interface.

Interrupts: Basic interrupt processing, hardware interrupts.

35

UNIT – V

Peripherals and their interfacing with 8086: Study of 8255 PPI, 8253 timer and 8279

keyboard

Numeric Co-processor 8087: Data formats, numerical processors, architecture & programming.

(Simple programs)

High end processors: Introduction to 80386, 80486 and Pentium.

Textbooks:

1. Barry B Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors-Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, 8th


2. A. K. Ray and K. M. Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessor and Peripherals”, 3rd

Edition,


References:


Programming and Design”, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd

Edition, July, 2003.



Course Outcomes:

1. Explain the architecture of various processors. (PO – 1. PSO – 2)

2. Describe the addressing modes and instruction sets of 8086 processor. (PO – 2. PSO – 2)

3. Develop assembly language programs for different applications using instruction sets of

8086. (POs – 2, 3, 5. PSO – 2)

4. Use macros and DOS function calls in assembly language programs. (POs – 2, 3, 5.

PSO – 2)

5. Design interfacing circuits for 8086 processor. (POs – 2, 3, 5. PSO – 2)

36

SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS




UNIT – I

Introduction to signals and systems: Continuous and Discrete time signals, transformation of

the independent variables, Exponential and Sinusoidal signals, unit impulse and step signals, CT

and DT systems, basic system properties.

UNIT – II

LTI Systems: Discrete time LTI systems, continuous time LTI systems, properties of LTI

systems, causal LTI systems described by differential and difference equations.

UNIT – III

Continuous Time Fourier Transform: Representation of aperiodic signals, Fourier Transform

of periodic signals, Properties of CTFT: Linearity, time shifting, conjugation and conjugate

symmetry, differentiation and integration, time and frequency scaling, duality, Parseval’s

relation, convolution and multiplication

UNIT – IV

DTFT and Z-Transform: Representation of aperiodic signals by DTFT, the Fourier Transform

of periodic signals

Z-Transform, ROC of Z-Transform, Inverse Z-Transform: Partial fraction and power series only,

Geometric evaluation of FT from pole zero plot, Properties of ZT: Linearity, time shifting,

scaling in the Z-domain, time reversal, time expansion

UNIT – V

Properties of ZT and analysis of LTI Systems: Properties of ZT: conjugation, convolution,

differentiation in Z-domain, initial value theorem, analysis and characterization of LTI system

using Z-transform, system function, algebraic and block diagram representation, unilateral Z-

transform.

37

Textbooks:

1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Alan S. Wilsky with Hamid Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd

Edition, PHI Publications, 2011.

References:

1. John G. Proakis and Dimitris G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing, Principles,

Algorithms, and Applications”, 4th

Edition, PHI Publications, 2006.

2. Haykin and B. Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd

Edition, Wiley, 2003.

Course Outcomes:

1. Classify and analyze continuous, discrete time signals and systems. (POs – 1, 2, 9. PSO – 3)

2. Compute the response of a system using convolution. (POs – 1, 2, 9. PSO – 3)

3. Analyze the system by difference and differential equations. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 3)

4. Employ Fourier Transform to analyze signals and systems. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 3)

5. Apply Z-Transform and analyze the signals and systems. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 3)

38



Pre-requisites: Linear Integrated Circuits Contact Hours: 42


UNIT – I

Measurement and Error: Definitions, Accuracy and precision, Significant figures, Types of

errors, Limiting errors, Classification of standards of measurement, Time and frequency

standards.




approximation type DVM, Digital meter displays – LED and LCD displays, Range changing

methods for DVM, Digital multimeter.

UNIT – II


frequency measurement (extending the frequency range), Time (period) measurement, Time

interval measurement, Frequency ratio measurement, Totalizing mode of measurement,

Universal counter, Automatic and computing counters, Reciprocal electronic counters, Sources

of measurement errors, Specifications of electronic counters – Input characteristics and operating

mode specifications, Digital phase meter.

UNIT – III

Digital Instruments: Digital tachometer, Digital PH meter, Digital measurement of mains

(supply) frequency, Digital L, C and R measurements – Digital RCL meter.



UNIT – IV

Digital Signal Generators: Arbitrary waveform generators (AWG), Key characteristics of

digital signal generators and Data generator.

39


Logic Analyzer: Types of logic analyzer - Logic time analyzer. Logic state analyzer, interfacing

a target system,



UNIT – V

Transducers: Electrical transducers, advantages, classification of transducers, characteristics

and choice (selection) of transducers.



Digital Controllers: Direct digital and computer supervisory control, Digital process controllers.

Textbook:

1. Albert D. Helfrick, William D. Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and

Measurement Techniques”, US Edition, PHI, 2012.

References:

1. H. S. Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation”, TMH, 3rd


Course Outcomes:

1. Employ the concept of errors to study the performance of electronic instrumentation

systems. (POs – 1, 2, 5, 6, 12. PSO – 1)

2. Apply the basic principles of electronic instruments to design and construct new

instruments. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 12. PSO – 1)

3. Interpret the suitability of instruments in various applications. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 12.

PSO – 1)

4. Select the instruments to observe waveforms and spectrum. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 12.

PSOs – 1, 3)

5. Describe transducers, data acquisition systems and digital process controllers in

electronic applications. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12. PSOs – 1, 3)

40




Course coordinator: Mrs. A. R. Priyarenjini

UNIT – I

Overview of Digital Design with Verilog HDL: Evolution of computer aided digital design,

Emergence of HDLs, Importance of HDLs, Verilog HDL and Typical design flow, Design

methodologies, modules, instances, components of simulation, example, basic concepts.

UNIT – II

Modules and ports: Modules, ports, Rules, Hierarchical Names.

Data flow modeling: Continuous assignment, Delays, Expressions, Operators, Operands, and

Operator types, Gate level modeling.

UNIT – III

Behavioral modeling: Structured procedures, Procedural assignments, Timing controls,

conditional statement, Multi way branching, Loops, Sequential and parallel blocks, generate

blocks, Examples.

UNIT – IV



UNIT – V


Verilog Constructs, Modeling tips for logic synthesis, Synthesis Design flow, examples,

verification of the gate level netlist.

Timing and delays: Types of delay models, modeling, timing checks and delay back annotation.

Textbook:

1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL – A guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall,

2nd

Edition, 2010.

41

References:

1. Stephen Brown, Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital logic with Verilog design”, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2003.

2. Michael D. Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with Verilog HDL”, Pearson Education, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Recall the basics of digital design and lexical conventions of HDL. (POs – 1, 3, 4, 5, 8,

PSO – 2)

2. Design, apply and test combinational circuits in HDL to verify the functionality. (POs – 1, 3,

4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 12. PSO – 2)

3. Write efficient RTL codes for sequential circuits and test using test benches. (POs –1, 3, 4, 5,

8, 9, 10, 12. PSO – 2)

4. Apply the concepts of tasks and functions in designing large digital systems. (POs – 1, 3, 4,

5, 8, 9, PSO – 2)

5. Justify the usage of EDA tools in digital circuit functional verification and logic synthesis

with design tradeoffs. (POs – 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 12, PSO – 2)

42

SIGNALS AND CONTROLS LABORATORY


Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics Contact Sessions: 14

Course Coordinators: Mrs. H. Mallika, Mr. V. Nuthan Prasad

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Introduction to MATLAB: different operators and functions

2. Generation of both discrete and continuous time signals

3. Operations on discrete time signals

4. Convolution of discrete and continuous time signals

5. Z transform and pole zero plot, frequency response and solving difference equations

6. Representation of control system by transfer function, partial fraction expansion and pole

zero map

7. Block diagram reduction

8. System response (with step, impulse, ramp and parabolic inputs)

9. System analysis: Root locus, Bode plot and Nyquist plot

10. Simulink model of a control system and its response

11. Simulink model of a control system with PID controller

Textbooks:

1. Dr. Shailendra Jain, “Modeling and Simulation using MATLAB-Simulink”, Wiley, 2nd

Edition, 2014.

2. P. Ramakrishna Rao and Shankar Prakriya, “Signals and Systems”, McGraw Hill Education,

2nd

Edition, 2013.

3. Anoop K. Jairath and Saketh Kumar, “Control Systems – The state variable approach

(Conventional and MATLAB)”, Ane’s Students Edition, 2nd

Edition, 2010.

Course Outcomes:

1. Recall various functions available in MATLAB for signal processing and control systems.

(POs – 1, 2, 5, 9. PSO – 3)

2. Demonstrate the various operations on signals. (POs – 1, 2,5.PSO – 3)

3. Solve the response of a system by difference equation and transfer functions. (POs – 1, 2, 3,

5. PSO – 2)

4. Analyze the system stability from root locus, Bode and Nyquist plots. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9.

PSO – 2)

5. Employ Simulink model for control systems. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9. PSO – 2)

43

MICROPROCESSOR LABORATORY




LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

A. Assembly Language Programs

1. Programs involving data transfer instructions

(i) Block move without overlapping

(ii) Block move with overlapping

(iii) Block move interchange

2. Programs involving arithmetic operations

(i) 16 Bit Addition and Subtraction

(ii) N-bit multi precision numbers(N ≥ 32bits)

(iii) Multiplication of 32- bits unsigned hexadecimal number using successive addition

and using shift left and add

(iv) Division of 16-bits number by 8-bits number

3. Programs involving bit manipulation instructions

(i) To identify whether the given number is positive or negative and odd or even

(ii) 2 out of 5 Codes

(iii) Bitwise and nibble wise palindrome

(iv) Find the logical 1’s and 0’s in the given data

4. To find Square, Cube, LCM, HCF and Factorial

(i) Program to find square and cube of a given number

(ii) Program to find LCM of a given number

(iii) Program to HCF of a given number

(iv) Program to factorial of a given number

5. Code conversion

(i) BCD to Hexadecimal

(ii) Hexadecimal to BCD

(iii) Addition and subtraction of two string ASCII digits

(iv) Multiplication of a string of ASCII digits by a single ASCII digit

(v) Division of a string of ASCII digits by a single ASCII digit

44

6. Programs involving branch/loop instruction

(i) Program to sort the numbers in ascending order (bubble sorting)

(ii) Program to sort the numbers in descending order (bubble sorting)

(iii) Program to find the smallest and largest 16-bit signed number in an array

7. Programs involving string manipulation

(i) Program for string transfer using primitive instruction

(ii) Program to reverse a string

8. Program to search the occurrence of a character in the given string using DOS interrupt

INT 21


1. Delay calculation and generation of a square wave, triangular wave generation and stair

case waveform using DAC. Display the waveform on a CRO

2. Program to generate a square wave using 8253

3. Program using 8279 Chip

(i) Program to display a message on the display unit

(ii) Program to display the ASCII equivalent of the key pressed


Textbooks:

1. Barry B Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors – Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, 8th


2. A. K. Ray and K. M. Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessor and Peripherals”, 3rd

Edition,


References:


Programming and Design”, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd

Edition, 2003.



Course Outcomes:

1. Write, compile and debug assembly language program using arithmetic instructions. (POs –

45

1, 2, 3, 5. PSO – 2)

2. Compute using MASM, LCM, HCF, Factorial and code conversion. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5.

PSO – 2)

3. Develop programs using string and loop instructions. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 2)

4. Write assembly language programs to interface modules to 8086 microprocessor. (POs – 1, 2,

4, 5. PSO – 2)

5. Prepare a report with the algorithm and expected output. (POs – 5, 10. PSO – 2)

CURRICULUM



COMMUNICATION



BANGALORE – 54

V & VI Semester B. E.

2

About the Institute



philanthropist, Late Dr. M S Ramaiah. The institute is accredited with A grade by NAAC in 2016 and

all engineering departments offering bachelor degree programs have been accredited by NBA. RIT is

one of the few institutes with faculty student ratio of 1:15 and achieves excellent academic results.

The institute is a participant of the Technical Education Quality Improvement Program (TEQIP), an

initiative of the Government of India. All the departments are full with competent faculty, with 100%

of them being postgraduates or doctorates. Some of the distinguished features of RIT are: State of the

art laboratories, individual computing facility to all faculty members. All research departments are

active with sponsored projects and more than 130 scholars are pursuing PhD. The Centre for

Advanced Training and Continuing Education (CATCE), and Entrepreneurship Development Cell

(EDC) have been set up on campus. RIT has a strong Placement and Training department with a

committed team, a fully equipped Sports department, large air-conditioned library with over 80,000

books with subscription to more than 300 International and National Journals. The Digital Library

subscribes to several online e-journals like IEEE, JET etc. RIT is a member of DELNET, and AICTE

INDEST Consortium. RIT has a modern auditorium, several hi-tech conference halls, all air-

conditioned with video conferencing facilities. It has excellent hostel facilities for boys and girls. RIT

Alumni have distinguished themselves by occupying high positions in India and abroad and are in

touch with the institute through an active Alumni Association. RIT obtained Academic Autonomy for

all its UG and PG programs in the year 2007.As per the National Institutional Ranking Framework,

MHRD, Government of India, Ramaiah Institute of Technology has achieved 45th

rank in 2017

among the top 100 engineering colleges across India and occupied No. 1 position in Karnataka,

among the colleges affiliated to VTU, Belagavi.







respectively. The department has a Center of Excellence in Food Technologies sponsored by

VGST, Government of Karnataka. The department is equipped with numerous UG and PG labs,

along with R & D facilities. Past and current research sponsoring agencies include DST, VTU,

VGST and AICTE with funding amount worth Rs. 1 crore. The department has modern research

ambitions to develop innovative solutions and products and to pursue various research activities

focused towards national development in various advanced fields such as Signal Processing,

Embedded Systems, Cognitive Sensors and RF Technology, Software Development and Mobile

Technology.

3



education




Quality Policy

We at M. S. Ramaiah Institute of Technology strive to deliver comprehensive, continually

enhanced, global quality technical and management education through an established Quality

Management System complemented by the synergistic interaction of the stake holders concerned


To be, and be recognized as, an excellent Department in Electronics& Communication








values.



4

Program Educational Objectives (PEOs): PEO1: To train to be employed as successful professionals in a core area of their choice

PEO2: To participate in lifelong learning/ higher education efforts to emerge as expert

researchers and technologists

PEO3: To develop their skills in ethical, professional, and managerial domains



fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.




PO3: Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and

design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate


considerations.


research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and

synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.




PO6: The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess

societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the

professional engineering practice.


solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for

sustainable development.

PO8: Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and

norms of the engineering practice.



5




clear instructions.


engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and

leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.

PO12: Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage

in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.

Program Specific Outcomes (PSOs):





PSO3: Communication Theory and Practice: Possess application level knowledge in theoretical

and practical aspects required for the realization of complex communication systems

6


Semester Humanities

& Social

Sciences

(HSS)

Basic

Sciences

/ Lab

(BS)

Engineering

Sciences/

Lab

(ES)

Professional

Courses -

Core (Hard

core, soft

core, Lab)

(PC-C)

Profession

al Courses

- Electives

(PC-E)

Other

Electives

(OE)

Project

Work/Int

ernship

(PW/IN)

Extra &

Co-

curricul

ar

activities

(EAC)

Total

Credits

in a

Semester

First 2 9 14 25

Second 4 9 10 23

Third 8 07 10 25

Fourth 4 21 25

Fifth 2 19 04 25

Sixth 15 04 06 25

Seventh 14 12 26

Eighth 4 20 02 26

Total 08 30 31 79 20 04 26 02 200

7

SCHEME OF TEACHING

V SEMESTER

SI.

No

.

Course


Credits Contact

Hours L T P S Total

1. EC51 Analog Communication PC-C 4 0 0 0 4 4

2. EC52 CMOS VLSI Design PC-C 3 0 0 1 4 5

3. EC53 Digital Signal Processing PC-C 3 1 0 0 4 5

4. EC54 Transmission Lines & Radiating Systems

PC-C 3 1 0 0 4 5

5. EC55 Management, Entrepreneurship & IPR

PC-C 1 0 0 1 2 5

6. ECExx Departmental Elective PC-E 3 0 0 1 4 7

7. ECL56 Analog Communication & LIC Laboratory

PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

8. ECL57 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory

PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

9. ECL58 HDL & VLSI Laboratory PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

Total 17 2 3 3 25 37

VI SEMESTER

SI.

No.

Course


Credits Contact

Hours L T P S Total

1. EC61 Digital Communication PC-C 3 1 0 0 4 5

2. EC62 Microcontroller PC-C 3 0 0 1 4 7

3. EC63 Microwaves and Radar PC-C 3 0 0 1 4 7

4. EC64 Mini-Project (Optional:

Interdisciplinary Projects) PC-C

0 0 6 0 6 6


6. ECL65 Digital Communication

Laboratory PC-C

0 0 1 0 1 2

7. ECL66 Microwaves & OFC Laboratory PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

8. ECL67 Microcontroller Laboratory PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

Total 12 1 9 3 25 38

8

List of Electives

SI. No.

Course Code

Course Title Credits

L T P S Total

1. ECE01 Power Electronics 3 0 0 1 4

2. ECE02 Random Variables and Random Process

3 0 0 1 4

3. ECE03 Speech Processing 3 0 0 1 4

4. ECE04 Low Power VLSI design 3 0 0 1 4

5. ECE05 Object Oriented Programming with C++

3 0 0 1 4

6. ECE06 Digital System Design using Verilog 3 0 0 1 4

7. ECE07 DSP Architecture & Algorithms 3 0 0 1 4

8. ECE08 MEMS 3 0 0 1 4

9. ECE09 Artificial Neural Networks & Fuzzy Logic

3 0 0 1 4

10. ECE10 Image Processing 3 0 0 1 4

11. ECE11 Real Time Systems 3 0 0 1 4

12. ECE12 Advanced Digital Logic Design 3 0 0 1 4

13. ECE13 Advanced Digital Logic Verification 3 0 0 1 4

14. ECE14 Linear Algebra 3 0 0 1 4

15. ECE15 Machine Learning 3 0 0 1 4

16. ECE16 Analog and Mixed Signal VLSI Design 3 0 0 1 4

17. ECE17 Neural Networks and Deep Learning 3 0 0 1 4

18. ECE18 Advanced Embedded Systems 3 0 0 1 4

19. ECE19 Multi-resolution Signal Processing 3 0 0 1 4

20. ECE20 Modeling and Simulation of Data Networks

3 0 0 1 4

21. ECE21 Cyber Security 3 0 0 1 4

22. ECE22 Distributed Systems 3 0 0 1 4

23. ECE23 Optical Networks 3 0 0 1 4

24. ECE24 Internet Engineering 3 0 0 1 4

25. ECE25 Multimedia Communication 3 0 0 1 4

26. ECE26 RTOS 3 0 0 1 4

27. ECE27 GSM Network 3 0 0 1 4

28. ECE28 Ad-hoc Wireless Networks 3 0 0 1 4

29. ECE29 Cryptography and Network Security 3 0 0 1 4

30. ECE30 Advanced Computer Architecture 3 0 0 1 4

9



Prerequisites: Signals and Systems Contact Hours: 56

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Lakshmi S

UNIT – I

Amplitude Modulation and Double Side-band Suppressed Carrier Modulation: Introduction

to AM: Time domain description, Frequency domain description. Generation of AM wave: Square

law modulator, switching modulator. Detection of AM waves: Square law detector, envelope

detector, time domain description of DSBSC, Frequency domain representation, Generation of

DSBSC waves, balanced modulator, ring modulator, coherent detection of DSBSC modulated

waves, Costas loop, Quadrature carrier multiplexing

UNIT – II



description of SSB wave, frequency discrimination method for generating an SSB modulated

wave, phase discrimination method for generating an SSB modulated wave, demodulation of SSB

waves.


wave, time domain description, coherent demodulation, envelope detection of VSB wave along

with carrier.

UNIT – III



stabilization in FM receivers, Demodulation of FM waves: frequency discrimination method,

phase locked loop, nonlinear model of phase locked loop, linear model of the phase locked loop,

nonlinear effect in FM systems.

UNIT – IV

Applications of AM and FM: AM radio (super heterodyne): Block diagram of transmitter and


receiver.

Elements of Color TV: Frequency range and channel bandwidth, scanning and synchronization,

composite video signal. Block diagram of transmitter and receiver.

10

UNIT – V





emphasis and de-emphasis in FM.

Textbooks:

1. Simon Haykin, and Michael Moher, “Communication Systems”, 5th

Edition, John Wiley, 2009.

2. George Kennedy, Bernard Davis, S R M Prasanna, “Electronic Communication Systems”, 5th


References:


Edition,

Wiley India Pvt Ltd., 2012.

2. H. Taub, D. L. Schilling, “Principles of Communication Systems”, 2nd

Edition, McGraw Hill,

Reprint, 2008.

3. R. R. Gulati, “Monochrome and Colour TV”, 3rd

Edition, New Age International (P) Ltd.

2014.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze the generation and demodulation of AM and DSBSC systems (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 12,

PSOs – 1, 3)

2. Realize the generation and demodulation of SSB and VSB (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 12, PSOs – 1, 3)

3. Discuss the direct and indirect method of generation of FM and its detection (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4,

12, PSOs – 1, 3)

4. Apply AM and FM basics in radio and TV systems (POs – 2, 3, 12, PSOs – 1, 3)

5. Analyze the noise performance of receivers (POs – 1, 2, 12, PSOs – 1, 3)

11

CMOS VLSI DESIGN




UNIT – I

CMOS Logic and Layouts: Introduction and history, CMOS Logic Circuits: Logic Gates, Pass

Transistor and Transmission gates

CMOS Fabrication and Layouts: Inverter Cross Section, Fabrication Process, Layout Design

Rules, Gate Layout, Stick Diagrams, Fabrication, Packaging and Testing.

UNIT – II

MOS Transistor Theory: Ideal V-I Characteristics, C-V Characteristics: simple MOS capacitance

models, Detailed MOS Gate Capacitance model, Detailed MOS diffusion capacitance model, Non-

ideal V-I Effects, DC Transfer Characteristics, Switch level RC delay model.

UNIT – III

Circuit Characterization and Performance Estimation: Delay Estimation: RC delay model,

linear delay model, Logical Effort (LE), LE and Transistor Sizing: Delay in gates and multistage

networks, choosing the best number of stages with LE, Power Dissipation, Low power design,

Interconnect.

UNIT – IV

Combinational Circuit Design: Circuit Families: Static CMOS, Ratioed Circuits, CVSL,

Dynamic Circuits, Pass Transistor Circuits, Differential Circuits, Sense Amplifier Circuits,

BiCMOS Circuits, Low Power Logic Design.

UNIT – V

Data path Subsystems: Adders: Ripple carry, Carry Generate and Propagate, Propagate Generate

Logic, Manchester Carry Chain, Carry Skip, Carry Select, Carry Look ahead, Tree Adders,

Subtraction, Multiple-Input Addition.

Self Study: VLSI Design Flow, Design specification, Design entry, Functional Simulation,

Placement and Routing, Timing Simulation, Fabrication into the chip. (U1) CMOS Technologies

(U2) Design Margins, Reliability (U3) Comparison of circuit families, Historical Perspectives,

(U4) One/Zero Detectors, Comparators, Counters (U5)

12

Textbooks:

1. Neil Weste and David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, 4th


2. Sung Mo Kang and Yusuf Leblebici, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits”, 4th

Edition, McGraw

Hill, 2014.

References:

1. Jan Rabaey, B. Nikolic, A. Chandrakasan, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”,

2nd


2. Morris Mano and Michael Ciletti, “Digital Design”, 4th


Course Outcomes:

1. Create MOS schematics and corresponding layouts for simple digital logic functions. (PO – 2,

3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, PSO – 2)

2. Calculate various circuit parameters such as current and device capacitance for a MOS

transistor. (PO – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, PSO – 2)

3. Evaluate the delay due to a MOS logic circuit, and thereby design a circuit to satisfy certain

design parameters. (PO – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, PSO – 2)

4. Analyze the performance of various MOS circuit families. (PO – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, PSO – 2)

5. Describe various connection configurations to realize digital adder designs and analyze their

operating speed. (PO – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, PSO – 2)

13



Prerequisite: Signals and Systems Contact Sessions: 56


UNIT – I

Sampling and Reconstruction of Signals: Ideal sampling and reconstruction of continuous time

signals, discrete time processing of continuous time signals.

Frequency Domain analysis of LTI systems: Frequency domain characteristics of LTI systems,

Frequency response of LTI systems, Frequency Domain Sampling and Reconstruction of discrete

time signals.

UNIT – II

DFT and FFT: Discrete Fourier Transform, DFT as a linear transformation, Properties of DFT,

DFT in linear filtering, Filtering long data sequences: overlap-save method, overlap-add method,

FFT algorithms: Direct computation of DFT, Radix-2 FFT algorithm: Decimation-in-time

algorithm, Decimation-in-frequency algorithm.

UNIT – III

FIR Filters: Design of FIR filters: Symmetric and anti-symmetric FIR filters, Design of linear-

phase FIR filters using windows and frequency sampling methods, FIR differentiators.


Structures.

UNIT – IV

IIR Filters: Analog filter specifications, Classification of Analog filters: Butterworth and

Chebyshev filters, Frequency transformations, Design of Analog filters, Digital IIR filter design

using impulse invariant method, bilinear transformation, Matched z-transform methods.

IIR filter structures: Direct form (I and II), Cascade, Parallel, and Transposed structures

UNIT – V

Architecture and Instruction set of TMS320C67x Processor: Architecture, Addressing modes,

Instruction sets, Assembler directives, Memory considerations, Fixed and Floating point formats,

implementation of FIR and IIR filters.

14

Textbooks:


Applications”, 4th

Edition, Pearson Education Asia/Prentice Hall of India, 2014.

2. Rulph Chassaing, Donald Relay, “Digital Signal Processing and Applications with

TMS3206713 and TMS320C6416DSK”, 2nd

Edition, Wiley Publications, 2014.

References:

1. Oppenheim and Schafer, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”, 3rd

Edition, Pearson Education,

2014.

2. Sen M. Kuo, Woon-Seng S. Gan, “Digital Signal Processors: Architectures, Implementations

and Applications”, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2005.

3. Emmanuel Ifeachor, Barrie W. Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing: A Practical Approach”, 2nd


Course Outcomes:

1. Illustrate the importance of sampling and frequency domain analysis of LTI Systems. (POs – 1,

2. PSO – 3)

2. Apply DFT in linear filtering. (POs – 2, 3. PSO – 3)

3. Design the filter coefficients of FIR and IIR filters. (POs – 2, 3. PSO – 3)

4. Develop digital structures for FIR and IIR filters. (POs – 2, 3. PSO – 3)

5. Summarize the architecture and instruction sets of TMS32067x processor. (POs – 2, 3.

PSO – 3)

15

TRANSMISSION LINES AND RADIATING SYSTEMS


Prerequisite: Electromagnetics Contact Sessions: 56


UNIT – I

Transmission Line theory: Lumped element circuit model for a transmission line, wave

propagation on a transmission line and general solutions of line, terminated lossless line,

characteristic impedance, reflection coefficient, VSWR and impedance equation. Special cases of

terminated lossless line, Smith chart: construction and applications, Conventional and graphical

solution of line parameters.

UNIT – II

Impedance matching and tuning, Line resonators: Matching with lumped elements (L-

networks) only Smith chart solutions, Single stub tuning: Shunt and Series stubs, Quarter Wave

transformer: Bandwidth performance of the transformer, Series and parallel resonant circuits:

loaded Q and unloaded Q, Transmission line resonators.

UNIT – III

Transmission lines and Fundamentals of radiator: Co-axial line, Strip line and Micro strip line,

Principle of antenna, fields from oscillating dipole, antenna field zones, basic antenna parameters,

patterns, beam area, Radiation intensity, beam efficiency, directivity and gain, antenna aperture,

effective height and radio communication link (Friis formula).

UNIT – IV

Point source and Arrays: Point source, Types of Arrays (Broad side, End fire, Extended End

fire), Arrays of two point sources, linear array of n-isotropic point sources of equal amplitude and

spacing, Null direction for arrays n isotropic point source of equal amplitude and spacing, pattern

multiplication.

UNIT – V

Thin linear antenna, Horn antenna and Parabolic reflectors: Introduction, short electric dipole,

Fields of short electric dipole, radiation resistance of short electric dipole, thin linear antenna, field

components of λ/2 (hertz) dipole antenna, radiation resistance of λ/2 antenna, Directivity of dipole

antenna, Types of antenna – Yagi-Uda antenna, Horn antenna, parabolic reflectors.

Textbooks:

1. David M. Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, 3rd


2. John D Kraus, Ronald J Marhetka, Ahmad S Khan, “Antennas and Wave Propagation”, 4th


16

References:

1. John Ryder D, “Networks, Lines and Fields”, Pearson India, 2015.

2. Constantine A Balanis, “Antenna, Theory, Analysis & Design”, 4th

Edition, John Wiley &

Sons, 2016.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze various transmission lines and find there parameters analytically and graphically.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 12, PSOs – 1, 2).

2. Apply Smith chart to design various impedance matching networks and also analyze line

resonators. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 12, PSOs –1, 2).

3. Define the parameters of antenna. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 12, PSOs – 1, 3).

4. Design different types of arrays and study the concept of pattern multiplication. (POs – 1, 2, 3,

12, PSOs – 1, 3).

5. Explore the field components and radiation resistance of various antennas. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 12,

PSOs – 1, 3).

17

MANAGEMENT, ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND IPR


Prerequisite: Nil Contact Hours: 14

Course Coordinator: Mr. V. Nuthan Prasad

UNIT – I

Management: Introduction, functions of management, Roles of manager, Levels of management,

Development of management thought.

Planning: Planning process, Types of plans (meaning only), Steps in planning, Decision making.

Organizing and Staffing: Principles of organization, Types of organization, Importance of

staffing.

UNIT – II

Directing and Controlling: Principles of directing, Leadership styles, Techniques and importance

of coordination and steps in controlling.

Entrepreneur: Functions of an entrepreneur, Stages in entrepreneurial process.

UNIT – III

SSI: Role of SSI in Economic Development, Steps to start an SSI

Project Management: Project Identification, Project selection

Entrepreneurship Development and Government: KIADB, MSME, SIDBI

UNIT – IV

IPR: Basic Principles of IPR laws, history of IPR – GATT, WTO, WIPO and TRIPS, role of IPR

in R&D and Knowledge era, concept of property, justification, Marx’s theory of property, different

forms of IPR.

UNIT – V

Patent: Evolution of patent law in India, Justifications, subject matters of patent, Criteria for

patentability, patentable and non-patentable inventions, pre-grant and post-grant oppositions, grant

or refusal of patents.

18

Patent application procedure and drafting: Patent drafting, format, provisional and complete

specifications, scopes of invention, claims, patent search and types of patent searches.

Self-Study: Modern management approaches, planning premises, Departmentation, committees,

communication meaning and importance, methods of establishing control (in brief). Types of

Entrepreneur, role of Entrepreneur in Indian economy and developing economies with reference to

Self-employment development, impact of liberalization, privatization globalization on SSI, project

report, KSFC, constitutional aspects of intellectual property, infringement of patents and design

rights

Textbooks:

1. P. C. Tripathi, P. N. Reddy, “Principles of Management”, 5th

Edition, McGraw Hill, 2016

2. Vasant Desai, “ Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development & Management”, 4th

Edition,

Himalaya Publishing House, 2010

3. P. Ganguli, “Intellectual Property Rights”, TMH, 2007.

4. T. Ramakrishna, “Course Material for I Year P. G. Diploma in IPR”, NLSIU, Bangalore

References:

1. Robert Lussier, “Management Fundamentals – Concepts, Application, Skill Development”, 5th

Edition, Thomson, 2012

2. World Intellectual Property Organization Handbook/Notes, 2nd

Edition, WIPO Publication,

2008

Course Outcomes:

1. Identify the importance of managerial discipline. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12,

PSO – 2)

2. Interpret the concepts of directing and controlling. (POs – 1, 2, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, PSO – 2)

3. Demonstrate the functions of an entrepreneurship development and describe various

institutional supports (POs – 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, PSO – 3)

4. Describe the basic principles of different IPRs (POs – 2, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, PSO – 3)

5. Recognize the characteristics and infringement of patents (POs – 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, PSO – 3)

19

ANALOG COMMUNICATION AND LIC LABORATORY


Prerequisites: Analog Electronic Circuits Laboratory Contact Sessions: 14


LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Differentiator and integrator using op-amps

2. Second order active low pass and high pass filter

3. Precision rectifier & 723 Regulator

4. Class-C amplifier

5. Generation and demodulation of AM

6. Schmitt Trigger

7. Generation of DSBSC using ring modulation

8. 555 Timer: Astable and Monostable Multivibrators

9. Generation and demodulation of FM

10. R-2R Ladder type Analog to Digital Converter and Flash ADC

11. Up conversion and down conversion using transistor mixer

12. Simulation of analog modulation techniques

Textbooks:

1. Simon Haykin and Michael Moher, “Communication Systems”, 5th


2. George Kennedy, Bernard Davis, S R M Prasanna, “Electronic Communication Systems”, 5th

Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2011.

3. David A. Bell, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear IC’s”, PHI/Pearson, 3rd

Edition, 2011.

4. D. Roy Choudhury and Shail B. Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, 2nd

Edition, New Age

International Reprint, 2006.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze basic op-amp circuits to perform differentiation and integration. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 9,

10, PSOs – 1, 3)

2. Design, simulate and implement modulation and demodulation circuits for AM and FM (POs –

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, PSOs – 1, 3)

3. Test analog filters, precision rectifier and regulators for the given specifications (POs – 1, 2, 3,

4, 9, 10, PSOs – 1, 3)

4. Implement multivibrators using IC 555 timer for the given specifications (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 9,

10, PSOs – 1, 3)

5. Construct analog to digital converters. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10. PSOs –1, 3)

20



Prerequisite: Signals and Systems Contact Sessions: 14


LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

Simulation Experiments

1. Verification of Sampling Theorem

2. DFT and IDFT, Circular convolution and Linear convolution

3. Design and implementation of FIR Filters (LP, HP, BP, BS) by using window techniques

4. Design and implementation of analog IIR Filters (Butterworth and Chebyshev)

5. Design and implementation of digital IIR Filters (Bilinear transformation)

Hardware Experiments

6. Linear convolution and Circular convolution

7. Computation of N point DFT/IDFT

8. Response of a discrete time system

9. Design and implementation of digital FIR Filters

10. Design and implementation of digital IIR Filters

11. Filtering of noisy signal using FIR filter

12. Generating signals of different frequencies and construction of AM wave

Textbooks:

1. J. G. Proakis and Ingle, “Digital signal processing using MATLAB”, 3rd

Edition, Cengage

learning, 2014.

2. Sanjit K. Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing”, 4th


Course Outcomes:

1. Apply sampling theorem on continuous time signal. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 9, PSO – 3)

2. Apply DFT and IDFT in linear and circular convolutions. (POs –1, 2, 3, 5, 9, PSO – 3)

3. Analyze the frequency response of FIR and IIR filters. (POs – 2, 3, 5, 9, PSO – 3)

4. Demonstrate filtering of noisy signals. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, PSO – 3)

5. Discuss generation of AM wave. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, PSO – 3)

21

HDL AND VLSI LABORATORY


Prerequisite: Digital Design Contact Sessions: 14


LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

All the experiments will make use of appropriate design tools.

1. Introduction to Design Entry and Simulation

2. Netlist generation, power, area, and timing report generation

3. NMOS and PMOS DC Analysis

4. Device Characterization

5. CMOS Inverter DC and Transient Analysis

6. Propagation delay of various simple gates, and comparison with logical effort

7. Fanout-of-4 Inverter delay measurement in different technologies

8. Inverter Chain Sizing

9. Comparison of MUX implementation

10. Verification of Full adder implementations at the transistor level

11. Verilog implementation of carry-select and carry-skip adders

12. Inverter Layout Design and Post layout simulation

Textbook:

1. Neil Weste and David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, 4th

Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ the digital design tools for HDL design entry, simulation, and synthesis. (POs – 2, 3, 4,

5, 9, 10, PSO – 2)

2. Create and verify functionality of various gates at the transistor level. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10,

PSO – 2)

3. Measure circuit performance parameters by performing simulations of circuit configurations.

(POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, PSO – 2)

4. Use tools to characterize processes by conducting suitable experiments. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10,

PSO – 2)

5. Create the layout for simple gates, and perform RC extraction and post layout simulation.

(POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, PSOs – 2)

22



Prerequisites: Analog Communication Contact Sessions: 56

Course Coordinator: Mr. Sadashiva V Chakrasali

UNIT – I

Signal Sampling: Basic signal processing operations in digital communication, Sampling

Principles, Sampling Theorem, Quadrature sampling of band-pass signals, Practical aspects of

sampling and signal recovery, PAM, TDM.

UNIT – II


PCM Robust quantization, DPCM, DM, Adaptive DM.

Base-Band Shaping for Data Transmission: Line Codes and their power spectra.

UNIT – III

Inter symbol interference: Introduction, Nyquist criterion for distortion less base-band binary

transmission, correlative coding, duo binary coding, Eye pattern.

Detection: Model of digital communication system, Gram – Schmidt orthogonalization, geometric

interpretation of signals, Maximum likelihood estimation.

UNIT – IV

Detection: Correlation receiver, Matched Filter Receiver, Properties of Matched Filter.


BPSK, FSK, ASK, QPSK systems with signal space diagram, generation, demodulation and error

probability concept, Comparison using Power Spectrum.

UNIT – V

Non coherent modulation techniques: FSK and BPSK, DPSK.

23

Spread spectrum modulation: Pseudo noise sequences, Notion of spread spectrum, direct

sequence spread coherent BPSK, Signal space dimensionality and processing gain, Frequency Hop

spread spectrum and applications of spread spectrum modulation.

Textbooks:

1. Simon Haykin, “Digital Communications”, John Wiley, Reprint 2014.

2. B. P. Lathi and Zhi Ding, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”,

International 4th

Edition, Oxford University Press, 2015.

References:



Course Outcomes:

1. Design a system to convert given analog signal into discrete signal. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 8, 11,

PSO – 3)

2. Analyze PCM, DPCM, DM and ADM systems and Base Band shaping for data transmission.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 11, PSO – 3)

3. Describe effects of ISI and detect message signal in noisy environment. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 11,

PSO – 3)

4. Compare performance of BPSK, ASK, and QPSK systems and their power spectra. (POs – 1,

2, 3, 8, 11, PSO – 3)

5. Describe spread spectrum technology and its applications. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 8, 11. PSO – 3)

24

MICROCONTROLLER


Prerequisite: Microprocessors Contact Hours: 42

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Suma K.V

UNIT – I

The MSP430 Architecture: The outside view-pin out, the inside view, memory, CPU, Memory

mapped input output Addressing Modes, Constant generator and emulated instructions, Instruction

set, examples

UNIT – II

Functions and subroutines: Storage for local variables, passing parameters to a subroutine and

returning a result, mixing C and assembly language, Interrupts, interrupt service routines, interrupt

service routines in C, non-maskable interrupts, issues associated with interrupts, Low power modes

Digital input, output and displays: parallel ports, digital inputs, interrupts on digital inputs,

multiplexed inputs: scanning a matrix keypad, analog aspects of digital inputs, switch debounce,

debouncing in hardware, debouncing in software, digital outputs, multiplexed displays, interface

between 3V & 5V system, liquid crystal displays, driving an LCD from MSP430xx

UNIT – III

Timers: Watchdog timer, basic timer1, real time clock, timer A, capture/compare channels,

interrupts from timer A, measurement in the capture mode, a single pulse or delay with a precise

duration, output in the continuous mode, edge-aligned pulse width modulation, uses of channel 0

in the up mode, Edge-Aligned PWM, simple PWM, design of PWM.

UNIT – IV

Mixed signal systems: Comparator_A, Architecture of Comparator_A+, Operation of

Comparator_A+, Analog to digital conversion: general issues, Resolution, Precision, and

Accuracy, SD 16 sigma delta ADC, signal conditioning and operational amplifiers

25

UNIT – V

Communication: Communication peripherals in the MSP430, serial peripheral interface, inter-

integrated circuit bus, a thermometer using I2C with the F2013 as master, asynchronous serial

communication

Self Study: clock generator, driving an LCD from an MSP430x4xx, output in the continuous

mode of timer, digital to analog conversion, a software UART using Timer A

Textbook:

1. John H Davies, “MSP430 Microcontrollers Basics”, Ist

Edition, Newnes Publishers, 2008.

Reference:

1. C. P. Ravikumar, “MSP430 Microcontroller in Embedded System Projects”, Elite Publishing

House, New Delhi, 2012.

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe the architecture of 16 bit mixed signal processor MSP430 including the

programming aspects. (POs – 1, 3. PSOs –1, 2)

2. Interface various digital input and output devices to MSP430. (POs – 1, 4. PSOs –1, 2)

3. Design timer applications in different modes of MSP430 timer. (POs – 1, 3. PSOs – 1, 2)

4. Apply the knowledge of on-chip mixed signal systems to build simple embedded system (PO –

1, 4. PSO –1, 2)

5. Implement embedded system using communication protocol. (PO –1, 3. PSO –1, 3)

26

MICROWAVE DEVICES AND RADAR


Prerequisites: Transmission Lines & Radiating Systems Contact Hours: 42


UNIT – I

Multiport Microwave Network Analysis: Scattering matrix – reciprocal networks and lossless

networks, shift in reference planes, Basic properties of dividers and couplers – three-port networks,

four-port networks; T-junction power divider – lossless divider, resistive divider, Wilkinson power

divider – even-odd mode analysis.

UNIT – II

Microwave Passive and Active devices: Composite filter design by the image parameter method,

PIN diodes, Phase shifters, Schottky-barrier diode, Attenuator, RWH theory, Gunn diodes– Gunn

effect, modes of operation.

UNIT – III

Microwave Tubes: Introduction, Klystrons: Two cavity klystron amplifiers, Multicavity Klystron

Amplifiers, Reflex Klystrons: Mathematical analysis of power and efficiency, Traveling Wave

Tubes, Magnetron Oscillators.

UNIT – IV

Introduction to Radar: Basic Radar – Principle of operation, Simple form of the Radar Equation,

Radar Block Diagram, Radar Frequencies, Applications of Radar.

Radar Equation: Introduction, Detection of signals in noise, Receiver noise and signal-to-noise

ratio, Radar cross-section of Targets.

UNIT – V

Special types of Radar: CW Radar, Coherent MTI Radar – Delay line cancellers, Blind speeds,

Digital MTI processor, Pulse Doppler Radar, Tracking Radar, Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR),

Air Surveillance Radar, Electronic Counter Measure, Bistatic Radar.

Self-Study: Impedance, admittance and transmission matrices of reciprocal microwave networks

and lossless microwave networks, Stepped-impedance low-pass filters, varactor diode and its

27

applications, IMPATT diode and its applications, conventional vacuum tubes comparison,

applications of Klystron amplifier, oscillator, applications of TWTA, applications of magnetron

oscillator, origins of radar, applications of radar, Doppler effect, millimeter waves radar.

Textbooks:





3. Merrill I. Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, 3rd


References:

1. Annapurna Das and Sisir K Das, “Microwave Engineering”, 2nd

Edition, McGraw-Hill 2009.

2. Robert E. Collin “Foundations of Microwave Engineering”, 2nd


Course Outcomes:

1. Apply the properties of scattering parameters to obtain the S-matrix of microwave components

and circuits. (POs – 1, 2. PSO – 3)

2. Examine the consequence of various microwave passive & active devices and design the

Microwave filters. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 10. PSO – 3)

3. Illustrate the significance of various microwave tubes. (POs – 1, 2, 10. PSO – 3)

4. Interpret the importance of radar and radar range equation. (PO - 1, 2, 10. PSO – 3)

5. Outline the key role played by special types of radar. (PO – 1, 10. PSO – 3)

28

MINI PROJECT


Students will commence and complete a technical project under the guidance of a faculty member

in the department. The quality of the work will be judged in two presentations, where the panel

consists of the guide and at least two other faculty members in the project domain.

Subject

Code Subject

No. of Hrs/Week Duration

of Exam

(Hrs)

Marks Total

Marks Credits

Lecture Practical/

Field Work IA Exam

EC64 Mini-project - - - 50 - 50 6

Course Outcomes:

1. Perform a survey of existing methods in the domain of the chosen topic (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4,

PSO – 1)

2. Describe the proposed design in terms of its technical block diagram (POs – 2, 3, 10,

PSOs – 2, 3)

3. Implement the technical block diagram using appropriate tools (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSOs – 2, 3)

4. Conduct extensive experimentation to evaluate the quality of the design (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5,

PSOs – 2, 3)

5. Present and prepare technical details of the project at regular intervals (POs – 9, 10,

PSOs – 2, 3)

29

EVALUATION RUBRICS

Criteria

Max.

Marks

Inadequate

(0% – 33%)

Development

(34% – 66%)

Proficient

(67% – 100%)

Marks CO

Mapping

Introduction to area

(Review I)

10 No information about the

specific technical details in the

chosen area.

Some information about the area,

but no clarity in internal details.

Clear presentation of the technical

details, internal working, and

rationale of design choices.

COs – 1, 5

Explanation of Technical

Block Diagram

(Review I)

10 Block diagram is not

technically correct, or is not

feasible.

Technically correct block

diagram, but not practical with

existing data/tools/methods.

Technically correct block diagram

with ample resources for

implementation.

COs – 2, 5

Implementation of Block

Diagram

(Review II)

10 Incomplete or no

implementation of diagram,

using unsuitable tools.

Block diagram is implemented,

but results are not matching

initial predictions.

Complete implementation using

suitable tools, and producing

consistent results.

COs – 3, 5

Results & Discussion

(Review II)

10 No or insufficient

experimentation to rest

working.

Simple experiments to show

functionality, without exhausting

testing.

Complete experimental analysis

including corner cases/weaknesses

of design.

COs – 4, 5

Presentation and Report

(Review I , II)

10 No proper use of tables/media,

unscientific language in report.

Basic use of media, no

continuity/flow in report and

presentation.

Media effectively used, along with

a smooth flow from beginning to

end, scientific language used in

report.

CO – 5

TOTAL MARKS AWARDED

30

DIGITAL COMMUNICATION LABORATORY


Prerequisites: Analog Communication Contact Sessions: 14


LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Verification of sampling theorem

2. Time Division Multiplexing

3. Generation and detection of Amplitude Shift Keying signals

4. Generation and detection of Frequency Shift Keying signals

5. Generation and detection of Phase Shift Keying signals

6. Generation and detection of Quadrature PSK & DPSK

7. PCM modulation and demodulation

8. Delta modulation and demodulation

9. Simulation for verification of sampling theorem

10. Simulation for performance analysis of various digital modulation and demodulation

techniques

Textbooks:

1. Simon Haykin, “Digital Communications”, John Wiley, Reprint 2014.

2. J. G. Proakis and M. Salehi, “Contemporary Communication Systems Using MATLAB”,

PWS Publishing Company, 2007.

Course Outcomes:

1. Implement a sampling circuit to find Nyquist rate. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 11. PSO – 3)

2. Employ TDM for band limited signals. (POs – 1, 2, 11. PSO – 3)

3. Design and implement ASK, PSK, FSK, DPSK digital modulation schemes. (POs –3, 4,

5, 7, 11. PSO – 3)

4. Design and implement PCM and Delta modulation scheme. (POs – 3, 4, 5, 7, 11.

PSO – 3)

5. Analyze the performance of various modulation techniques. (PO – 2, 4, 11. PSO – 3)

31

MICROWAVE AND OFC LABORATORY


Prerequisite: Transmission Line & Radiating Systems Contact Sessions: 14


LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Parameter characterization of microwave signals

2. Verify the power division and calculate insertion loss and isolation of a hybrid network

(Magic tee).

3. Determination of coupling and isolation characteristics of a microstrip

a) Branch-line directional coupler

b) Back-ward Directional coupler

4. a) Measurement of resonance characteristics of a microstrip ring resonator and

determination of dielectric constant.

b) Measurement of power division and isolation characteristics of a microstrip 3 dB

power divider.

5. Characteristics of Gunn diode

6. Mode curves of Reflex Klystron

7. Radiation pattern and directivity of Horn antenna

8. Radiation pattern and directivity of printed antennas

9. Measurement of losses in a given optical fiber

10. Measurement of numerical aperture of a given optical fiber

11. Fiber Dispersion Measurement

12. Voice and data multiplexing using optical fiber

Softwares suggested: Computer Simulation Technology (CST) or any other suitable

simulation tool.

Textbooks:





3. John D. Kraus , Ronald J. Marhefka and Ahmad S Khan “Antennas and Wave

Propagation”, 4th

Edition, McGraw-Hill Publications, 2006.

4. G. Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communication”, 4th


Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze the characteristics of Multiport Microwave networks. (POs – 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10.

PSO – 3)

2. Interpret the characteristics of Microwave Oscillators. (POs –1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10.

PSO – 3)

https://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&text=John+D.+Kraus&search-alias=books&field-author=John+D.+Kraus&sort=relevancerank

https://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&text=Ronald+J.+Marhefka&search-alias=books&field-author=Ronald+J.+Marhefka&sort=relevancerank

32

3. Obtain the radiation pattern and calculate the antenna parameters. (POs – 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8,

9, 10. PSO – 3)

4. Calculate the losses and numerical aperture in optical fiber communication. (POs – 1, 2,

5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. PSO – 3)

5. Analyze data multiplexing in optical fiber communication. (POs – 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10.

PSO – 3)

33

MICROCONTROLLER LABORATORY


Prerequisite: Microprocessors Contact Sessions: 14

Course Coordinator: Mrs. Suma K. V.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

Part A: Assembly Language Programming

1. Data block move : with overlap, without overlap and interchange

2. Addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of N-bit multi precision numbers

(N > 32 bits)

3. Identify whether a given number is positive, negative, odd and even

4. Sorting and Finding smallest/largest element in an array

5. Code conversion between BCD, ASCII & Hexadecimal

6. Generating Pulse Width Modulation

7. Square, cube, LCM, HCF and Factorial of a number

8. Addition and subtraction of two string ASCII digits

9. String transfer and string reversal

10. Identify whether a string is palindrome

Part B: Interfacing

Write C programs to interface MSP430 with peripherals:

11. Identify a key press by interfacing keypad with LCD display

12. Display on LCD : a key pressed or a message on the LCD module

13. External Analog to Digital converter interface using digital output pins and display on

the LCD display

14. Seven segment interface: 4 digit up/down binary and decimal counter

15. DC Motor interface: using PWM signal as variable DC signal

Textbook:

1. John Davies, “MSP430 Microcontroller Basics”, Elsevier, 2008.

Reference:

1. C. P. Ravikumar, “MSP430 Microcontroller in Embedded System Projects”, Elite

Publishing House, New Delhi, 2012.

Course Outcomes:

1. Employ hardware and software development and debugging tool. (PO – 5. PSO – 2)

34

2. Write, compile and debug assembly language program. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5. PSO – 2)

3. Develop C programs for different applications. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 2)

4. Write C language programs to interface modules to MSP430 microcontroller. (POs –1, 2, 4,

5. PSOs – 2, 3)

5. Write assembly language programs to use GPIO ports and timer module of MSP430

microcontroller. (PO – 10. PSOs – 2)

35

DEPARTMENT ELECTIVES

POWER ELECTRONICS

Course Code: ECE01 Credits: 3:0:0:1


Course Coordinator/s: Mrs. Punya Prabha. V, Mrs. Reshma Verma

UNIT – I

Introduction: Application of power electronics, power semiconductor devices, control

characteristics of power devices, types of power electronic circuits, peripheral effects.

Thyristors: Static characteristics, two- transistor model, dynamic characteristics turn on and

turn-off

Power MOSFET: Structure, operation, concept of pinch-off, steady state characteristics,

switching characteristics, gate drive.

IGBT: Structure of punch-through and non-punch-through IGBT, operation, steady state

characteristics, switching characteristics.

UNIT – II

DC Choppers: Principle of step-up and step-down chopper

Power Supplies: Introduction, Linear Series Voltage Regulator, Linear Shunt Voltage

Regulator, Integrated Circuit Voltage Regulators, Switching Regulators, Applications

UNIT – III

Inverters: Principle of operation, performance parameters, single phase half and full bridge

inverter with R and RL load

Uninterruptible Power Supplies: Introduction, Classification, Performance Evaluation,

Applications, Control Techniques, Energy Storage

UNIT – IV

Automotive Applications of Power Electronics: Introduction, Present Automotive Electrical

Power System, System Environment, Functions Enabled by Power Electronics, Multiplexed

36

Load Control, and Electromechanical Power Conversion, Dual/High Voltage Automotive

Electrical Systems, Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles.

UNIT – V

Non-conventional energy sources: Photovoltaic cells, wind power, LED light circuits,

Self Study: Conduct experiments on Static characteristics of Power MOSFET, IGBT, SCR,

RC half-wave and full-wave triggering circuit for a thyristor, SCR firing circuit using

synchronized UJT relaxation circuit, Commutation circuits for thyristor – LC circuit and

Impulse commutation circuit, Voltage impulse commutated chopper, Series Inverter.

Textbooks:

1. M. H. Rashid, “Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications”, 3rd

Edition, PHI,

2011.

2. M. H. Rashid, “Power Electronics Handbook”, 3rd

Edition, Elsevier Inc., 2011

References:

1. Vedam Subramanyam, “Power Electronics”, Revised 2nd


Publishers, 2008.

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe the structure, characteristics and operation of power semiconductor devices like

Thyristor, MOSFET and IGBT. (PO – 1, PSO – 2)

2. Analyze detailed operation of Power supplies. (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 2)

3. Illustrate the various operations of UPS. (POs – 2, 3, PSO – 2)

4. Investigate the various automotive applications of power electronics (POs – 2, 3, PSO – 2)

5. Analyze electronic ballast for discharge lamps. (PO – 3, 5, 9, PSO – 2)

37

RANDOM VARIABLES AND RANDOM PROCESS




UNIT – I

Introduction: Set theory, definitions, conditional probability, Bayes theorem, combined

experiments.

Specific Random Variables: Gaussian random variable, other distributions, density functions

and examples, conditional distribution and density functions.

UNIT – II

Operations on one random variable: Introduction, Expectation, moments, functions that give

moments, Transformations of random variables, computer generation of one random variable.

Multiple random variables: Introduction, vector random variables, joint distribution and its

properties, joint density and its properties, conditional distributions and density functions,

statistical independence.

UNIT – III

Multiple random variables: Distribution and density function of sum of random variables,

central limit theorem.

Random Processes: Introduction, the random process concept, stationarity and independence,

correlation functions, measurement of correlation functions.

UNIT – IV

Random Processes: Ergodic processes, Gaussian random processes, Poisson random

processes, Wiener Processes.

Spectral Characteristics of Random Processes: Power density spectrum and its properties,

white noise.

UNIT – V

Analysis and Processing of Random Processes: Response of linear systems to random

inputs, cross power density spectrums. Noise bandwidth, Band pass and band limited

processes, modeling of noise processes.

38

Self Study: Probability: Set definitions, set operations, probability introduced through sets,

joint and conditional probability, independent events and Bernoulli trials, Random Variable:

the random variable concept, distribution function, density function.

Textbook:

1. Peyton Z. Peebles, “Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles”, 4th


2. A. Papoulis and S. U. Pillai, “Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes”,

4th


References:

1. Hwei P. Hsu, “Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables, and Random

Processes”, Schaum’s Outline Series, McGraw Hill, 1997.

2. H Stark and J W Woods, “Probability and Random Processes with applications to Signal

Processing”, 3rd


Course Outcomes:

1. Solve basic probability and random variable problems. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

2. Identify different random variables and their properties. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

3. Estimate statistical parameters of different random variables. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

4. Classify different random processes. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

5. Relate input and output processes of a LTI system. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

39

SPEECH PROCESSING




UNIT – I

Digital Models for the Speech Signal: The process of speech production, the acoustic theory

of speech production, lossless tube models.

UNIT – II

Time Domain Models for Speech Processing: Time dependent processing of speech, short

time energy and average magnitude, speech and silence determination, pitch period estimation.

UNIT – III

Digital Representations of the Speech Waveform: Sampling speech signals, Instantaneous

quantization and adaptive quantization, delta modulation, differential PCM.

UNIT – IV

Short Time Fourier analysis and Homomorphic speech processing: Design of digital filter

banks, spectrographic displays, pitch detection, analysis by synthesis, analysis – synthesis

systems.

Homomorphic speech processing: The complex cepstrum of speech, Pitch detection, formant

estimation.

UNIT – V

Linear Predictive Coding: Linear predictive coding of speech: basic principles of linear

predictive analysis, computation of the gain for the model, solution of the LPC equations,

relations between various speech parameters, synthesis of speech from linear predictive

parameters.

Self Study: Digital models for speech signals, short time average zero crossing rates, direct

digital code conversion, implementation of filter bank summation method using FFT,

applications of LPC parameters.

Textbooks:

1. L R Rabiner and R W Schafer, “Digital Processing of Speech Signals”, Pearson

Education, 2004.

40

2. Thomas F. Quatieri, “Discrete Time Speech Signal Processing”, Pearson Education, 2009.

References:

1. L. Rabiner, R Schafer, “Theory and Applications of Digital Speech Processing”, 1st


2. I. McLoughlin, “Applied Speech and Audio Processing: with Matlab Examples”, 1st

Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2009.

Course Outcomes:

1. Compare various speech production models. (POs – 2, 3, PSO – 3)

2. Find various speech parameters. (POs – 2, 3, PSO – 3)

3. Represent speech signal in different codes. (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3)

4. Interpret and analyze speech signals in frequency domain. (POs – 2, 3, PSO – 3)

5. Determine LPC parameters for given speech signal. (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3)

41



Prerequisites: CMOS VLSI Design Contact Hours: 42


UNIT – I

Power Dissipation in CMOS: Introduction: Need for low power VLSI chips, sources of

power consumption, introduction to CMOS inverter power dissipation, low power VLSI design

limits, basic principle of low power design.

UNIT – II

Power Optimization: Logical Level Power Optimization: gate reorganization, local

restructuring, signal gating, logic encoding, state machine encoding, pre-computation logic

Circuit Level Power Optimization: Transistor and gate sizing, equivalent pin ordering,

network restructuring and re-organization, special latches and flip-flops.

UNIT – III

Design of Low Power CMOS Circuits: Reducing power consumption in memories: low

power techniques for SRAM, Circuit techniques for reducing power consumption in adders and

multipliers.

Special techniques: Power reduction and clock networks, CMOS floating gate, low power

bus, delay balancing.

UNIT – IV

Power Estimation: Simulation power analysis: SPICE circuit simulation, Gate level

Simulation, Architectural level analysis, Data correlation analysis in DSP systems, Monte-

Carlo simulation.

Probabilistic Power analysis: Random signals, probabilistic techniques for signal activity


transition density.

42

UNIT – V

Synthesis for Low Power: Behavioral level transforms, algorithm level transforms for low

power, architecture driven voltage scaling, power optimization using operation reduction,

operation substitution, Bus switching activity.

Self Study: Basic principle of low power design, Signal gating, Network restructuring and re-

organization, CMOS floating gates, delay balancing in multipliers, SPICE circuit simulation,

Random signals, power optimization using Operation reduction

Textbooks:

1. Gary Yeap, “Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design”, Kluwer Academic, 1998.


References:

1. Jan M. Rabaey and Massoud Pedram, “Low Power Design Methodologies”, Kluwer

Academic, 2010.

2. P. Chandrakasan and R.W. Broadersen, “Low Power Digital CMOS Design”, Kluwer

Academic 1995.

3. NPTEL Lecture series on, “Low power Circuits and Systems”, June 2012.

Course Outcomes:

1. Identify the sources of power dissipation in CMOS circuits. (POs –1, 2, 4, 9, PSO – 2)

2. Investigate low power design techniques. (POs – 2, 4, 6, PSO – 2)

3. Apply optimization and trade-off techniques that involve power dissipation of digital

circuits. (POs – 2, 5, 6, PSO – 2)

4. Perform power analysis using simulation and probabilistic based approaches. (POs – 4, 9,

11, PSO – 2)

5. Analyze and design low-power VLSI circuits using current generation design style and

process technology. (POs – 2, 4, 5, 11, PSO – 2)

43

OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING WITH C++


Prerequisite: Data Structures using C Contact Hours: 42


UNIT – I

Introduction: Structure of C++ program: Preprocessor directive, declarations and definitions.

Functions: Passing simple function, passing arguments to functions such as variables,

reference arguments pointer type, function return data type such as constant, variables, data

structures, specifying a class, member functions and member data, nested classes, static data

members and member functions, friendly functions.

UNIT – II

Classes and Objects: Definition, class initialization, class constructors, destructors,

constructor types , multiple constructor in a class, destructors, inheritance, defining derived

classes, different types of inheritance, Virtual base classes, abstract classes, constructors in

derived classes, virtual functions and dynamic polymorphism, Pure virtual function.

UNIT – III

Operator Overloading: Overloading using various operators, Overloading using friends,

Function Overloading, Templates: Function Templates, Class Templates, Header File and

Implementation File of a Class Template

UNIT – IV

Pointers and Standard Template Library: Pointer data types and Pointer Variables,

Dynamic Arrays, Classes and Pointers, Overloading the array index operator.

Components of STL, Sequence Container, Iterators and Programming Examples

UNIT – V

Stacks: Implementation of Stacks as Arrays, Linked implementation of Stacks Applications of

Stacks.

Queues: Implementation of Queues as Arrays, Linked implementation of Queues

Trees: Basic terminologies of binary trees, Binary Tree Traversal, Binary Search Trees

44

Self Study: Programs using C++ for the following topics: Introduction to C++ Programming,

Data types in C++, Manipulators and Functions, Structures, Recursive function and Class,

Nested Member Functions and Arrays, Static variables, Static Member Function, Arrays of

objects and objects as Arguments, Friend Functions and Constructors, Inheritance, Multiple

Inheritance and Virtual Functions, Stacks Queues, Trees and Hashing.

Textbooks:

1. E. Balaguruswamy, “Object Oriented Programming with C++”, TMH, 4th

Edition, 2011.

2. D. S. Malik, “Data Structures using C++”, Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2003.

References:

1. Robert Lafore, “Introduction to OOPs with C++”, 4th

Edition, Sams Publishing, 2001.

2. Sartaj Sahni, “Data Structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++”, International Edition,

McGraw Hill, 2000.

3. Gray Litwin, “Programming with C++ and Data Structures”, Vikas Publications, 2003.

Course Outcomes:

1. Illustrate the concept of C++ program by using functions with different arguments. (POs –

1, 2, 3, 5, 12, PSO – 2)

2. Apply the concept of inheritance in solving real world problems. (POs – 2, 3, 5, 12,

PSO – 2)

3. Employ overloading concepts to overload built in operators. (POs – 2, 3, 5, 12, PSO – 2)

4. Use pointers for dynamic arrays and Linked Lists. (POs – 2, 3, 5, 12, PSO – 2)

5. Implement the concept of stack, queues and trees using Standard Template Library. (PO –

2, 3, 5, 12, PSO – 2)

45

DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN USING VERILOG


Prerequisite: Digital Electronics Contact Hours: 42


UNIT – I

Introduction and Methodology: Digital systems and embedded systems, Real world circuits,

Models, Design Methodology.

Combinational Basics: Boolean function and Boolean Algebra, Binary coding, Combinational

components and circuits.

UNIT – II

Sequential Basics: Counters, Sequential data paths and controls, Clocked synchronous timing

methodology, Memories: Concepts, Memory types, Error detection and correction.

UNIT – III

Implementation Fabrics: ICs, PLDs, Interconnections and signal integrity, Processor Basics:

Embedded computer organization, Instruction and data.

UNIT – IV

Interfacing with memory and I/O Interfacing: I/O devices, I/O Controllers, Parallel Buses,

Serial transmission, I/O software.

UNIT – V

Accelerators: General concepts, Case study: Video edge detection, verifying an accelerator.

Design Methodology: Design optimization, Design for test.

Self Study: Binary representation and circuit elements, Sequential Basics: Storage elements,

Packaging and circuit boards, Design methodology: Design Flow.

Textbook:

1. Peter J. Ashenden, “Digital design: An Embedded systems approach using Verilog”,

Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, Elsevier, 2014.

46

References:

1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A guide to digital design and synthesis”, 2nd

Edition,

Pearson Publications, 2009.

2. Stephen Brown, ZvonkoVranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design”,

2nd

Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publications. 2009.

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe the basics of combinational components for building digital systems.

(POs – 1, 3, PSOs – 1, 2)

2. Apply the sequential basics and memory concepts to build a specified digital system

(POs – 1, 2, 3, PSOs – 1, 2)

3. Implement processors and other digital systems on programmable logic devices.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 1, 2)

4. Interface different I/O and memory modules in a system. (POs – 1, 2, 3, PSOs – 1, 2)

5. Illustrate the entire digital system design flow. (PO – 1, 2, 3, PSOs – 1, 2)

47

DSP ARCHITECTURE AND ALGORITHMS



Course Coordinator: Dr. Maya V. Karki

UNIT – I

Introduction to Digital Signal Processors: A Digital Signal Processing System,

Programmable digital signal processors, major features of programmable digital signal

processors, architectures for programmable digital signal processing devices, introduction to

basic architectural features.

Architecture and instruction set of C6x processor: TMS320C6x architecture, functional

units, fetch and execute units, pipelining, registers, linear and circular addressing modes,

instruction sets

UNIT – II

Software and memory consideration of C6xProcessor: Assembler directives, Linear

assembly, ASM statements within C, C callable assembly function, timers, interrupts,

multichannel buffered serial ports, direct memory access, memory considerations, fixed and

floating point format, code improvements, constraints, Programming examples using assembly

and linear assembly.

UNIT – III

Implementation of FIR filters: FIR filters, FIR lattice structure, FIR implementation using

Fourier series, window functions, Programming example using ASM and C

UNIT – IV

Implementation of IIR filters: Introduction, IIR filter structures, Bilinear transformation,

Programming examples based on ASM and C

UNIT – V

Fast Fourier Transform: Introduction, development of FFT algorithm with Radix-2,

Decimation in frequency FFT algorithm with Radix-2, Decimation in Time FFT algorithm with

Radix-2, Bit reversal for unscrambling, development of FFT algorithm with Radix-4, Inverse

fast Fourier transform

48

Self Study: Assembly code format, Programming examples using assembly and linear

assembly, Programming example using ASM on FIR and IIR filtering, Programming example

using ASM on FFT

Textbook:

1. Rulph Chassaing, Donald Relay ”Digital Signal Processing and Applications with

TMS3206713 and TMS320C6416DSK” , 2nd

Edition, Wiley 2014

References:

1. Sen M. Kuo, Woon-Seng S. Gan, “Digital Signal Processors: Architectures,

Implementations and Applications”, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2005

2. Lapsley, “DSP Processor Fundamentals, Architectures & Features”, S. Chand & Co, 2000.

Course Outcomes:

1. Distinguish the computational building blocks, architectural features and instruction sets of

TMS320C6x (POs – 1, 2, 3, PSO – 3)

2. Compute the programming examples using assembly and linear assembly (POs – 2, 3, 5,

PSO – 3)

3. Demonstrate implementation of FIR filters using ASM and C (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3)

4. Employ ASM and C code to realize IIR filtering (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3)

5. Illustrate realization of FFT algorithm with Radix-2 and Radix-4 (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3)

49



Prerequisites: CMOS VLSI Design Contact Hours: 42


UNIT – I

Introduction to MEMS: Historical background of Micro Electro Mechanical Systems, multi-

disciplinary aspects, basic technologies, application areas, scaling laws in miniaturization,

scaling in geometry, electrostatics, electromagnetics, electricity and heat transfer.

UNIT – II

Micro Systems – Principles: Transduction principles in MEMS Sensors: Various sensing

mechanisms, Actuators: different actuation mechanisms - silicon capacitive accelerometer,

piezo-resistive pressure sensor, blood analyzer, conductometric gas sensor, silicon micro-

mirror arrays, piezo-electric based inkjet print head, electrostatic comb-drives.

UNIT – III

Materials and Micromanufacturing: Semiconducting materials, Silicon, Silicon dioxide,

Silicon Nitride, Quartz, Poly silicon, Polymers, Materials for wafer processing, Packaging

materials Silicon wafer processing, lithography, thin-film deposition, etching (wet and dry),

wafer-bonding, Silicon micromachining: surface, bulk, LIGA process.

UNIT – IV

Electrical and Electronics Aspects: Electrostatics, Coupled electro mechanics, stability and

Pull-in phenomenon, Practical signal conditioning circuits for microsystems, RF MEMS:

Switches, varactors.

UNIT – V

Integration and Packaging of Microelectromechanical Systems: Integration of

microelectronics and micro devices at wafer and chip levels, Microelectronic packaging: wire

and ball bonding, flip chip, Micro system packaging examples.

Self Study: Feynman’s vision, Smart phone applications, Smart buildings, Wafer bonding

process, Tuned filters, Application circuits Based on microcontrollers for pressure sensor,

Accelerometer, Testing of Micro sensors, Qualification of MEMS devices.

50

Textbooks:


Smart Systems”, 1st Edition, Wiley India, 2010.

2. T R Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacturing”, 2nd

Edition, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2008

References:

1. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson International Edition, 2006.

2. S D Senturia, “Microsystem Design”, Springer International Edition, 2001.

Course Outcomes:

1. Recognize the multidisciplinary and scaling aspects of micro systems. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4,

PSOs – 2, 3)

2. Analyze the various transduction mechanisms and applications of MEMS. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4,

PSOs – 2, 3)

3. Describe the various fabrication processes of MEMS devices. (POs – 2, 9, 10, 12,

PSOs – 2, 3)

4. Analyze the electronics aspects of MEMS systems. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 2, 3)

5. Classify the various packaging methods for MEMS devices. (POs – 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 2, 3)

51

ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC

Course Code: ECE09 Credit: 3:0:0:1


Course Coordinator/s: Mrs. Punya Prabha. V

UNIT – I

Fundamentals of Neural Networks: Biological neurons and their artificial models, Neural

Network Architecture: Single Layer, Multi layer Feed Forward Networks, Recurrent Networks,

Learning methods, Applications.

UNIT – II



propagation algorithm, Radial Basis Function Network (RBFN), Applications.

UNIT – III

Adaptive Resonance Theory (ART): Introduction, Cluster Structure, Vector Quantization,

Classical ART Networks, Simplified ART Architecture, Special features of ART1 models,

ART1 Algorithms, Illustration, Applications.

UNIT – IV

Fuzzy Set Theory: Fuzzy vs crisp sets, crisp sets, Operations on crisp sets, Properties of crisp

sets, Partition and Covering, Membership function, Basic fuzzy set operations, Properties of

Fuzzy sets, Crisp relations and Fuzzy relations, Applications.

UNIT – V

Fuzzy systems: Crisp logic: Laws of propositional logic, inference in propositional logic,

Predicate logic: Interpretations of predicate logic formula, inference in predicate logic, Fuzzy

logic: Fuzzy Quantifiers, Fuzzy inference. Fuzzy rule based system, defuzzification.

Applications: Greg Viot’s Fuzzy cruise controller, Air conditioner controller

52

Self Study: Implementation: Pattern classification using Hebb net and McCulloch –Pitts net,

Pattern recognition using Perceptron Networks, Implementation of all fuzzy operations on both

discrete and continuous fuzzy sets, Defuzzification, Fuzzy inference system

Textbooks:

1. Rajasekaran. S, Vijayalakshmi Pai G.A, “Neural networks, Fuzzy logic, and Genetic

Algorithms, Synthesis and Applications”, PHI New Delhi, 2011.



References:

1. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks: A Comprehensive Foundation”, 3rd Edition, PHI, 2009.

2. Timothy J Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, 3rd Edition, Wiley, India,

New Delhi, 2011.

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe the relation between real brains and simple artificial neural network models.

(POs – 1, 6, 12, PSO – 2)

2. Select different neural network algorithms for suitable applications. (POs – 1, 3, 6, 12,

PSO – 2)

3. Identify the main implementation issues for common neural network systems and apply

ANN models to data compression and pattern identification (POs – 1, 3, 6, 12, PSO – 2)

4. Apply the rules of fuzzy logic for fuzzy controller (POs – 2, 4, 6, 12, PSO – 2)

5. Employ fuzzy set operations and defuzzification for a given application (POs – 1, 2, 4, 6,

12, PSO – 2)

53

IMAGE PROCESSING

Course Code: ECE10 Credit: 3:0:0:1


Course Coordinator: Mr. Shreedarshan K

UNIT – I

Introduction and Fundamentals: What is Digital Image Processing? Origins, Examples,

fundamental steps in Digital Image Processing, Components of an image processing system,

Elements of visual perception, Image sensing and acquisition, Image sampling and

quantization, some basic relationships between pixels, mathematical tools used in image

processing.

UNIT – II

Intensity Transformations and Spatial Filtering: Basic intensity transformation functions,

Histogram processing, spatial filtering, smoothing spatial filters, sharpening spatial filters.

UNIT – III

Image Transforms: Two dimensional orthogonal and unitary transforms, property of unitary

transforms, 1D-DFT, 2D-DFT, DCT, Basics of filtering in the frequency domain, image

smoothing and image sharpening using frequency domain filters, Geometric mean filter.

UNIT – IV

Image Segmentation – 1: Fundamentals, Detection of discontinuities, line detection, Edge

detection, Edge linking via Hough Transform, Thresholding, Optimal global and adaptive

thresholding.

UNIT – V

Image Segmentation and Morphological Image Processing: Region based segmentation:

Region growing, splitting and merging, Dilation and Erosion, some basic morphological

algorithms, segmentation using morphological watersheds.

Self Study: Implement programs for image processing basics, reading and display of image,

histogram, image sensing, acquisition and sampling, intensity transformations and filtering,

DFT, DCT, and thresholding of images, image segmentation and morphological algorithms

54

Textbooks:

1. R. C. Gonzalez, R. E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd

Edition, Pearson Education,

2009.

2. R. C. Gonzalez, R. E. Woods, S. L. Eddins, “Digital Image Processing using MATLAB”, 2nd

Edition, 2009.

References:

1. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

1. Analyze general terminology of digital image processing. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3)

2. Examine various types of images, intensity transformations and spatial filtering. (POs – 2,

3, 5, PSO – 3)

3. Employ Fourier Transform for image processing in frequency domain. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5,

PSO – 3)

4. Evaluate the methodologies for image segmentation and morphological image processing.

(POs – 3, 5, PSO – 3)

5. Apply image processing algorithms in practical applications. (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3)

55

REAL TIME SYSTEMS


Prerequisite: Microprocessors Contact Hours: 42


UNIT – I

Fundamentals of Real Time Systems: Concepts and Misconceptions, Multidisciplinary

Design Challenges, Birth and Evolution of Real-Time Systems.

Hardware for Real Time Systems: Basic Processor Architecture, Memory Technologies,

Architectural Advancements, Peripheral Interfacing, Microprocessor versus Microcontroller,

Distributed Real-Time Architectures.

UNIT – II

Real Time Operating systems: From Pseudo kernels to Operating Systems, Theoretical

Foundations of Scheduling, System Services for Application Programs, Memory Management

Issues, and Selecting Real-Time Operating Systems.

UNIT – III

Programming Languages for Real-Time Systems: Coding of Real-Time Software,

Assembly Language, Procedural Languages, and Object-Oriented Languages, Overview of

Programming Languages, Automatic Code Generation, and Compiler Optimizations of Code.

UNIT – IV

Requirements Engineering Methodologies: Requirements Engineering for Real-Time

Systems, Formal Methods in System Specification, Semiformal Methods in System

Specification, The Requirements Document.

UNIT – V

Software Design Approaches: Qualities of Real-Time Software, Software Engineering

Principles, Procedural Design Approach, Object-Oriented Design Approach, Life Cycle

Models.

Self Study: Advancements behind Modern Real-Time Systems, Hierarchical Memory

Organization, Time-Triggered Architectures, and Memory Management in the Task Control

Block Model, Case Study: Selecting a Commercial Real-Time Operating System, Cardelli’s

Metrics and Object-Oriented Languages, Recommendations on Specification Approach, Agile

Methodologies.

56

Textbook:

1. Phillip. A. Laplante, “Real-time systems design and analysis”, 2nd

Edition, PHI, 2012.

References:

1. Stuart Bennet, “Real-Time Computer Control – An Introduction”, 2nd

Edition, Pearson

Education, 2005.

2. Rob Williams, “Real-Time Systems Development”, Elsevier, 2006.

3. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, India, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe the basics of real time systems (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 2)

2. Select appropriate scheduling strategy based on real time application constraints

(POs – 3, 4, PSOs – 2, 3)

3. Elaborate the language syntax for real time applications (POs – 2, 3, PSO – 2)

4. Identify suitable RTS development methodology for a given application (POs – 3, 4,

PSOs – 2, 3)

5. Apply the knowledge of software design specification to build RTS (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4,

PSO – 2)

57





UNIT – I

Digital Integrated Circuits: Technology Scaling, Die size growth, Frequency, Power


Evolution of SoC, ASIC flow vs SoC flow, SoC design challenges.

Introduction to CMOS Technology: CMOS operation principles, Characteristic curves of

CMOS, CMOS inverter and characteristic curves, Delays in inverters, Buffer Design, Power

dissipation in CMOS, CMOS Logic, Stick diagrams and Layout diagrams, Timing concepts

UNIT – II

Digital Building Blocks: Decoder, encoder, code converters. Priority encoder, multiplexer,

Demultiplexer, Comparators, Parity check schemes, Multiplexer, De-multiplexer, Pass

Transistor Logic, Application of multiplexer as a multi-purpose logical element, asynchronous

and synchronous up-down counters, Shift registers.

FSM Design: Mealy and Moore modeling, Adder & Multiplier concepts

UNIT – III

Logic Design using Verilog: Lexical Conventions, Data Types, Modules, Nets, Values, Data

Types, Comments, arrays in Verilog, Expressions, Operators, Operands, Arrays, memories,

Strings, Delays, parameterized designs, Procedural blocks, Blocking and Non-Blocking

assignment, looping, flow Control, Task, Function, Synchronization, Event Simulation, need

for verification, basic test bench generation and simulation

UNIT – IV

Principles of RTL Design: Verilog coding concepts, Verilog coding guide lines:

Combinational, Sequential, FSM, general guidelines, synthesizable Verilog constructs,

sensitivity list, Verilog events, RTL design challenges, clock domain crossing, Verilog

modeling of combinational logic, Verilog modeling of sequential logic.

UNIT – V

58

Design and simulation of architectural building blocks: Basic Building blocks, design

using Verilog HDL: Arithmetic Components – Multiplier design, Data Integrity – Parity

Generation circuits, Control logic – Arbitration, FSM Design, overlapping and non-

overlapping Mealy and Moore state machine design

Mini-Project: n bit simple ALU design & verification

Self Study: Moore’s law, PMOS & NMOS operation, basic gates, universal gates, NAND &

NOR CMOS implementation, Evolution & importance of HDL, Introduction to Verilog,

Levels of abstraction, typical design flow, design using Verilog HDL, Arithmetic components

– Adder, Subtractor.

Textbooks:

1. Morris Mano M, “Digital Design”, 4th


2. Neil H. E. Weste, David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems

Perspective”, 3rd


3. Samir Palnitkar, “VERILOG HDL – A guide to digital design and synthesis”, 2nd

Edition,


References:

1. J. Bhasker, “Verilog HDL Synthesis: A Practical Primer”, 3rd

Edition, Star Galaxy, 2005.

2. A. Anand Kumar, “Fundamentals of Digital Circuits”, 2nd

Edition, PHI Learning, 2012.

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand the basic VLSI principles. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSO – 2)

2. Apply basic digital design principles to complex circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 1, 2)

3. Employ Verilog HDL for describing digital circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 2)

4. Create directed test benches, running simulators and analyze/debug. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

PSO – 2).

5. Apply Linux commands and Cadence tools to get simulation results, Netlist creation, basic

timing, area and power report. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 2).

59



Prerequisites: Advanced Digital Logic Design Contact Hours: 42

Course Coordinator: Mr. S. L. Gangadharaiah

UNIT – I

Verification Concepts: Concepts of verification, Test bench generation, Functional

verification approaches, Typical verification flow, Stimulus generation, Direct testing.

Coverage: Code coverage and Functional coverage, Coverage plan.

UNIT – II

System Verilog – language constructs: System Verilog constructs – Data types, two state

data, strings, Arrays: Queues, Dynamic and Associative Arrays, Structs, Enumerated types.

Program blocks, modules, interfaces, Clocking ports, Mod ports.

UNIT – III

System Verilog – Classes: Classes and Objects, Class Variables and Methods, Class

Instantiation, Inheritance and Encapsulation, Polymorphism.

Randomization: Directed vs Random Testing, Randomization: Constraint driven

Randomization.

UNIT – IV

System Verilog – Assertions and Coverage: Introduction to assertion based verification,

Immediate and concurrent assertions

Coverage driven assertion: Motivation, types of coverage, Cover group, Cover point, Cross

coverage, Concepts of binning and event sampling.

UNIT – V

Building Test bench: Layered test bench architecture, Introduction to universal verification

methodology, Overview of UVM.

60

Self Study: Importance of verification, Stimulus vs verification, Language evolution,

Introduction to universal verification methodology, Base classes and simulation phases in

UVM and UVM macros, Unified messaging in UVM, UVM environment structure,

Connecting DUT – Virtual Interface.

Tools: NCVerilog, NCSim, VCSMX for System Verilog

References:

1. System Verilog LRM

2. Chris Spear, Greogory J Tumbush, “System Verilog for Verification – A guide to learning

test bench language features”, Springer, 2012.

3. Sasan Iman, “Step by Step functional Verification with System Verilog and OVM”,

Hansen Brown Publishing, 2008

Reference Websites: www.testbench.in, www.asic-world.com

Online material: Seer recordings

Course Outcomes:

1. Express the principle of HDL verification. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 2)

2. Apply OOPs concepts in System Verilog. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 2)

3. Build basic verification environment using System Verilog. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 2)

4. Generate random stimulus and track functional coverage using System Verilog. (POs – 2,

3, 4, 5, PSO – 2)

5. Appreciate the concepts of layered test bench architecture and its components. (POs – 2, 3,

4, 5, PSO – 2)

http://www.testbench.in/

http://www.asic-world.com/

61

LINEAR ALGEBRA


Prerequisite: Engineering Mathematics Contact Hours: 42

Course Coordinator: Mr. Shreedarshan K

UNIT – I

Linear Equations: Systems of Linear Equations, Row reduction and Echelon Forms, Vector

Equations, Matrix Equation Ax = b, Solution Sets of Linear Systems, Linear Independence,

Introduction to Linear Transformations, Matrix of a Linear Transformation, Applications.

UNIT – II


Transformations, Linearly Independent sets, Bases, Co-ordinate Systems, The Dimension of a

Vector Space, Rank,.

UNIT – III

Eigen Values and Eigen Vectors: The Characteristic equation, Diagonalization, Eigen

Vectors and Linear Transformations.

UNIT – IV

Orthogonality and Least Squares: Orthogonal Sets, Orthogonal Projections, Gram –

Schmidt Process, Least Squares Problems

UNIT – V

Symmetric Matrices and Quadratic Forms: Diagonalization of Symmetric Matrices,

Quadratic Forms, Singular Value Decomposition.

Self Study: Linear models in engineering, Applications to difference equations, Inner Product,

Length and Orthogonality, Constrained Optimization.

Textbooks:

1. David C Lay, Stephen R Lay, Judi J McDonald, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, 5th


2. Gilbert Strang, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, 4th


2007.

62

References:

1. S Lipschutz, M Lipson, “Schaum’s Outline of Linear Algebra”, 5th

Edition, 2012.

2. M J Sterling, “Linear Algebra for Dummies”, 1st Edition, 2009.

Course Outcomes:

1. Solve systems of linear equations using multiple methods, including Gaussian elimination,

matrix inversion and matrix operations. (POs – 1, 2, 3, PSO – 3)

2. Demonstrate understanding of the concepts of vector space and subspace. (POs – 2, 3, 5,

PSO – 3)

3. Demonstrate understanding of linear independence, span, and basis. (POs – 2, 3, 5,

PSO – 3)

4. Determine eigen values and eigenvectors and solve eigen value problems. (POs – 2, 3, 5,

PSO – 3)

5. Apply principles of matrix algebra to linear transformations. (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3)

63

MACHINE LEARNING


Prerequisite: Linear Algebra Contact Hours: 54

Course Coordinator: Dr. S. Sethu Selvi

UNIT – I

Introduction: Probability theory, what is machine learning, example machine learning

applications

Supervised Learning: Learning a class from examples, VC dimension, PAC learning, Noise,

Learning multiple classes, Regression, Model selection and generalization

UNIT – II

Bayesian Learning: Classification, losses and risks, utility theory MLE, Evaluating an

estimator, Bayes estimator, parametric classification

Discriminant functions: Introduction, Discriminant functions, Least squares classification,

Fisher’s linear discriminant, fixed basis functions, logistic regression

UNIT – III

Multivariate methods: Multivariate data, Parameter Estimation, Estimation of Missing

Values, Multivariate Normal Distribution, Multivariate Classification, Tuning Complexity,

Discrete Features, Multivariate Regression

Non-parametric methods: Nearest Neighbor Classifier, Nonparametric Density Estimation

UNIT – IV

Maximum margin classifiers: SVM, Introduction to kernel methods, Overlapping class

distributions, Relation to logistic regression, Multiclass SVMs, SVMs for regression

Mixture models and EM: K – means clustering, Mixture of Gaussians, Hierarchical

Clustering, Choosing the Number of Clusters

UNIT – V

Dimensionality reduction: Combining Models

64

Self Study: Implementation of Histograms, Covariance matrices, Regression with sampling,

Bayes classifier, Perceptron algorithm and clustering algorithms

Textbooks:

1. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, 2nd

Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd,

2010.

2. Christopher Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, CBS Publishers &

Distributors, 2010.

Course Outcomes:

1. Appreciate the concepts and issues of various learning systems. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10,

PSOs – 1, 3)

2. Employ Bayesian learning and discriminant functions for classification. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

10, PSOs – 1, 3)

3. Evaluate multi-variate and non-parametric methods for regression and classification.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, PSOs – 1, 3)

4. Describe maximum margin classifiers and mixture models. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10,

PSOs – 1, 3)

5. Examine various dimensionality reduction algorithms. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, PSOs – 1, 3)

65

ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL VLSI DESIGN

Course Code: ECE16 Course Credits: 3:0:0:1

Prerequisite: CMOS VLSI Design Contact Hours: 42

Course Coordinator: Dr. M Nagabhushan

UNIT – I

Single Stage Amplifiers: Common Source stage with different loads and source degeneration,

Source follower, Common Gate stage, Cascode structures and Folded Cascode structures.

UNIT – II

Differential Amplifier and Current Mirrors: Introduction to Differential Pair Amplifier,


Amplifiers with Different Loads, Effects of mismatches, Simple Current Mirrors, Cascode

Current Mirrors, Differential Pair with Current Mirror Load.

UNIT – III

Operational Amplifiers and Frequency Response: Op Amps Low Frequency Analysis,

Telescopic Op Amps, Folded Cascode Op Amps, Two Stage Op Amps, Common Mode

Feedback. Frequency response of common source amplifiers, Source Follower Common Gate,

Cascode Structures and Folded Cascode Structures, Differential Amplifiers, Single Ended

Differential Pair.

UNIT – IV

Frequency Compensation and Stability: Frequency compensation techniques in Telescopic

Op Amps, Folded Cascode Op Amps, Two Stage Op Amps.

UNIT – V

Data Converters: Analog vs Digital and Discrete time signals, converting analog signals to

digital signals, Sample and Hold characteristics, DAC Specifications, ADC Specifications,

DAC Architectures, Digital input code, Resistor String, R – 2R Ladder Networks, Current

steering, Charge scaling DACs, Cyclic DAC, Pipeline DAC, ADC Architectures. Flash type, 2-

Step Flash, Pipeline ADC, Integrating ADC, Successive Approximation methods.

Self Study: Differential amplifiers with different loads, Op-amp low frequency analysis,

frequency response of cascode structures, ADC & DAC specifications, cyclic DAC

66

Textbooks:

1. B Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, 2nd

Edition, McGraw Hill

Education, 2016.

2. R. Jacob Baker, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout, and Simulation”, Wiley IEEE Press, 3rd

Edition, 2010.

References:

1. Tony Chan Carusone, David Johns, Kenneth Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”,

2nd


2. P E Allen, D R Holberg, “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, 2nd

Edition, Oxford University

Press, 2002.

3. Gray Paul R, Meyer Robert G, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”, 5th


4. Franco Sergio, “Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits”, 4th


Course Outcomes:

1. Design a simple current mirror and cascode current mirror. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 11,

PSOs – 1, 2)

2. Design a multistage amplifier using single stage amplifier concept. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 11,

PSOs – 1, 2)

3. Determine the poles and zeroes of a multi-pole system and analyze the frequency response,

and stability of the system. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 6, 11, PSOs – 1, 2)

4. Design an operational amplifier to optimize its performance metrics. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8,

10, 11, PSO – 1, 2)

5. Analyze different ADC/DAC architectures. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 11, PSOs – 1, 2)

https://www.amazon.com/Tony-Chan-Carusone/e/B005OFLUQE/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

https://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&field-author=David+Johns&search-alias=books&text=David+Johns&sort=relevancerank

https://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_3?ie=UTF8&field-author=Kenneth+Martin&search-alias=books&text=Kenneth+Martin&sort=relevancerank

67

NEURAL NETWORKS AND DEEP LEARNING


Prerequisites: Machine Learning Contact Hours: 42

Course Coordinator: Dr. S. Sethu Selvi

UNIT – I

Introduction: Human brain, neuron models, neural nets as directed graphs, feedback, neural

architectures, knowledge representation, connection to artificial intelligence

UNIT – II

Learning process: Error-correction learning, memory based learning, Hebbian learning,

competitive learning, Boltzman learning, credit assignment, learning with and without a teacher,

learning tasks, memory, statistical learning theory

UNIT – III

Modern practical deep neural networks: Deep feed forward networks, regularization for deep

learning, optimization for training deep models, convolutional networks

UNIT – IV

Sequence Modeling: Recurrent and Recursive nets, Practical Methodology, applications

UNIT – V

Deep Learning Research: Linear factor models, auto encoders, variational auto encoders,

restricted Boltzman machine, generative adversarial networks

Self Study: Implementation of neural network and deep learning algorithms

Textbooks:

1. Simon Haykin, “Neural networks: A comprehensive foundation”, 2nd

Edition, Prentice Hall,

New Delhi, 1999.

2. Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio and Aaron Courville, “Deep Learning”, MIT Press, 2016.

Course Outcomes:

1. Appreciate the concepts and applications of neural networks and deep learning (POs – 2, 3, 4,

5, 10, PSOs – 1, 3)

2. Examine how various types of learning work and how they can be used (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 10,

PSOs – 1, 3)

3. Apply deep feed forward and convolutional networks to solve practical problems (POs – 2, 3,

4, 5, 10, PSOs – 1, 3)

68

4. Demonstrate how recurrent and recursive nets function and how practical problems can be

mapped to them (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, PSOs – 1, 3)

5. Design end-to-end deep learning architectures involving auto encoders, RBM, and generative

adversarial networks for practical applications (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, PSOs – 1, 3)

CURRICULUM



COMMUNICATION



BANGALORE – 54

VII & VII Semester B. E.

2

About the Institute



philanthropist, Late Dr. M S Ramaiah. The institute is accredited with A grade by NAAC in 2016

and all engineering departments offering bachelor degree programs have been accredited by NBA.

RIT is one of the few institutes with faculty student ratio of 1:15 and achieves excellent academic

results. The institute is a participant of the Technical Education Quality Improvement Program

(TEQIP), an initiative of the Government of India. All the departments are full with competent

faculty, with 100% of them being postgraduates or doctorates. Some of the distinguished features of

RIT are: State of the art laboratories, individual computing facility to all faculty members. All

research departments are active with sponsored projects and more than 130 scholars are pursuing

PhD. The Centre for Advanced Training and Continuing Education (CATCE), and Entrepreneurship

Development Cell (EDC) have been set up on campus. RIT has a strong Placement and Training

department with a committed team, a fully equipped Sports department, large air-conditioned library

with over 80,000 books with subscription to more than 300 International and National Journals. The

Digital Library subscribes to several online e-journals like IEEE, JET etc. RIT is a member of

DELNET, and AICTE INDEST Consortium. RIT has a modern auditorium, several hi-tech

conference halls, all air-conditioned with video conferencing facilities. It has excellent hostel

facilities for boys and girls. RIT Alumni have distinguished themselves by occupying high positions

in India and abroad and are in touch with the institute through an active Alumni Association. RIT

obtained Academic Autonomy for all its UG and PG programs in the year 2007.As per the National

Institutional Ranking Framework, MHRD, Government of India, Ramaiah Institute of Technology

has achieved 45th

rank in 2017 among the top 100 engineering colleges across India and occupied

No. 1 position in Karnataka, among the colleges affiliated to VTU, Belagavi.







respectively. The department has a Center of Excellence in Food Technologies sponsored by VGST,

Government of Karnataka. The department is equipped with numerous UG and PG labs, along with

R & D facilities. Past and current research sponsoring agencies include DST, VTU, VGST and

AICTE with funding amount worth Rs. 1 crore. The department has modern research ambitions to

develop innovative solutions and products and to pursue various research activities focused towards

national development in various advanced fields such as Signal Processing, Embedded Systems,

Cognitive Sensors and RF Technology, Software Development and Mobile Technology.



education




Quality Policy

We at M. S. Ramaiah Institute of Technology strive to deliver comprehensive, continually enhanced,

global quality technical and management education through an established Quality Management

System complemented by the synergistic interaction of the stake holders concerned


To be, and be recognized as, an excellent Department in Electronics& Communication Engineering










Program Educational Objectives (PEOs):

PEO1: To provide fundamental prerequisites in mathematical, scientific and engineering fields

required to solve technical problems

PEO2: To train in analyzing, designing and creating new scientific tools and other software so as to

gain good breadth of knowledge

4

PEO3: To be able to involve in a professional and ethical environment by building effective

communication, multidisciplinary and teamwork skills and relate to engineering issues in a broader

social context

PEO4: To provide an academic environment for excelling and leading a successful professional

career with lifelong learning

PEO5: To conduct research, design/develop, create novel products/solutions by formulating and

integrating various concepts


POa: Fundamental Concepts: Recollect the essential descriptions from basic sciences, and apply

them in E & C stream

POb: Analysis: Demonstrate ability to identify, interpret and solve engineering problems

POc: Design Concepts: Design circuits and conduct experiments with electronic systems,

communication equipments, analyze and interpret the result

POd: Design Applications: Design systems/subsystems and devices

POe: Team Work: Demonstrate the capability to visualize, organize and work in interdisciplinary

tasks

POf: Technical Skills: Demonstrate skills in mastering different software tools and modern

technology

POg: Professional Ethics: Inculcate the ethical, social and professional responsibilities such as

project management and finance

POh: Communication Skills: Communicate effectively in oral /written form of scientific analysis

or data

POi: Contemporary Issues: Understand the impact of engineering solutions on the society and be

aware of contemporary issues and criticisms

POj: Entrepreneurship: Develop self-confidence and become excellent multi-skilled engineer,

manager, leader and entrepreneur and display ability for life-long learning

POk: Competitive Ability: Participate and succeed in competitive examinations/placement and show

potential research capability

PO l: Leadership Quality: Understand engineering and management principles and apply these as

a member and leader in a team for project management

5


Semester Humanities

& Social

Sciences

(HSS)

Basic

Sciences

/ Lab

(BS)

Engineeri

ng

Sciences/

Lab

(ES)

Profession

al Courses

- Core

(Hard

core, soft

core, Lab)

(PC-C)

Profession

al Courses

- Electives

(PC-E)

Other

Electives

(OE)

Project

Work/I

nternsh

ip

(PW/I

N)

Total

Credits

in a

Semester

First 2 9 14 25

Second 4 9 12 25

Third 8 08 08 24

Fourth 8 17 25

Fifth 22 04 26

Sixth 2 15 08 25

Seventh 2 06 08 3 06 25

Eighth 07 04 14 25

Total 10 34 34 75 24 03 20 200

SCHEME OF TEACHING

VII SEMESTER

SI. No.

Course Code

Course Title Category Credits Contact

Hours L T P Total

1. EC701 IPR HSS 2 0 0 2 2

2. EC702 Wireless Communication PC-C 3 0 0 3 3

3. EC703 Information Theory & Coding PC-C 3 0 0 3 3

4. ECPExx Department Elective – IV PC-E x x x 4 4

5. ECPExx Department Elective – V PC-E x x x 4 4

6. XXOExx Open Elective OE x x x 3 3

7. EC704 Project Work – I PW 0 0 6 6 12

Total 8+x x 6+x 25 31

VIII SEMESTER

SI. No.

Course Code

Course Title Category Credits Contact

Hours L T P Total

1. EC801 Optical Fiber Communication PC-C 3 0 0 3 3

2. EC802 Embedded System Design PC-C 3 0 1 4 5

3. ECPExx Department Elective – VI PC-E x x x 4 4

4. EC804 Project Work – II PW 0 0 14 14 28

Total 6+x x 15+x 25 40

7




Course Code

Course Title Credits

L T P Total

ECPE01 OOPs with C++ and Data Structures PC-E 3 0 1 4

ECPE02 Operating Systems PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE03 Computer Organization and Architecture PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE04 Power Electronics PC-E 3 0 1 4

ECPE05 Digital Electronic Measurements PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE06 Advanced Signal Processing PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE07 Image Processing PC-E 3 0 1 4

ECPE08 Communication Switching Systems PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE09 Discrete Time Control Systems PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE10 Linear Algebra PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE11 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE12 Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems PC-E 3 0 1 4

ECPE13 Cryptography and Network Security PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE14 Global Positioning Systems (GPS) PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE15 Low Power VLSI Design PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE16 Design of Electronic Systems PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE17 Data Compression PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE18 Radar and Navigational Aids PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE19 Wavelets and its Applications PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE20 Spread Spectrum Communication PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE21 Satellite Communication PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE22 RF ICs PC-E 4 0 0 4

ECPE23 Advanced Digital Logic Design PC-E 3 0 1 4

ECPE24 Advanced Digital Logic Verification PC-E 3 0 1 4

ECPE25 Machine Learning PC-E 3 0 1 4

ECPE26 Neural Networks and Deep Learning PC-E 3 0 1 4

8





UNIT – I




UNIT – II




Case studies

UNIT – III




UNIT – IV






UNIT – V



rights.


Case studies.

9

Textbooks:

1. P. Ganguli, “Intellectual Property Rights”, 1st Edition, TMH, 2001.

2. Dr. B. L. Wadhera, “Intellectual Property Law Handbook”, 2nd

Edition, Universal Law

Publishing, 2002.

3. T. Ramakrishna, “Course Material for 1 year P. G Diploma in IPR”, 1st Edition, NLSIU,

Bangalore.

References:



2. D. Baingridge, “Intellectual Property”, 5th



Course Outcomes:




3. Use implication and protection for GI of goods. (PO – e, g, h, i, j, l)

4. Understand procedures to get Indian and other country patents by direct application or by PCT

route. (PO – e, g, h, i,)

5. Gain knowledge of various forms of IP, their infringements and their significance in




Prerequisite(s): Digital Signal Processing & Contact Hours: 42

Digital Communication


UNIT – I





UNIT – II




UNIT – III








UNIT – IV




UNIT – V



Textbooks:


Education/ Prentice Hall of India, 3rd

Indian Reprint 2003.

11

References:


2. W. C. Y. Lee, "Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory and applications, 2nd


Course Outcomes:


(PO – b, h, k)

2. Analyze the received power and field components of propagated EM waves. (PO – a, b, c, h, k)

3. Employ the concept of different diversity techniques to overcome the effect of small scale multi-

path propagation. (PO – b, c, h, k)



5. Describe the functional blocks of GSM architecture and Classify different types of channels in IS-

95 and CDMA-2000 standards. (PO – f, h, k)




Course Coordinator: Dr. Maya V Karki

UNIT – I





information sources

UNIT – II






r-ary coding)

UNIT – III








UNIT – IV






13

UNIT – V







Textbooks:

1. K. Sam Shanmugham, “Digital and analog communication Systems”, 2nd

Edition, John Wiley

Publications, 1996.


Edition, 2004.

3. Simon Haykin, “Digital Communications”, 2nd

Edition, John Wiley Publications, 2003

References:

1. Bernard Sklar, “Digital Communications”, 2nd


2. Simon Haykin, “Introduction to Analog and Digital Communications”, 2nd

Edition, John Wiley

Publications, 2003.

Course Outcomes:





nd,


(PO – b, c, d, e, f)



encoders and use Viterbi and stack algorithms for decoding convolutional codes. (PO – b, c, d,

e, f, h, k, l)





UNIT – I







dispersion.

UNIT – II





response time.



UNIT – III





UNIT – IV


penalties.



optical filters.

15

UNIT – V





SONET/SDH rings.

Textbooks:

1. Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communication”, 5th

Edition, MGH, 2008.


References:

1. Joseph C Palais, “Fiber Optic Communication”, 5th


Course Outcomes:





4. Employ power budget and rise-time budget analysis in digital optical links. (PO – b,

c, h, k)


(PO – b, c, h, k)



Prerequisites: Microcontroller Contact Hours: 70

Course Coordinator: Mrs. K. V. Suma

UNIT – I





UNIT – II




UNIT – III






UNIT – IV




UNIT – V




Textbooks:


Introduction”, 3rd

edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.

17


References:

1. James K. Peckol, “Embedded Systems – A contemporary design tool”, John Wiley India Pvt.

Ltd, 2008.

Course Outcomes:




(PO – a, b, j)



(PO – a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, j, l)

5. Explain and demonstrate the hardware and software aspects of interrupt systems. (PO – a, b, c)

CURRICULUM

Institute of Technology

RAMAIAH INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY(Autonomous Institute, Affiliated to VTU)

Bangalore – 560054.



COMMUNICATION

III & IV SEMESTER B.E.

About the Institute Ramaiah Institute of Technology (RIT) (formerly known as M. S. Ramaiah Institute of Technology) is a self-financing institution established in Bangalore in the year 1962 by the industrialist and philanthropist, Late Dr. M S Ramaiah. The institute is accredited with “A” grade by NAAC in 2016 and all engineering departments offering bachelor degree programs have been accredited by NBA. RIT is one of the few institutes with prescribed faculty student ratio and achieves excellent academic results. The institute was a participant of the Technical Education Quality Improvement Program (TEQIP), an initiative of the Government of India. All the departments have competent faculty, with 100% of them being postgraduates or doctorates. Some of the distinguished features of RIT are: State of the art laboratories, individual computing facility to all faculty members. All research departments are active with sponsored projects and more than 150 scholars are pursuing PhD. The Centre for Advanced Training and Continuing Education (CATCE), and Entrepreneurship Development Cell (EDC) have been set up on campus. RIT has a strong Placement and Training department with a committed team, a good Mentoring/Proctorial system, a fully equipped Sports department, large air-conditioned library with over 1,35,427 books with subscription to more than 300 International and National Journals. The Digital Library subscribes to several online e-journals like IEEE, JET etc. RIT is a member of DELNET, and AICTE INDEST Consortium. RIT has a modern auditorium, several hi-tech conference halls and all are air-conditioned with video conferencing facilities. It has excellent hostel facilities for boys and girls. RIT Alumni have distinguished themselves by occupying high positions in India and abroad and are in touch with the institute through an active Alumni Association. RIT obtained Academic Autonomy for all its UG and PG programs in the year 2007. As per the National Institutional Ranking Framework, MHRD, Government of India, Ramaiah Institute of Technology has achieved 60th rank in 2018 among the top 100 engineering colleges across India. About the Department The Department of Electronics and Communication was started in 1975 and has grown over the years in terms of stature and infrastructure. The department has well equipped simulation and electronic laboratories and is recognized as a research center under VTU. The department currently offers a B. E. program with an intake of 120, and two M. Tech programs, one in Digital Electronics and Communication, and one in VLSI Design and Embedded Systems, with intakes of 30 and 18 respectively. The department has a Center of Excellence in Food Technologies sponsored by VGST, Government of Karnataka. The department is equipped with numerous UG and PG labs, along with R & D facilities. Past and current research sponsoring agencies include DST, VTU, VGST and AICTE with funding amount worth Rs. 1 crore. The department has modern research ambitions to develop innovative solutions and products and to pursue various research activities focused towards national development in various advanced fields such as Signal Processing, Embedded Systems, Cognitive Sensors and RF Technology, Software Development and Mobile Technology.

2

Vision of the Institute To be an Institution of International Eminence, renowned for imparting quality technical education, cutting edge research and innovation to meet global socio economic needs

Mission of the Institute MSRIT shall meet the global socio-economic needs through

• Imparting quality technical education by nurturing a conducive learning environment through continuous improvement and customization

• Establishing research clusters in emerging areas in collaboration with globally reputed

organizations

• Establishing innovative skills development, techno-entrepreneurial activities and consultancy for socio-economic needs

Quality Policy

We at M. S. Ramaiah Institute of Technology strive to deliver comprehensive, continually enhanced, global quality technical and management education through an established Quality Management System complemented by the synergistic interaction of the stake holders concerned

Vision of the Department To be, and be recognized as, an excellent Department in Electronics& Communication Engineering that provides a great learning experience and to be a part of an outstanding community with admirable environment.

Mission of the Department To provide a student centered learning environment which emphasizes close faculty-student interaction and co-operative education. To prepare graduates who excel in the engineering profession, qualified to pursue advanced degrees, and possess the technical knowledge, critical thinking skills, creativity, and ethical values. To train the graduates for attaining leadership in developing and applying technology for the betterment of society and sustaining the world environment

3

Program Educational Objectives (PEOs): PEO1: To train to be employed as successful professionals in a core area of their choice PEO2: To participate in lifelong learning/ higher education efforts to emerge as expert researchers and technologists PEO3: To develop their skills in ethical, professional, and managerial domains Program Outcomes (POs): PO1: Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems. PO2: Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences. PO3: Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental considerations. PO4: Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions. PO5: Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations. PO6: The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice. PO7: Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable development. PO8: Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.

4

PO9: Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings. PO10: Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions. PO11: Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments. PO12: Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.

Program Specific Outcomes (PSOs): PSO1: Circuit Design Concepts: Apply basic and advanced electronics for implementing and evaluating various circuit configurations PSO2: VLSI and Embedded Domain: Demonstrate technical competency in the design and analysis of components in VLSI and Embedded domains PSO3: Communication Theory and Practice: Possess application level knowledge in theoretical and practical aspects required for the realization of complex communication systems

5


Semester Humanities Basic Engineering Professional Profession Other Project Extra & Total & Social Sciences Sciences/ Courses - al Courses Electives Work/Int Co- Credits Sciences / Lab Lab Core (Hard - Electives (OE) ernship curricul in a (HSS) (BS) (ES) core, soft (PC-E) (PW/IN) ar Semester core, Lab) activities (PC-C) (EAC)

First 2 9 14 25 Second 4 9 12 25 Third 8 07 10 25

Fourth 4 21 25 Fifth 2 19 04 25 Sixth 15 04 06 25

Seventh 14 12 26 Eighth 4 18 02 24 Total 08 30 33 79 20 04 24 02 200

6

SCHEME OF TEACHING

III SEMESTER

SI. Course Course Title Category Credits Contact

No. Code

Hours

L T P S Total

1. EC31 Mathematics – III BS 4 0 0 0 4 4

2. EC32 Analog Electronic Circuits PC-C 4 0 0 0 4 4

3. EC33 Digital Electronic Circuits PC-C 4 0 0 0 4 4

4. EC34 Network Analysis ES 3 1 0 0 4 5

5. EC35 Electromagnetics BS 4 0 0 0 4 4

6. EC362 Data Structures using C (Soft Core) PC-C 2 0 0 1 3 2


8. ECL37 Analog Electronic Circuits PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

Laboratory

9. ECL38 Digital Electronic Circuits PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

Laboratory

Total 21 1 2 1 25 27

IV SEMESTER


No. Code

Hours

L T P S Total

1. EC41 Mathematics – IV BS 4 0 0 0 4 4

2. EC42 Linear Integrated Circuits PC-C 3 0 0 1 4 3

3. EC43 Control Systems PC-C 3 1 0 0 4 5

4. EC44 Microprocessors PC-C 4 0 0 0 4 4

5. EC45 Signals and Systems PC-C 4 0 0 0 4 4

6. EC462 Hardware Description Language (Soft Core) PC-C 3 0 0 0 3 3


8. ECL47 Signals & Controls Laboratory PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

9. ECL48 Microprocessor Laboratory PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

Total 21 1 2 1 25 27

7

III SEMESTER

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III Course Code: EC31 Credits: 4:0:0:0 Prerequisite: Engineering Mathematics I and II Contact Hours: 56 Course Coordinators: Dr. Monica Anand & Mr. Vijaya Kumar

UNIT – I Numerical solution of Algebraic and Transcendental equations: Method of false position, Newton - Raphson method. Numerical solution of Ordinary differential equations: Taylor series method, Euler and modified Euler method, fourth order Runge-Kutta method. Statistics: Curve fitting by the method of least squares, fitting a linear curve, fitting a parabola, fitting a geometric curve, correlation and regression.

UNIT – II Linear Algebra: Elementary transformations on a matrix, Echelon form of a matrix, rank of a matrix, Consistency of system of linear equations, Gauss elimination and Gauss – Siedel method to solve system of linear equations, eigen values and eigen vectors of a matrix, Rayleigh power method to determine the dominant eigen value of a matrix, diagonalization of a matrix, system of ODEs as matrix differential equations.

UNIT – III Complex Variables – I: Functions of complex variables, Analytic function, Cauchy-Riemann equations in cartesian and polar coordinates, Consequences of Cauchy-Riemann equations, Construction of analytic functions. Transformations: Conformal transformation, Discussion of the transformations –

,,2 zewzw == and )0(2

≠+= zzazw , bilinear transformation.

UNIT – IV

Complex Variables-II: Complex integration, Cauchy theorem, Cauchy integral formula, Taylor and Laurent series (statements only), Singularities, Poles and residues, Cauchy residue theorem (statement only).

8

UNIT – V Fourier series: Convergence and divergence of infinite series of positive terms, Periodic function, Dirchlet conditions, Fourier series of periodic functions of period 2π and arbitrary period, Half range series, Fourier series and Half Range Fourier series of Periodic square wave, Half wave rectifier, Full wave rectifier, Saw-tooth wave with graphical representation, Practical harmonic analysis. Textbooks: 1. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Wiley Publication, 10th Edition, 2015. 2. B. S. Grewal, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, 43rd Edition, 2015. References: 1. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, 4th Edition,

2010. 2. Dennis G. Zill, Michael R. Cullen, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Jones and Barlett

Publishers Inc., 3rd Edition, 2009. 3. Dennis G. Zill and Patric D. Shanahan, “A First Course in Complex Analysis with Applications”,

Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2009.

Course Outcomes: 1. Solve the problems of algebraic, transcendental and ordinary differential equations using

numerical methods and fit a suitable curve by the method of least squares and determine the lines of regression for a set of statistical data. (POs – 1, 2. PSO – 1, 3)

2. Analyze the concept of rank of a matrix and testing the consistency and the solution by Gauss elimination and Gauss Siedel iteration methods. (POs – 1, 2. PSO – 1, 3)

3. Analyze functions of complex variable in terms of continuity, differentiability and analyticity and apply Cauchy-Riemann equations and harmonic functions to solve problems related to Fluid Mechanics, Thermo Dynamics and Electromagnetic fields and geometrical interpretation of conformal and bilinear transformations. (POs – 1, 2. PSO – 1, 3)

4. Find singularities of complex functions and determine the values of integrals using residues. (POs – 1, 2. PSO – 1, 3)

5. Apply the knowledge of Fourier series and expand a given function in both full range and half range values of the variable and obtain the various harmonics of the Fourier series expansion for the given numerical data. (POs – 1, 2. PSO – 1, 3)

9

ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS Course Code: EC32 Credits: 4:0:0:0 Prerequisite: Basic Electronics Contact Hours: 56 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Lakshmi Shrinivasan

UNIT – I Small signal low frequency transistor models: Two-port devices and hybrid model, the three transistor configurations, determination of h-parameters from the characteristics, Advantages of h-parameters, Analysis of a transistor amplifier circuit using h-parameters (CE Configuration only), CE amplifier with emitter resistance, Miller’s theorem and its dual, Miller effect capacitance Low frequency transistor amplifier circuits: Bootstrapped Darlington circuit, Cascode transistor configuration. Untuned amplifiers: Cascaded CE transistor stages.

UNIT – II Feedback amplifiers: Feedback concept, advantages of Negative feedback, Transfer gain with feedback, Loop gain, Feedback amplifier topologies, General characteristics of negative feedback amplifiers, effect of negative feedback on input and output resistance in voltage series, Effect of negative feedback on amplifier bandwidth. Sinusoidal Oscillators: Barkhausen Criterion, LC oscillators (tuned oscillators) - Transistor Colpitts oscillator, Hartley oscillator, Transistor Phase Shift Oscillator – RC Phase shift & Wien Bridge oscillator (both without mathematical analysis), Crystal oscillator – Frequency Stability.

UNIT – III Large Signal Amplifiers: Classification of power amplifiers, Class A Large signal amplifiers, Second Harmonic distortion, conversion efficiency, Power Output, Transformer – Coupled Audio Power Amplifier, Push – Pull Amplifiers, Advantages of a Push–Pull System, Class B amplifiers, Complementary –Symmetry Circuits, Class AB operation, Class C and Class D Amplifier, Problems, power transistor heat sink, thermal analogy of a power transistor.

10

UNIT – IV Field Effect Transistors: Junction Field Effect Transistor, Pinch-Off Voltage Vp, JFET volt-ampere characteristics, FET small signal model, Insulated Gate FET(MOSFET), Comparison of MOSFET & JFET, Common Source Amplifier, Common Drain Amplifier, or Source Follower, Generalized FET Amplifier, Biasing FET, FET as a Voltage Variable Resistor(VVR), Uni-junction Transistor, Problems.

UNIT – V MOSFET as an amplifier and a switch: Large signal operation – transfer characteristic, graphical derivation of the transfer characteristic, operation as a switch, operation as a linear amplifier, Biasing in MOS amplifiers, biasing by fixing VGS, biasing by fixing VGS and connecting a resistance in the source, biasing using a drain-to-gate feedback resistor, biasing using a constant current source. Small signal operation and models: Small signal equivalent circuit model, T equivalent circuit model, Modeling the Body effect, Common source amplifier with and without source resistance, high frequency model of MOSFET, unity gain frequency, frequency response – Low frequency, mid-band and high frequency analysis of common-source amplifier. Textbooks: 1. Jacob Millman, Christos C. Halkias & Satyabrata Jit, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2008. 2. Adel Sedra, Kenneth Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits”, 1st Indian Edition, Oxford University

Press, 2006. References: 1. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, PHI, 9th

Edition, 2008. Course Outcomes: 1. Analyze BJT hybrid model and its significance in circuit analysis along with general BJT

amplifiers. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 12. PSO –1) 2. Illustrate the importance of feedback amplifiers and oscillator circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 12.

PSO – 1) 3. Compute the conversion efficiency of different types of power amplifiers. (POs – 1, 2.

PSO – 1)

11

4. Compare different types of FET amplifiers. (POs – 1, 2, 4. PSO – 1) 5. Interpret the low and high frequency response of a common source amplifier using

MOSFET. (POs – 1, 2, 4. PSO – 1)

12


Course Code: EC33 Credits: 4:0:0:0 Prerequisites: Basic Electronics Contact Hours: 56 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Reshma Verma

UNIT – I Introduction to different logic families: Electrical characteristics of logic gates – logic levels and noise margins, fan-out, propagation delay, transition time, power consumption and power delay product, TTL inverter – circuit description and operation, TTL NAND circuit description and operation. Combinational logic: Boolean algebra: Standard representation of logic functions – SOP and POS forms, Minimization of 4 variable functions using Karnaugh maps, Multiplexing and Demultiplexing, Multiplexers – Realization of 2:1, 4:1 and 8:1 multiplexers using gates, applications, Demultiplexers: Realization of 1:2, 1:4, 1:8 using basic gates, applications.

UNIT – II Combinational logic: Code converters: BCD to Excess 3 and vice versa, Binary to gray and vice versa, Encoders, Priority Encoders, Decoders, BCD to Decimal and BCD to Seven segment decoders, Parity circuits (generator and checker), Comparators: 1 bit and 2 bit comparators design, cascade comparators. Combinational Functions: Arithmetic operations: Adders, Parallel adders, Fast adders, Subtractor: using 2s complement and applications, Adder/Subtractor, BCD adder, binary multipliers.

UNIT – III Flip Flops: Latches, Flip-Flops: Master Salve Flip Flops, Edge Triggered Flip Flop, setup and hold time, Characteristic and Excitation Tables, Conversion from one flip flop to another. Registers: Registers (basic, load control input, parallel load), Shift registers (basic, parallel load, universal), SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, Applications of shift registers (serial adder, ring counter, Johnson counter)

UNIT – IV Sequential Circuits Analysis and Design: Ripple counter: Up counter, down counter, up/down counter using flip flops, design of Mod N counter. Synchronous counters: Design of synchronous counters (self-starting counter)

13

Synchronous sequential Machines: State table, state diagram, Mealy and Moore Machines, Design and Analysis of Sequential Circuits using D /T Flip Flops.

UNIT – V Synchronous Sequential Machines: Sequence recognizer, State assignment, State reduction, design procedure. Memory and Programmable Logic Devices: Random Access-Memory, Timing waveforms, Read Only Memory, Programmable logic devices (PROM, Programmable Logic Array, Programmable Array Logic Devices), implementation of combinational circuits using PLDs. Textbooks: 1. M. Morris Mano and Charles R. Kime, “Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals”,

Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2006. 2. Charles Roth Jr, and Larry L Kinney, “Fundamental of Logic Design”, Cengage Learning, 7th

Edition, 2014. References: 1. Donald D Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2002. 2. John Yarbrough, “Digital Logic Applications and Principles”, Cengage Learning, 1st

Edition, 2006. Course Outcomes: 1. Employ K-Map for simplifying Boolean functions and design of circuits composed of NAND

and NOR gates. (POs – 1, 2. PSO – 2) 2. Analyze and design combinational logic circuits. (POs – 1, 2. PSO – 2) 3. Analyze and design sequential circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 3. PSO – 2) 4. Design and analyze synchronous sequential machines. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4. PSO – 2) 5. Implement combinational logic circuits using PLD. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4. PSO – 2)

14

NETWORK ANALYSIS Course Code: EC34 Credits: 3:1:0:0 Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics Contact hours: 56 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Punya Prabha

UNIT – I Voltage and Current Laws: Kirchoff’s Laws; Single Loop and Node-Pair Circuits; Connected Independent Sources; Voltage and Current Division. Circuit Analysis: Nodal and Mesh Analysis; Super Node; Super Mesh; Delta-Wye Conversion.

UNIT – II Circuit Analysis Techniques: Linearity, Superposition, Reciprocity, Thevenin’s, Norton’s and Maximum Power Transfer Theorems; Source Transformation. Sinusoidal Steady-State Analysis: Forced Response; Complex Forcing Function; Phasor relationships for R, L and C; Impedances and Admittances in Nodal and Mesh Analysis; Superposition, Source Transformations and Thevenin’s Theorem.

UNIT – III Initial Conditions in Networks: Initial Conditions in Elements; Evaluating Initial Conditions. Laplace Transformation: Basic Theorems; Partial Fraction Expansion; Solution by the Laplace Transformation. Transforms of Signal Waveforms: Shifted Unit Step Function; Ramp and Impulse Functions; Waveform Synthesis; Initial and Final Value theorems, Convolution Integral.

UNIT – IV Network Topology and Equations: Basic Definitions; Matrices of Graphs; Node and Mesh Transformations; Generalized Element; Formulation of Network Equations. Two-Port Parameters: Impedance, Admittance, Transmission and Hybrid Parameters, Relationships between Parameter Sets.

15

UNIT – V Synthesis of One-Port Networks: Synthesis of L-C Driving-Point Immittances, R-C (R-L) Impedances (Admittances). Frequency Response: Parallel and Series Resonance Forms. Textbooks: 1. W. H. Hayt Jr., J. E. Kemmerly, S. M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, 6th Edition,

Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002. 2. F. F. Kuo, “Network Analysis and Synthesis”, 2nd Edition; Wiley, 1966. References: 1. V. K. Aatre, “Network Theory and Filter Design” 2nd Edition, New Age International, 1980. 2. M. E. Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 1974. 3. M. Nahvi, J. A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007. 4. C. K. Alexander, M. N. O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, 3rd Edition, Tata

McGraw-Hill, 2008. Course Outcomes: 1. Employ nodal and mesh analysis techniques to various electric circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 5.

PSO – 1) 2. Analyze electrical circuits using network theorems. (POs – 1, 2, 5. PSO – 1) 3. Solve electric circuits using Laplace transform and network topology. (POs – 1, 2, 5.

PSO – 1) 4. Determine two-port network parameters. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5. PSO – 1) 5. Synthesize one-port networks using lumped elements. (PO – 1, 2, 3, 5. PSO – 1)

16

ELECTROMAGNETICS Course Code: EC35 Credits: 4:0:0:0 Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics Contact hours: 56 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Jayashree S

UNIT – I Coulomb's Law and Electric Field Intensity: The experimental Law of Coulomb, Electric field intensity, Field Arising from a Continuous Volume Charge Distribution, Field of Line Charge, Field of a Sheet of Charge. Electric Flux Density, Gauss's Law: Electric Flux Density, Gauss's Law, Application of Gauss's Law, Some Symmetrical Charge distributions.

UNIT – II Divergence: Differential Volume element, Divergence, Maxwell's First Equation (Electrostatics), vector operator ∇ and Divergence Theorem. Energy and Potential: Energy expended in moving a point charge in an electric field, Line integral, Definition of Potential Difference and Potential, Potential field of a point charge, Potential field of a system of charges: conservative property, Potential Gradient, Energy Density in the Electrostatic Field.

UNIT – III Dielectrics, Capacitance, Poisson's and Laplace's Equations: Boundary Conditions for perfect dielectric materials, Capacitance, Several Capacitance examples, Derivation of Poisson's and Laplace's equations, Examples of the solution of Laplace's equation, Examples of the solution of Poisson's equation. Steady Magnetic Field: Biot-Savart's Law, Ampere's circuital law, Curl, Stokes’ theorem.

UNIT – IV Magnetic Forces, Time-varying Fields and Maxwell's Equations: Magnetic flux and Magnetic flux Density, Scalar and Vector Magnetic Potentials, Force on a Moving Charge, Force on a Differential Current Element, Force between Differential Current Elements, Faraday's law, Displacement Current, Maxwell's Equations in Point Form, Maxwell's Equations in Integral Form, Retarded Potential.

17

UNIT – V Uniform Plane Wave: Wave propagation in Free Space, Wave propagation in Dielectrics, Poynting's Theorem and Wave Power, Propagation in good conductors: Skin effect, Wave Polarization (Qualitative treatment). Waveguides: Rectangular Waveguides, Analysis of field components, cut off frequency, group and phase velocities, phase constants, dominant modes. Textbook: 1. William H. Hayt Jr., John A. Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, McGraw-Hill

Publications, 8th Edition, 2010. Reference: 1. Mathew N. O. Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press, 4th Edition,

2006. Course Outcomes: 1. Apply Coulomb’s law and Gauss’s law to various charge distributions. (POs – 1, 2, 10.

PSO – 3) 2. Analyze the concept of divergence, potential and energy density in electrostatic field.

(POs – 1, 2, 10. PSO – 3) 3. Employ boundary conditions, Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations to determine capacitance of

various configurations. (POs –1, 2, 3, 10. PSOs – 2, 3) 4. Use Biot-Savart’s law and Ampere’s law to determine magnetic field for various current

distributions. (POs – 1, 2, 10. PSOs –3) 5. Interpret Maxwell’s equations for time varying fields and in wave propagation. (POs – 1, 2,

10, 12. PSOs – 2, 3)

18

DATA STRUCTURES USING C Course Code: EC362 Credits: 2:0:0:1 Prerequisite Courses: Fundamentals of Computing Contact hours: 28 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Reshma Verma

UNIT – I Stack and Queues: Basic stack operations (Push, Pop, stack top), Stack algorithms and C functions (create, push, pop, display), stack applications (Infix to postfix, evaluating postfix expression), Queue Operations (enqueue, dequeue) algorithms and C functions (queue front and rear)

UNIT – II Linked List: General linear lists: Basic Operations (Insertion, deletion, retrieval, traversal), Implementation, data structure (Head node, data node), algorithms and C functions (create list, insert node, delete node, search node, display, traverse list), complex implementation (doubly linked list, create list, insert node, delete node, search node, display, traverse list).

UNIT – III Sorting and Searching: Sort concepts, algorithms and C functions, selection sort (straight selection sort), insertion sort (straight selection sort), searching (sequential and binary search)

UNIT – IV Trees: Basic tree concepts, binary tree, binary tree (concept only), binary tree traversals (depth first traversals, breadth first traversals), expression trees (infix, postfix and prefix traversals)

UNIT – V Graphs: Basic concepts, operations (insert and delete vertex, add and delete edge), traverse graph (Depth-first traversal), Graph storage structures (Adjacency matrix), Networks: minimum spanning tree (Prim’s algorithm), shortest path algorithm (Dijkstra’s) Self-Study: Stack applications (Infix to prefix), Circular singly list (create list, insert node, delete node, search node, display, traverse list), Sort order, stability, efficiency, exchange sort (bubble and quick sort), Binary search trees (Basic concepts, BST operations, traversals, C functions), Breadth-first traversal, Adjacency list, minimum spanning tree (Kruskal’s algorithm)

19

Textbook: 1. Richard Gilberg and Behrouz Forouzan, “Data Structures: A pseudo code approach with C”,

2nd Edition, Thomson Publishing, 2007. Reference: 1. A. Tanenbaum, “Data Structures with C”, McGraw Hill, 2000. Course Outcomes: 1. Implement stacks and queues. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12. PSO – 2) 2. Create various linked list applications. (POs –1, 2, 3, 12. PSO – 2) 3. Apply searching and sorting algorithms to sort data. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12. PSO – 2) 4. Illustrate the concepts of trees with suitable algorithm. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12. PSO – 2) 5. Develop algorithm to solve real world problems using graphs. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12. PSO – 2)

20

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS Course Code: EC363 Credits: 2:0:0:1 Pre-requisites: Basic Electronics Contact Hours: 28 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Punya Prabha. V

UNIT – I Measurement and Error: Definitions, Accuracy and precision, Significant figures, Types of errors, Limiting errors, Classification of standards of measurement, Time and frequency standards. Digital Voltmeters and Multimeters: Advantages of digital meters, General characteristics (specifications) of a DVM, Ramp type DVM, Integrating type DVM (Voltage to frequency conversion), Digital meter displays – LED and LCD displays, Range changing methods for DVM, Digital multimeter.

UNIT – II Digital Frequency meters and Phase meters: Introduction, Frequency measurement, High frequency measurement (extending the frequency range), Time (period) measurement, Universal counter, Automatic and computing counters, Reciprocal electronic counters, Sources of measurement errors, Specifications of electronic counters – Input characteristics and operating mode specifications, Digital phase meter.

UNIT – III Digital Instruments: Digital tachometer, Digital PH meter, Digital measurement of mains (supply) frequency, Digital L, C and R measurements – Digital RCL meter. Special Oscilloscopes: Sampling oscilloscope, Digital read out oscilloscope.

UNIT – IV Digital Signal Generators: Arbitrary waveform generators (AWG), Key characteristics of digital signal generators. Digital Spectrum Analyzer: Principle of working and its applications. Logic Analyzer: Types of logic analyzer – Logic time analyzer Recorders: Digital data recording, Objectives and requirements of recording data, Recorder selection and specifications.

21

UNIT – V Transducers: Electrical transducers, advantages, classification of transducers, characteristics and choice (selection) of transducers. Digital Data Acquisition System: Objectives of DAS, Elements of data acquisition system. Telemetry systems: Landline and radio frequency (RF) telemetry systems. Digital Controllers: Direct digital and computer supervisory control, Digital process controllers. Self-Study: Dual slope integrating type DVM (Voltage to time conversion), Successive approximation type DVM, Parallel or flash type DVM, Microprocessor based ramp type DVM, Time interval measurement, Frequency ratio measurement, Totalizing mode of measurement, Digital capacitance meter, Digital storage oscilloscopes, Arbitrary function generator, Data generator, Logic state analyzer, Digital memory waveform recorder (DWR), Digital Transducers – Optical encoders, Shaft (spatial) encoders, Data loggers. Textbook: 1. Albert D. Helfrick, William D. Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and

Measurement Techniques”, US Edition, PHI, 2012. References: 1. H. S. Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation”, TMH, 3rd Edition, Seventh reprint, 2012. Course Outcomes: 1. Employ the concept of errors to study the performance of electronic instrumentation systems.

(POs – 1, 2, 5, 6, 12. PSO – 1) 2. Apply the basic principles of electronic instruments to design and construct new instruments.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 12. PSO – 1) 3. Interpret the suitability of instruments in various applications. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 12.

PSO – 1) 4. Select the instruments to observe waveforms and spectrum. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 12.

PSOs – 1, 3) 5. Describe transducers, data acquisition systems and digital process controllers in electronic

applications. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12. PSOs – 1, 3)

22

ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY Course Code: ECL37 Credits: 0:0:1:0 Prerequisite: Basic Electronics Contact Sessions: 14 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Lakshmi Shrinivasan

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Verification of Thevinin’s theorem and Maximum Power Transfer Theorem 2. Study the input output characteristics of BJT CE Amplifier and determine the h-

parameters 3. Study of drain characteristics and transfer characteristics of n-channel MOSFET 4. Design and test Bridge Rectifier with and without C filter 5. Design and test diode clipping and clamping circuits 6. Design and test RF oscillators (i) Hartley (ii) Colpitts 7. Design and test RC Phase Shift oscillators 8. Design and test a BJT- RC coupled amplifier. Plot the frequency response. 9. Design and test a FET- RC coupled amplifier. Plot the frequency response. 10. Design a voltage series feedback amplifier. Compare the parameters with and without

feedback. 11. Design and test power amplifiers (i) Class A transformer coupled audio power amplifier

(ii) Class B Push Pull power amplifier. 12. Design and test Darlington pair emitter follower with bootstrap capacitor 13. Simulation of all the above experiments.

Softwares suggested: MultiSim or any other suitable simulation tool. Textbooks: 1. Millman & Halkias, “Integrated Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill International Edition, 2001. 2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, 6th

Edition PHI, 2002. 3. Behzad Razavi, “RF Microelectronics”, Prentice Hall Communications Engineering and

Emerging Technology Series, 1998. Course Outcomes: 1. Design amplifier circuits using BJT and FET devices. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10. PSO – 1) 2. Design power and negative feedback amplifiers. (POs –1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10. PSO – 1)

23

3. Design diode clipping, clamping and rectifier circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10. PSO – 1) 4. Design oscillator circuits using BJT. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10. PSO – 1) 5. Simulate and verify hardware designs. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10. PSO – 1)

24

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY Course Code: ECL38 Credits: 0:0:1:0 Prerequisites: Basic Electronics Contact Sessions: 14 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Reshma Verma

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. (i) Verification of basic, universal and XOR gates (ii) Simplification, realization of Boolean expressions using universal gates

2. Realization of Half/Full adder and Half/Full Subtractor using NAND gates 3. (i) Realization of BCD to Excess 3 code converter

(ii) Realization of Binary to Gray code converter 4. Study of Decoder chip to drive LED display and priority encoder using IC 74147 5. Multiplexer using IC74153 and its applications 6. Demultiplexer using IC74139 and its applications 7. (i) Parallel Adder/Subtractor using IC7483

(ii) BCD Adder using IC7483 (iii) One bit comparator and study of IC7485 magnitude comparator

8. (i) JK Master slave, T-Type and D-Type Flip Flop using IC7476 (ii) Ripple counter using IC7476

9. (i) Study of asynchronous decade counter using IC 7490 (ii) Synchronous counter using IC7476 (iii) Study of synchronous decade counter using IC 74192

10. (i) Shift left, Shift right, SIPO, SISO, PISO, PIPO operations using IC7495 shift register (ii) Study of Ring/Twisted counter using IC7495 (iii) Sequence generator using IC7495 (iv) Programming RAM using IC6116

Textbooks: 1. M. Morris Mano and Charles R. Kime, “Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals”,

Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2006. 2. R. P. Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2010. References: 1. Donald D Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2002. 2. Tocci, “Digital Systems, Principles and Applications”, PHI/Pearson Education, 6th Edition,

1997.

25

Course Outcomes: 1. Design combinational logic circuits using gates. (POs – 1, 2, 9. PSO – 2) 2. Design combinational logic circuits using MUX/DEMUX/ADDER ICs (POs – 1, 2, 9.

PSO – 2) 3. Design sequential logic circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 2) 4. Demonstrate the operation of RAM. (POs – 3, 9. PSO – 2) 5. Design sequence generator circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 2)

26

IV SEMESTER

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – IV Course Code: EC41 Credits: 4:0:0:0 Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics I and II Contact Hours: 56 Course Coordinators: Dr. Monica Anand & Mr. Vijaya Kumar

UNIT – I Finite Differences and Interpolation: Forward, Backward differences, Interpolation, Newton-Gregory Forward and Backward Interpolation, formulae, Lagrange interpolation formula and Newton divided difference interpolation formula (no proof). Numerical Differentiation and Numerical Integration: Derivatives using Newton-Gregory forward and backward interpolation formulae, Newton-Cotes quadrature formula, Trapezoidal rule, Simpson 1/3rd rule, Simpson 3/8th rule.

UNIT – II

Fourier Transforms: Infinite Fourier transform, Infinite Fourier sine and cosine transforms, properties, Inverse transform, Convolution theorem, Parseval identity (statements only), Fourier transform of rectangular pulse with graphical representation and its output discussion, Continuous Fourier spectra – Example and physical interpretation.

Z-Transforms: Definition, standard Z-transforms, Single sided and double sided, Linearity property, Damping rule, Shifting property, Initial and final value theorem, Convergence of Z-transforms, Inverse Z-transform, Convolution theorem and problems, Application of Z-transform to solve difference equations.

UNIT – III Random Variables: Random Variables (Discrete and Continuous), Probability density function, Cumulative distribution function, Mean, Variance, Moment generating function . Probability Distributions: Binomial and Poisson distributions, Normal distribution, Exponential distribution, Gamma distribution, Uniform distribution, Joint probability distribution (both discrete and continuous), Conditional probability, Conditional expectation, Simulation of random variables.

27

UNIT – IV Stochastic Processes: Introduction, Classification of stochastic processes, discrete time processes, Stationarity, Ergodicity, Autocorrelation, Power spectral density. Markov Chain: Probability Vectors, Stochastic matrices, Regular stochastic matrices, Markov chains, Higher transition probabilities, Stationary distribution of regular Markov chains and absorbing states, Markov and Poisson processes.

UNIT – V Series Solution of ODEs and Special Functions: Series solution, Frobenius method, Series solution of Bessel differential equation leading to Bessel function of first kind, Orthogonality of Bessel functions, Series solution of Legendre differential equation leading to Legendre polynomials, Rodrigues’s formula. Textbooks: 1. B. S. Grewal, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, 43rd Edition, 2015. 2. R. E. Walpole, R. H. Myers, R. S. L. Myers and K. Ye, “Probability and Statistics for

Engineers and Scientists”, Pearson Education, Delhi, 9th Edition, 2012. References: 1. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Wiley Publication, 10th Edition,

2015 2. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, 4th Edition,

2010 3. Kishor S. Trivedi, “Probability & Statistics with Reliability, Queuing and Computer Science

Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2008. Course Outcomes: 1. Use a given data for equal and unequal intervals to find a polynomial function for estimation

and compute maxima, minima, curvature, radius of curvature, arc length, area, surface area and volume using numerical differentiation and integration. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

2. Evaluate Fourier, Fourier sine and Fourier cosine transforms of functions and apply the knowledge of Z – transforms to solve difference equations. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

3. Apply the concept of probability distribution to solve engineering problems. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

4. Apply the stochastic process and Markov Chain in predictions of future events. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

5. Obtain the series solution of ordinary differential equations. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

28


Course Code: EC42 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Analog Electronic Circuits Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mrs. H. Mallika

UNIT – I Operational Amplifier Fundamentals: Basic Op-Amp circuits, Op-amp parameters: input and Output voltage, CMRR and PSRR, offset voltages and currents, Input and Output Impedances, Slew rate and Frequency limitations. Op-amp as DC Amplifiers: Biasing Op-amps, Direct Coupled Voltage follower, Non Inverting Amplifiers, Inverting Amplifiers, Summing Amplifiers, Difference Amplifiers, Instrumentation Amplifiers.

UNIT – II Op-Amp as AC amplifiers: Capacitor coupled Voltage followers, High Input Impedance Capacitor coupled Voltage followers, Capacitor coupled Non Inverting Amplifiers, High Input Impedance Capacitor coupled Non Inverting Amplifiers, Capacitor coupled Inverting Amplifiers, setting the upper cut off frequency, capacitor coupled difference amplifiers.

UNIT – III Op-Amp switching, differentiating and integrating circuits: Zero crossing detectors, Inverting Schmitt trigger circuits, Integrating circuits and Differentiating circuits. Signal processing circuits using Op-Amp: Precision half-wave rectifier, Precision full-wave rectifier, Limiting Circuits, Clamping circuits, Peak Detectors, Sample and Hold circuits.

UNIT – IV Signal generators: Triangular/Rectangular wave generator, Phase shift Oscillator, Wein Bridge Oscillator, Monostable and Astable multivibrator. Active filters: First and second order Low and High pass filter, First order two op-amp band pass and band reject filters (block diagrams only)

29

UNIT – V Applications of other Linear ICs: Series Op-amp Regulator, IC 723 general purpose Regulator, 555 Timer – Basic Timer circuit used as astable multivibrator and monostable multivibrator, PLL operating principles DAC and ADC: DAC/ADC Specifications, R-2R DAC, Monolithic DAC, Successive Approximation ADC and Dual Slope ADC. Self-Study: Use of single polarity voltage supply, Op-amp frequency response and compensation methods, Log and Antilog amplifier, multiplier and divider, Non-Inverting Schmitt trigger, weighted resistor DAC, Flash type ADC and Counter type ADC Textbooks: 1. David A. Bell, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear ICs”, PHI/Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2011. 2. D. Roy Choudhury and Shail B. Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age International 2nd

Edition, Reprint 2006. References: 1. Robert. F. Coughlin & Fred. F. Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated

Circuits”, PHI/Pearson, 2006. 2. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, “Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits”, PHI/Pearson, 4th

Edition, 2004. Course Outcomes:

1. Evaluate the parameters of an op-amp. (PO – 1, PSO – 1) 2. Design op-amp amplifier circuits. (PO – 1,2, 3, PSO – 1) 3. Analyze and design switching and signal processing circuits. (PO – 1,2, 3, PSO – 1) 4. Analyze active filters and signal generators. (PO – 1,2, 3, PSO – 1) 5. Employ linear ICs in various applications. (PO – 1,2, 3, PSO – 1)

30

CONTROL SYSTEMS Course Code: EC43 Credits: 3:1:0:0 Prerequisites: Network Analysis, Engineering Mathematics Contact Hours: 56 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Punya Prabha. V

UNIT – I Introduction: Examples of control systems, closed loop vs open loop control systems, classification of control systems. Mathematical modeling of linear systems: Review of Laplace transforms, transfer function and impulse response: Block diagram and signal flow graph.

UNIT – II Mathematical modeling of linear systems: Analogous systems, Translational and Rotational Mechanical systems. Time response of feedback control systems: Test input signals, time response of first and second order systems, Transient response specification of second order system, Steady state error and error constants. Applications: Design and analysis of second order system.

UNIT – III Stability analysis: Concept of stability, Routh-Hurwitz criterion, Relative stability analysis, application of Routh stability criterion, Nyquist plot: polar plots, Nyquist stability criterion, assessment of relative stability using Nyquist criterion.

UNIT – IV Root-locus technique: Introduction, the root-locus concepts, construction of root loci. Introduction to state variable analysis: Concepts of state, state variables and state model for electrical systems, Solution of state equations.

UNIT – V Frequency response analysis: Introduction, Bode diagrams, assessment of relative stability using Bode plots.

31

Controllers: Classification of controllers, Brief analysis of different types of controllers. Textbooks: 1. K. Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2001. 2. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, “Control System Engineering”, 5th Edition, New Age

International Publishers, 2007. References: 1. Ajit. K. Mandal, “Introduction to Control Engineering Modeling, Analysis and Design”, 2nd

Edition, New Age International Publishers, 2012. 2. Dhanesh N. Manik, “Control Systems”, Cengage Learning, 1st Edition, 2012. Course Outcomes: 1. Employ mathematical modeling techniques to determine the transfer function of a system.

(POs – 1, 2, 5. PSO – 1) 2. Analyze the time response of first and second order systems. (POs – 1, 2, 5. PSO – 1) 3. Apply the concept of RH Criterion and root locus technique to determine the stability of a

system. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 1) 4. Interpret the frequency response of a system using Bode’s plot and Nyquist stability criterion.

(POs –1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 1) 5. Describe the state models and various controllers. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 1)

32

MICROPROCESSORS Course Code: EC44 Credits: 4:0:0:0 Prerequisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact Hours: 56 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Flory Francis

UNIT – I Microprocessor and its architecture: Introduction, internal architecture of 8086, PSW, Real mode memory addressing. Addressing modes: Data, Program memory, Stack memory

UNIT – II Instruction set of 8086: Data move, arithmetic and logic, program control, assembler directives, assembly language programming, programs using BIOS and DOS interrupts.

UNIT – III Modular Programming: Assembler & linker, PUBLIC & EXTRN, libraries, macros, DOS function calls, programming examples using macros & DOS function calls. 8086 Hardware Specifications: Pin outs and Pin functions of 8086, clock generator 8284A, Bus buffering and latching, bus timing, READY and wait state, minimum mode versus maximum mode. (Basic comparison only)

UNIT – IV Memory interfacing: Address decoding, memory interfacing for 8086, Introduction to dynamic memory interfacing. I/O interfacing: Introduction, I/O port address decoding (8 bit and 16 bit). Simple programs related to I/O interface. Interrupts: Basic interrupt processing, hardware interrupts.

33

UNIT – V Peripherals and their interfacing with 8086: Study of 8255 PPI, 8253 timer and 8279 keyboard Numeric Co-processor 8087: Data formats, numerical processors, architecture & programming. (Simple programs) High end processors: Introduction to 80386, 80486 and Pentium. Textbooks: 1. Barry B Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors – Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, 8th

Edition, Pearson Education, 2009. 2. A. K. Ray and K. M. Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessor and Peripherals”, 3rd Edition,

Tata McGraw Hill, 2007. References: 1. Yu Cheng Liu & Glenn A Gibson, “Microcomputer systems 8086/8088 family, Architecture,

Programming and Design”, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, July, 2003. 2. Douglas V. Hall, “Microprocessors & Interfacing, Programming & Hardware”, Penram

International, 2006. Course Outcomes: 1. Explain the architecture and addressing modes of 8086. (PO – 1, PSO – 2) 2. Develop assembly language programs for different applications using instruction sets of

8086 and DOS functions. (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 2) 3. Interpret hardware specifications for 8086 and clock generator. (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 2) 4. Illustrate the concepts of interfacing and interrupts. (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 2) 5. Describe peripheral ICs, co-processors and high end processors. (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 2)

34

SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS Course Code: EC45 Credits: 4:0:0:0 Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics Contact Hours: 56 Course Coordinator: Ms. Akkamahadevi M. B.

UNIT – I Introduction to signals and systems: Continuous and Discrete time signals, transformation of the independent variables, Exponential and Sinusoidal signals, unit impulse and step signals, CT and DT systems, basic system properties.

UNIT – II LTI Systems: Discrete time LTI systems, continuous time LTI systems, properties of LTI systems, causal LTI systems described by differential and difference equations.

UNIT – III Continuous Time Fourier Transform: Representation of aperiodic signals, Fourier Transform of periodic signals, Properties of CTFT: Linearity, time shifting, conjugation and conjugate symmetry, differentiation and integration, time and frequency scaling, duality, Parseval’s relation, convolution and multiplication

UNIT – IV DTFT and Z-Transform: Representation of aperiodic signals by DTFT, the Fourier Transform of periodic signals Z-Transform, ROC of Z-Transform, Inverse Z-Transform: Partial fraction and power series only, Geometric evaluation of FT from pole zero plot, Properties of ZT: Linearity, time shifting, scaling in the Z-domain, time reversal, time expansion

UNIT – V Properties of ZT and analysis of LTI Systems: Properties of ZT: conjugation, convolution, differentiation in Z-domain, initial value theorem, analysis and characterization of LTI system using Z-transform, system function, algebraic and block diagram representation, unilateral Z-transform.

35

Textbooks: 1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Alan S. Wilsky with Hamid Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd

Edition, PHI Publications, 2011. References: 1. John G. Proakis and Dimitris G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing, Principles,

Algorithms, and Applications”, 4th Edition, PHI Publications, 2006. 2. Haykin and B. Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2003. Course Outcomes: 1. Classify and analyze continuous, discrete time signals and systems. (POs – 1, 2, 9. PSO – 3) 2. Compute the response of a system using convolution. (POs – 1, 2, 9. PSO – 3) 3. Analyze the system by difference and differential equations. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 3) 4. Employ Fourier Transform to analyze signals and systems. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 3) 5. Apply Z-Transform and analyze the signals and systems. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 9. PSO – 3)

36


Course Code: EC462 Credits: 3:0:0:0 Prerequisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact Hours: 42 Course coordinator: Mrs. A. R. Priyarenjini

UNIT – I Overview of Digital Design with Verilog HDL: Evolution of computer aided digital design, Emergence of HDLs, Importance of HDLs, Verilog HDL and Typical design flow, Design methodologies, modules, instances, components of simulation, example, basic concepts.

UNIT – II Modules and ports: Modules, ports, Rules, Hierarchical Names. Data flow modeling: Continuous assignment, Delays, Expressions, Operators, Operands, and Operator types, Gate level modeling.

UNIT – III Behavioral modeling: Structured procedures, Procedural assignments, Timing controls, conditional statement, Multi way branching, Loops, Sequential and parallel blocks, generate blocks, Examples.

UNIT – IV Tasks and Functions: Difference between Tasks and Functions, Tasks, Functions, Automatic Functions, Constant Function, Signed Functions.

UNIT – V Logic synthesis with Verilog HDL: Logic synthesis, Verilog HDL Synthesis, Interpretation of Verilog Constructs, Modeling tips for logic synthesis, Synthesis Design flow, examples, verification of the gate level netlist. Timing and delays: Types of delay models, modeling, timing checks and delay back annotation. Textbook: 1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL – A guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall,

2nd Edition, 2010.

37

References: 1. Stephen Brown, Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital logic with Verilog design”, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2003. 2. Michael D. Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with Verilog HDL”, Pearson Education, 2005. Course Outcomes: 1. Recall the basics of digital design and lexical conventions of HDL. (POs – 1, 3, 4, 5, 8,

PSO – 2) 2. Design, apply and test combinational circuits in HDL to verify the functionality. (POs – 1, 3,

4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 12. PSO – 2) 3. Write efficient RTL codes for sequential circuits and test using test benches. (POs –1, 3, 4, 5,

8, 9, 10, 12. PSO – 2) 4. Apply the concepts of tasks and functions in designing large digital systems. (POs – 1, 3, 4,

5, 8, 9, PSO – 2) 5. Justify the usage of EDA tools in digital circuit functional verification and logic synthesis

with design tradeoffs. (POs – 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 12, PSO – 2)

38

COMPUTER ORGANIZATION Course Code: EC463 Credits: 3:0:0:0 Prerequisites: Basic Electronics Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Dr. Maya V. Karki

UNIT – I Basic Structures of Computers: Computer types, Basic Operational Concepts, Performance, Processor clock, Functional units: Input unit, Memory unit, Arithmetic and logic unit, Control unit, Output unit, Pipelining and Superscalar operation, Basic performance equation.

UNIT – II Input/Output Organization: Accessing I/O devices, Interrupts: Interrupt Hardware, Enabling & Disabling Interrupt, Handling Multiple Devices, Controlling Device Requests, exceptions, Direct Memory Access, Bus Arbitration; Standard I/O Interfaces, Parallel Port, Serial Port, PCI bus.

UNIT – III Memory System: Some Basic Concepts, Semiconductor RAM memories, Read only memories, Speed size and cost Cache memories, Virtual memories and performance considerations.

UNIT – IV Basic Processing Unit: Some fundamental concepts: Register Transfers, Performing an Arithmetic or Logic operation, Fetching a Word from Memory, Storing a Word in Memory, Execution of a Complete Instruction, Branch instruction.

UNIT – V Arithmetic Addition & Subtraction of Signed Numbers: Addition /Subtraction Logic Unit, Multiplication of Positive numbers: Signed-Operand Multiplication, Booth Algorithm, Design of fast adder: Carry-Look-ahead Addition. Fast Multiplication: Bit-pair Recoding of Multipliers; Floating-point Numbers & Operations, IEEE Standard for Floating-point Numbers

39

Textbook: 1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat Zaky, “Computer Organization”, 5th Edition,

Tata McGraw Hill, 2002. References: 1. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”,

6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003. 2. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The

Hardware/Software Interface”, 3rd Edition, Elsevier, 2005. Course Outcomes: 1. Recall the basic structure and functional units of a computer. (POs – 1, 2, 6. PSO – 2) 2. Describe the I/O organization and interface standards used in a computer. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 12.

PSO – 2) 3. List different types of memories used in computers. (POs – 2, 3, 6. PSO – 2) 4. Explain the basic processing schemes and data handling capability in a computer. (POs – 1,

2, 3, 5. PSO – 2) 5. Illustrate arithmetic logic unit and operations on floating point numbers. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.

PSO – 2)

40

SIGNALS AND CONTROLS LABORATORY Course Code: ECL47 Credits: 0:0:1:0 Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics Contact Sessions: 14 Course Coordinators: Mrs. H. Mallika, Mr. V. Nuthan Prasad

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 1. Introduction to MATLAB: different operators and functions 2. Generation of both discrete and continuous time signals 3. Operations on discrete time signals 4. Convolution of discrete and continuous time signals 5. Z transform and pole zero plot, frequency response and solving difference equations 6. Representation of control system by transfer function, partial fraction expansion and pole

zero map 7. Block diagram reduction 8. System response (with step, impulse, ramp and parabolic inputs) 9. System analysis: Root locus, Bode plot and Nyquist plot 10. Simulink model of a control system and its response 11. Simulink model of a control system with PID controller Textbooks: 1. Dr. Shailendra Jain, “Modeling and Simulation using MATLAB-Simulink”, Wiley, 2nd

Edition, 2014. 2. P. Ramakrishna Rao and Shankar Prakriya, “Signals and Systems”, McGraw Hill Education,

2nd Edition, 2013. 3. Anoop K. Jairath and Saketh Kumar, “Control Systems – The state variable approach

(Conventional and MATLAB)”, Ane’s Students Edition, 2nd Edition, 2010. Course Outcomes: 1. Recall various functions available in MATLAB for signal processing and control systems.

(POs – 1, 2, 5, 9. PSO – 3) 2. Demonstrate the various operations on signals. (POs – 1, 2,5.PSO – 3) 3. Solve the response of a system by difference equation and transfer functions. (POs – 1, 2, 3,

5. PSO – 2) 4. Analyze the system stability from root locus, Bode and Nyquist plots. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9.

PSO – 2) 5. Employ Simulink model for control systems. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9. PSO – 2)

41

MICROPROCESSOR LABORATORY Course Code: ECL48 Credits: 0:0:1:0 Prerequisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact Sessions: 14 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Flory Francis

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS A. Assembly Language Programs

1. Programs involving data transfer instructions (i) Block move without overlapping (ii) Block move with overlapping (iii) Block move interchange

2. Programs involving arithmetic operations

(i) 16 Bit Addition and Subtraction (ii) N-bit multi precision numbers(N ≥ 32bits) (iii) Multiplication of 32 bits unsigned hexadecimal number using successive addition

and using shift left and add (iv) Division of 16-bits number by 8-bits number

3. Programs involving bit manipulation instructions

(i) To identify whether the given number is positive or negative and odd or even (ii) 2 out of 5 Codes (iii) Bitwise and nibble wise palindrome (iv) Find the logical 1’s and 0’s in the given data

4. To find LCM, HCF and Factorial

(i) Program to find LCM of a given number (ii) Program to HCF of a given number (iii) Program to factorial of a given number

5. Code conversion

(i) BCD to Hexadecimal (ii) Hexadecimal to BCD (iii) Addition and subtraction of two string ASCII digits (iv) Multiplication of a string of ASCII digits by a single ASCII digit (v) Division of a string of ASCII digits by a single ASCII digit

42

6. Programs involving branch/loop instruction (i) Program to sort the numbers in ascending order (bubble sorting) (ii) Program to sort the numbers in descending order (bubble sorting) (iii) Program to find the smallest and largest 16-bit signed number in an array

7. Programs involving string manipulation

(i) Program for string transfer using primitive instruction (ii) Program to reverse a string

8. Program to search the occurrence of a character in the given string using DOS interrupt INT 21


1. Delay calculation and generation of a square wave, triangular wave generation and stair case waveform using DAC. Display the waveform on a CRO

2. Program using 8279 Chip

(i) Program to display a message on the display unit (ii) Program to display the ASCII equivalent of the key pressed


Textbooks: 1. Barry B Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors – Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, 8th

Edition, Pearson Education, 2009. 2. A. K. Ray and K. M. Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessor and Peripherals”, 3rd Edition,

Tata McGraw Hill, 2007. References: 1. Yu Cheng Liu & Glenn A Gibson, “Microcomputer systems 8086/8088 family, Architecture,

Programming and Design”, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 2003. 2. Douglas V. Hall, “Microprocessors & Interfacing, Programming & Hardware”, Penram


43

Course Outcomes: 1. Write, compile and debug assembly language programs using arithmetic instructions.

(POs –1, 2, 3, 5. PSO – 2) 2. Compute LCM, HCF, factorial and code conversion using assembly language programs.

(POs – 1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 2) 3. Write assembly language programs to display using DOS functions. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5.

PSO – 2) 4. Develop programs using string and loop instructions. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 2) 5. Write assembly language programs to interface modules to 8086 microprocessor. (POs – 1,

2, 4, 5. PSO – 2)

44

CURRICULUM






V & VI SEMESTER B.E.

2

About the Institute Ramaiah Institute of Technology (RIT) (formerly known as M. S. Ramaiah Institute of Technology) is a self-financing institution established in Bangalore in the year 1962 by the industrialist and philanthropist, Late Dr. M S Ramaiah. The institute is accredited with “A” grade by NAAC in 2016 and all engineering departments offering bachelor degree programs have been accredited by NBA. RIT is one of the few institutes with prescribed faculty student ratio and achieves excellent academic results. The institute was a participant of the Technical Education Quality Improvement Program (TEQIP), an initiative of the Government of India. All the departments have competent faculty, with 100% of them being postgraduates or doctorates. Some of the distinguished features of RIT are: State of the art laboratories, individual computing facility to all faculty members. All research departments are active with sponsored projects and more than 150 scholars are pursuing PhD. The Centre for Advanced Training and Continuing Education (CATCE), and Entrepreneurship Development Cell (EDC) have been set up on campus. RIT has a strong Placement and Training department with a committed team, a good Mentoring/Proctorial system, a fully equipped Sports department, large air-conditioned library with over 1,35,427 books with subscription to more than 300 International and National Journals. The Digital Library subscribes to several online e-journals like IEEE, JET etc. RIT is a member of DELNET, and AICTE INDEST Consortium. RIT has a modern auditorium, several hi-tech conference halls and all are air-conditioned with video conferencing facilities. It has excellent hostel facilities for boys and girls. RIT Alumni have distinguished themselves by occupying high positions in India and abroad and are in touch with the institute through an active Alumni Association. RIT obtained Academic Autonomy for all its UG and PG programs in the year 2007. As per the National Institutional Ranking Framework, MHRD, Government of India, Ramaiah Institute of Technology has achieved 60th rank in 2018 among the top 100 engineering colleges across India.

About the Department The Department of Electronics and Communication was started in 1975 and has grown over the years in terms of stature and infrastructure. The department has well equipped simulation and electronic laboratories and is recognized as a research center under VTU. The department currently offers a B. E. program with an intake of 120, and two M. Tech programs, one in Digital Electronics and Communication, and one in VLSI Design and Embedded Systems, with intakes of 30 and 18 respectively. The department has a Center of Excellence in Food Technologies sponsored by VGST, Government of Karnataka. The department is equipped with numerous UG and PG labs, along with R & D facilities. Past and current research sponsoring agencies include DST, VTU, VGST and AICTE with funding amount worth Rs. 1 crore. The department has modern research ambitions to develop innovative solutions and products and to pursue various research activities focused towards national development in various advanced fields such as Signal Processing, Embedded Systems, Cognitive Sensors and RF Technology, Software Development and Mobile Technology.

3





organizations


Quality Policy




4

Program Educational Objectives (PEOs): PEO1: To train to be employed as successful professionals in a core area of their choice PEO2: To participate in lifelong learning/ higher education efforts to emerge as expert researchers and technologists PEO3: To develop their skills in ethical, professional, and managerial domains Program Outcomes (POs): PO1: Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems. PO2: Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences. PO3: Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental considerations. PO4: Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions. PO5: Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations. PO6: The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice. PO7: Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable development. PO8: Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice. PO9: Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.

5

PO10: Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions. PO11: Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments. PO12: Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.


6






7

SCHEME OF TEACHING V SEMESTER

SI. Course Credits Contact

No. Course Title Category

Hours

L T P S Total

Code

1. EC51 Analog Communication PC-C 4 0 0 0 4 4

2. EC52 CMOS VLSI Design PC-C 3 0 0 1 4 5

3. EC53 Digital Signal Processing PC-C 3 1 0 0 4 5

4. EC54 Transmission Lines & Radiating PC-C 3 1 0 0 4 5

Systems

5. EC55 Management, Entrepreneurship PC-C 1 0 0 1 2 5

& IPR


7. ECL56 Analog Communication & LIC PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

Laboratory

8. ECL57 Digital Signal Processing PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

Laboratory

9. ECL58 HDL & VLSI Laboratory PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

Total 17 2 3 3 25 37

VI SEMESTER


No. Code

Hours

L T P S Total

1. EC61 Digital Communication PC-C 3 1 0 0 4 5

2. EC62 Microcontroller PC-C 3 0 0 1 4 7

3. EC63 Microwaves and Radar PC-C 3 0 0 1 4 7

4. EC64 Mini-Project (Optional: PC-C 0 0 6 0 6 6

Interdisciplinary Projects)


6. ECL65 Digital Communication PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

Laboratory

7. ECL66 Microwaves & Antenna Laboratory PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

8. ECL67 Microcontroller Laboratory PC-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

Total 12 1 9 3 25 38

8

List of Electives

SI. Course Course Title Credits

No. Code L T P S Total

1. ECE01 Power Electronics 3 0 0 1 4

2. ECE02 Random Variables and Random 3 0 0 1 4

Process

3. ECE03 Speech Processing 3 0 0 1 4

4. ECE04 Low Power VLSI design 3 0 0 1 4

5. ECE05 Object Oriented Programming with 3 0 0 1 4

C++

6. ECE06 Digital System Design using Verilog 3 0 0 1 4

7. ECE07 DSP Architecture & Algorithms 3 0 0 1 4

8. ECE08 MEMS 3 0 0 1 4

9. ECE09 Artificial Neural Networks & Fuzzy 3 0 0 1 4

Logic

10. ECE10 Image Processing 3 0 0 1 4

11. ECE11 Real Time Systems 3 0 0 1 4

12. ECE12 Advanced Digital Logic Design 3 0 0 1 4

13. ECE13 Advanced Digital Logic Verification 3 0 0 1 4

14. ECE14 Linear Algebra 3 0 0 1 4

15. ECE15 Machine Learning 3 0 0 1 4

16. ECE16 Analog and Mixed Signal VLSI Design 3 0 0 1 4

17. ECE17 Neural Networks and Deep Learning 3 0 0 1 4

18. ECE18 Advanced Embedded Systems 3 0 0 1 4

19. ECE19 Multi-resolution Signal Processing 3 0 0 1 4

20. ECE20 Modeling and Simulation of Data 3 0 0 1 4

Networks

21. ECE21 Cyber Security 3 0 0 1 4

22. ECE22 Distributed Systems 3 0 0 1 4

23. ECE23 Optical Networks 3 0 0 1 4

24. ECE24 Internet Engineering 3 0 0 1 4

25. ECE25 Multimedia Communication 3 0 0 1 4

26. ECE26 RTOS 3 0 0 1 4

27. ECE27 GSM Network 3 0 0 1 4

28. ECE28 Ad-hoc Wireless Networks 3 0 0 1 4

29. ECE29 Cryptography and Network Security 3 0 0 1 4

30. ECE30 Advanced Computer Architecture 3 0 0 1 4

9

ANALOG COMMUNICATION Course Code: EC51 Credits: 4:0:0:0 Prerequisites: Signals and Systems Contact Hours: 56 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Lakshmi S

UNIT – I Amplitude Modulation and Double Side-band Suppressed Carrier Modulation: Introduction to AM: Time domain description, Frequency domain description. Generation of AM wave: Square law modulator, switching modulator. Detection of AM waves: Square law detector, envelope detector, time domain description of DSBSC, Frequency domain representation, Generation of DSBSC waves, balanced modulator, ring modulator, coherent detection of DSBSC modulated waves, Costas loop, Quadrature carrier multiplexing

UNIT – II Single Side-band Modulation (SSB): Hilbert transform, properties of Hilbert transform, pre-envelope, single side-band modulation, frequency domain description of SSB wave, time domain description of SSB wave, frequency discrimination method for generating an SSB modulated wave, phase discrimination method for generating an SSB modulated wave, demodulation of SSB waves. Vestigial Side-band Modulation: Frequency domain description, Generation of VSB modulated wave, time domain description, coherent demodulation, envelope detection of VSB wave along with carrier.

UNIT – III Angle Modulation (FM): Basic definitions, FM, narrow band FM, wideband FM, transmission bandwidth of FM waves. Generation of FM waves: indirect FM and direct FM, frequency stabilization in FM receivers, Demodulation of FM waves: frequency discrimination method, phase locked loop, nonlinear model of phase locked loop, linear model of the phase locked loop, nonlinear effect in FM systems.

UNIT – IV

Applications of AM and FM: AM radio (super heterodyne): Block diagram of transmitter and receiver, mixer, AGC, performance characteristics. FM radio: block diagram of transmitter and receiver. Elements of Color TV: Frequency range and channel bandwidth, scanning and synchronization, composite video signal. Block diagram of transmitter and receiver

10

UNIT – V

Noise Basics and Noise in Continuous Wave Modulation Systems: Introduction, shot noise, thermal noise, white noise, noise equivalent bandwidth, noise figure, equivalent noise temperature, cascade connection of two port networks, receiver model, noise in DSBSC receivers, noise in SSB receivers, noise in AM receivers, threshold effect, noise in FM receivers, FM threshold effect, pre-emphasis and de-emphasis in FM. Textbooks: 1. Simon Haykin, and Michael Moher, “Communication Systems”, 5th Edition, John Wiley, 2009. 2. George Kennedy, Bernard Davis, S R M Prasanna, “Electronic Communication Systems”, 5th

Edition, McGraw Hill, 2011. References: 1. Simon Haykin, “An Introduction to Analog and Digital Communication”, 2nd Edition, Wiley

India Pvt Ltd., 2012. 2. H. Taub, D. L. Schilling, “Principles of Communication Systems”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill,

Reprint, 2008. 3. R. R. Gulati, “Monochrome and Colour TV”, 3rd Edition, New Age International (P) Ltd. 2014. Course Outcomes: 1. Analyze the generation and demodulation of AM and DSBSC systems (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 12,

PSOs – 1, 3) 2. Realize the generation and demodulation of SSB and VSB (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 12, PSOs – 1, 3) 3. Discuss the direct and indirect method of generation of FM and its detection (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4,

12, PSOs – 1, 3) 4. Apply AM and FM basics in radio and TV systems (POs – 2, 3, 12, PSOs – 1, 3) 5. Analyze the noise performance of receivers (POs – 1, 2, 12, PSOs – 1, 3)

11

CMOS VLSI DESIGN Course Code: EC52 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mrs. A. R. Priyarenjini

UNIT – I CMOS Logic and Layouts: Introduction and history, CMOS Logic Circuits: Logic Gates, Pass Transistor and Transmission gates CMOS Fabrication and Layouts: Inverter Cross Section, Fabrication Process, Layout Design Rules, Gate Layout, Stick Diagrams, Fabrication, Packaging and Testing.

UNIT – II MOS Transistor Theory: Ideal V-I Characteristics, C-V Characteristics: simple MOS capacitance models, Detailed MOS Gate Capacitance model, Detailed MOS diffusion capacitance model, Non-ideal V-I Effects, DC Transfer Characteristics, Switch level RC delay model.

UNIT – III Circuit Characterization and Performance Estimation: Delay Estimation: RC delay model, linear delay model, Logical Effort (LE), LE and Transistor Sizing: Delay in gates and multistage networks, choosing the best number of stages with LE, Power Dissipation.

UNIT – IV Combinational Circuit Design: Circuit Families: Static CMOS, Ratioed Circuits, CVSL, Dynamic Circuits, Pass Transistor Circuits.

UNIT – V Data path Subsystems: Adders: Ripple carry, Carry Generate and Propagate, Propagate Generate Logic, Manchester Carry Chain, Carry Skip, Carry Select, Carry Look ahead, Tree Adders, Subtraction, Multiple-Input Addition. Self Study: VLSI Design Flow, Design specification, Design entry, Functional Simulation, Placement and Routing, Timing Simulation, Fabrication into the chip. (U1) CMOS Technologies (U2) Design Margins, Reliability (U3) Comparison of circuit families, Historical Perspectives, (U4) One/Zero Detectors.

12

Textbooks: 1. Neil Weste and David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, 4th

Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010. 2. Sung Mo Kang and Yusuf Leblebici, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits”, 4th Edition, McGraw

Hill, 2014. References: 1. Jan Rabaey, B. Nikolic, A. Chandrakasan, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”,

2nd Edition, Pearson, 2003. 2. Morris Mano and Michael Ciletti, “Digital Design”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2006. Course Outcomes: 1. Create MOS schematics and corresponding layouts for simple digital logic functions. (PO – 2,

3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, PSO – 2) 2. Calculate various circuit parameters such as current and device capacitance for a MOS transistor.

(PO – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, PSO – 2) 3. Evaluate the delay due to a MOS logic circuit, and thereby design a circuit to satisfy certain

design parameters. (PO – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, PSO – 2) 4. Analyze the performance of various MOS circuit families. (PO – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, PSO – 2) 5. Describe various connection configurations to realize digital adder designs and analyze their

operating speed. (PO – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, PSO – 2)

13

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Course Code: EC53 Credits: 3:1:0:0 Prerequisite: Signals and Systems Contact Sessions: 56 Course Coordinator: Dr. K. Indira

UNIT – I Sampling and Reconstruction of Signals: Ideal sampling and reconstruction of continuous time signals, discrete time processing of continuous time signals. Frequency Domain analysis of LTI systems: Frequency domain characteristics of LTI systems, Frequency response of LTI systems, Frequency Domain Sampling and Reconstruction of discrete time signals.

UNIT – II DFT and FFT: Discrete Fourier Transform, DFT as a linear transformation, Properties of DFT, DFT in linear filtering, Filtering long data sequences: overlap-save method, overlap-add method, FFT algorithms: Direct computation of DFT, Radix-2 FFT algorithm: Decimation-in-time algorithm, Decimation-in-frequency algorithm.

UNIT – III FIR Filters: Design of FIR filters: Symmetric and anti-symmetric FIR filters, Design of linear-phase FIR filters using windows and frequency sampling methods, FIR differentiators. Structures for FIR Systems: Direct-Form Structures, Cascade-Form Structures and Lattice Structures.

UNIT – IV IIR Filters: Analog filter specifications, Classification of Analog filters: Butterworth and Chebyshev filters, Frequency transformations, Design of Analog filters, Digital IIR filter design using impulse invariant method, bilinear transformation, Matched z-transform methods. IIR filter structures: Direct form (I and II), Cascade, Parallel, and Transposed structures

UNIT – V Architecture and Instruction set of TMS320C67x Processor: Architecture, Addressing modes, Instruction sets, Assembler directives, Memory considerations, Fixed and Floating point formats, implementation of FIR and IIR filters.

14

Textbooks: 1. J. G. Proakis and D. G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms and

Applications”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education Asia/Prentice Hall of India, 2014. 2. Rulph Chassaing, Donald Relay, “Digital Signal Processing and Applications with

TMS3206713 and TMS320C6416DSK”, 2nd Edition, Wiley Publications, 2014. References: 1. Oppenheim and Schafer, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education,

2014. 2. Sen M. Kuo, Woon-Seng S. Gan, “Digital Signal Processors: Architectures, Implementations

and Applications”, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2005. 3. Emmanuel Ifeachor, Barrie W. Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing: A Practical Approach”, 2nd

Edition, Pearson Education, 2002. Course Outcomes: 1. Illustrate the importance of sampling and frequency domain analysis of LTI Systems.

(POs – 1, 2. PSO – 3) 2. Apply DFT in linear filtering. (POs – 2, 3. PSO – 3) 3. Design and develop digital structures for FIR filters. (POs – 2, 3. PSO – 3) 4. Design and develop digital structures for IIR filters. (POs – 2, 3. PSO – 3) 5. Summarize the architecture and instruction sets of TMS32067x processor. (POs – 2, 3. PSO –3)

15

TRANSMISSION LINES AND RADIATING SYSTEMS Course Code: EC54 Credits: 3:1:0:0 Prerequisite: Electromagnetics Contact Sessions: 56 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Sujatha B

UNIT – I Transmission Line theory: Lumped element circuit model for a transmission line, wave propagation on a transmission line and general solutions of line, terminated lossless line, characteristic impedance, reflection coefficient, VSWR and impedance equation. Special cases of terminated lossless line, Smith chart: construction and applications, Conventional and graphical solution of line parameters.

UNIT – II Impedance matching and tuning, Line resonators: Matching with lumped elements (L-networks) only Smith chart solutions, Single stub tuning: Shunt and Series stubs, Quarter Wave transformer: Bandwidth performance of the transformer, Series and parallel resonant circuits: loaded Q and unloaded Q, Transmission line resonators.

UNIT – III Transmission lines and Fundamentals of radiator: Co-axial line, Strip line and Micro strip line, Principle of antenna, fields from oscillating dipole, antenna field zones, basic antenna parameters, patterns, beam area, Radiation intensity, beam efficiency, directivity and gain, antenna aperture, effective height and radio communication link (Friis formula).

UNIT – IV Point source and Arrays: Point source, Types of Arrays (Broad side, End fire, Extended End fire), Arrays of two point sources, linear array of n-isotropic point sources of equal amplitude and spacing, Null direction for arrays n isotropic point source of equal amplitude and spacing, pattern multiplication.

UNIT – V Thin linear antenna, Horn antenna and Parabolic reflectors: Introduction, short electric dipole, Fields of short electric dipole, radiation resistance of short electric dipole, thin linear antenna, field components of λ/2 (hertz) dipole antenna, radiation resistance of λ/2 antenna, Directivity of dipole antenna, Types of antenna – Yagi-Uda antenna, Horn antenna, parabolic reflectors.

16

Textbooks:

1. David M. Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, 3rd Edition, Wiley, 2011. 2. John D Kraus, Ronald J Marhetka, Ahmad S Khan, “Antennas and Wave Propagation”, 4th

Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010. References:

1. John Ryder D, “Networks, Lines and Fields”, Pearson India, 2015. 2. Constantine A Balanis, “Antenna, Theory, Analysis & Design”, 4th Edition, John Wiley &

Sons, 2016. Course Outcomes: 1. Analyze various transmission lines and find there parameters analytically and graphically.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 12, PSOs – 1, 2). 2. Apply Smith chart to design various impedance matching networks and also analyze line

resonators. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 12, PSOs –1, 2). 3. Define the parameters of antenna. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 12, PSOs – 1, 3). 4. Design different types of arrays and study the concept of pattern multiplication. (POs – 1, 2, 3,

12, PSOs – 1, 3). 5. Explore the field components and radiation resistance of various antennas. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 12,

PSOs – 1, 3).

17

MANAGEMENT, ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND IPR Course Code: EC55 Credits: 1:0:0:1 Prerequisite: Nil Contact Hours: 14 Course Coordinator: Mr. V. Nuthan Prasad

UNIT – I Management: Introduction, functions of management, Roles of manager, Levels of management, Development of management thought. Planning: Planning process, Types of plans (meaning only), Steps in planning, Decision making. Organizing and Staffing: Principles of organization, Types of organization, Importance of staffing.

UNIT – II Directing and Controlling: Principles of directing, Leadership styles, Techniques and importance of coordination and steps in controlling. Entrepreneur: Functions of an entrepreneur, Stages in entrepreneurial process.

UNIT – III SSI: Role of SSI in Economic Development, Steps to start an SSI Project Management: Project Identification, Project selection Entrepreneurship Development and Government: KIADB, MSME, SIDBI

UNIT – IV IPR: Basic Principles of IPR laws, history of IPR – GATT, WTO, WIPO and TRIPS, role of IPR in R&D and Knowledge era, concept of property, justification, Marx’s theory of property, different forms of IPR.

UNIT – V

Patent: Evolution of patent law in India, Justifications, subject matters of patent, Criteria for patentability, patentable and non-patentable inventions, pre-grant and post-grant oppositions, grant or refusal of patents.

18

Patent application procedure and drafting: Patent drafting, format, provisional and complete specifications, scopes of invention, claims, patent search and types of patent searches. Self-Study: Modern management approaches, planning premises, Departmentation, committees, communication meaning and importance, methods of establishing control (in brief). Types of Entrepreneur, role of Entrepreneur in Indian economy and developing economies with reference to Self-employment development, impact of liberalization, privatization globalization on SSI, project report, KSFC, constitutional aspects of intellectual property, infringement of patents and design rights Textbooks: 1. P. C. Tripathi, P. N. Reddy, “Principles of Management”, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2016 2. Vasant Desai, “ Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development & Management”, 4th Edition,

Himalaya Publishing House, 2010 3. P. Ganguli, “Intellectual Property Rights”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007. 4. T. Ramakrishna, “Course Material for I Year P. G. Diploma in IPR”, NLSIU, Bangalore References: 1. Robert Lussier, “Management Fundamentals – Concepts, Application, Skill Development”, 5th

Edition, Thomson, 2012 2. World Intellectual Property Organization Handbook/Notes, 2nd Edition, WIPO Publication, 2008 Course Outcomes: 1. Identify the importance of managerial discipline.(POs – 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12,PSO – 2) 2. Interpret the concepts of directing and controlling. (POs – 1, 2, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, PSO – 2) 3. Demonstrate the functions of an entrepreneurship development and describe various institutional

supports (POs – 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, PSO – 3) 4. Describe the basic principles of different IPRs (POs – 2, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, PSO – 3) 5. Recognize the characteristics and infringement of patents (POs – 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, PSO – 3)

19

ANALOG COMMUNICATION AND LIC LABORATORY Course Code: ECL56 Credits: 0:0:1:0 Prerequisites: Analog Electronic Circuits Laboratory Contact Sessions: 14 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Lakshmi S

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Differentiator and integrator using op-amps 2. Second order active low pass and high pass filter 3. Precision rectifier & 723 Regulator 4. Class-C amplifier 5. Generation and demodulation of AM 6. Schmitt Trigger 7. Generation of DSBSC using ring modulation 8. 555 Timer: Astable and Monostable Multivibrators 9. Generation and demodulation of FM 10. R-2R Ladder type Analog to Digital Converter and Flash ADC 11. Up conversion and down conversion using transistor mixer 12. Simulation of analog modulation techniques

Textbooks: 1. Simon Haykin and Michael Moher, “Communication Systems”, 5th Edition, John Wiley, 2009. 2. George Kennedy, Bernard Davis, S R M Prasanna, “Electronic Communication Systems”, 5th

Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2011. 3. David A. Bell, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear IC’s”, PHI/Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2011. 4. D. Roy Choudhury and Shail B. Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, 2nd Edition, New Age

International Reprint, 2006. Course Outcomes: 1. Analyze basic op-amp circuits to perform differentiation and integration. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10,

PSOs – 1, 3) 2. Design, simulate and implement modulation and demodulation circuits for AM and FM

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, PSOs – 1, 3) 3. Test analog filters, precision rectifier and regulators for the given specifications (POs – 1, 2, 3,

4, 9, 10, PSOs – 1, 3) 4. Implement multivibrators using IC 555 timer for the given specifications (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 9,

10, PSOs – 1, 3) 5. Construct analog to digital converters. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10. PSOs –1, 3)

20

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY Course Code: ECL57 Credits: 0:0:1:0 Prerequisite: Signals and Systems Contact Sessions: 14 Course Coordinator: Dr. K. Indira

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS Simulation Experiments 1. Verification of Sampling Theorem 2. DFT and IDFT, Circular convolution and Linear convolution 3. Design and implementation of FIR Filters (LP, HP, BP, BS) by using window techniques 4. Design and implementation of analog IIR Filters (Butterworth and Chebyshev) 5. Design and implementation of digital IIR Filters (Bilinear transformation)

Hardware Experiments 6. Linear convolution and Circular convolution 7. Computation of N point DFT/IDFT 8. Response of a discrete time system 9. Design and implementation of digital FIR Filters 10. Design and implementation of digital IIR Filters 11. Filtering of noisy signal using FIR filter 12. Generating signals of different frequencies and construction of AM wave

Textbooks: 1. J. G. Proakis and Ingle, “Digital signal processing using MATLAB”, 3rd Edition, Cengage

Learning, 2014. 2. Sanjit K. Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.

Course Outcomes:

1. Apply sampling theorem on continuous time signal. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 9, PSO – 3) 2. Apply DFT and IDFT in linear and circular convolutions. (POs –1, 2, 3, 5, 9, PSO – 3) 3. Analyze the frequency response of FIR and IIR filters. (POs – 2, 3, 5, 9, PSO – 3) 4. Demonstrate filtering of noisy signals. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, PSO – 3) 5. Discuss generation of AM wave. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, PSO – 3)

21

HDL AND VLSI LABORATORY Course Code: ECL58 Credits: 0:0:1:0 Prerequisite: Digital Design Contact Sessions: 14 Course Coordinator: Mrs. A. R. Priyarenjini

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS All the experiments will make use of appropriate design tools.

1. Introduction to Design Entry and Simulation 2. Netlist generation, power, area, and timing report generation 3. NMOS and PMOS DC Analysis 4. Device Characterization 5. CMOS Inverter DC and Transient analysis 6. Propagation delay of various simple gates, and comparison with logical effort 7. Fanout-of-4 Inverter delay measurement in different technologies 8. Verification of method of Logical effort 9. Inverter Chain Sizing 10. Verification of Full adder implementations at the transistor level 11. Inverter Layout Design and Post layout simulation

Textbook: 1. Neil Weste and David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, 4th

Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010 Course Outcomes: 1. Employ the digital design tools for HDL design entry, simulation, and synthesis. (POs – 2, 3, 4,

5, 9, 10, PSO – 2) 2. Create and verify functionality of various gates at the transistor level. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10,

PSO – 2) 3. Measure circuit performance parameters by performing simulations of circuit configurations.

(POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, PSO – 2) 4. Use tools to characterize processes by conducting suitable experiments. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10,

PSO – 2) 5. Create the layout for simple gates, and perform RC extraction and post layout simulation.

(POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, PSOs – 2)

22

DIGITAL COMMUNICATION Course Code: EC61 Credits: 3:1:0:0 Prerequisites: Analog Communication Contact Sessions: 56 Course Coordinator: Mr. Sadashiva V Chakrasali

UNIT – I Signal Sampling: Basic signal processing operations in digital communication, Sampling Principles, Sampling Theorem, Quadrature sampling of band-pass signals, Practical aspects of sampling and signal recovery, PAM, TDM.

UNIT – II Waveform Coding Techniques: PCM block diagram, Different quantization techniques, SNR in PCM Robust quantization, DPCM, DM, Adaptive DM. Base-Band Shaping for Data Transmission: Line Codes and their power spectra.

UNIT – III Inter symbol interference: Introduction, Nyquist criterion for distortion less base-band binary transmission, correlative coding, duo binary coding, Eye pattern. Detection: Model of digital communication system, Gram – Schmidt orthogonalization, geometric interpretation of signals, Maximum likelihood estimation.

UNIT – IV Detection: Correlation receiver, Matched Filter Receiver, Properties of Matched Filter. Digital Modulation and Demodulation Techniques: Coherent binary modulation techniques, BPSK, FSK, ASK, QPSK systems with signal space diagram, generation, demodulation and error probability concept, Comparison using Power Spectrum.

UNIT – V Non coherent modulation techniques: FSK and BPSK, DPSK. Spread spectrum modulation: Pseudo noise sequences, Notion of spread spectrum, direct sequence spread coherent BPSK, Signal space dimensionality and processing gain, Frequency Hop spread spectrum and applications of spread spectrum modulation.

23

Textbooks: 1. Simon Haykin, “Digital Communications”, John Wiley, Reprint 2014. 2. B. P. Lathi and Zhi Ding, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”,

International 4th Edition, Oxford University Press, 2015. References: 1. Simon Haykin, “An Introduction to Analog and Digital Communication”, John Wiley, 2003. 2. Bernard Sklar “Digital Communications”, Pearson Education, 2007. Course Outcomes: 1. Design a system to convert the given analog signal into discrete signal. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 8, 11,

PSO – 3) 2. Analyze PCM, DPCM, DM and ADM systems and Base Band shaping for data transmission.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 11, PSO – 3) 3. Describe effects of ISI and detect message signal in noisy environment. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 11,

PSO – 3) 4. Compare performance of BPSK, ASK, and QPSK systems and their power spectra.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 8, 11, PSO – 3) 5. Describe spread spectrum technology and its applications. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 8, 11. PSO – 3)

24

MICROCONTROLLER Course Code: EC62 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisite: Microprocessors Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Sara Mohan George

UNIT – I The MSP430 Architecture: The outside view-pin out, the inside view, memory, CPU, Memory mapped input output Addressing Modes, Constant generator and emulated instructions, Instruction set, examples

UNIT – II Functions and subroutines: Storage for local variables, passing parameters to a subroutine and returning a result, mixing C and assembly language, interrupts, interrupt service routines, interrupt service routines in C, non-maskable interrupts, issues associated with interrupts, Low power modes Digital input, output and displays: Parallel ports, digital inputs, interrupts on digital inputs, multiplexed inputs: scanning a matrix keypad, Digital outputs: multiplexed displays.

UNIT – III Timers: Watchdog timer, timer A: Timer block, capture/compare channels, interrupts from timer A, Measurement in the capture mode: Measurement of time; Press and release of button, Output in the continuous mode: Generation of Independent, Periodic Signals, Output in the Up Mode: Edge-Aligned PWM, simple PWM, design of PWM.

UNIT – IV Mixed signal systems: Comparator_A+, Architecture of Comparator_A+, Operation of Comparator_A+, Analog to digital conversion: general issues, Resolution, Precision, and Accuracy, SD 16 sigma delta ADC, signal conditioning and operational amplifiers: Thermistor for range 5°C – 30°C.

UNIT – V Communication: Communication peripherals in MSP430, serial peripheral interface, SPI with USI, Inter-integrated circuit bus: Hardware for I2C, I2C protocol. Self Study: Clock generator, driving an LCD from an MSP430x4xx, Basic timer1, real time clock, Architecture of Sigma Delta ADC, Asynchronous serial communication.

25

Textbook: 1. John H Davies, “MSP430 Microcontrollers Basics”, 1st Edition, Newnes Publishers, 2008. Reference: 1. C. P. Ravikumar, “MSP430 Microcontroller in Embedded System Projects”, Elite Publishing

House, New Delhi, 2012. Course Outcomes: 1. Explain the addressing modes, generation of constants and instruction sets of MSP430

microcontroller. (POs – 1, 3. PSOs –1, 2) 2. Demonstrate the interfacing of various devices to the input and output pins of MSP430 using

Interrupt Service Routines. (POs – 1, 4. PSOs –1, 2) 3. Generate independent periodic and PWM signals using different modes of MSP430 timer.

(POs – 1, 3. PSOs – 1, 2) 4. Design the conversion of analog inputs to digital outputs using comparator A+ and Sigma Delta

ADC. (POs – 1, 4. PSOs – 1, 2) 5. Describe communication between peripherals using SPI and I2C. (PO – 1, 3. PSO – 1, 3)

26

MICROWAVE DEVICES AND RADAR Course Code: EC63 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Transmission Lines & Radiating Systems Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Sujatha B

UNIT – I Multiport Microwave Network Analysis: Scattering matrix – reciprocal networks and lossless networks, shift in reference planes, Basic properties of dividers and couplers – three-port networks, four-port networks; T-junction power divider – lossless divider, resistive divider, Wilkinson power divider – even-odd mode analysis.

UNIT – II Microwave Passive and Active devices: Composite filter design by the image parameter method, PIN diodes, Phase shifters, Schottky-barrier diode, Attenuator, RWH theory, Gunn diodes– Gunn effect, modes of operation.

UNIT – III Microwave Tubes: Introduction, Klystrons: Two cavity klystron amplifiers, Multicavity Klystron Amplifiers, Reflex Klystrons: Mathematical analysis of power and efficiency, Traveling Wave Tubes, Magnetron Oscillators.

UNIT – IV Introduction to Radar: Basic Radar – Principle of operation, Simple form of the Radar Equation, Radar Block Diagram, Radar Frequencies, Applications of Radar. Radar Equation: Introduction, Detection of signals in noise, Receiver noise and signal-to-noise ratio, Radar cross-section of Targets.

UNIT – V Special types of Radar: CW Radar, Coherent MTI Radar – Delay line cancellers, Blind speeds, Digital MTI processor, Pulse Doppler Radar, Tracking Radar, Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR), Air Surveillance Radar, Electronic Counter Measure, Bistatic Radar. Self-Study: Impedance, admittance and transmission matrices of reciprocal microwave networks and lossless microwave networks, Stepped-impedance low-pass filters, varactor diode and its applications, IMPATT diode and its applications, conventional vacuum tubes comparison, applications of Klystron amplifier, oscillator, applications of TWTA, applications of magnetron oscillator, origins of radar, applications of radar, Doppler effect, millimeter waves radar.

27

Textbooks: 1. David M. Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, 3rd Edition, Wiley, 2011. 2. Samuel Y Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2011. 3. Merrill I. Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2015. References: 1. Annapurna Das and Sisir K Das, “Microwave Engineering”, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill 2009. 2. Robert E. Collin “Foundations of Microwave Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2005. Course Outcomes: 1. Apply the properties of scattering parameters to obtain the S-matrix of microwave components

and circuits. (POs – 1, 2. PSO – 3) 2. Examine the consequence of various microwave passive & active devices and design the

Microwave filters. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 10. PSO – 3) 3. Illustrate the significance of various microwave tubes. (POs – 1, 2, 10. PSO – 3) 4. Interpret the importance of radar and radar range equation. (PO - 1, 2, 10. PSO – 3) 5. Outline the key role played by special types of radar. (PO – 1, 10. PSO – 3)

28

MINI PROJECT Course Code: EC64 Credits: 0:0:6:0 Students will commence and complete a technical project under the guidance of a faculty member in the department. The quality of the work will be judged in two presentations, where the panel consists of the guide and at least two other faculty members in the project domain.

Subject No. of Hrs/Week Duration Marks Total

Subject

of Exam

Credits

Practical/

Code Lecture IA Exam Marks

Field Work (Hrs)

EC64 Mini-project - - - 50 - 50 6

Course Outcomes: 1. Perform a survey of existing methods in the domain of the chosen topic (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4,

PSO-1) 2. Describe the proposed design in terms of its technical block diagram (POs – 2, 3, 10,

PSOs – 2, 3) 3. Implement the technical block diagram using appropriate tools (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSOs – 2, 3) 4. Conduct extensive experimentation to evaluate the quality of the design (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5,

PSOs – 2, 3) 5. Present and prepare technical details of the project at regular intervals(POs – 9, 10,

PSOs – 2, 3)

29

EVALUATION RUBRICS

Criteria Max. Marks

Inadequate (0% – 33%)

Development (34% – 66%)

Proficient (67% – 100%) Marks

CO Mapping

Introduction to area (Review I) 10

No information About the

specific technical details in the

chosen area.

Some information about the area,

but no clarity in internal details.

Clear presentation of the technical details,

Internal working, And rationale of design

choices.

COs – 1, 5

Explanation of

Technical Block Diagram

(Review I) 10

Block diagram is not technically correct,

or is not feasible.

Technically Correct block diagram, but not practical

with existing data/ tools/methods.

Technically correct block diagram with ample

Resources for implementation.

COs – 2, 5

Implementation of Block

Diagram (Review II) 10

Incomplete or no implementation of

diagram, using unsuitable

tools.

Block diagram is implemented, but results

are not matching initial predictions.

Complete Implementation using Suitable tools, And producing consistent

results.

COs – 3, 5

Results & Discussion

(Review II) 10

No or insufficient Experimentation to rest

working.

Simple experiments

To show functionality, without exhausting

testing.

Complete Experimental analysis

including corner cases/weaknesses of

design.

COs – 4, 5

Presentation and Report

(Review I , II) 10

No proper use of tables/media,

unscientific language in report.

Basic use of media no continuity/flow in

reportand presentation.

Media effectively used, along with

a smooth flow from beginning to

end, scientific language used in report.

CO – 5

TOTAL MARKS AWARDED

30

DIGITAL COMMUNICATION LABORATORY Course Code: ECL65 Credits: 0:0:1:0 Prerequisites: Analog Communication Contact Sessions: 14 Course Coordinator: Mr. Sadashiva V Chakrasali

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 1. Verification of sampling theorem 2. Time Division Multiplexing 3. Generation and detection of Amplitude Shift Keying signals 4. Generation and detection of Frequency Shift Keying signals 5. Generation and detection of Phase Shift Keying signals 6. Generation and detection of Quadrature PSK & DPSK 7. PCM modulation and demodulation 8. Delta modulation and demodulation 9. Simulation for verification of sampling theorem 10. Simulation for performance analysis of various digital modulation and demodulation

techniques Textbooks: 1. Simon Haykin, “Digital Communications”, John Wiley, Reprint 2014. 2. J. G. Proakis and M. Salehi, “Contemporary Communication Systems Using MATLAB”,

PWS Publishing Company, 2007. Course Outcomes: 1. Implement a sampling circuit to find Nyquist rate. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 11. PSO – 3) 2. Employ TDM for band limited signals. (POs – 1, 2, 11. PSO – 3) 3. Design and implement ASK, PSK, FSK, DPSK digital modulation schemes. (POs – 3, 4,

7, 11. PSO – 3) 4. Design and implement PCM and Delta modulation scheme. (POs – 3, 4, 5, 7, 11. PSO – 3) 5. Analyze the performance of various modulation techniques. (PO – 2, 4, 11. PSO – 3)

31

MICROWAVE AND ANTENNAS LABORATORY Course Code: ECL66 Credits: 0:0:1:0 Prerequisite: Transmission Line & Radiating Systems Contact Sessions: 14 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Sujatha B

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 1. Verify the power division and calculate insertion loss and isolation of a hybrid network

(Magic tee). 2. Determination of coupling and isolation characteristics of a microstrip, branch line

directional coupler 3. Determination of coupling and isolation characteristics of a microstrip backward directional

coupler 4. Measurement of resonance characteristics of a microstrip ring resonator and determination

of dielectric constant 5. Measurement of power division and isolation characteristics of a microstrip 3 dB power

divider 6. Verify the power division and calculate insertion loss and isolation of a waveguide

directional coupler 7. Characteristics of Gunn diode 8. Mode curves of Reflex Klystron 9. Radiation pattern and directivity of Horn antenna 10. Radiation pattern and directivity of Yagi-uda antenna 11. Radiation pattern and directivity of dipole antenna 12. Radiation pattern and directivity of patch antenna Textbooks: 1. David M. Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, 3rd Edition, Wiley, 2011. 2. Samuel Y Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2011. 3. John D. Kraus , Ronald J. Marhefka and Ahmad S Khan “Antennas and Wave Propagation”,

4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Publications, 2006. Course Outcomes: 1. Analyze the characteristics of multiport waveguide microwave networks. (POs – 1, 2, 9, 10.

PSO – 3) 2. Interpret the characteristics of microwave oscillators. (POs –1, 2, 9, 10. PSO – 3) 3. Obtain the radiation pattern and calculate the directivity and gain of horn antenna.

(POs – 1, 2, 9, 10. PSO – 3) 4. Calculate the parameters of printed antennas (POs – 1, 2, 9, 10. PSO – 3) 5. Analyze the power division in micro-strip microwave network. (POs – 1, 2, 9, 10. PSO – 3)

32

MICROCONTROLLER LABORATORY Course Code: ECL67 Credits: 0:0:1:0 Prerequisite: Microprocessors Contact Sessions: 14 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Sara Mohan George

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS Part A: Assembly Language Programming

1. Data block move : with overlap, without overlap and interchange 2. Addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of N-bit multi precision numbers (N >

32 bits) 3. Identify whether a given number is positive, negative, odd and even 4. Sorting and Finding smallest/largest element in an array 5. Code conversion between BCD, ASCII & Hexadecimal 6. Square, cube, LCM, HCF and Factorial of a number 7. Addition and subtraction of two string ASCII digits 8. String transfer and string reversal 9. Identify whether a string is palindrome

Part B: Interfacing Write C programs to interface MSP430 with peripherals:

10. Toggle LEDs using Timer_A to set delay 11. Identify a key press by interfacing keypad with 7 segment display 12. Display on LCD: a key pressed or a message on the LCD module 13. Seven segment interface: 4 digit up/down binary and decimal counter 14. Generating pulse width modulation

Textbook: 1. John Davies, “MSP430 Microcontroller Basics”, Elsevier, 2008. Reference: 1. C. P. Ravikumar, “MSP430 Microcontroller in Embedded System Projects”, Elite

Publishing House, New Delhi, 2012.

33

Course Outcomes: 1. Employ hardware and software development and debugging tool. (PO – 5. PSO – 2) 2. Write, compile and debug assembly language program. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5. PSO – 2) 3. Develop C programs for different applications. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5. PSO – 2) 4. Write C language programs to interface modules to MSP430 microcontroller. (POs –1, 2, 4,

5. PSOs – 2, 3) 5. Write assembly language programs to use GPIO ports and timer module of MSP430

microcontroller. (PO – 10. PSOs – 2)

34

DEPARTMENT ELECTIVES

POWER ELECTRONICS Course Code: ECE01 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Analog Electronic Circuits Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator/s: Mrs. Punya Prabha. V, Mrs. Reshma Verma

UNIT – I

Introduction: Application of power electronics, power semiconductor devices, control characteristics of power devices, types of power electronic circuits, peripheral effects. Thyristors: Static characteristics, two- transistor model, dynamic characteristics turn on and turn-off Power MOSFET: Structure, operation, concept of pinch-off, steady state characteristics, switching characteristics, gate drive. IGBT: Structure of punch-through and non-punch-through IGBT, operation, steady state characteristics, switching characteristics.

UNIT – II

DC Choppers: Principle of step-up and step-down chopper Power Supplies: Introduction, Linear Series Voltage Regulator, Linear Shunt Voltage Regulator, Integrated Circuit Voltage Regulators, Switching Regulators, Applications

UNIT – III

Inverters: Principle of operation, performance parameters, single phase half and full bridge inverter with R and RL load Uninterruptible Power Supplies: Introduction, Classification, Performance Evaluation, Applications, Control Techniques, Energy Storage

UNIT – IV Automotive Applications of Power Electronics: Introduction, Present Automotive Electrical Power System, System Environment, Functions Enabled by Power Electronics, Multiplexed Load Control, and Electromechanical Power Conversion, Dual/High Voltage Automotive Electrical Systems, Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles.

35

UNIT – V Non-conventional energy sources: Photovoltaic cells, wind power, LED light circuits, Self Study: Conduct experiments on Static characteristics of Power MOSFET, IGBT, SCR, RC half-wave and full-wave triggering circuit for a thyristor, SCR firing circuit using synchronized UJT relaxation circuit, Commutation circuits for thyristor – LC circuit and Impulse commutation circuit, Voltage impulse commutated chopper, Series Inverter. Textbooks: 1. M. H. Rashid, “Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications”, 3rd Edition,

Prentice Hall India, 2011. 2. M. H. Rashid, “Power Electronics Handbook”, 3rd Edition, Elsevier Inc., 2011 References: 1. Vedam Subramanyam, “Power Electronics”, Revised 2nd Edition, New Age International

Publishers, 2008. Course Outcomes: 1. Describe the structure, characteristics and operation of power semiconductor devices like

Thyristor, MOSFET and IGBT. (PO – 1, PSO – 2) 2. Analyze detailed operation of Power supplies. (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 2) 3. Illustrate the various operations of UPS. (POs – 2, 3, PSO – 2) 4. Investigate the various automotive applications of power electronics (POs – 2, 3, PSO – 2) 5. Analyze electronic ballast for discharge lamps. (PO – 3, 5, 9, PSO – 2)

36

RANDOM VARIABLES AND RANDOM PROCESS Course Code: ECE02 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mr. Sadashiva V Chakrasali

UNIT – I Introduction: Set theory, definitions, conditional probability, Bayes theorem, combined experiments. Specific Random Variables: Gaussian random variable, other distributions, density functions and examples, conditional distribution and density functions.

UNIT – II Operations on one random variable: Introduction, Expectation, moments, functions that give moments, Transformations of random variables, computer generation of one random variable. Multiple random variables: Introduction, vector random variables, joint distribution and its properties, joint density and its properties, conditional distributions and density functions, statistical independence.

UNIT – III Multiple random variables: Distribution and density function of sum of random variables, central limit theorem. Random Processes: Introduction, the random process concept, stationarity and independence, correlation functions, measurement of correlation functions.

UNIT – IV Random Processes: Ergodic processes, Gaussian random processes, Poisson random processes, Wiener Processes. Spectral Characteristics of Random Processes: Power density spectrum and its properties, white noise.

UNIT – V Analysis and Processing of Random Processes: Response of linear systems to random inputs, cross power density spectrums. Noise bandwidth, Band pass and band limited processes, modeling of noise processes.

37

Self Study: Probability: Set definitions, set operations, probability introduced through sets, joint and conditional probability, independent events and Bernoulli trials, Random Variable: the random variable concept, distribution function, density function. Textbook: 1. Peyton Z. Peebles, “Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles”, 4th

Edition, McGraw Hill, 2007. 2. A. Papoulis and S. U. Pillai, “Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes”,

4th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2012. References: 1. Hwei P. Hsu, “Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables, and Random

Processes”, Schaum’s Outline Series, McGraw Hill, 1997. 2. H Stark and J W Woods, “Probability and Random Processes with applications to Signal

Processing”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2002. Course Outcomes: 1. Solve basic probability and random variable problems. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3) 2. Identify different random variables and their properties. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3) 3. Estimate statistical parameters of different random variables. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3) 4. Classify different random processes. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3) 5. Relate input and output processes of a LTI system. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3)

38

SPEECH PROCESSING Course Code: ECE03 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Digital Signal Processing Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mr. Sadashiva V Chakrasali

UNIT – I Digital Models for the Speech Signal: The process of speech production, the acoustic theory of speech production, lossless tube models.

UNIT – II Time Domain Models for Speech Processing: Time dependent processing of speech, short time energy and average magnitude, speech and silence determination, pitch period estimation.

UNIT – III Digital Representations of the Speech Waveform: Sampling speech signals, Instantaneous quantization and adaptive quantization, delta modulation, differential PCM.

UNIT – IV Short Time Fourier analysis and Homomorphic speech processing: Design of digital filter banks, spectrographic displays, pitch detection, analysis by synthesis, analysis – synthesis systems. Homomorphic speech processing: The complex cepstrum of speech, Pitch detection, formant estimation.

UNIT – V Linear Predictive Coding: Linear predictive coding of speech: basic principles of linear predictive analysis, computation of the gain for the model, solution of the LPC equations, relations between various speech parameters, synthesis of speech from linear predictive parameters. Self Study: Digital models for speech signals, short time average zero crossing rates, direct digital code conversion, implementation of filter bank summation method using FFT, applications of LPC parameters.

39

Textbooks: 1. L R Rabiner and R W Schafer, “Digital Processing of Speech Signals”, Pearson

Education, 2004. 2. Thomas F. Quatieri, “Discrete Time Speech Signal Processing”, Pearson Education, 2009.

References: 1. L. Rabiner, R Schafer, “Theory and Applications of Digital Speech Processing”, 1st

Edition, Pearson Education, 2010. 2. I. McLoughlin, “Applied Speech and Audio Processing: with Matlab Examples”, 1st

Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2009. Course Outcomes: 1. Compare various speech production models. (POs – 2, 3, PSO – 3) 2. Find various speech parameters. (POs – 2, 3, PSO – 3) 3. Represent speech signal in different codes. (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3) 4. Interpret and analyze speech signals in frequency domain. (POs – 2, 3, PSO – 3) 5. Determine LPC parameters for given speech signal. (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3)

40

LOW POWER VLSI DESIGN Course Code: ECE04 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: CMOS VLSI Design Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Dr. V. Anandi

UNIT – I

Power Dissipation in CMOS: Introduction: Need for low power VLSI chips, sources of power consumption, introduction to CMOS inverter power dissipation, low power VLSI design limits, basic principle of low power design.

UNIT – II Power Optimization: Logical Level Power Optimization: gate reorganization, local restructuring, signal gating, logic encoding, state machine encoding, pre-computation logic Circuit Level Power Optimization: Transistor and gate sizing, equivalent pin ordering, network restructuring and re-organization, special latches and flip-flops.

UNIT – III Design of Low Power CMOS Circuits: Reducing power consumption in memories: low power techniques for SRAM, Circuit techniques for reducing power consumption in adders and multipliers. Special techniques: Power reduction and clock networks, CMOS floating gate, low power bus, delay balancing.

UNIT – IV Power Estimation: Simulation power analysis: SPICE circuit simulation, Gate level Simulation, Architectural level analysis, Data correlation analysis in DSP systems, Monte-Carlo simulation. Probabilistic Power analysis: Random signals, probabilistic techniques for signal activity estimation, propagation of static probability in logic circuits, gate level power analysis using transition density.

41

UNIT – V Synthesis for Low Power: Behavioral level transforms, algorithm level transforms for low power, architecture driven voltage scaling, power optimization using operation reduction, operation substitution, Bus switching activity. Self Study: Basic principle of low power design, Signal gating, Network restructuring and re-organization, CMOS floating gates, delay balancing in multipliers, SPICE circuit simulation, Random signals, power optimization using Operation reduction Textbooks: 1. Gary Yeap, “Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design”, Kluwer Academic, 1998. 2. K. Roy and S.C. Prasad, “Low Power CMOS VLSI Circuit Design”, Wiley, 2000. References: 1. Jan M. Rabaey and Massoud Pedram, “Low Power Design Methodologies”, Kluwer

Academic, 2010. 2. P. Chandrakasan and R.W. Broadersen, “Low Power Digital CMOS Design”, Kluwer

Academic 1995. 3. NPTEL Lecture series on, “Low power Circuits and Systems”, June 2012. Course Outcomes: 1. Identify the sources of power dissipation in CMOS circuits. (POs –1, 2, 4, 9, PSO – 2) 2. Investigate low power design techniques. (POs – 2, 4, 6, PSO – 2) 3. Apply optimization and trade-off techniques that involve power dissipation of digital circuits.

(POs – 2, 5, 6, PSO – 2) 4. Perform power analysis using simulation and probabilistic based approaches. (POs – 4, 9,

11, PSO – 2) 5. Analyze and design low-power VLSI circuits using current generation design style and

process technology. (POs – 2, 4, 5, 11, PSO – 2)

42

OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING WITH C++ Course Code: ECE05 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisite: Data Structures using C Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Dr. K. Indira

UNIT – I Introduction: Structure of C++ program: Preprocessor directive, declarations and definitions. Functions: Passing simple function, passing arguments to functions such as variables, reference arguments pointer type, function return data type such as constant, variables, data structures, specifying a class, member functions and member data, nested classes, static data members and member functions, friendly functions.

UNIT – II Classes and Objects: Definition, class initialization, class constructors, destructors, constructor types , multiple constructor in a class, destructors, inheritance, defining derived classes, different types of inheritance, Virtual base classes, abstract classes, constructors in derived classes, virtual functions and dynamic polymorphism, Pure virtual function.

UNIT – III Operator Overloading: Overloading using various operators, Overloading using friends, Function Overloading, Templates: Function Templates, Class Templates, Header File and Implementation File of a Class Template

UNIT – IV Pointers: Pointer data types and Pointer Variables, Dynamic Arrays, Classes and Pointers, Overloading the array index operator. Standard Template Library: Components of STL, Sequence Container, Iterators and Programming Examples

UNIT – V Stacks: Implementation of Stacks as Arrays, Linked implementation of Stacks Applications of Stacks. Queues: Implementation of Queues as Arrays, Linked implementation of Queues Trees: Basic terminologies of binary trees, Binary Tree Traversal, Binary Search Trees

43

Self Study: Programs using C++ for the following topics: Introduction to C++ Programming, Data types in C++, Manipulators and Functions, Structures, Recursive function and Class, Nested Member Functions and Arrays, Static variables, Static Member Function, Arrays of objects and objects as Arguments, Friend Functions and Constructors, Inheritance, Multiple Inheritance and Virtual Functions, Stacks Queues, Trees and Hashing. Textbooks: 1. E. Balaguruswamy, “Object Oriented Programming with C++”, TMH, 4th Edition, 2011. 2. D. S. Malik, “Data Structures using C++”, Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2003. References: 1. Robert Lafore, “Introduction to OOPs with C++”, 4th Edition, Sams Publishing, 2001. 2. Sartaj Sahni, “Data Structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++”, International Edition,

McGraw Hill, 2000. 3. Gray Litwin, “Programming with C++ and Data Structures”, Vikas Publications, 2003. Course Outcomes: 1. Illustrate the concept of C++ program by using functions with different arguments.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 12, PSO – 2) 2. Apply the concept of inheritance in solving real world problems. (POs – 2,3,5,12, PSO – 2) 3. Employ overloading concepts to overload built in operators. (POs – 2, 3, 5, 12, PSO – 2) 4. Use pointers for dynamic arrays and linked lists. (POs – 2, 3, 5, 12, PSO – 2) 5. Implement the concept of stack, queues and trees using Standard Template Library.

(PO – 2, 3, 5, 12, PSO – 2)

44

DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN USING VERILOG Course Code: ECE06 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisite: Digital Electronics Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Lakshmi Shrinivasan

UNIT – I Introduction and Methodology: Digital systems and embedded systems, Real world circuits, Models, Design Methodology. Combinational Basics: Boolean function and Boolean Algebra, Binary coding, Combinational components and circuits.

UNIT – II Sequential Basics: Counters, Sequential data paths and controls, Clocked synchronous timing methodology, Memories: Concepts, Memory types, Error detection and correction.

UNIT – III Implementation Fabrics: ICs, PLDs, Interconnections and signal integrity, Processor Basics: Embedded computer organization, Instruction and data.

UNIT – IV Interfacing with memory and I/O Interfacing: I/O devices, I/O Controllers, Parallel Buses, Serial transmission, I/O software.

UNIT – V Accelerators: General concepts, Case study: Video edge detection, verifying an accelerator. Design Methodology: Design optimization, Design for test. Self Study: Binary representation and circuit elements, Sequential Basics: Storage elements, Packaging and circuit boards, Design methodology: Design Flow. Textbook: 1. Peter J. Ashenden, “Digital design: An Embedded systems approach using Verilog”, Morgan

Kaufmann Publishers, Elsevier, 2014.

45

References: 1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A guide to digital design and synthesis”, 2nd Edition,

Pearson Publications, 2009. 2. Stephen Brown, ZvonkoVranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design”, 2nd

Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publications. 2009. Course Outcomes: 1. Describe the basics of combinational components for building digital systems.

(POs – 1, 3, PSOs – 1, 2) 2. Apply the sequential basics and memory concepts to build a specified digital system

(POs – 1, 2, 3, PSOs – 1, 2) 3. Implement processors and other digital systems on programmable logic devices.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 1, 2) 4. Interface different I/O and memory modules in a system. (POs – 1, 2, 3, PSOs – 1, 2) 5. Illustrate the entire digital system design flow. (PO – 1, 2, 3, PSOs – 1, 2)

46

DSP ARCHITECTURE AND ALGORITHMS Course Code: ECE07 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Digital Signal Processing Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Dr. Maya V. Karki

UNIT – I Introduction to Digital Signal Processors: A Digital Signal Processing System, Programmable digital signal processors, major features of programmable digital signal processors, architectures for programmable digital signal processing devices, introduction to basic architectural features.

Architecture and instruction set of C6x processor: TMS320C6x architecture, functional units, fetch and execute units, pipelining, registers, linear and circular addressing modes, instruction sets

UNIT – II Software and memory consideration of C6xProcessor: Assembler directives, Linear assembly, ASM statements within C, C callable assembly function, timers, interrupts, multichannel buffered serial ports, direct memory access, memory considerations, fixed and floating point format, code improvements, constraints, Programming examples using assembly and linear assembly.

UNIT – III Implementation of FIR filters: FIR filters, FIR lattice structure, FIR implementation using Fourier series, window functions, Programming example using ASM and C

UNIT – IV Implementation of IIR filters: Introduction, IIR filter structures, Bilinear transformation, Programming examples based on ASM and C

UNIT – V Fast Fourier Transform: Introduction, development of FFT algorithm with Radix-2, Decimation in frequency FFT algorithm with Radix-2, Decimation in Time FFT algorithm with Radix-2, Bit reversal for unscrambling, development of FFT algorithm with Radix-4, Inverse fast Fourier transform

47

Self Study: Assembly code format, Programming examples using assembly and linear assembly, Programming example using ASM on FIR and IIR filtering, Programming example using ASM on FFT Textbook: 1. Rulph Chassaing, Donald Relay ”Digital Signal Processing and Applications with

TMS3206713 and TMS320C6416DSK”, 2nd Edition, Wiley 2014 References: 1. Sen M. Kuo, Woon-Seng S. Gan, “Digital Signal Processors: Architectures, Implementations

and Applications”, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2005 2. Lapsley, “DSP Processor Fundamentals, Architectures & Features”, S. Chand & Co, 2000. Course Outcomes: 1. Distinguish the computational building blocks, architectural features and instruction sets of

TMS320C6x (POs – 1, 2, 3, PSO – 3) 2. Compute the programming examples using assembly and linear assembly (POs – 2, 3, 5,

PSO – 3) 3. Demonstrate implementation of FIR filters using ASM and C (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3) 4. Employ ASM and C code to realize IIR filtering (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3) 5. Illustrate realization of FFT algorithm with Radix-2 and Radix-4 (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3)

48

MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Course Code: ECE08 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: CMOS VLSI Design Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Lakshmi S

UNIT – I Introduction to MEMS: Historical background of Micro Electro Mechanical Systems, multi-disciplinary aspects, basic technologies, application areas, scaling laws in miniaturization, scaling in geometry, electrostatics, electromagnetics, electricity and heat transfer.

UNIT – II Micro Systems – Principles: Transduction principles in MEMS Sensors: Various sensing mechanisms, Actuators: different actuation mechanisms - silicon capacitive accelerometer, piezo-resistive pressure sensor, blood analyzer, conductometric gas sensor, silicon micro-mirror arrays, piezo-electric based inkjet print head, electrostatic comb-drives.

UNIT – III Materials and Micromanufacturing: Semiconducting materials, Silicon, Silicon dioxide, Silicon Nitride, Quartz, Poly silicon, Polymers, Materials for wafer processing, Packaging materials Silicon wafer processing, lithography, thin-film deposition, etching (wet and dry), wafer-bonding, Silicon micromachining: surface, bulk, LIGA process.

UNIT – IV Electrical and Electronics Aspects: Electrostatics, Coupled electro mechanics, stability and Pull-in phenomenon, Practical signal conditioning circuits for microsystems, RF MEMS: Switches, varactors.

UNIT – V Integration and Packaging of Microelectromechanical Systems: Integration of microelectronics and micro devices at wafer and chip levels, Microelectronic packaging: wire and ball bonding, flip chip, Micro system packaging examples. Self Study: Feynman’s vision, Smart phone applications, Smart buildings, Wafer bonding process, Tuned filters, Application circuits Based on microcontrollers for pressure sensor, Accelerometer, Testing of Micro sensors, Qualification of MEMS devices.

49

Textbooks: 1. G. K. Ananthasuresh, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalakrishnan, K. N. Bhat, V. K. Aatre, “Micro and

Smart Systems”, 1st Edition, Wiley India, 2010. 2. T R Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacturing”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw

Hill, 2008 References: 1. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson International Edition, 2006. 2. S D Senturia, “Microsystem Design”, Springer International Edition, 2001. Course Outcomes: 1. Recognize the multidisciplinary and scaling aspects of micro systems. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4,

PSOs – 2, 3) 2. Analyze the various transduction mechanisms and applications of MEMS. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4,

PSOs – 2, 3) 3. Describe the various fabrication processes of MEMS devices. (POs – 2, 9, 10, 12,

PSOs – 2, 3) 4. Analyze the electronics aspects of MEMS systems. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 2, 3) 5. Classify the various packaging methods for MEMS devices. (POs – 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 2, 3)

50

ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC Course Code: ECE09 Credit: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Digital Signal Processing Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator/s: Mrs. Punya Prabha. V

UNIT – I Fundamentals of Neural Networks: Biological neurons and their artificial models, Neural Network Architecture: Single Layer, Multi layer Feed Forward Networks, Recurrent Networks, Learning methods, Applications.

UNIT – II Back Propagation Networks: Architecture of a back propagation network, Back propagation learning, Training of Neural network, Method of steepest descent, effect of learning rate, Back propagation algorithm, Radial Basis Function Network (RBFN), Applications.

UNIT – III Adaptive Resonance Theory (ART): Introduction, Cluster Structure, Vector Quantization, Classical ART Networks, Simplified ART Architecture, Special features of ART1 models, ART1 Algorithms, Illustration, Applications.

UNIT – IV Fuzzy Set Theory: Fuzzy vs crisp sets, crisp sets, Operations on crisp sets, Properties of crisp sets, Partition and Covering, Membership function, Basic fuzzy set operations, Properties of Fuzzy sets, Crisp relations and Fuzzy relations, Applications.

UNIT – V Fuzzy systems: Crisp logic: Laws of propositional logic, inference in propositional logic, Predicate logic: Interpretations of predicate logic formula, inference in predicate logic, Fuzzy logic: Fuzzy Quantifiers, Fuzzy inference. Fuzzy rule based system, defuzzification. Applications: Greg Viot’s Fuzzy cruise controller, Air conditioner controller

51

Self Study: Implementation: Pattern classification using Hebb net and McCulloch –Pitts net, Pattern recognition using Perceptron Networks, Implementation of all fuzzy operations on both discrete and continuous fuzzy sets, Defuzzification, Fuzzy inference system Textbooks: 1. Rajasekaran. S, Vijayalakshmi Pai G.A, “Neural networks, Fuzzy logic, and Genetic

Algorithms, Synthesis and Applications”, PHI New Delhi, 2011. 2. S. N. Sivanandam, S. Sumathi, S N Deepa , “Introduction to Neural Networks using Matlab

6.0”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006. References: 1. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks: A Comprehensive Foundation”, 3rd Edition, PHI, 2009. 2. Timothy J Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, 3rd Edition, Wiley, India,

New Delhi, 2011. Course Outcomes: 1. Describe the relation between real brains and simple artificial neural network models.

(POs – 1, 6, 12, PSO – 2) 2. Select different neural network algorithms for suitable applications. (POs – 1, 3, 6, 12,

PSO – 2) 3. Identify the main implementation issues for common neural network systems and apply

ANN models to data compression and pattern identification (POs – 1, 3, 6, 12, PSO – 2) 4. Apply the rules of fuzzy logic for fuzzy controller. (POs – 2, 4, 6, 12, PSO – 2) 5. Employ fuzzy set operations and defuzzification for a given application. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 6,

12, PSO – 2)

52

IMAGE PROCESSING Course Code: ECE10 Credit: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Digital Signal Processing Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mr. Shreedarshan K

UNIT – I Introduction and Fundamentals: What is Digital Image Processing? Origins, Examples, fundamental steps in Digital Image Processing, Components of an image processing system, Elements of visual perception, Image sensing and acquisition, Image sampling and quantization, some basic relationships between pixels, mathematical tools used in image processing.

UNIT – II Intensity Transformations and Spatial Filtering: Basic intensity transformation functions, Histogram processing, spatial filtering, smoothing spatial filters, sharpening spatial filters.

UNIT – III Image Transforms: Two dimensional orthogonal and unitary transforms, property of unitary transforms, 1D-DFT, 2D-DFT, DCT, Basics of filtering in the frequency domain, image smoothing and image sharpening using frequency domain filters.

UNIT – IV Image Segmentation – 1: Fundamentals, Detection of discontinuities, line detection, Edge detection, Edge linking via Hough Transform, Thresholding, Basics of intensity thresholding, Basic global thresholding, Optimum global thresholding using Otsu’s method.

UNIT – V

Image Segmentation and Morphological Image Processing: Region based segmentation: Region growing, splitting and merging, Dilation and Erosion, some basic morphological algorithms, segmentation using morphological watersheds. Self Study: Implement programs for image processing basics, reading and display of image, histogram, image sensing, acquisition and sampling, intensity transformations and filtering, DFT, DCT, and thresholding of images, image segmentation and morphological algorithms

53

Textbooks: 1. R. C. Gonzalez, R. E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education,

2009. 2. R. C. Gonzalez, R. E. Woods, S. L. Eddins, “Digital Image Processing using MATLAB”, 2nd

Edition, 2009. References: 1. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, 2002. Course Outcomes: 1. Analyze general terminology of digital image processing. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3) 2. Examine various types of images, intensity transformations and spatial filtering. (POs – 2, 3,

5, PSO – 3) 3. Employ Fourier Transform for image processing in frequency domain. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5,

PSO – 3) 4. Apply segmentation algorithms to detect and link edges in an image. (POs – 3, 5, PSO – 3) 5. Develop morphological algorithms to describe the shape of a region in an image. (POs – 2,

3, 5, PSO – 3)

54

REAL TIME SYSTEMS Course Code: ECE11 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisite: Microprocessors Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mrs. Lakshmi Shrinivasan

UNIT – I Fundamentals of Real Time Systems: Concepts and Misconceptions, Multidisciplinary Design Challenges, Birth and Evolution of Real-Time Systems. Hardware for Real Time Systems: Basic Processor Architecture, Memory Technologies, Architectural Advancements, Peripheral Interfacing, Microprocessor versus Microcontroller, Distributed Real-Time Architectures.

UNIT – II Real Time Operating systems: From Pseudo kernels to Operating Systems, Theoretical Foundations of Scheduling, System Services for Application Programs, Memory Management Issues, and Selecting Real-Time Operating Systems.

UNIT – III Programming Languages for Real-Time Systems: Coding of Real-Time Software, Assembly Language, Procedural Languages, and Object-Oriented Languages, Overview of Programming Languages, Automatic Code Generation, and Compiler Optimizations of Code.

UNIT – IV Requirements Engineering Methodologies: Requirements Engineering for Real-Time Systems, Formal Methods in System Specification, Semiformal Methods in System Specification, The Requirements Document.

UNIT – V Software Design Approaches: Qualities of Real-Time Software, Software Engineering Principles, Procedural Design Approach, Object-Oriented Design Approach, Life Cycle Models. Self Study: Advancements behind Modern Real-Time Systems, Hierarchical Memory Organization, Time-Triggered Architectures, and Memory Management in the Task Control Block Model, Case Study: Selecting a Commercial Real-Time Operating System, Cardelli’s Metrics and Object-Oriented Languages, Recommendations on Specification Approach, Agile Methodologies.

55

Textbook: 1. Phillip. A. Laplante, “Real-time systems design and analysis”, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2012. References: 1. Stuart Bennet, “Real-Time Computer Control – An Introduction”, 2nd Edition, Pearson

Education, 2005. 2. Rob Williams, “Real-Time Systems Development”, Elsevier, 2006. 3. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, India, 2005. Course Outcomes: 1. Describe the basics of real time systems (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 2) 2. Select appropriate scheduling strategy based on real time application constraints

(POs – 3, 4, PSOs – 2, 3) 3. Elaborate the language syntax for real time applications (POs – 2, 3, PSO – 2) 4. Identify suitable RTS development methodology for a given application (POs – 3, 4,

PSOs – 2, 3) 5. Apply the knowledge of software design specification to build RTS (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4,

PSO – 2)

56


Course Code: ECE12 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Digital Electronic Circuits Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mrs. A. R. Priyarenjini

UNIT – I Digital Integrated Circuits: Technology Scaling, Die size growth, Frequency, Power dissipation, Challenges in digital design, Design metrics, Cost of Integrated circuits, ASIC, Evolution of SoC, ASIC flow vs SoC flow, SoC design challenges. Introduction to CMOS Technology: CMOS operation principles, Characteristic curves of CMOS, CMOS inverter and characteristic curves, Delays in inverters, Buffer Design, Power dissipation in CMOS, CMOS Logic, Stick diagrams and Layout diagrams, Timing concepts

UNIT – II

Digital Building Blocks: Decoder, encoder, code converters, Priority encoder, multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Comparators, Parity check schemes, Multiplexer, De-multiplexer, Pass Transistor Logic, Application of multiplexer as a multi-purpose logical element, asynchronous and synchronous up-down counters, Shift registers.

FSM Design: Mealy and Moore modeling, Adder & Multiplier concepts

UNIT – III

Logic Design using Verilog: Lexical Conventions, Data Types, Modules, Nets, Values, Data Types, Comments, arrays in Verilog, Expressions, Operators, Operands, Arrays, memories, Strings, Delays, parameterized designs, Procedural blocks, Blocking and Non-Blocking assignment, looping, flow Control, Task, Function, Synchronization, Event Simulation, need for verification, basic test bench generation and simulation

UNIT – IV

Principles of RTL Design: Verilog coding concepts, Verilog coding guide lines: Combinational, Sequential, FSM, general guidelines, synthesizable Verilog constructs, sensitivity list, Verilog events, RTL design challenges, clock domain crossing, Verilog modeling of combinational logic, Verilog modeling of sequential logic.

57

UNIT – V Design and simulation of architectural building blocks: Basic Building blocks, design using Verilog HDL: Arithmetic Components – Multiplier design, Data Integrity – Parity Generation circuits, Control logic – Arbitration, FSM Design, overlapping and non-overlapping Mealy and Moore state machine design Mini-Project: n bit simple ALU design & verification

Self Study: Moore’s law, PMOS & NMOS operation, basic gates, universal gates, NAND & NOR CMOS implementation, Evolution & importance of HDL, Introduction to Verilog, Levels of abstraction, typical design flow, design using Verilog HDL, Arithmetic components – Adder, Subtractor.

Textbooks:

1. Morris Mano M, “Digital Design”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2014. 2. Neil H. E. Weste, David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems

Perspective”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2004. 3. Samir Palnitkar, “VERILOG HDL – A guide to digital design and synthesis”, 2nd Edition,

Pearson Education, 2003. References:

1. J. Bhasker, “Verilog HDL Synthesis: A Practical Primer”, 3rd Edition, Star Galaxy, 2005. 2. A. Anand Kumar, “Fundamentals of Digital Circuits”, 2nd Edition, PHI Learning, 2012.

Course Outcomes: 1. Understand the basic VLSI design principles. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSO – 2) 2. Apply basic digital design principles to complex circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 1, 2) 3. Employ Verilog HDL for describing digital circuits. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 2) 4. Create directed test benches, run simulators and analyze/debug. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

PSO – 2). 5. Employ FSMs for the design of basic sub circuits and use EDA tools to simulate them.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 2).

58

ADVANCED DIGITAL LOGIC VERIFICATION Course Code: ECE13 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Advanced Digital Logic Design Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mr. S. L. Gangadharaiah

UNIT – I Verification Concepts: Concepts of verification, Test bench generation, Functional verification approaches, Typical verification flow, Stimulus generation, Direct testing. Coverage: Code coverage and Functional coverage, Coverage plan.

UNIT – II System Verilog – language constructs: System Verilog constructs – Data types, two state data, strings, Arrays: Queues, Dynamic and Associative Arrays, Structs, Enumerated types. Program blocks, modules, interfaces, Clocking ports, Mod ports.

UNIT – III System Verilog – Classes: Classes and Objects, Class Variables and Methods, Class Instantiation, Inheritance and Encapsulation, Polymorphism. Randomization: Directed vs Random Testing, Randomization: Constraint driven Randomization.

UNIT – IV System Verilog – Assertions and Coverage: Introduction to assertion based verification, Immediate and concurrent assertions Coverage driven assertion: Motivation, types of coverage, Cover group, Cover point, Cross coverage, Concepts of binning and event sampling.

UNIT – V Building Test bench: Layered test bench architecture, Introduction to universal verification methodology, Overview of UVM.

59

Self Study: Importance of verification, Stimulus vs verification, Language evolution, Introduction to universal verification methodology, Base classes and simulation phases in UVM and UVM macros, Unified messaging in UVM, UVM environment structure, Connecting DUT – Virtual Interface. Tools: NCVerilog, NCSim, VCSMX for System Verilog References: 1. System Verilog LRM 2. Chris Spear, Greogory J Tumbush, “System Verilog for Verification – A guide to learning

test bench language features”, Springer, 2012. 3. Sasan Iman, “Step by Step functional Verification with System Verilog and OVM”, Hansen

Brown Publishing, 2008 Reference Websites: www.testbench.in, www.asic-world.com Online material: Seer recordings Course Outcomes: 1. Express the principle of HDL verification. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 2) 2. Apply OOPs concepts in System Verilog. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 2) 3. Build basic verification environment using System Verilog. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 2) 4. Generate random stimulus and track functional coverage using System Verilog. (POs – 2, 3,

4, 5, PSO – 2) 5. Appreciate the concepts of layered test bench architecture and its components. (POs – 2, 3,

4, 5, PSO – 2)

60

LINEAR ALGEBRA Course Code: ECE14 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisite: Engineering Mathematics Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Mr. Shreedarshan K

UNIT – I Linear Equations: Systems of Linear Equations, Row reduction and Echelon Forms, Vector Equations, Matrix Equation Ax = b, Solution Sets of Linear Systems, Linear Independence, Introduction to Linear Transformations, Matrix of a Linear Transformation, Applications.

UNIT – II Vector Spaces: Vector Spaces and Subspaces, Null Spaces, Column Spaces and Linear Transformations, Linearly Independent sets, Bases, Co-ordinate Systems, The Dimension of a Vector Space, Rank,.

UNIT – III Eigen Values and Eigen Vectors: The Characteristic equation, Diagonalization, Eigen Vectors and Linear Transformations.

UNIT – IV Orthogonality and Least Squares: Orthogonal Sets, Orthogonal Projections, Gram – Schmidt Process, Least Squares Problems

UNIT – V Symmetric Matrices and Quadratic Forms: Diagonalization of Symmetric Matrices, Quadratic Forms, Singular Value Decomposition. Self Study: Linear models in engineering, Applications to difference equations, Inner Product, Length and Orthogonality, Constrained Optimization. Textbooks: 1. David C Lay, Stephen R Lay, Judi J McDonald, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, 5th

Edition, Pearson Education, 2015. 2. Gilbert Strang, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, 4th Edition, Thomson Learning Asia,

2007.

61

References: 1. S Lipschutz, M Lipson, “Schaum’s Outline of Linear Algebra”, 5th Edition, 2012. 2. M J Sterling, “Linear Algebra for Dummies”, 1st Edition, 2009. Course Outcomes: 1. Solve systems of linear equations using multiple methods, including Gaussian elimination,

matrix inversion and matrix operations. (POs – 1, 2, 3, PSO – 3) 2. Demonstrate understanding of the concepts of vector space and subspace. (POs – 2, 3, 5,

PSO – 3) 3. Demonstrate understanding of linear independence, span and basis. (POs – 2, 3, 5,

PSO – 3) 4. Determine eigen values and eigenvectors and solve eigen value problems. (POs – 2, 3, 5,

PSO – 3) 5. Apply principles of matrix algebra to linear transformations. (POs – 2, 3, 5, PSO – 3)

62

MACHINE LEARNING Course Code: ECE15 Credits: 3:1:0:0 Prerequisite: Linear Algebra Contact Hours: 54 Course Coordinator: Dr. S. Sethu Selvi

UNIT – I Introduction: Probability theory, what is machine learning, example machine learning applications Supervised Learning: Learning a class from examples, VC dimension, PAC learning, Noise, Learning multiple classes, Regression, Model selection and generalization

UNIT – II Bayesian Learning: Classification, losses and risks, utility theory MLE, Evaluating an estimator, Bayes estimator, parametric classification Discriminant functions: Introduction, Discriminant functions, Least squares classification, Fisher’s linear discriminant, fixed basis functions, logistic regression

UNIT – III Multivariate methods: Multivariate data, Parameter Estimation, Estimation of Missing Values, Multivariate Normal Distribution, Multivariate Classification, Tuning Complexity, Discrete Features, Multivariate Regression Non-parametric methods: Nearest Neighbor Classifier, Nonparametric Density Estimation

UNIT – IV Maximum margin classifiers: SVM, Introduction to kernel methods, Overlapping class distributions, Relation to logistic regression, Multiclass SVMs, SVMs for regression Mixture models and EM: K – means clustering, Mixture of Gaussians, Hierarchical Clustering, Choosing the Number of Clusters

63

UNIT – V Dimensionality reduction: Combining Models Self Study: Implementation of Histograms, Covariance matrices, Regression with sampling, Bayes classifier, Perceptron algorithm and clustering algorithms Textbooks: 1. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, 2nd Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2010. 2. Christopher Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, CBS Publishers &

Distributors, 2010. Course Outcomes: 1. Appreciate the concepts and issues of various learning systems. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 1, 3) 2. Employ Bayesian learning and discriminant functions for classification. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4,

PSOs – 1, 3) 3. Evaluate multi-variate and non-parametric methods for regression and classification.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 1, 3) 4. Describe maximum margin classifiers and mixture models. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 1, 3) 5. Examine various dimensionality reduction algorithms. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 1, 3)

64

ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL VLSI DESIGN Course Code: ECE16 Course Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisite: CMOS VLSI Design Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Dr. M Nagabhushan

UNIT – I Single Stage Amplifiers: Common Source stage with different loads and source degeneration, Source follower, Common Gate stage, Cascode structures and Folded Cascode structures.

UNIT – II Differential Amplifier and Current Mirrors: Introduction to Differential Pair Amplifier, Quantitative Analysis to Differential Pair Amplifier, Common Mode Response, Differential Amplifiers with Different Loads, Effects of mismatches, Simple Current Mirrors, Cascode Current Mirrors, Differential Pair with Current Mirror Load.

UNIT – III Operational Amplifiers and Frequency Response: Op Amps Low Frequency Analysis, Telescopic Op Amps, Folded Cascode Op Amps, Two Stage Op Amps, Common Mode Feedback. Frequency response of common source amplifiers, Source Follower Common Gate, Cascode Structures and Folded Cascode Structures, Differential Amplifiers, Single Ended Differential Pair.

UNIT – IV Frequency Compensation and Stability: Frequency compensation techniques in Telescopic Op Amps, Folded Cascode Op Amps, Two Stage Op Amps.

UNIT – V Data Converters: Analog vs Digital and Discrete time signals, converting analog signals to digital signals, Sample and Hold characteristics, DAC Specifications, ADC Specifications, DAC Architectures, Digital input code, Resistor String, R – 2R Ladder Networks, Current steering, Charge scaling DACs, Cyclic DAC, Pipeline DAC, ADC Architectures. Flash type, 2-Step Flash, Pipeline ADC, Integrating ADC, Successive Approximation methods. Self Study: Differential amplifiers with different loads, Op-amp low frequency analysis, frequency response of cascode structures, ADC & DAC specifications, cyclic DAC

65

Textbooks: 1. B Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill

Education, 2016. 2. R. Jacob Baker, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout, and Simulation”, Wiley IEEE Press, 3rd

Edition, 2010. References: 1. Tony Chan Carusone, David Johns, Kenneth Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”,

2nd Edition, Wiley, 2011. 2. P E Allen, D R Holberg, “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, 2nd Edition, Oxford University

Press, 2002. 3. Gray Paul R, Meyer Robert G, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”, 5th

Edition, John Wiley, 2010. 4. Franco Sergio, “Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits”, 4th

Edition, McGraw Hill, 2011. Course Outcomes: 1. Appreciate the basic concepts of single amplifier design and cascode Amplifier. (POs – 1, 2,

3, 4, 6, 10, 11, PSOs – 1, 2) 2. Design a multistage amplifier using single stage amplifier concept. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 11,

PSOs – 1, 2) 3. Determine the poles and zeroes of a multi-pole system and analyze the frequency response and

stability of the system. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 6, 11, PSOs – 1, 2) 4. Design an operational amplifier to optimize its performance metrics. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10,

11, PSO – 1, 2) 5. Analyze different ADC/DAC architectures. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 11, PSOs – 1, 2)

66

NEURAL NETWORKS AND DEEP LEARNING Course Code: ECE17 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Machine Learning Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Dr. S. Sethu Selvi

UNIT – I Introduction: Human brain, neuron models, neural nets as directed graphs, feedback, neural architectures, knowledge representation, connection to artificial intelligence

UNIT – II Learning process: Error-correction learning, memory based learning, Hebbian learning, competitive learning, Boltzman learning, credit assignment, learning with and without a teacher, learning tasks, memory, statistical learning theory

UNIT – III Modern practical deep neural networks: Deep feed forward networks, regularization for deep learning, optimization for training deep models, convolutional networks

UNIT – IV Sequence Modeling: Recurrent and Recursive nets, Practical Methodology, applications

UNIT – V Deep Learning Research: Linear factor models, auto encoders, variational auto encoders, restricted Boltzman machine, generative adversarial networks Self Study: Implementation of neural network and deep learning algorithms Textbooks: 1. Simon Haykin, “Neural networks: A comprehensive foundation”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall,

New Delhi, 1999. 2. Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio and Aaron Courville, “Deep Learning”, MIT Press, 2016.

67

Course Outcomes: 1. Appreciate the concepts and applications of neural networks and deep learning (POs – 2, 3, 4,

5, PSOs – 1, 3) 2. Examine how various types of learning work and how they can be used (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5,

PSOs – 1, 3) 3. Apply deep feed forward and convolutional networks to solve practical problems (POs – 2, 3,

4, 5, PSOs – 1, 3) 4. Demonstrate how recurrent and recursive nets function and how practical problems can be

mapped to them (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSOs – 1, 3) 5. Design end-to-end deep learning architectures involving auto encoders, RBM, and generative

adversarial networks for practical applications (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSOs – 1, 3)

CURRICULUM





ELECTRONICS A ND COMMUNICATION

ENGINEERING

VII & VIII SEMESTER B.E.

2

About the Institute Ramaiah Institute of Technology (RIT) (formerly known as M. S. Ramaiah Institute of Technology) is a self-financing institution established in Bangalore in the year 1962 by the industrialist and philanthropist, Late Dr. M S Ramaiah. The institute is accredited with “A” grade by NAAC in 2016 and all engineering departments offering bachelor degree programs have been accredited by NBA. RIT is one of the few institutes with prescribed faculty student ratio and achieves excellent academic results. The institute was a participant of the Technical Education Quality Improvement Program (TEQIP), an initiative of the Government of India. All the departments have competent faculty, with 100% of them being postgraduates or doctorates. Some of the distinguished features of RIT are: State of the art laboratories, individual computing facility to all faculty members. All research departments are active with sponsored projects and more than 150 scholars are pursuing PhD. The Centre for Advanced Training and Continuing Education (CATCE), and Entrepreneurship Development Cell (EDC) have been set up on campus. RIT has a strong Placement and Training department with a committed team, a good Mentoring/Proctorial system, a fully equipped Sports department, large air-conditioned library with over 1,35,427 books with subscription to more than 300 International and National Journals. The Digital Library subscribes to several online e-journals like IEEE, JET etc. RIT is a member of DELNET, and AICTE INDEST Consortium. RIT has a modern auditorium, several hi-tech conference halls and all are air-conditioned with video conferencing facilities. It has excellent hostel facilities for boys and girls. RIT Alumni have distinguished themselves by occupying high positions in India and abroad and are in touch with the institute through an active Alumni Association. RIT obtained Academic Autonomy for all its UG and PG programs in the year 2007. As per the National Institutional Ranking Framework, MHRD, Government of India, Ramaiah Institute of Technology has achieved 60th rank in 2018 among the top 100 engineering colleges across India. About the Department The Department of Electronics and Communication was started in 1975 and has grown over the years in terms of stature and infrastructure. The department has well equipped simulation and electronic laboratories and is recognized as a research center under VTU. The department currently offers a B. E. program with an intake of 120, and two M. Tech programs, one in Digital Electronics and Communication, and one in VLSI Design and Embedded Systems, with intakes of 30 and 18 respectively. The department has a Center of Excellence in Food Technologies sponsored by VGST, Government of Karnataka. The department is equipped with numerous UG and PG labs, along with R & D facilities. Past and current research sponsoring agencies include DST, VTU, VGST and AICTE with funding amount worth Rs. 1 crore. The department has modern research ambitions to develop innovative solutions and products and to pursue various research activities focused towards national development in various advanced fields such as Signal Processing, Embedded Systems, Cognitive Sensors and RF Technology, Software Development and Mobile Technology.

3





organizations


Quality Policy




4

Program Educational Objectives (PEOs): PEO1: To train to be employed as successful professionals in a core area of their choice PEO2: To participate in lifelong learning/ higher education efforts to emerge as expert researchers and technologists PEO3: To develop their skills in ethical, professional, and managerial domains Program Outcomes (POs): PO1: Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems. PO2: Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences. PO3: Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental considerations. PO4: Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions. PO5: Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations. PO6: The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice. PO7: Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable development. PO8: Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.

5

PO9: Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings. PO10: Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions. PO11: Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments. PO12: Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.


6






7

SCHEME OF TEACHING

VII SEMESTER

SI. No.

Course Code Course Title Category Credits Contact

Hours L T P S Total 1. EC71 Wireless and Data

Communication PS-C 3 0 0 1 4 3

2. EC72 Information Theory and Coding PS-C 3 1 0 0 4 5 3. EC73 Embedded System Design PS-C 4 0 0 0 4 4 4. ECExx Departmental Elective PS-E 3 0 0 1 4 3 5. ECExx Departmental Elective PS-E 3 0 0 1 4 3 6. ECExx Departmental Elective PS-E 3 0 0 1 4 3 7. ECL74 Wireless & Data

Communication Laboratory PS-C 0 0 1 0 1 2

8. ECL75 Embedded System Design Lab PS-C 0 0 1 0 1 2 Total 19 1 2 4 26 25

VIII SEMESTER


No. Code

Hours

L T P S Total

1. xxOExx Open Elective OE 4 0 0 0 4 4

I

2. ECIN Internship/Departmental Elective (Industry collaborated course) IN 0 0 4 0 4 8

3. ECP Project Work PW 0 0 16 0 16 32

4. EAC Extra Curricular/Co-Curricular Activities EAC 0 0 2 0 2 4

Total 4 0 22 0 26 48

8

LIST OF ELECTIVES

SI. No.

Course Code Course Title Credits

L T P S Total 1. ECE18 Internet of Things (IoT) 3 0 0 1 4 2. ECE19 Multi-resolution Signal Processing 3 0 0 1 4 3. ECE20 Error Control Coding 3 0 0 1 4 4. ECE21 Cyber Security 3 0 0 1 4 5. ECE22 Optical Communication Networks 3 0 0 1 4 6. ECE23 Multimedia Communication 3 0 0 1 4 7. ECE24 Real Time Operating Systems (RTOS) 3 0 0 1 4 8. ECE25 Satellite Communication and GPS 3 0 0 1 4 9. ECE26 Wireless Networks 3 0 0 1 4 10. ECE27 Cryptography 3 0 0 1 4 11. ECE28 Advanced Computer Architecture 3 0 0 1 4

9

WIRELESS AND DATA COMMUNICATION

Course Code: EC71 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Pre requisites: Digital Communication Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinators: Flory Francis, T. D. Senthilkumar

UNIT – I Network Models: Introduction, OSI Model Layers, TCP/IP Suite Data Link Control: Introduction to data link layer, Point-to-Point Protocol Multiple Accesses: Random access – CSMA/CD, CSMA/CA, and Channelization

UNIT – II Wired LANs: Ethernet, IEEE standards, Standard Ethernet Network Layer: Logical addressing IPv4 and IPv6 Addresses, IPv4 and IPv6 format, Unicast Routing Protocols Transport layer: Process to Process delivery, UDP, TCP

UNIT – III Cellular Concepts: Frequency reuse, channel assignment, hand off, interference and system capacity, improving coverage and capacity in cellular systems – cell splitting, cell sectoring, microcell zone concept. Mobile Radio Propagation – Large Scale Path Loss: Free space propagation model, Relating power to electric field – Reflection, Diffraction, Scattering, Link budget design, log-distance path loss models, log normal shadowing.

UNIT – IV Mobile Radio Propagation – Small Scale Fading and Multipath: Small scale multipath propagation – Parameter of mobile multipath channels – Types of small scale fading. Diversity techniques: Polarization diversity, frequency diversity, time diversity and RAKE receiver, Space diversity – combining techniques and derivation of selection diversity improvement.

10

UNIT – V

Multiple Access Techniques: Introduction to multiple access techniques, FDMA, TDMA, CDMA and SDMA, Capacity of cellular FDMA, TDMA, and CDMA. Mobile Communication Systems: Transmit diversity: 2 x 1 MISO system and 2 x 2 MIMO system example – Space Time Block Codes (STBC) and spatial multiplexing, Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Self Study: HDLC protocol – HTTP & FTP protocols, Wireless LAN, Intersymbol interference, Rayleigh and Rician fading, Spread spectrum techniques, Examples of 2G/3G wireless systems: GSM, IS95, CDMA 2000, Introduction and features of LTE standards. Textbooks:

1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2016.

2. T. S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, Third Indian Reprint, 2010.

References:

1. Wayne Tomasi, “Introduction to Data Communication and Networking”, Pearson Education, 2007.

2. James Kurose Keith Ross “Computer Networking”, Pearson Education, 2017. 3. David Tse, Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”, Cambridge

University Press, 2005. 4. Arunabha Ghosh, Jan Zhang, Jefferey Andrews, Riaz Mohammed, “Fundamentals of

LTE”, Prentice Hall, Communications Engineering and Emerging Technologies, 2010.

Course Outcomes:

1. Discriminate the functionality between the layers in OSI model and TCP/IP suite (POs – 1, 2, 10, 12, PSO – 3)

2. Describe transport layer formats and the network layer routing algorithms in the internet (POs – 1, 2, 10, 12, PSO – 3)

3. Employ cellular concept to improve capacity of cellular system with limited radio spectrum (POs – 1, 2, 10, 12, PSO – 3)

4. Appreciate the importance of diversity technique in mobile fading channel. (POs – 1, 2, 10, 12, PSO – 3)

5. Employ the concept of multiple access techniques in 4G/5G mobile communication standards. (POs – 1, 2, 10, 12, PSO – 3)

11


Subject Code: EC72 Credits: 3:1:0:0 Prerequisites: Digital Communication Contact Hours: 56 Course Coordinator: V. Nuthan Prasad

UNIT – I

Information Theory: Introduction, Measure of information, Information content of message, Average Information content of symbols in Long Independent sequences, Source Coding: Prefix Codes, Source coding theorem, Kraft McMillan Inequality property – KMI. Encoding of the Source Output, Huffman codes, Arithmetic Coding, LZW Algorithm.

UNIT – II Information Channels: Communication Channels, Channel Models, Channel Matrix, Joint Probability Matrix, Mutual Information, Channel Capacity, Special Channel, Capacity of Binary Symmetric Channel, Binary Erasure Channel, Muroga’s Theorem, Continuous Channels.

UNIT – III Linear Block Codes: Introduction, matrix description of linear block codes, Error detection and error correction capabilities of linear block codes, Single error correcting Hamming codes, Table lookup decoding using standard array.

UNIT – IV

Binary Cyclic Codes: Algebraic Structure of Cyclic Codes, Encoding using an (n-k) bit shift register, Syndrome calculation, Error detection and correction

UNIT – V

Convolution Codes: Convolution Encoder, Time domain approach, Transform domain approach, code tree, Trellis and State Diagram, Viterbi decoding algorithm for the convolution code. Textbooks:

1. K. Sam Shanmugham, “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, John Wiley Publications, 1996.

2. Muralidhar Kulkarni, “Information Theory and Coding”, Wiley Publications, 1st Edition, 2015.

12

3. Shu Lin, Daniel J. Costello, “Error Control Coding”, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2004.

References:

1. Bernard Sklar, “Digital Communications”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2007. 2. Ranjan Bose, “Information Theory, Coding and Cryptography”, TMH Publication, 2nd

Edition, 2007. 3. Khalid Sayood, “Introduction to Data Compression”, Elsevier, 4th Edition, 2012.

Course Outcomes:

1. Apply basics of information theory to compute entropy, information rate and design various coding techniques (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 1, 2)

2. Categorize various channels for information transmission and interpret Shannon’s theorem in continuous channels (POs – 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 1, 2)

3. Design Linear Block Codes for error detection and error correction (POs – 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 2, 3)

4. Model Cyclic Block Codes using shift register for error detection and correction (POs – 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 2, 3)

5. Construct trellis diagrams for Convolution encoders and decode with Viterbi algorithm (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSOs – 2, 3)

13

EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN

Course Code: EC73 Credits: 4:0:0:0 Prerequisites: Microcontrollers Contact Hours: 56 Course Coordinator: Lakshmi Shrinivasan & Suma K V

UNIT – I

Introduction to Embedded Systems: Embedded system vs General computing system, characteristics of an embedded system, quality attributes of embedded system, core of embedded system, memory, sensors and actuators, communication interfaces, Embedded firmware design approaches, embedded firmware development languages.

UNIT – II

ARM7 Processor Fundamentals: ARM Architecture, Registers, current program status register, pipeline, exceptions, interrupts and vector table, core extensions. Introduction to ARM Instruction Set: Data Processing Instructions, Branch Instructions.

UNIT – III

Introduction to ARM7 Instruction Set: Load Store Instructions, Software Interrupt Instruction, Program Status Register Instructions, Loading Constants, and Conditional Execution. Introduction to the THUMB Instruction set: Thumb register usage, ARM7 – Thumb Interworking, other branch instructions, Data Processing Instructions, Single register Load – Store Instructions, Multiple register Load Store Instructions, Stack Instructions, and Software Interrupt Instruction.

UNIT – IV

Interrupts & Exception Handling in ARM7: Exception Handling Interrupts, Interrupt handling schemes, Design of system using GPIO’s (LCD interface, 4 x 4 Keypad), Timers.

UNIT – V

Embedded/Real – Time Operating System Concepts: Architecture of the Kernel, Tasks & Task Scheduler, and Interrupt service Routine. I/O peripherals: ADC, DAC, UART, SPI.

14

Textbooks:

1. Shibu K V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2009.

2. Andrew N. Sloss, “ARM system Developers Guide”, Elsevier, 1st Edition, 2008.

References:

1. K. V. K. K. Prasad, “Embedded Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design & Programming”, Dreamtech Press, 2005.

2. LP2148 user manual.

Course Outcomes:

1. Identify the requirements of an embedded system (POs – 1, 3, PSO – 2) 2. Familiarize with the ARM architecture (POs – 1, 3, 4, PSO – 2) 3. Write programs using ARM / THUMB instruction set (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSO – 2) 4. Analyze the various ways of handling exceptions and interrupts in ARM processor

(POs – 1, 2, 4, PSO – 2) 5. Develop embedded C programs to interact with various built in peripherals of ARM7

(POs –1, 2, 3, 4, PSO – 2)

15

WIRELESS AND DATA COMMUNICATION LABORATORY

Course Code: ECL74 Credits: 0:0:1:0 Pre requisites: Digital Communication Laboratory Contact Sessions: 14 Course Coordinators: Flory Francis and T. D. Senthilkumar

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS Data Communication

1. Write a program for error detection using CRC-CCITT (16 bits) using C. 2. Write a program for a HLDC frame to perform bit stuffing and destuffing in a single

frame. 3. Write a program for a HLDC frame to perform character stuffing and destuffing in a

single frame. 4. Write a program for encryption and decryption of text. 5. Simulate a three node point-to-point network with duplex links between them. Set the

queue size, vary the bandwidth and find the number of packets dropped using NS2. 6. Simulate a four node point-to-point network, and connect the links as follows: n0-n2, n1-

n2 and n2-n3. Apply TCP agent between n0-n3 and UDP agent between n1-n3. Apply relevant applications over TCP and UDP agents by changing the parameters and determine the number of packets sent by TCP/UDP using NS2.

Wireless Communication

1. Analyze the performance of Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) and M-ary Phase Shift Keying (PSK) scheme in AWGN channel, and compare the results with theoretical results.

2. Compute Bit Error Rate (BER) for different digital modulation schemes in frequency-flat and slowly varying fading channel.

3. Bit error rate analysis of digital communication receivers with Maximal Ratio Combining (MRC) receive diversity in frequency-flat and slowly varying fading channel.

4. Bit error rate analysis of digital communication receivers with Equal Gain Combining (EGC) receive diversity in frequency-flat and slowly varying fading channel.

5. Simulation of Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) techniques. 6. (a) Measurement of numerical aperture and attenuation loss in analog fiber optic link.

(b) Data multiplexing using fiber optic link

Textbooks:

1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data communication and Networking”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012.

2. J. G. Proakis and M. Salehi, “Contemporary Communication Systems using MATLAB”, PWS Publishing Company, 2007.

16

References:

1. James F. Kurose and Keith W. Ross, “Computer Networking: A Top Down Approach”, 5th Edition, Addison Wesley, 2009.

2. Larry L. Peterson and Bruce S Davie, “Computer Networks: A Systems Approach”, 5th Edition, Elsevier, 2011.

3. T. S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, Third Indian Reprint, 2010.

Course Outcomes:

1. Examine the performance of the algorithms of OSI model layers (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 3)

2. Use simulators to evaluate the network performance in different layers like NS2 (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 3)

3. Analyze the performance of the digital modulation receivers in AWGN and fading channel (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 3)

4. Analyze the performance of diversity receiver in multipath fading channel (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5, PSO – 3)

5. Examine the characteristics of analog and digital optical link (POs – 1, 2, 4, 5, PSO – 3)

17

EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY Course Code: ECL75 Credits: 0:0:1:0 Prerequisite: Microcontrollers Contact Sessions: 14 Course Coordinator: Lakshmi Shrinivasan & Suma K V

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS Part A: Assembly language programs 1. Search a key element “X” in a list of ‘n’ 16-bit numbers using binary search algorithm. 2. Sort a given set of ‘n’ 16-bit numbers in ascending order using bubble sort algorithm. 3. Reverse a given string and verify whether it is a palindrome or not. Display the

appropriate message. 4. Compute nCr using recursive procedure. Assume that ‘n’ and ‘r’ are non-negative

integers. 5. Read the current time and date from the system and display it in the standard format on

the screen. 6. ARM assembly language programs for data transfer, arithmetic, Thumb instructions and

logical operations. 7. C Programs for matrix multiplication, matrix addition and sparse matrix implementation.

Part B: Interfacing programs

1. Familiarize I/O ports of LPC 2148 – on/off control of LEDs using switches. 2. Display a given string using the LCD display interface. 3. Interface keypad and display the key pressed on LCD. 4. Waveform generation using the internal DAC of LPC 2148. 5. Convert a given analog voltage to digital using ADC of LPC 2148. 6. Interface a DC motor and control the speed of it. 7. Design and display a 2 digit counter (using timer/counter/capture module of LPC 2148)

Textbooks:

1. Andrew N. Sloss, “ARM System Developers Guide”, Elsevier, 1st Edition, 2008. 2. LPC 2148 user manual.

Reference:

1. Shibu K V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2nd Edition, 2009.

18

Course Outcomes:

1. Write ARM assembly level programs. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 12, PSO – 2) 2. Build subroutines using ARM/THUMB instructions (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, 9, PSO – 2 ) 3. Develop embedded C programs to interface display modules (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10,

PSO – 2) 4. Design embedded C programs to interact with data converters (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10,

PSO – 2) 5. Implement digital counter using internal timer module (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, PSO – 2)

19

INTERNSHIP

Course Code: ECIN Credits: 0:0:4:0 The evaluation of students will be based on an intermediate presentation, along with written report containing a Certificate from the employer. The rubrics for evaluation of the presentation and the questionnaire for the report will be distributed at the beginning of the internship.

Course Code

Course Name

No. of Hrs/Week Duration of Exam

(Hrs)

Marks Total

Marks Credits

Lecture Practical/

Field Work IA Exam

ECIN

Internship

- - - 50 50 100 4

Course Outcomes: 1. Analyze the working of complex technical systems/blocks. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 1, 2, 3) 2. Apply modern software tools effectively for design and development of complex technical

blocks. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, PSOs – 2, 3) 3. Appreciate the effectiveness of teamwork in completing complex tasks within deadlines.

(PO – 9) 4. Appreciate the requirements for constant technology updation. (PO – 12) 5. Create quality technical report describing all aspects of the internship. (PO – 10)

20

EVALUATION RUBRICS

Criteria Maximum Marks

Achievement Levels CO

Mapping Inadequate

(0% – 33 %)

Developing

(34% – 66 %)

Proficient

(67% – 100 %)

Marks Awarded

Complex Technical Blocks

10 No working knowledge of the domain.

Working knowledge of the domain, with some knowledge of internal details.

Detailed understanding of the system, along with underlying mechanisms.

CO 1

Modern Software Tools

10 Has not applied any modern tools for the design/analysis of the technical block diagrams.

Has applied tools, but without proper working knowledge, and has not obtained satisfactory results.

Has applied tools effectively to design/ analyze/debug/optimize complex technical blocks.

CO 2

Teamwork 10 Does not understand the importance of teamwork in a practical setting.

Has utilized/partaken in team efforts to a limited extent.

Has effectively participated as a member in a team, due to which significant results have been obtained.

CO 3

Lifelong Learning 10 No understanding of the requirements for lifelong learning in the engineering profession.

Can present examples of the impact of lifelong learning in the engineering industry.

Can present examples of the impact of lifelong learning, along with the requirement of skills updation in the modern engineering profession.

CO 4

Report Writing 10 Not professionally written, content not covering all items of course outcome.

Professional report writing, with some of the course outcomes addressed as part of the report.

Professionally prepared report, addressing to full extant all the items listed as part of the required outcomes of the internship.

CO 5

TOTAL MARKS AWARDED

21

PROJECT

Course Code: ECP Credits: 0:0:16:0 The evaluation of students will be based on an intermediate presentation, along with written report containing a Certificate from the employer. The rubrics for evaluation of the presentation and the questionnaire for the report will be distributed at the beginning of the internship.

Course Code

Course Name


(Hrs)

Marks

Total Marks

Credits Lecture

Practical/

Field Work IA Exam

ECP Project - - - 50 50 100 16

Course Outcomes: 1. Display an ability to undertake research activities by formulating a hypothesis and testing

through appropriate experiments. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 10, PSO – 1) 2. Choose and use modern tools most suitable to the chosen technical problem. (POs – 5, 11,

PSO – 2, 3) 3. Analyze and evaluate technical block diagrams and propose suitable modifications to

improve performance. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 2, 3) 4. Work effectively as a member or a leader of a team. (POs – 9, 11) 5. Communicate technical content effectively through written report and oral presentations.

(POs – 10, PSOs – 2, 3)

22

Rubrics for Evaluation (Maximum Marks = 50)

Two reviews will be conducted with the same rubrics, the marks will be averaged. Marks

Awarded GROUP Poor Satisfactory Proficient

Modern Tool Usage

(10)

Tools chosen are not appropriate for the required analysis, or are obsolete. Results are incomplete. (0 – 3)

Tools chosen are appropriate, along with the most modern version. Results are incomplete/incorrect. (4 – 7)

Tools chosen are appropriate, along with results that are matching theoretical arguments. (8 – 10)

Teamwork

(5)

No cohesive teamwork noticeable, with individuals working separately without coordination. (0 – 1)

Individuals working together, but no clear separation of tasks. (2 – 3)

Teamwork effectively used to achieve goals on schedule. (4 – 5)

Project Management

(5)

No goals and/or timelines set for project. (0 – 1)

Goals and times set, but no continuous evaluation of progress. (2 – 3)

Division into timelines and intermediate goals, along with periodic reviews and observations. (4 – 5)

Report Writing (10)

Non uniform/improper formatting, details are missing, language and grammar are poor. Poor reference list. (0 – 1)

Clear formatting, but lacking detail. Grammar and writing are not suitable. Reference list is partial and not in proper format. (4 – 7)

Clear formatting, with concise and precise expression of ideas. Reference list is adequate with all details. (8 – 10)

23

INDIVIDUAL

Name & USN: Poor Satisfactory Proficient Marks

Awarded

Effort & Contribution

(5)

The individual did not contribute to the project and failed to meet responsibilities. The individual does not identify key performance criteria of the system.(0 – 3)

The individual contributed modestly to the project, and is able to understand some of the design criteria in the project. (4 – 7)

The individual has contributed significantly to the project, and is informed about all the design aspects that can impact the performance. (8 – 10)

Research/Experimentation (10)

Is not familiar with the tools used or the technical block diagram, or the design of experiments to test hypothesis. (0 – 3)

Is familiar with the details of the technical implementation. Has used the tools, but not to their full extant. Experiments are run, but with no hypothesis testing.(4 – 7)

Is completely familiar with all elements of the technical block diagram and their functionalities. Have run experiments with an objective to testing specific hypotheses. (8 – 10)

Presentation

(5)

No eye contact, voice is low and content preparation and delivery is dry. Poor language skills.(0 – 3)

Content is well prepared but delivery is poor, language skills are inadequate. (4 – 7)

Connects with the audience with a suitably designed content and professional delivery. (8 – 10)

TOTAL (50)

24

EXTRA AND CO-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES

Course Code: EAC Credits: 0:0:2:0

Course Code

Course Name


(Hrs)

Marks

Total Marks

Credits Lecture

Practical/

Field Work IA Exam

EAC

Extra and

Co-

Curricular

Activities

- - - 100 - 50 2

Course Outcomes:

1. Apply basic engineering knowledge in competitive situations such as quizzes and tech-fests. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

2. Design and develop technical solutions that are beneficial to the society. (POs – 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)

3. Communicate technical and non-technical ideas effectively to audiences at different levels. (PO – 10)

4. Contribute productively to societal causes through their knowledge in technical domains. (POs – 6, 7, 8)

5. Participate effectively as part of a team to perform technical and non-technical activities. (PO – 9)

25

Evaluation Rubrics – Extra/Co-Curricular Activities

The concerned faculty will collect proof and provide marks for the activities, based on the rubrics. Marks may be added, for a total not exceeding Fifty (50) marks for Extra-Curricular activities/semester and Fifty (50) marks for Co-Curricular activities/semester.

Average

(0 – 25 marks/event)

Satisfactory


Good


Excellent


Organizing Department Level activities such as orientation, farewell, etc.

Organized activities at the college level such as robotics competitions, hackathons etc.

Worked with professional societies (IEEE, NSS) in student/college chapter or individually, for organizing events inside/outside college. (including UDBHAV)

National/International Conferences, Meetings, Symposia, etc., participated as part of organizing committee.

Participating Attending activities organized by professional societies.

Participated in workshops in the domain or outside the domain, organized at a prominent location/organization outside college. Inter-College level activities such as quizzes, debates, competitions, etc. in RIT or at another college.

Volunteering work with NGOs, Social Organizations, Hospitals, and similar activities undertaken for a period of time not lesser than one week. Emerged victorious in inter-college/public competitions activities such as quizzes, hackathons, technical competitions, non-technical events such as theatre, debates etc.

National/International Level events, such as national conclaves, NCC or other camps, society meetings etc. DECA Core Committee Members, NSS Core Committee Members, and similar college level core committee members.

RIT Level Sports Day participation, Udbhav participation, Technical competitions participation.

Active members of societies in college such as Debate Society etc.

Emerged victorious in events such as sports day, quizzes/debates etc. in college level events.

College Team members in sports such as cricket, tennis, etc.

26

INTERNET OF THINGS (IoT)

Subject Code: ECE18 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Microcontrollers Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Lakshmi S.

UNIT – I

Introduction & concepts: Definition and Characteristics of IoT, Things in IoT, IoT Protocols, IoT Functional Blocks, IoT Communication Models, IoT Communication APIs, IoT Enabling Technologies, IoT Levels and Deployment Templates, IoT and M2M, SDN and NFV for IoT, IoT System Management with NETCONFIG-YANG

UNIT – II

Developing Internet of Things: IoT Platform Design Methodology, Specifications: Requirements, Process, Domain, Information, Services, Level, Functional, Operational, Integration, Application Development Python Language: Data Types & Data Structures, Control Flow, Functions, Modules, Packages, File Handling, Date & Time Operations, Classes, Python Packages of Interest for IoT

UNIT – III

IoT Physical Devices and End Points: Basic Building Blocks of an IoT Device, Raspberry Pi, Linux on Raspberry Pi, Raspberry Pi Interfaces: Serial, SPI, I2C Programming Raspberry Pi with Python: Controlling LED, Interfacing Switch, Interfacing Light Sensor

UNIT – IV

Cloud and Data Analytics: Introduction to cloud storage Models and Communication APIs, Python Web Application Framework: Django, Web Services for IoT, SkyNet Messaging Platform, Data Analytics for IoT, Apache: Hadoop, Oozie, Storm, Real-Time Data Analysis, Tools for IoT

UNIT – V

IoT Case Studies: Home Automation: Smart Lighting, Home Intrusion Detection; Cities: Smart Parking Environment: Weather Monitoring System, Weather Reporting Bot, Air Pollution Monitoring, Forest Fire Detection; Agriculture – Smart Irrigation, IoT Printer Self Study: Exploring programming using Raspberry Pi for application prototypes

27

Textbook:

1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things: A Hands-on Approach”, Universities Press, 2015.

References:

1. Ovidiu Vermesan, Peter Friess, “Internet of Things – From Research and Innovation to Market Deployment”, River Publishers Series in Communication, June 2014.

2. Adrian McEwen, Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, Wiley Publications, 2013.

Course Outcomes: 1. Describe the OSI Model for the IoT/M2M Systems. (POs – 1, 2, 12, PSO – 3) 2. Learn basics of design, integration and applications of IoT models. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 12,

PSO – 3) 3. Acquire the knowledge of basic blocks of IOT devices using Raspberry Pi. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5,

12, PSO – 3) 4. Understand cloud storage models and web services for IoT. (POs – 1, 2, 4, 12, PSO – 3) 5. Appraise with various case studies. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 12, PSO – 3)

28

MULTI-RESOLUTION SIGNAL PROCESSING

Course Code: ECE19 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Digital Signal Processing Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Maya V. Karki

UNIT – I

Time Frequency Analysis of Signals: Introduction, Short Time Fourier Transform, Gabor transform, Tiling in time frequency plane.

UNIT – II

Multi-resolution analysis: Scaling functions, Construction of wavelet basis MRA, Haar scaling functions and function spaces, nested spaces, Haar wavelet function

UNIT – III

Multi-scale Transforms: Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT), Ridgelet Transform, Curvelet Transform, Contourlet Transform

UNIT – IV

Theory of Subband Decomposition: Introduction, Multirate systems, Polyphase Decomposition, Two Channel Filter bank, Biorthogonal filters, Lifting scheme, Applications of multirate filtering

UNIT – V

Applications of Multi-scale Transforms: Multitone modulation, Image denoising, Progressive pattern recognition, biomedical signal processing.

Self Study: DFT, STFT and Gabor transform on 1D non-stationary signal, Illustration of scale, frequency and translation on 1D non stationary signal, Application of multi-scale transforms on 2D signals, Implementation of sub-band adaptive filters, Image denoising using multi-scale transforms.

Textbooks:

1. K. P. Soman, K. I. Ramachandran, “Insight into Wavelets from Theory to Practice”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2005.

2. Agostino Abbate, Casimer DeCusatis, Pankaj K. Das, “Wavelets and Subbands: Fundamentals and Applications”, Birkhäuser, 2002.

3. Aparna Vyas, Soowhan Yu, Joonki Paik, “Multiscale Transforms with Applications to Image Processing”, Springer Nature Singapore Pvt. Ltd, 2018.

29

References:

1. P. P. Vaidyanathan, “Multirate systems and filter banks”, Pearson Education, Second Impression, 2008.

2. M. Vetterli, I. Kovacevic, “Wavelets and Subband Processing”, Prentice Hall, 1995. 3. L. Prasad, S. S. Iyengar, “Wavelet Analysis with Applications to Image Processing”,

CRC Press, 1997. 4. Ivan W. Selesnick, Richard G. Baraniuk, and Nick G. Kingsbury, “The Dual Tree

Complex Wavelet Transform”, IEEE Signal Processing Magazine, November 2005

Course Outcomes: 1. Apply STFT and Gabor transform on a given signal (POs – 1, 2, 3, PSO – 3) 2. Analyze multi-scale signals and systems. (POs – 2, 3, 4, PSO – 3) 3. Apply various multi-scale transforms on a 2D signal. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 3) 4. Construct poly phase decomposition and biorthogonal filters (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 3) 5. Employ multi-scale transforms for de-noising, pattern recognition and in biomedical signal

analysis. (POs – 3, 4, 5, PSO – 3)

30

ERROR CONTROL CODING Subject Code: ECE20 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Information Theory and Coding Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: V. Nuthan Prasad

UNIT – I

Introduction to algebra: Groups, Fields, binary field arithmetic, Construction of Galois Field GF (2m) and its properties, Computation using Galois filed GF (2m) arithmetic, Vector spaces and matrices on Galois field.

UNIT – II Linear block codes: Generator and parity check matrices, Encoding circuits, Syndrome and error detection and error correcting capabilities, Minimum distance considerations, decoding circuits, Hamming codes, Reed-Muller codes.

UNIT – III

Cyclic codes: Introduction, Generator and parity check polynomials, Encoding using multiplication circuits, Systematic cyclic codes – generator matrix for cyclic code, Encoding using feedback shift register circuits, Meggitt decoder, Error trapping decoding, Cyclic hamming codes, Golay code, Shortened cyclic codes.

UNIT – IV BCH codes: Binary primitive BCH codes, Decoding procedures, Implementation of Galois field arithmetic, Implementation of error correction.

UNIT – V Convolutional codes: Encoding of convolutional codes, Viterbi decoding algorithm for decoding, soft output Viterbi algorithm, Stack and Fano sequential decoding algorithms, Self Study: Matrices on Galois field, Syndrome and error detection, Hamming codes, Generator matrix for cyclic code, Encoding using shift register circuit, Encoding of convolutional codes, Implementation of Hamming codes, cyclic codes, convolutional codes and Viterbi algorithm

31

Textbooks:

1. Shu Lin and Daniel J. Costello. Jr, “Error control coding”, 2nd Edition, Pearson, Prentice Hall, 2010.

2. Blahut. R. E, “Theory and practice of Error control codes”, Addison Wesley, 1984.

References:

1. Patrick Guy Farrell, Jorge Castineira Moreira, “Essentials of Error Control Coding”, John Wiley & Sons, 2010.

2. Todd K. Moon, “Error Correcting Codes”, John Wiley & Sons, 1st Edition, 2006. Course Outcomes: 1. Apply properties of Galois Field to Groups, Fields, Vector Spaces, row space and sub-spaces.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSO – 1) 2. Describe RM codes in error detection and error correction. (POs – 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 1, 3) 3. Demonstrate cyclic block codes in error detection and correction. (POs – 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 2, 3) 4. Illustrate various BCH Codes and apply them for error detection & correction. (POs – 2, 3, 4,

PSOs – 2, 3) 5. Construct higher-order error-control codes and use Viterbi & stack algorithms for decoding.

(POs – 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 2, 3)

32

CYBER SECURITY

Subject Code: ECE21 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Cryptography Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Shreedarshan K

UNIT – I

Transport Level Security: Web Security Considerations, Secure Sockets Layer, HTTPS, Secure Shell (SSH)

UNIT – II

E-mail Security: Pretty Good Privacy, S/MIME, Domain keys identified mail

UNIT – III

IP Security: IP Security Overview, Encapsulation Security Payload (ESP), combining security Associations Internet Key Exchange.

UNIT – IV

Network Security: Security Architecture, anti pattern: signature based malware detection versus polymorphic threads, document driven certification and accreditation, policy driven security certifications. Refactored solution: reputational, Problems: cyber anti patterns concept, forces in cyber anti patterns, cyber anti pattern templates, cyber security anti pattern catalog

UNIT – V

Cyber Network Security: Enterprise security using Zachman framework, Zachman framework for enterprise architecture, primitive models versus composite models, architectural problem solving patterns, enterprise workshop, matrix mining, mini patterns for problem solving meetings. Case study: cyber security hands on – managing administrations and root accounts, installing hardware, reimaging OS.

Self Study: Transport Layer Security, IP Security Policy, Cryptographic Suites, behavioral and entropy based malware detection, Case study: installing system protection/ antimalware, configuring firewalls.

Textbooks:

1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security Principles and Practice”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education Inc., 2014.

2. Thomas J. Mowbray, “Cyber Security – Managing Systems, Conducting Testing, and Investigating Intrusions”, Wiley, 2014.

33

References:

1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Cryptography and Network Security”, 2nd Edition, TMH 2010. 2. Atul Kahate, “Cryptography and Network Security”, 3rd Edition, TMH, 2017.

Course Outcomes: 1. Use basic transport level security to network systems. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3) 2. Illustrate e-mail security methods. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3) 3. Illustrate IP security techniques. (POs – 1, 2, 3, PSOs – 1, 3) 4. Generate some cyber anti pattern templates. (POs – 1, 2, 3, PSOs – 1, 3) 5. Solve patterns related to cyber security using different composite models. (PO – 1, 2, 3,

PSOs – 1, 3)

34

OPTICAL COMMUNICATION NETWORKS

Subject Code: ECE22 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Digital Communication Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: M. Nagabushanam

UNIT – I

Optical fiber waveguides: Historical development, general system, Advantages of optical fiber communication, Optical fiber waveguides: Ray theory transmission, Modes in planar guide, Phase and group velocity, Cylindrical fiber: Modes, Step index fibers, Graded index fibers, Single mode fibers, Cut off wavelength.

UNIT – II

Transmission characteristics of optical fibers: Attenuation, material absorption losses, linear and nonlinear scattering loss, fiber bend loss, dispersion chromatic dispersion, intermodal dispersion, polarization, nonlinear effects. Digital Links: Point to point links, system considerations, link power budget, rise time budget analysis.

UNIT – III

Optical Sources & Detector: Optical emissions from semiconductor, semiconductor/non semiconductor injection laser & structures, LED power & efficiency, optical detection principles, absorption, quantum efficiency, responsivity, semiconductor photo diodes with and without internal gain.

UNIT – IV

Client layers of the optical layer: SONET/SDH, Multiplexing SONET/SDH Layers, SONET Frame Structure SONET/SDH Physical Layer, optical transports Network, Ethernet, IP, Multiprotocol label switching.

UNIT –V

WDM System: Optical Line Terminals, Optical Line Amplifiers, Optical Add/Drop Multiplexers, OADM Architectures, Reconfigurable OADMs, Optical Cross connects. Self Study: Mode field diameter, effective refractive index, soliton propagation, LED structures and characteristics, resilient packet ring, All optical OXC Configurations

35

Textbooks:

1. John M. Senior, “Optical Fiber Communication: Principles and Practice”, 3rd Edition, PHI, 2010.

2. Rajiv Ramaswami, Kumar N. Sivarajan, Galen H. Sasaki, “Optical networks”, 3rd Edition Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2010.

3. Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communications”, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2015. References:

1. Govind P. Agrawal, “Fiber Optic Communication System”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2010.

2. Djafark Mynbaev and Lowell L. Scheiner, “Fiber Optic Communication Technology”, Pearson Education, 2006.

Course Outcomes:

1. Describe the light propagation in an optical fiber waveguide. (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 3) 2. Apply the optical losses in the power budget estimation. (POs – 1, 2, 3, PSO – 3) 3. Appreciate the efficiency of optical sources and detectors in the optical communication

system. (POs – 2, 3, 8, PSO – 3) 4. Demonstrate the principle of SONET/SDH standard in optical networks. (POs – 2, 3, 8,

PSO – 3) 5. Demonstrate the principle of optical amplifiers and WDM components. (POs – 2, 3, 8,

PSO – 3)

36

MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION

Subject Code: ECE23 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Information theory and Coding Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Maya V Karki

UNIT – I

Multimedia Communications and Information Representation: Introduction, multimedia information representation, multimedia networks, multimedia applications, application and networking terminology

UNIT – II

Multimedia operating systems and synchronization: Multimedia resource management and process management, Synchronization: Notion of synchronization, presentation requirements, reference model for synchronization, Synchronization specification.

UNIT – III

Text and Image Compression: Text and image representation, Compression Principles, Text compression: Huffman coding, Arithmetic coding, Dictionary based (LZW) coding, Image Compression: KL transform, DCT, Wavelet based compression (EZW), JPEG and JPEG 2000

UNIT – IV

Audio Compression Principles and Standards: Basic of audio compression techniques: ADPCM, Speech coding, Vocoders, Psychoacoustics, MPEG Audio Compression: MPEG layers, MPEG audio compression algorithm, MPEG – 2 and MPEG – 4, MPEG – 7 and MPEG –21.

UNIT – V

Video Compression Principles and standards: Introduction to video compression, Video compression based on motion compensation, search for motion vectors, H.261, H.263 and H.264 standard. MPEG – 1, MPEG – 2, MPEG – 4 and MPEG – 7 standards.

Self Study: Multimedia applications, Text and image representation, audio representation, Psychoacoustics, H.263, MPEG – 7 standards

Textbooks:

1. Fred Halsall, “Multimedia Communications, Applications, Networks, Protocols and Standards”, Pearson Education, 2001.

2. Ze Nian Li, Mark S Drew, “Fundamentals of Multimedia” Pearson Edition, 2004.

37

References:

1. Raif Steinmetz, Klara Nahrstedt, “Multimedia: Computing, Communications and Applications”, Pearson Education, 2002.

2. K. Sayood, “Introduction to Data Compression”, 3rd Edition, Harcourt India Pvt. Ltd., Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012.

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand the basics of multimedia communication, information representation, network terminology and multimedia applications. (POs – 1, 2, 4, PSO – 3)

2. Identify the requirements of multimedia operating systems and synchronization. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSO – 3)

3. Apply lossless and lossy compression techniques to text and images. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 3)

4. Demonstrate audio compression standards. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 3) 5. Distinguish between various video compression standards. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 5, PSO – 3)

38

REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS (RTOS)

Course Code: ECE24 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisite: Operating Systems Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinators: Lakshmi Shrinivasan & Suma K V

UNIT – I

Introduction to Real Time Embedded Systems: Brief history of Real Time Systems and Embedded Systems. System Resources: Resource Analysis, Real Time Service Utility, Scheduling Classes, The Cyclic Executive, Scheduler Concepts, Preemptive Fixed Priority Scheduling Policies, Real-Time OS, Thread Safe Reentrant Functions.

UNIT – II

Processing: Preemptive Fixed Priority Policy, Feasibility, Rate Monotonic least upper bound, and Necessary and Sufficient feasibility, Deadline – Monotonic Policy, Dynamic priority policies. I/O Resources: Worst-case Execution time, Intermediate I/O, Execution efficiency, I/O Architecture. Memory: Physical hierarchy, Capacity and allocation, Shared Memory, ECC Memory, Flash file systems.

UNIT – III

Multi-resource Services: Locking, Deadlock and livestock, Critical sections to protect shared resources, priority inversion. Soft Real-Time Services: Missed Deadlines, QoS, Alternatives to rate monotonic policy, mixed hard and soft real-time services. Embedded System Components: Firmware components, RTOS system software mechanisms, Software application components.

UNIT – IV

Debugging Components: Exceptions assert, Checking return codes, Single-step debugging, kernel scheduler traces, Test access ports, Trace ports, Power-On self-test and diagnostics, External test equipment, Application-level debugging.

39

Performance Tuning: Basic concepts of drill-down tuning, hardware – supported profiling and tracing, Building performance monitoring into software, Path length, Efficiency, and Call frequency, Fundamental optimizations.

UNIT – V

High availability and Reliability Design: Reliability and Availability, Similarities and differences, Reliability, Reliable software, Available software, Design tradeoffs, Hierarchical applications for Fail-safe design. Design of RTOS: PIC microcontroller.

Self Study: Programming in C on Linux platform, Implement Semaphore and pipes, realize IPC using message queues, pipes, socket programming, creating threads and multithreads using fork() function, setting up the different priority levels of threads, data transfer between parent and child process.

Textbooks:

1. Sam Siewert, “Real-Time Embedded Systems and Components”, Cengage Learning Indian Edition, 2007.

2. Myke Predko, “Programming and Customizing the PIC microcontroller”, 3rd Edition, TMH, 2008.

Reference:

1. Dr. K. V. K. K. Prasad, “Embedded/Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design and Programming”, Dreamtech Press, India, 2005.

Course Outcomes:

1. Appreciate real time embedded systems. (POs – 1, 2, PSO – 2) 2. Select suitable scheduling techniques, I/O resource and real time memory for an embedded

system. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 6, PSO – 2) 3. Interpret the soft real time services, multi resource sharing and various embedded system

components in real time system design. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, PSO – 2) 4. Analyze and use software debugging components and performance tuning methods.

(POs – 1, 2, 3, 7, PSO – 2) 5. Utilize and build a RTOS API for a given microcontroller. (POs – 1, 3, 5, PSO – 2)

40

SATELLITE COMMUNICATION AND GPS

Course Code: ECE25 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisite: Microwave Devices and Radar Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Akkamahadevi M B

UNIT – I

Introduction and Orbital Mechanics: Introduction, Kepler's Law, Orbital elements, Orbital perturbations, Launches and launch vehicles, launches with geostationary orbit with AKM launch.

UNIT – II

Space Segment: Power supply, Attitude and Control system, Spin stabilization, Momentum control, Telemetry, Tracking and Command Subsystems, Transponders, Low noise amplifier & Receivers, equipment reliability.

UNIT – III

Satellite Link Design: Basic transmission theory, System noise, Uplink, Concept of saturation of TWTA, Downlink, Combined uplink and downlink C/N ratio & Intermodulation noise system design example.

Satellite Services: Introduction, VSATs, GPS system and Orbcomm.

UNIT – IV

GPS System: Overview of the GPS System, Space Segment Description, Control Segment, User Segment.

UNIT – V

GPS Signal Acquisition and Tracking: GPS Receiver Code and Carrier Tracking, Measurement Errors and Tracking Thresholds, Signal Acquisition, Sequence of Initial Receiver Operations. Self Study: Direct launch, Antenna subsystem, Satellite mobile services, Radar sat, Indian space program for civil aviation, working principle of GPS in mobile.

41

Textbooks:

1. Dennis Roddy, “Satellite Communications”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education India, 2008.

2. Elliott D. Kaplan and Christopher J. Hegarty, “Understanding GPS Principles and Applications”, 2nd Edition, Artech House Inc., 2006.

References:

1. Timothy Pratt, Charles W. Bostian, Jeremy E. Allnutt, “Satellite Communications”, 2nd Edition , John Wiley & Sons, 2010.

2. Pratap Misra and Per Enge, “Global Positioning System – Signals, Measurements and Performance”, 2nd Edition, Ganga Jamuna Press, 2010.

Course Outcomes: 1. Identify the significance of Kepler’s laws of orbital mechanism and perturbations. (POs –1,

2, 6, PSO – 3) 2. Illustrate the subsystems of the satellite. (POs – 1, 2, 6, PSO – 3) 3. Design of satellite link budget and analyze the different satellite services for practical

applications. (POs – 1, 2, 6, PSO – 3) 4. Discuss the GPS system segments. (POs – 1, 2, 6, PSO – 3) 5. Describe the GPS signal acquisition and tracking. (POs – 1, 2, 6, PSO – 3)

42

WIRELESS NETWORKS

Subject Code: ECE26 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Digital Communication Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinators: Flory Francis, Mamtha Mohan

UNIT – I

Wireless Local Area Networks (WLANs): WLAN Standards – IEEE 802.11 and its variants, WLAN Protocols – Physical Layer Protocols, MAC Layer Protocols and WLAN applications.

Wireless Body Area Networks (WBANs): Protocols – Physical Layer techniques, MAC Layer Protocols, WBAN Technologies – Bluetooth, Zigbee, UWB and WBAN applications.

UNIT – II

Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPANs): Network Architecture- Piconet and Scatternet, WPAN Technologies and Protocols -IEEE 802.15.5: Mesh WPAN and WPAN Applications.

Wireless Metropolitan Area Networks (WMANs): WiMAX, Broadband Wireless Networks – WLL, LMDS, MMDS, WMAN Applications.

Wireless Wide Area Networks (WWANs): Interworking of WWAN and WWAN applications.

UNIT – III

MAC Protocols for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Introduction, Issues in designing a MAC protocol for Ad hoc wireless Networks, Design goals of a MAC protocol for Ad hoc wireless Networks, Classification of MAC protocols. Contention - based MAC protocols with scheduling mechanism, MAC protocols that use directional antennas, Other MAC protocols.

UNIT – IV

MAC Protocols for Wireless Sensor Networks: Introduction, Background, Fundamentals of MAC Protocols, Performance Requirements, Common Protocols, MAC Protocols for WSNs, Schedule-Based Protocols, Random Access-Based Protocols, Sensor-MAC, Case Study: Protocol Overview, Periodic Listen and Sleep Operations.

UNIT – V

Routing Protocols for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Introduction, Issues in designing a routing protocol for Ad hoc wireless Networks, Classification of routing protocols, table drive routing protocol, On-demand routing protocol, Hybrid routing protocol, Routing protocols with effective flooding mechanisms, Hierarchical routing protocols, Power aware routing protocols.

43

Self Study: WLAN applications, WBAN applications, WPAN Applications, WMAN Applications, WWAN applications, Classification of MAC protocols of Ad Hoc wireless networks, Common WSN MAC Protocols, Classification of routing protocols of Ad Hoc wireless networks.

Textbooks:

1. P. Kaveh and Krishnamurthy, “Principles of Wireless network: A unified approach”, 1st

Edition, Prentice Hall, 2006. 2. Ozan K. Tonguz and Gianguigi Ferrari, “Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: A Communication

– Theoretic Perspective”, 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2009. 3. Feng Zhao and Leonidas Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks – An Information

Processing Approach”, 1st Edition, Elsevier, 2007. References:

1. Sunilkumar. S. Manvi, and Mahabaleshwar. S. Kakkasageri, “Wireless and Mobile Networks - Concepts and Protocols”, 1st Edition, John Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., 2010.

2. C. Siva Ram Murthy and B. S. Manoj, “Ad Hoc wireless Networks”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.

3. Holger Karl and Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley, 2005.

Course Outcomes: 1. Discuss the standards of WLANs and WBANs. (POs – 1, 6, 7, PSO – 3) 2. Describe the significance of WPANs, WMANs and WWANs. (POs – 1, 6, 7, PSO – 3) 3. Explain the MAC protocols for Ad Hoc wireless networks. (POs – 1, 6, 7, PSO – 3) 4. Summarize the MAC Protocols for Wireless Sensor Networks. (PO – 1, 6, 7, PSO – 3) 5. Outline the Routing Protocols for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks. (PO – 1, 6, 7, PSO – 3)

44

CRYPTOGRAPHY

Subject Code: ECE27 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Digital Communication Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinator: Shreedarshan K

UNIT – I

Basic Concepts of Number Theory and Finite Fields: Divisibility and the divisibility algorithm, Euclidean algorithm, Modular arithmetic, Groups, Finite fields of the form GF(p), Polynomial arithmetic, Finite fields of the form GF(2n), Prime Numbers, Fermat’s and Euler’s theorem, Primality testing, Chinese Remainder theorem, Discrete logarithm.

UNIT – II

Classical Encryption Techniques: Symmetric cipher model, Substitution techniques, Steganography

Symmetric Ciphers: Data encryption standard (DES)

UNIT – III

Symmetric Ciphers: The AES Cipher. Pseudo-Random-Sequence Generators and Stream Ciphers: Linear Congruential Generators, Linear Feedback Shift Registers, Design and analysis of stream ciphers, Stream ciphers using LFSRs

UNIT – IV

Principles of Public-Key Cryptosystems: The RSA algorithm, Diffie - Hellman Key Exchange, Elgamal Cryptosystem, Elliptic Curve Arithmetic, Elliptic Curve Cryptography

UNIT – V

Digital Watermarking Fundamentals: Differences between watermarking and steganography, Applications of steganography, Least Significant-bit substitution, Spatial Domain Watermarking, Frequency Domain watermarking, Fragile Watermark.

Self Study: Rings and Fields, Transposition techniques, Traditional Block Cipher structure, Classification in Digital Watermarking based on characteristics and applications, Types of Steganography, Random Sequence Generation.

45

Textbooks:

1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security Principles and Practice”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education Inc., 2014.

2. Frank Y. Shih, “Digital Watermarking and Steganography”, CRC Press, 2012. References:

1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Cryptography and Network Security”, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2010. 2. Atul Kahate, “Cryptography and Network Security”, 3rd Edition, TMH, 2017.

Course Outcomes: 1. Use basic cryptographic algorithms to encrypt the data. (POs – 1, 2, PSOs – 1, 3) 2. Generate some pseudorandom numbers required for cryptographic applications. (POs – 1, 2,

PSOs – 1, 3) 3. Apply symmetric cipher for digital data. (POs – 1, 2, 3, PSOs – 1, 3) 4. Realize asymmetric cipher algorithms using digital data. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4, PSOs – 1, 3) 5. Perform techniques involving digital watermarking and steganography. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 4,

PSOs – 1, 3)

46

ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE

Subject Code: ECE28 Credits: 3:0:0:1 Prerequisites: Computer Organisation Contact Hours: 42 Course Coordinators: Maya V Karki, V. Anandi

UNIT – I

Parallel Computer Models: Multiprocessors and multicomputer, Multivectors and SIMD computers.

Program and Network Properties: Conditions of parallelism, Data and resource Dependences, Hardware and software parallelism, Program partitioning and scheduling.

UNIT – II

Program flow mechanisms: Data flow Architecture, Demand driven mechanisms.

Principles of Scalable Performance: Parallel Processing Applications, Speedup Performance Laws, Scalability Analysis and Approaches.

UNIT – III

Speedup Performance Laws: Amdhal’s law, Gustafson’s law, Memory bounded speedup model, Scalability Analysis and Approaches.

Advanced Processors: CISC Scalar Processors, RISC Scalar Processors, Superscalar Processors, VLIW Architectures.

UNIT – IV

Pipelining: Linear pipeline processor, nonlinear pipeline processor, Instruction pipeline Design, Mechanisms for instruction pipelining, Dynamic instruction scheduling, Branch Handling techniques, branch prediction, Arithmetic Pipeline Design

Memory Hierarchy Design: Multilevel cache hierarchies, main memory organizations, design of memory hierarchies.

UNIT – V

Multiprocessor Architectures: Symmetric shared memory architectures, distributed shared memory architectures, models of memory consistency, scalable cache coherence, design challenges of directory protocols, memory based directory protocols, cache based directory protocols.

47

Self Study : The state of computing, Classification of parallel computers, Grain Size and latency (U1), Control flow versus data flow, Comparisons of flow mechanisms, Performance Metrics and Measures (U2), Advanced processor technology, Instruction-set Architectures (U3), Cache basics & cache performance, reducing miss rate and miss penalty (U4), cache coherence protocols (MSI, MESI, MOESI), overview of directory based approaches (U5)

Textbook:

1. Kai Hwang, “Advanced Computer Architecture: Parallelism, Scalability, Programmability”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

References:

1. Kai Hwang and Zu, “Scalable Parallel Computers Architecture”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003. 2. M. J. Flynn, “Computer Architecture, Pipelined and Parallel Processor Design”, Jones &

Bartlett Learning, 1995. 3. D. A. Patterson, J. L. Hennessy, “Computer Architecture: A quantitative approach”, 5th

Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2012.

Course Outcomes:

1. Illustrate understanding of contemporary computer architecture issues and techniques. (POs – 1, 2, 6, PSO – 2)

2. Discuss the role of parallelism in current and future architectures. (POs – 2, 3, 6, PSO – 2) 3. Analyse the behavior of a pipeline as the processor executes various sequences of

instructions. (POs – 2, 3, 4, 12, PSO – 2) 4. Apply concept and principle of cache and virtual memory to high-performance computer

architecture. (POs – 1, 2, 3, 5, PSO – 2) 5. Compare different multiprocessor architectures and cache coherence protocols. (POs – 2, 3,

6, PSO – 2)

III & IV Semester B. E.

Documents

Transcript of III & IV Semester B. E.